JP2020032125A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: When identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on display means, a privilege which is advantageous to a player is imparted by privilege imparting means. A first setting corresponding to an operation on the basis of the fact that operation means operable by the player has been operated is executed by first setting execution means, and execution of the first setting on the basis of the fact that the operation means has been operated is restricted by restricting means. When the operation means is operated in a state where execution of the first setting is regulated by the restricting means, a second setting different from the first setting is executed by second setting execution means. Thereby, it is possible to allow a player to perform various operations, so that the player's interest in the game can be increased.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 135

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operating means, and there are gaming machines that execute various settings based on operation results on the operating means. In such a gaming machine, the operating means is operated to improve interest.

JP 2012-249877 A

  However, there is a need for further enhancement of interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of displaying display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. A dynamic display means, and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. Means that can be operated by a user, first setting execution means that can execute a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and that the operation means has been operated. A second setting different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state where the first setting is restricted by the restricting means. Second setting execution means for executing A.

  In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the regulation unit can regulate the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during a dynamic display period of the identification information. It is.

  A game machine according to claim 3, wherein the dynamic display means determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and an end condition. A game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until When the operating means is operated in a state in which the short game state is set, execution of the first setting by the first setting executing means can be restricted.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the first effect mode is different from the first effect mode based on the first setting executed by the first setting executing means. And an effect mode setting means that can at least set the second effect mode.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the operation means is different from a first operation unit for executing a first operation and the first operation. A second operation unit different from the first operation unit for executing the second operation.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means And, when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. Operating means, first setting executing means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operating means, and the first setting based on the operating of the operating means A second setting that is different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state in which the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting means. Setting execution means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the restriction unit can restrict the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and a dynamic display period determining unit that determines the dynamic display period until the end condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as a target display period, wherein the regulating means is configured such that the operation means is in a state where the short game state is set. It is possible to restrict the execution of the first setting by the first setting execution means when operated.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the first setting executed by the first setting execution means, an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. Have.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation unit includes a first operation unit for performing a first operation, a second operation unit different from the first operation unit for performing a second operation different from the first operation, It has.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a distribution device. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is the figure which showed the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each big hit type, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of the distribution device. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a production standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an effect standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member accompanying the rotation displacement of a rotation member. FIGS. 7A and 7B are schematic diagrams illustrating the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the supported member on the driven side when the rotating member rotates in a tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. is there. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. is there. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. is there. It is an exploded front perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal production device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertical reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57 (a), and (b) is FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside down member, the intermediate arm member, the direct acting plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (A) to (c) are front views of the rendering device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm members, the driving mode of the driving motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit along a line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. It is a front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device and the distribution device along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 73. FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of a middle member, a slide displacement member, a lower member, and a detection sensor of the distribution device along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. (A) to (d) is a front perspective view of a middle member of the distribution device. It is a top view of a middle member, a state switching device, a slide displacement member, and a lower member. (A) is sectional drawing of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member in the LXXIXa-LXXIXa line of FIG. 78, (b) is the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member in the LXXIXb-LXXIXb line of FIG. 78. 78 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. (A) And (b) is a side view of a slide displacement member and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81 (a). It is. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the extended part of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the extended part of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. It is a rear view of the extension part of a guide slot, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. It is a front perspective view of a 1st decoration rotation member and a 2nd decoration rotation member. (A) And (b) is a schematic front view which shows a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. (A) And (b) is a schematic front view which shows a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a guide long hole, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along a line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in an overhang state. FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit along a line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal effect device. (A) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. It is a schematic diagram of a 3rd operation unit which shows displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member typically. It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. FIG. 106 is a sectional view of a third operation unit along a line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105; FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit along a CVII-CVII line in FIG. 104. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVI-XVI line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams of a third flow path component, a positive change detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member schematically showing the configuration on the downstream side of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. It is a top view. 110A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the positive change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110A, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a third flow path component, a probability change detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member along line CXIb-CXIb). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the distribution device in a 5th embodiment in a line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of Drawing 15. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the distribution device in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device along the line CXV-CXV in FIG. 114. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between a guide long hole and a rotating member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between a guide long hole and a rotating member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a structure of a variable winning arrangement provided in a front view area of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow path of the ball which won the variable winning device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the 1st control example, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen in the 1st control example. is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when reach is established in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third control example in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of the normal symbol change in the normal state displayed on the symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a game per ordinary symbol (game per long open) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone is set in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the second symbol. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is restarted in a special fluctuation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device is acquired in one control example. is there. Diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is restarted in a special variation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device is not acquired in the first control example. It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the first control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the first half period in the ending period of the probability change big hit game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the example, and (c) is the 3rd symbol display device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the latter half period in the ending period of the normal big hit game displayed, and (d) is the ending of the probable big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a latter half of a period. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display aspect of the game state suggestion effect performed during the chance mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a state in which the chance mode is set as an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, in which a normal state is set internally, and other than the high-speed fluctuation period. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a period (during a normal fluctuation period), and (b) shows a state in which a chance mode is set as an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal state is set internally and a frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during a normal fluctuation period). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an operation effect during a high-speed change period among the chance modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of operating the frame button during the operation effect during the high-speed change period among the chance modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol change is executed during the “super chance mode” displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and FIG. 4) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the “super chance mode” displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of an effect when a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach fluctuation effect is executed is set as a fluctuation effect of the third symbol in the first control example; It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect when the fluctuation pattern in which the reach fluctuation effect is executed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect of the ending period for the normal jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is the effect of the ending period for the probable variable jackpot in the first control example. (C) is a timing chart showing a flow when the ball does not flow down the specific area (V gate) during the probability change big hit game in the first control example. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game in the first control example. (A), (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the contents of the operation effect during the chance mode in the first control example. It is a figure showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of various counters in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st random number table set in ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example, (b) is the main control device in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table set in a ROM of FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in a ROM of a main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a main control device in a ROM in the first control example. It is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the special figure 1 big hit table which was set, and (c) shows the specification content of the special figure 2 big hit table set in ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically. FIG. 4A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device in a first control example, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a normal table that has been set. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a table of a probability change / time saving table set in a ROM of a main control device in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the normal middle special figure 2 production selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the effect change selection table during the probability change set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the continuous notice execution selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a sound lamp in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the V notification execution selection table set in ROM of the control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a button operation effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a voice lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a time-saving state selection table set in a ROM of FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a probable change state selection table set in a ROM of an audio lamp control device in a first control example. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power on in the 1st control example. (A) is an explanatory view explaining the back A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory view explaining the back B to D in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table in a first control example. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern selection process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure winning information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general map related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production | presentation mode setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production | presentation mode setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in the chance mode performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notification command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a display image layer formed on a pachinko machine and a display screen in the second control example, and (b) and (c) are main symbols in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display effect performed when the display of a layer is set to OFF and the display of a sub-design pattern layer is set to ON. (A) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main marine design used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, and (b) is a mountain view in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the image data of the mountain main image used when the image (mountain background) is set, and (c) is the sub-pattern of the sub-pattern stored in advance in the character storage area in the second control example. It is the figure which showed typically the image data, (d) is the figure which showed typically the content of the image data corresponding to various images used for the main symbol for change in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the fluctuation | variation display of the 3rd symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) in a 2nd control example. (A) is a timing chart schematically illustrating a flow of a variation pattern used in an effect example in the second control example, and (b) schematically illustrates a flow of a normal effect in the second control example. It is a timing chart, (c) is a timing chart which showed typically the flow of the reach line announcement effect in the 2nd control example, and (d) shows the fluctuation direction of the sub-symbol in the 2nd control example as normal. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of a different announcement effect. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a rear image change command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a display image layer formed on a pachinko machine and a display screen in a modification of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in a modification of the second control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple-reach production, and (c) shows an example of a display screen in a case where a triple-reach production resulted in a triple-reach state in a modification of the second control example. FIG. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a structure near a specific winning opening in a variable winning device of a game board of a pachinko machine in a third control example, and (b) is a specific diagram in the third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow path of the ball which won the winning opening. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow path of the ball which won the specific winning opening in the 3rd control example. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a third control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process 4 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. It is a flow chart which shows V round processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the update process during a big hit performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit related process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a fourth control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 big hitting two tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the main contents in the fourth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the fall lottery table which is set to ROM of the control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. is there. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a button operation effect selection 2 table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is an audio lamp control in the fourth control example. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a defined-variable-state selection two table set in a ROM of the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol big hit determination processing 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 5 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall-related process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example. It is a figure showing an example of the display effect in the 2nd example of control.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guiding nails (shown below the center frame 86. In the upper half of the game area, Are not shown), a windmill (not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit. 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws and the like are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by.

  The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability-change jackpot, a 4R probability-change jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “4R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after four rounds of jackpots, and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. In the high-probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of changes (100 changes in the present embodiment), and the second symbol hit probability described later increases. This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the winning opening 140. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100 times. During the number of times, it is in a high probability state. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is reduced to the time-saving state for 100 times of change.

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed. Then a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 140 as compared to when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 140a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened during the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 (start winning) as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and outputs the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the rear case 510 described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged to border the window of the base plate 60. Has been established. That is, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart from each other in the front-back direction. Have been.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle, and lower Are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is held for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, during the probability change and during the working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 140 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of winning ports in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured to have three prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded, and to have five prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  The second winning port 140 is provided with an electric accessory 140a. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). State), so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened (increased) is increased. Further, during the probable change and during the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 140 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state capable of winning.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 tends to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 can aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 140 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 140 is guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). Solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected thereto, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via an input / output port 205. It transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6A illustrates a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to regulate the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. An open state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the ball to flow down is illustrated. Note that FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to in the description of FIG. 5 and FIG.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, and opens the opening and closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

  Since the electric accessory 140a is disposed above the left and right central portions of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur at the left and right central portions, but mainly at the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a position closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b (see the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) Is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end portion facing the rear surface side), so that the ball that bounces near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b and the front design member 141. It is possible to reduce the degree of losing momentum due to collision. Thereby, the possibility that the ball is arranged near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b can be increased.

  The center of the radius of curvature of the lower curved portion of the front design member 141 may be located at the front or the rear. In the present embodiment, by forming the radius of curvature in the lateral view below the front side, a larger space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the left and right widths of the front design member 141 are reduced toward the lower side at the left and right end portions, a space between the front design member 141 and the open / close plate 65b can be easily secured on the left and right sides.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that is inclined downward and rearward is disposed at an upper and lower position where the ball can be guided to the ball passage hole 163b.

  The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled to the left and right outer sides by the lower surface portion 163a can move over with less resistance. A guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

  The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending frontward and leftward and rightward inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and has a front end surface that is displaced rearward toward the left and right inward. It is formed.

  Accordingly, when the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided to flow down along the slope of the inclined surface. 163a1 can be guided with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation in a state where the ball rides on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is performed even if the ball is disposed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

  That is, for example, the flow of the sphere is deteriorated, and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that has flowed backward due to the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b rebounds on the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again, By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening / closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening / closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened or malfunctions occur.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed by a rising operation. That is, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. The riding ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission.

  At this time, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b is shifted left and right or the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a is retained. Therefore, the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be maintained.

  Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a planar shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then flows in the left / right direction by the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b.

  That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls temporarily move rearward in parallel, so that collision of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b can be avoided. Therefore, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling surface on the opening / closing plate 65b is compared with the case where the left and right flows are formed on the rolling balls. Since the possibility of irregular movement of the ball can be reduced, unintended operation failure can be prevented.

  The receiving member 163 is provided with a contact surface portion 163a3 that comes into contact with the rotating front end portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is in a closed state, and that enhances the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. I have. The contact surface portion 163a3 is formed as a pair of left and right, and is formed so as to be capable of surface contact instead of point contact by a shape design according to the shape of the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b, In addition, since the load at the time of contact is received on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so that durability can be improved.

  In addition, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed below the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b that is disposed to face with a slight gap. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail safe when contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b that comes into contact with the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the repeatability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front / rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. This makes it possible to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. Thereby, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the open / close plate 65b in the closed state can be improved.

  Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape is normal, there is a disadvantage that the load is easily accumulated, but the area for dispersing the load can be enlarged, and the opening / closing plate 65b can be enlarged. , The magnitude of the local load applied to the contact surface portion 163a3 can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being received by the opening / closing plate 65b can be received in a manner of being pushed into the opening / closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

  That is, in a state in which the ball is received (for example, a state in which the ball slides sideways between the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a), the ball contacts the lower shape of the front design member 141. In the case of contact, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided to the curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which a ball that has deviated from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path component 336, so that it is easy to secure a view to the third flow path component 336. can do.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball does not land on the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b is located on the left and right sides of the electric accessory 140a. Is limited to

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b can be limited to the left and right outer positions with respect to the electric accessory 140a. Accordingly, a field of view can be ensured below the left and right end portions of the electrically driven accessory 140a at the left and right inner positions below the electrically driven accessory 140a.

  Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, the balls having entered the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). Collecting trough 150 in which a path for flowing the gas to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion forming a flow path, and a front side portion facing the base plate 60 in the groove-shaped portion is opened. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the sphere to the sphere discharge path is completed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path of a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path of a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that respectively form left and right flow paths of a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63 disposed on both the left and right sides.

  The first channel portion 151 is configured as a channel inclined downward and leftward from the position behind the first winning opening 64, and the second channel portion 152 is inclined downward and rightward from the position behind the second winning hole 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending below the general winning opening 63.

  Therefore, in a front view, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, the flow of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is as follows. , From the central position in the left and right directions to the left and right sides. Accordingly, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is a base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, other parts are not shown, and other configurations to be assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground on the base plate 60 is visible. In FIG. 9, for convenience of description, the center frame 86 is illustrated in a state where the center frame 86 is assembled to the base plate 60.

  The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the distribution device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  In the sorting device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

  In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in the present embodiment can be used as they are depending on whether the distributing device 300 is provided or not. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the common gutter 150 can be shared.

  Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific prize port 65a, and the distribution device 300 configures a flowing path of the ball received by the variable prize device 65. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player is changed based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 so as to be able to receive a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. And an intervening member 164 that is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163 and is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163 and intervenes as a connecting portion with the sorting device 300; and is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163. And a state switching device 165 configured to be capable of switching the open / close state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

  The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front surface formed of a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and a specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back side has a three-dimensional shape that extends to the back side inside the thin portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 at the outer peripheral portion.

  In particular, the boundary 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to dispose the boundary 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending slightly rearward from the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a in a horizontally elongated plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. And a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped extended support plates 161b including a vertically long plate-like portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally long plate-like portion.

  The extension support plate 161b functions to support both a range behind the specific winning opening 65a and a flow path of the distribution device 300 described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, and a lower edge of the boundary portion 161a The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface has a function as a portion for supporting the distribution device 300, and will be described later in detail.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrically projecting portion 161f projecting in a symmetrical shape below the right and left center position of the specific winning opening 65a comes into contact with the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the ball flowing down. Has functions.

  A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting a fastening screw screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h each having a female screw portion for screwing a fastening screw inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

  The to-be-fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the interposition member 164 is disposed outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left and right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through holes formed in the base plate 60, a connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is provided.

  The front design member 162 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down in a range on the back side of the front design member 162 and on the front side of the fixed member 161.

  On the back side of the front design member 162, there are provided a plurality of female screw portions which are provided at positions matching the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and which are formed so that the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g can be screwed therein. It includes a fastened portion 162a, and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c extending rearward in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

  The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent a ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, so that the durability of the fastened portion 162a is reduced. Can be improved.

  Further, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, the flow path of the ball can be restricted. That is, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b (two locations on the left and right sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward and leftward and outward. The ball riding on the portion 162b can be suppressed from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extending portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extending portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations at the left and right ends) extending at the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that incline down toward the left and right inner sides, a ball flowing on the extending portion 162c is formed. The downflow path can be combined with the downflow path of the sphere riding on the extension 162b. Thereby, compared with the number of flowing balls, the range in which the flowing balls are arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of the balls can be increased). (Unconfigured space) can be secured.

  Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be formed in a plain color. For example, a sticker with a pattern or character may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate it, or a groove may be formed in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and light may be applied to the groove. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or having the above-described decoration added thereto.

  The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described guide plate portion 163a2, contact surface portion 163a3, and auxiliary contact surface 163a4. A lower surface portion 163a that forms a flow lower surface inside the frame, a ball passage hole 163b that is provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the to-be-fastened portion 161h is inserted from the rear side, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the interposition member 164 is screwed. And a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

  The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface which descends toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right center portions as vertices, and the inclined flow which descends rearward at a position one step lower from the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the sphere flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

  The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  The intervening member 164 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, has a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a through-hole formed at an upper portion of the main body 164a to be fastened to the receiving member 163. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c in which LEDs are arranged above the insertion holes 164b, and left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened portions 164d formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened portion of the fixed member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. And an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

  The light emitting board 164c is disposed in such a manner that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged is directed obliquely forward and upward. In an assembled state, the position directly above the specific winning opening 65a in front view (see FIG. 6), and the second winning It is located just below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who desires to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and looks at the location obliquely downward and downward.

  Therefore, by controlling to turn on the LED of the light emitting substrate 164c when a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is controlled. Can be easily grasped by the player as to whether or not the game has occurred.

  From the above configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. Thereby, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with a case where only the fastening and fixing of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are performed. In addition, since the arrangement of the distribution device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the distribution of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to the distribution device 300 can be stabilized. Relative displacement can be suppressed.

  The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a into which fastening screws to be screwed into the to-be-fastened portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring passage and heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep bottom box shape whose upper side is opened, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the tip of the rotation protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b, and is rotated by the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 165d. It has a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

  The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and a transmission projection 65c projecting rightward from the right end of the opening / closing plate 65b enters the recessed portion. Engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is disposed at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be caused with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

  13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the distribution device 300. 13 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164 d of the interposition member 164 is formed so as to be inserted therethrough. A middle member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the up-down direction and formed to penetrate a fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150; A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and provided with a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, and the state is determined depending on whether or not electricity is supplied. Switching device 360 configured to be switchable, and a slidable sliding device that is disposed below the middle member 330 and that slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. The displacement member 370 is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the displacement member 370 and the middle member 330. And a lower member 380 having an insertion hole 381 to be formed.

  Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the distribution device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that forms a flow-down path in which the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

  The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path components 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. The ball that has flowed down from the lower member 380 is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the ball, and the flow-down mode allows the player to obtain not only a mere staging effect to entertain the eyes of the player, but also a player. An effect related to game profit, such as causing a change in profit.

  The difference in the manner in which the spheres flowing down inside the distribution device 300 flow down is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the location of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 causes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes.

  Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered at a place where the ball naturally flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (a place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged as described later). The device is designed on the premise of concentration.

  Next, the configuration of each part of the distribution device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member formed of a light-transmitting resin material and has a U-shape in a top view, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetratingly formed to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and a middle member A plurality of insertion cylinder portions 315 having through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into 330 can be inserted; a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed; A pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317 that are elongated in the front-rear direction and protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. Is a long part in the left and right direction A pair of left and right inner protruding portions 318 disposed between the pair of front and rear long protruding portions 317, and a horizontally long portion protruding downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. It includes a pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317, and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess having a size capable of disposing the upper portion of the substrate 350.

  The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that plays a role of receiving a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flowing the ball downward, and an upper front edge portion of the sensor SE1 ( The shape is such that it is cut along an inclined surface so as to be flush with the rear surface of the plate (see FIG. 12). Thus, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

  Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the ball passage hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passage hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance at the time of guiding the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

  The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by being brilliantly visually recognized by receiving light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350, and will be described in detail later.

  The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner side. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. The left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured to be longer toward the near side, so that the visibility of the player who visually recognizes the ball between the second upper surface portions 314b can be secured.

  A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion cylindrical portion 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the screw head of the fastening screw while inserting the fastening screw from above.

  The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female screw portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the to-be-fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, which will be described in detail later.

  The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged such that the screw portion is upward and the screw head is downward. For this reason, the screw head is configured to be less noticeable to a player who is obliquely viewed from above, while the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the near side. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated due to the fastening screw, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are fixed with strength.

  The fastening portion 316 is formed only on the right side because the insertion tube portion 315 is already disposed at two locations on the rear side, so that the fastening position on the front side is sufficient at one location, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that the distributing device 300 can be improved in appearance by omitting the disposing device if it is unnecessary even if it is not noticeable and unnecessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be provided on the left side, or may be provided on a left and right pair.

  The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position that avoids the flow path of the ball and minimizes the deterioration of the appearance of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  The lower surface portions of the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319 formed in a pair each have the same location as a reference, and the lower the location, the farther the location is from the location. Formed as a surface. The curved surface has different shapes at the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319, and there is an intention to control the flow-down state of the sphere based on the difference in the shapes.

  The middle member 330 includes a pair of the above-described insertion holes 331, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially having a lower bottom portion on the front side). A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape), a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portions 333 and constitute a flow path of a ball, A pair of second flow path forming parts 335 connected to the front end of the flow path forming part 334 to form a flow path of a sphere and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped part 333; A pair of third flow path components 336 which are connected to left and right inner ends of the front frame 335 to form a flow path of the sphere, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame 333.

  Further, the middle member 330 has a left and right elongated shape behind the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and is formed to penetrate the lower bottom and functions as a discharge path for a ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path component portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangular shape from a lower side surface at a rear end portion of the third flow channel component portion 336. A pair of positioning projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

  The rear frame-shaped portion 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front side portion that forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed as a through-hole 332a formed vertically at the front end at the center in the left-right direction and configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be arranged, and a through-hole elongated in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed with a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 so as to be screwable therein. It includes a fastened portion 332c and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having at its upper end a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion cylindrical portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

  Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and on the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, the visibility of the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape in a top view, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Is provided.

  The first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 are parts forming flow paths of the spheres, respectively, so that the flow direction of the spheres, the inclination angle, and the like are different. It is designed, but details will be described later.

  The opening 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position between the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336 can enter the symmetrically protruding section 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening 335a so as to be able to contact the ball flowing down the distribution device 300.

  The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are configured as a pair of left and right sides, and are formed in a size that allows a ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it has a left and right length at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 disposed below the discharge holes 337, the discharge holes 337 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the spherical through holes of the detection sensors SE1. May be designed.

  The partition plate portion 338 has a function as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, and the details will be described later. The positioning projection 339 is fitted to the projection 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding a positional shift between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, which will be described in detail later.

  The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352, and the lower portion 353 has a concave portion for positioning at the lower end on the left end side. A section 354 is provided.

  The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with the corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portion 353 is moved back and forth to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. The upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 320 of the upper member 310 so that the upper portion 352 is prevented from dropping upward, so that the arrangement is fixed. The details will be described later together with the intention of disposing the light emitting means 351.

  The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. A sliding portion 362 engaged with the plunger and slidingly displaced together with the plunger; and a rotating portion 363 which is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left-side fastened portion 332d, and which rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362. , Is provided.

  The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a recessed to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, an overhang portion 362b projecting rightward from the right side, and a lower surface. And a guided portion 362c projecting downward from the front-rear central portion and having an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

  Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the concave portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from dropping upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

  The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being shifted from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide portion 362 can be maintained long by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b because it is formed to be long in the left-right direction. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

  The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a vertically long tubular shape at the L-shaped connecting portion and has a size large enough to allow the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted. A supporting cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from a short-side end portion of the L-shape and being inserted into a through hole of the overhang portion 362b; A lower cylindrical portion 363c protruding downward from the side distal end portion in a cylindrical shape and inserted through the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

  With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger slides and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in the vertical direction, and includes a lower bottom portion and a lower member of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. 380, a thin plate portion 371 sandwiched and supported from above and below, an upper projecting portion 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair of right and left, and a left and right center behind the upper projecting portion 376. And a recess 378 formed at the projecting end of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

  The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a formed in the rear half and a front-rear end portion at the left and right center portions, and a left-right width shorter than an arrangement interval of the upper protruding portions 376. A recess 372 to be recessed, a pair of lower protrusions 373 projecting downward in a ridge shape along the edge of the recess 372, and a protrusion along left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of upper and lower protruding ridges 374 protruding in both vertical directions in a strip shape, and a cylindrical protruding portion 375 protruding downward in a columnar shape from the rear end and inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

  The lower protruding ridge 373 and the upper and lower protruding ridges 374 are portions supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. This is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

  The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 can be guided by the partition plate portion 338.

  In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap between the left and right inner sides, and is configured such that displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be guided well, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-back direction.

  The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary for causing the slide displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction. You.

  The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, so that the lower column of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the concave portion 378.

  As described above, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a has a shape including the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged inside. Designed as a through hole.

  The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that enables the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

  The sensor holding frame portion 389 has an opening formed on the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted, and the upper and lower side surfaces through which a ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 is opened, and other portions are closed. Formed.

  The plate-like portion 382 has through holes formed at positions matching the through holes of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through holes formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 in the up-down direction. A projecting portion 383 projecting upward in a longitudinally elongated projecting shape at an intermediate position of the SE1 and a pair of projecting portions projecting left and right away from the front end of the projecting portion 383. And a pair of guide projections 384 projecting at a position rearward of the projection 383 at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projections 384. A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer sides, and a long guide-like hole 386 extending colinearly with the protrusion 383 in a top view. , Curved surface protruding rearward on the front side Includes a curved surface portion 387 which is formed by Jo, an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw is threaded insertable to the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330, a.

  The ridge 383 is formed as a ridge having a slightly smaller left and right thickness than the width of the left and right gaps of the recess 372 of the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the protrusion 383 between the recesses 372. Be placed. That is, the ridge 383 functions as a guide that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The projecting portion 383a is designed such that the left and right inner ends are located at positions equivalent to the left and right outer ends of the positioning projecting portion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the right and left outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are abutted against the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right of the middle member 330 with the lower member 380 as a reference. The position in the direction can be appropriately determined. At the same time, the rear side surface of the front portion of the frame of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protruding portion 383 and the protruding portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the positioning protruding portion 339 are brought into contact with each other, thereby lowering the lower portion. The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a displacement between the third flow path component 336 as the configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the configuration of the lower member 380.

  The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a displacement in a range where the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge 383, so that, for example, the forward end of the displacement is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge 383. The durability of the ridge portion 383 can be improved as compared with the configuration. Therefore, the guide effect by the ridge portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

  The guide projecting portion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting ridge 383. For this reason, the guide projection 384 is usually designed with sufficient strength so that it can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide projection 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projection 384 and the projection 383 may be designed in consideration of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to be shorter than the set period (for example, two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the projecting portion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

  The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left and right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridge 385. Thereby, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be made small in the lateral displacement.

  The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a left and right width that allows the cylindrical projection 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by the cylindrical projection 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

  The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere flowing down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

  A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being noticeably visually recognized. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 obstructs the field of view of the sphere passing near the detection sensor SE1 or passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

  As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371 a, the recess 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is displaced in the front-rear direction by being guided by the ridge portion 383, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like. Thus, the load at the time of guidance can be shared among a plurality of positions, so that the load can be locally prevented, and the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being damaged. Can be.

  As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper projecting portions 376 are guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the projecting ridge portion 383 of the lower member 380.

  Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 have a small displacement as a part that continuously configures the flow path of the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good, A small displacement can be guaranteed.

  In other words, when the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is not performed favorably. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, In addition, it is possible to control to execute the error notification on the assumption that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative positions of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are in a poor state, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

  Next, details of the internal structure of the distribution device 300 will be described. Here, a configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 and a configuration that enters the flow path of the sphere will be mainly described.

  15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

  In FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at a front position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 will be described.

  When the open / close plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B), the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 65b rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310, and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path forming section 334, the subsequent second flow path forming section 335, and the succeeding third flow path forming section 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that are inclined downward, and the connected flow paths are connected to each other. Are formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees in a top view.

  That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the sphere to flow toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path configuration part 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the sphere that flows down the second flow path configuration part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down the back side in the front-rear direction rotated by 90 degrees in the direction.

  In this manner, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape having a bending angle of a right angle, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the sphere increases as it goes downstream. More specifically, when the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, the downward flow in the subsequent second flow path component 335 has no longitudinal component. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the configuration section 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path forming section 336 following the second flow path forming section 335, the flow is directed backward in the backward direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming section 334. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence is suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode in which the ball constantly flows down in the same direction (for example, the left direction) from the beginning, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive increase in the ball's flow-down speed on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make the flow velocity of the ball uniform over the entire flow path, to keep the player's attention to the ball high, and to easily avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to do so.

  Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but it is easier to prevent clogging of the ball and backflow by forming the second flow path component 335. When the second flow path component 335 is not formed (when the length of the second flow path component 335 in the left-right direction is 0), that is, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are In the case of connection, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the sphere at the connection point by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side. In this case, the switching angle of the ball flowing direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so it is difficult to smoothly flow down the ball, and the ball tends to stay, clog, and backflow, May occur.

  On the other hand, if the switching angle in the downflow direction is 90 degrees or less as in the present embodiment (90 degrees in the present embodiment), the reversal of the velocity direction of the ball does not occur, so that the ball flows down smoothly. Stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the ball can be easily avoided.

  The flow path shape at the connection end of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrically projecting part 161f is provided as a part for guiding the flow of the sphere in a manner to bend the flow direction of the sphere. Is done.

  The symmetric protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion arranged on the downstream side of the sphere retreats from the path of the sphere than a portion arranged on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left and right widths of the symmetrically protruding portions 161f disposed to face each other are formed to be longer than the left and right widths of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. In addition, the rear end portions on the left and right ends of the symmetrically protruding portion 161f that are arranged to face each other are disposed on the front side of the flow path side surface of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the opening 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

  Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrically protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or the ball from flowing backward.

  Further, at the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flowing direction of the sphere. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in an embodiment.

  At the upstream end of the first flow path component 334, the first flow path component 334 projects upward from the flow lower surface of the first flow path component 334 in a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement decreases toward the front side. Curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion for guiding the flow of the ball in a manner to bend the flow direction of the ball.

  In other words, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path component 334, and contacts the side wall 334a during the flow, so that the flow direction can be switched. The flowing direction is switched by flowing down the flow path forming section 335 and abutting on the symmetrically protruding section 161 f during the flowing down, and flows down the third flow path forming section 336 to reach the discharge hole 337.

  The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape capable of engaging with the projecting support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligning the same. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and the displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 are aligned in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

  A description will be given of the inclination angle and the length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in the longitudinal direction. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle to the horizontal of about 7 degrees, the second flow path component 335 has the inclination angle to the horizontal of about 5 degrees, The flow path forming part 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path configuration section 334, and set to a slightly gentle common inclination angle in the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336.

  Regarding the length, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in an outer square shape as an inner side surface in a top view, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed so that a large square having the outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is set to 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-described large square is set to 45 mm. It is formed.

  Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere, the sphere flows down in a state where there is almost no displacement in the width direction with respect to the generally used sphere having a diameter of 11 mm. . This is a small clearance, considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is about 19 mm. Can be suppressed.

  Among the parts constituting the ends of the flow path components 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is Since only the curved protrusion 334b to be configured is arranged inside (front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path configuration section 334 is connected to the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336. Shorter than that.

  Speaking from the actually measured values in a top view, the flow path formed by the second flow path configuration part 335 and the third flow path configuration part 336 has substantially the same length (33 mm at the center of the sphere), and the length is The length is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

  From the above-described ratios of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, it can be explained that the time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the passage time through the first flow path forming part 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is equal to the second flow path forming part 335 having the slanted angle and 1.5 times the path length. And the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336.

  In the present embodiment, with such a configuration, the arrangement shifts to the rear side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part is hidden by the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1. From the state in which the visibility of the ball is deteriorated, the ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage, and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  Further, when the visibility of the ball is high, slowing down the flow speed of the ball eliminates the need for the player to quickly move his or her line of sight toward the ball. Eye fatigue) can be reduced.

  When attention is paid to the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 having high visibility, the sphere flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path component 335. In comparison with the case, when the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the displacement amount of the ball in front view becomes smaller, so that the game burden of the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , Can be minimized when focusing on a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

  In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are equal, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 Are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in front view is different, and as a result, the apparent velocity of the sphere flowing down (the displacement velocity of the sphere in front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere that flows is slower than the sphere that flows down the second flow path component 335.

  The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easily noticed, and the flow path of the ball in other portions is the flow path component 334 to 336. It is common in. Accordingly, the line of sight of the player tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight can be effectively reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path component 335 in order to ensure the visibility of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to prevent the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336 from being obstructed by the meat of the second flow path component 335.

  Further, in the symmetrically protruding portion 161f disposed inside the opening 335a, only a portion necessary for contact and guidance with the flowing ball is formed, and the formation of the shape portion is omitted on the upper and lower sides thereof. Is done. In other words, the symmetrically protruding portions 161f are formed as vertically thin plate-like portions, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides (see FIG. 18). Therefore, as compared with the case where the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed to have a vertical thickness, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrically protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered, and the visibility can be improved.

  Further, it is configured such that spheres deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b and heading toward the out port 71 are gathered toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path component 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

  Therefore, assuming a line of sight for observing the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 from an obliquely upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the rear side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 will be covered by the front and rear, so that the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is noticed. The total number of spheres that enter the field of view increases.

  In other words, whether the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path forming portion 336 or the ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a but enters the out opening 71, Enters the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, regardless of the nail configuration (the so-called good or bad gauge) implanted in the base plate 60, many of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is located at the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered the balls 64 and 140) and the position where the third flow path constituent part 336 overlaps. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 by the flowing sphere.

  As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is configured to lower.

  For example, a light diffusion processing surface 333b for generating a light diffusion effect in a shape following the prism is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330. In FIG. 17, a portion visually recognized in a saw-tooth shape is the light diffusion processing surface 333 b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and vertically.

  When the effect of light diffusion occurs, light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is visually perceived as shining. And the visibility on the back side deteriorates. According to the present embodiment, visibility is deteriorated in a state where light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not emitted, at least as compared to a state where light is emitted. Visibility can be improved.

  On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the light, the shadow of the shielding object is visually recognized as a black point, and the position of the shielding object can be easily determined.

  A processing surface similar to the light diffusion processing surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processing surface 319a formed on the rear side surface of the left and right outer projecting portion 319, a light diffusion processing surface 332e formed on the rear side surface of the front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

  The processing surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending on the back side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is formed on the front frame-like portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. The light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered and the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the front part of the middle member 330 before the rear frame portion 332 are exemplified. Is done.

  With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is performed on the back surface, the lower surface, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow channel formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow channel components 334 to 336. The processed surface is formed, and the effect of changing the visibility by light irradiation is achieved.

  In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336 with the player's eyes paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame 333 to make it harder to see immediately.

  Further, with a player's line of sight observing a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 as viewed obliquely from above, let's see the ball that has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and has dropped. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processing surface 340, the light is irradiated on the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that it is difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling. .

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the profit obtained for the player is controlled to be changed depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in order to grasp how the ball has flowed from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. In addition, the power to pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  On the other hand, when the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, it is possible to configure a state where the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black point. As described above, by switching between the light irradiation and the non-light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Further, depending on the presence or absence of the sphere on the front side of the black point, a situation where the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation where the black point can be seen without being hidden by the sphere can be configured.

  As described above, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path components 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 is consistent. It is formed on the side that does not come into contact with the ball that flows down the road.

  This can prevent the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped due to contact with the sphere, and maintain the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 for a long period of time. And the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

  Furthermore, by contacting the sphere with the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down and prevent the sphere from being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere decreases while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336. That can be avoided.

  The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to achieve the effect of causing the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by collision with the ball.

  In the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the part to be fastened 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility is maintained high without any countermeasure. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screw.

  That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it can be used as a blindfold at a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processing surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processing surface 333b shines brightly, and the fastening screw reflects and shines light where the light diffusion processing surface 333b is not formed. The visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processing surface 333b is omitted.

  The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336. For this purpose, besides making the surface brilliantly shine, a substrate 350 disposed on the back side is provided. And causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 is blindfolded, and it is easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by a player.

  The substrate 350 is accommodated in a form supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. The substrate 350 is disposed with a gap between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 at the left and right central portions, and slides into the gap. The displacement member 370 is disposed (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the slide displacement member 370 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332.

  More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends from the front and rear (see FIG. 17). In this supporting portion, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f having a large thickness (see FIG. 16). Then, the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

  As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is disposed in front of and behind the light diffusion processing surface 164 f formed on the interposition member 164.

  Therefore, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper portion 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164 f of the interposed member 164 can produce an effect of glittering brilliantly. Can be reduced in the visibility of the range.

  Here, when the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processing surface 164f, the light diffusion processing surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape following the prism along the surface. Since the light is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, it can be seen from the player's point of view that the light is emitted above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is disposed at the center on the left and right sides of the receiving member 163. However, even if the light diffusion processing surface 164f is disposed on the rear side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 obstructs the field of view. Therefore, if it is formed at least in the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be obtained.

  The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is disposed so as to irradiate light toward the seal member 313 and a portion disposed below the seal member 313 and in which a ball flows down, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, switching of the flow path of the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-section of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. FIG. 19 and 20, in the case shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state disposed at a rear position.

  Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

  The four detection sensors SE1 are two sets arranged symmetrically, and include a positive detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probable change detection sensor SE11 is provided on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is provided on the outside in the left-right direction.

  The functions of the four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 disposed behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor for paying out a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, ten for one detection) of the prize ball is paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

  On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor for paying out prize balls, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the big hit game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

  In addition, as described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the positive change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching the presence or absence of the next jackpot acquisition.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper part of the certainty detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the certainty detection sensor SE11. The passage of the sphere to is prevented. Therefore, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 as guided by the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member.

  Since the upper side 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a front side surface 376a facing the sphere formed in an arc shape with a concave channel side, the flowing sphere smoothly flows toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats backward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 moves to the through hole. A ball is allowed to pass.

  That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability change state. In other words, when the ball is not detected as passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and passes only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or the time reduction state). ).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type includes the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each big hit type.

  In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that the ball easily passes through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 in the case of the probability change jackpot. It is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through-hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and to easily pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. The details of the control will be described later.

  As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit obtained by the player, and the arrangement naturally draws the attention of the player. On the other hand, an illegal act of illegally switching the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 has been found not a little, and a measure against it has been emphasized.

  As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when power is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are disposed on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower column portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 faces the front. By being disposed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front position.

  On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by the rearward displacement of the portion inserted into the setting portion 378). This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

  The person who performs the above-mentioned misconduct inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 from the ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), for example. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 to the back side, there is a possibility that the state in which the ball can enter the positive change detection sensor SE11 may be illegally created. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming section 336 as the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (see FIG. 18), It is difficult to press against the front end of the thin plate portion 371 when pressing the slide forming member 370 through the thin metal wire through the road forming portion 336, and press against the upper projecting portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if a thin metal wire is pressed, the load can escape to the left and right sides. Thus, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear side position.

  Further, in addition to the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 being wound not in a straight line but in a spiral shape, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the rear side. Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is difficult to make the thin metal wires reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

  From these configurations, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 can be improved. That is, in the related art, in many cases, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanically devising the mechanism for transmitting the driving force (displacement regulation) in response to the above-described misconduct. Is limited in the configuration of the state switching device 360. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted by configuring the slide displacement member 370 such that a load is hardly applied in the first place, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. The degree can be increased.

  When a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire creeping through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the sphere trying to flow down the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere reach the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes. It is desirable to avoid.

  In the conventional model, it is usual to configure the normal detection sensor SE12 to restrict the ball in the state where the ball is allowed to enter the positive change detection sensor SE11. However, in the present embodiment, the positive change detection is performed. In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball is also entered into the normal detection sensor SE12. This is a configuration that can be performed.

  Even with such a configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the probability change state after the jackpot game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such a concept, by omitting the disposition of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, the material cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, as a result of not disposing the movable member, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member is not required, and the service life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the life of the movable member.

  On the other hand, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side as a device different from the movable member, the flow channel shape and the arrangement of the fixed protruding portions 317, 318, and 319 are used. And shape are devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents a ball larger than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position is fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, the protrusion). It is intended to be realized by the shape of the set portions 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

  First, a device of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal in the lateral direction toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate 338). (See FIG. 15).

  The inclination angle is set so that the angle and the direction are the same as the inclination of the second flow path component 335 in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to reduce bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338).

  Due to the inclination in the short direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball when flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be disposed on the side close to the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position. In the arrangement state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the ball erroneously passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate portion 338) may occur.

  Also, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path component 335. Since the inclination direction is the left / right center side (partition plate part 338 side), the speed in the left / right direction is generated in the left / right inward direction. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a ball may accidentally pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate 338).

  Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed projections 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner protruding portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336 are first arranged close to each other. The left and right inner protruding portions 318 are the smallest protruding portions among the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, but are located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is located on the front side more, it comes into contact with the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 without sliding while sliding on the partition plate 338.

  The protruding distal end surfaces of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protruding portion is more left and right than the front end side of the protruding portion. It is formed so as to extend outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected to form a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abutted on the left and right inwardly protruding portions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

  On the other hand, since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are formed in a small size, the flowing direction of the ball is not determined by the load received from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 as being downward or left and right outward, but is merely a momentum. It functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-described force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be described separately. In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting on the upper projecting portion 376 and the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). And flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

  The projecting end of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 has the same use as the upper projecting portion 376. That is, since the curved surface is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at a position rearward of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose start point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 18).

  Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward and leftward and outward, and the ball that is urged right and left outward by contact with the left and right inwardly protruding portion 318 takes advantage of the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left and right outward directions, the ball can smoothly flow down.

  Further, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the sphere flowing down in the left and right directions, so that the sphere can be smoothly formed by suppressing the ball from jumping. Since the purpose of the left and right outer projections 319 is not switching of the ball flowing direction but suppression of ball bouncing, the shape of the left and right outer projections 319 is significantly different from that of the front and rear long projections 317. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer protrusions 319 are disposed on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protrusions 319 are provided. When the setting portion 319 and the ball are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is more likely to be located on the rear side than the thickness center of the left and right outer protruding portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

  With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent clogging of a ball or backflow of a ball when a plurality of balls flow down.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protruding portion 376 are retracted behind the front and rear long protruding portion 317. Flows in contact with

  The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end portion (curved surface) whose normal shape passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged immediately behind the position, it is easy to apply a load in which the component in the left-right direction is suppressed to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load for causing the ball to flow obliquely downward and forward because the protruding tip of the front and rear long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

  Therefore, the sphere that has not gone to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 receives the load from the front and rear long protruding portions 317 obliquely downward and forward, and flows toward the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  Here, depending on the contact point at the time of collision with the front and rear long protruding portion 317, there is a concern that the ball may rebound to the front side (backflow may occur), but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right inward collision occurs. Since the ball is urged obliquely downward and to the right and left outside by contact with the setting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not move toward the lower bottom rear end of the third flow path component portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or However, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the collision only occurs with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and the backflow of the third flow path component 336 occurs.

  What is unique in this embodiment is that, even when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position and the ball flows to the positive detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced leftward and rightward by the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318. This use will be described later.

  The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at a front position and a rear position. When the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 is moved. When the 370 performs the closing operation (the operation from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the sphere, and the load in the direction in which the third flow path component 336 flows backward (forward) is applied to the sphere. May be given.

  In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if control is performed so that the closing operation is completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the sliding displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, so that the ball can flow backward. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing left and right outer sides, or the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without causing a third problem. The action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end of the flow path component 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. Thereby, the backflow of the sphere can be made hard to occur.

  In addition, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front position to the rear position) is not the operation in the direction opposing the ball but the operation away from the ball, for example, the ball is Even if the operation is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that pushes the ball back to the front side is less likely to occur. Therefore, in the opening operation, even if the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere, it is considered that the backflow of the sphere does not easily occur.

  When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before flowing to the left and right outer sides), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the sphere. Since a load is applied in the direction (the direction in which the ball is rolled backward), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and the ball can be easily dropped.

  Therefore, when the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371 and the slide displacement member 370 is opened, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 with the current rolling force. And the ball can be easily guided to the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  The appearance of the distribution device 300 from the player's perspective in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment including the above-described distribution device 300 will be described. Hereinafter, as an example, the case where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different will be described separately.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

  As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the player plays the game with the head sufficiently separated from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a horizontal direction or a direction inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be played by bringing the head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice small parts, while the latter has a narrower field of view, but small parts in the field of vision are more noticeable.

  FIG. 21 is shown as a reference, and hereinafter, description will be mainly given by comparing FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b for convenience.

  In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half part arranged in the lower part 353 will be described here.

  First, the upper light emitting unit 351 emits light toward the seal member 313. As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is disposed right above the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 can be noticed.

  Note that the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting unit 351 (see FIG. 18). Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized as being extended in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

  Note that the light emission control is not limited at all. For example, during the big hit game, control is performed so that the seal member 313 is irradiated with light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, the attention can be paid to the seal member 313, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

  Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side respectively correspond to the positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is performed such that when the ball enters the certainty detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 disposed directly above the certainty detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is transmitted to the normal detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light-emitting means 351 disposed directly above the detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball has entered, it is possible to notify the player of the ball passage location.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

  Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting unit 351, and is formed as a range extending vertically (as a band-like light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of light from the light emitting unit 351 can be improved.

  The angle (5 degrees) of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp a change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this view.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in the direction at an angle of 30 degrees from horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, so that it is compared to the direction viewed in FIG. Thus, the difficulty of confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 increases. However, in this view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  Since the arrangement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size enough to allow the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass through, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed. Can be hidden such that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) disposed at the position is difficult to visually recognize.

  During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time, the line of sight toward the back sphere may be obstructed by the front sphere.

  For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path component 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the back side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

  When the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12, the ball flows from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the left and right directions. After deviating in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336, the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame-shaped part 333. It is preferable to grasp the flow path from the downstream end position (the position of the ball P1) of the second flow path component 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the ball P2) of the third flow path component 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly shifted in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336), the sphere hides a sphere that is coming off the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

  In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is possible by visually recognizing it, and it is only necessary to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the right The sphere is configured to be able to flow down along a path including the periphery (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the sphere flowing down the upstream side, a situation may occur in which it is difficult to grasp whether the sphere has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Also, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in the vertical direction, so that the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, as the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is smaller, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the direction is reduced.

  In particular, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336, once flowing down diagonally to the right, goes to the positive change detection sensor SE11 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, as described above. The flow path is switched between the flow path and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. For this reason, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller as compared with the case where the sphere flows downward just as the sphere flows downward or the direction in which the sphere flows downward is switched to the right.

  As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is located on the more upstream side, such as in the case where the flow path of the sphere flows down just below or when the ball switches to the right. For example, in a case where the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are not formed and the sphere heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. The position is behind the center line of the component 336.

  On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right from the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the sphere is added to the third flow path component 336 itself. In addition to the action of partially concealing the ball, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside the range visually recognized through the third flow path component 336, so that the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame portion 333.

  Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes visible from the viewpoint of the player, it becomes difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, the attention power for the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end of the third flow path component 336. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. Thereby, even if the method of visually recognizing the distribution device 300 is used, it is possible to allow the player to adjust and select a favorite visual recognition method, instead of requiring the player to perform a one-sided game, and to provide a wide variety of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game.

  Although securing the player's view can be achieved by various methods, in the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path component portion is formed. Since the roof 336 can be in a state where it has been removed, the third flow path component 336 can be easily viewed.

  22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the distribution device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300, so that the light is transmitted depending on the thickness of the member. Since less light is emitted, the field of view is obstructed.

  23 can be more easily recognized in the direction view of FIG. 23 than in the direction view of FIG. 22 because the range in which the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is smaller than in the direction view of FIG. There is.

  The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically formed in a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light hardly occurs (see FIG. 12). This can prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated.

  The portion which cannot be formed into a flat shape in function is formed so as to have a small influence on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 do not obstruct the player's line of sight facing obliquely downward, so that the player sees the flow path components 334 to 336. (Upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower, etc.).

  Further, for example, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with a minimum thickness in terms of strength (see FIG. 18). Thereby, even if the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is disposed between the ball and the eyes of the player, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. Visibility can be ensured.

  The sphere that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65 a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The effect of the ball flowing down to the out port 71 on the field of view will be described.

  FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down to the out port 71 with the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning opening 65a side. The ball is deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extending portion 162b and the extending portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down to the out port 71.

  As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is below the respective flow path components 334 to 336, so that the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 cause the respective spheres to flow. The visibility of the ball flowing down the components 334 to 336 can be prevented from being reduced.

  On the other hand, the flow of the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 is, like the flow of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335, a mode in which the ball flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same manner as a ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, an effect of guiding the line of sight of the player to the left and right center positions of the game area is exerted. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are set to the same position (left and right center position), the player moves his or her line of sight up and down, and the out port 71 and the third flow path. The gaze is guided to a state where both of the components 336 can be visually recognized.

  Therefore, the ball hitting toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a (whether there is little wasted ball during the jackpot game) or deviates from the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing ball irrespective of whether the flowing ball between the ball and the ball 162c frequently occurs (whether the wasteful ball during the jackpot game frequently occurs). Can be played.

  That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow forming unit 336 in a state where the ball flows down the second flow forming unit 335, and the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a. In the case where the player deviates, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

  The ball heading to the out port 71 usually has no effect in the game as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, the ball heading out port 71 To the third flow path component 336.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming section 335, so that the visibility of the second flow path forming section 335 can be reduced. There is.

  On the other hand, the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path forming portion 336 is arranged below the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so that the ball is prevented from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path forming portion 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the vicinity of the third flow path component 336 and its rear end portion is reduced by a ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path components 334 to 336. An attempt is made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide of the arrangement of the third flow path component 336. Are formed short.

  In addition, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. In this case, it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is disposed so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a as to bite.

  In addition, the flow path of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a formed in the left and right elongated shape and has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 disposed at the left and right ends thereof has a symmetrical flow path configuration. Through the parts 334 to 336, it is collected below the left and right central sides of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370, as compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left and right lengths become shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. it can.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, although the design concept is such that the specific winning opening 65a is disposed close to the out opening 71, the specific winning opening 65a does not have a structure in which a ball flows down directly from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming portion 335, but has a second flow path. By adopting a structure in which the ball flows down backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path forming section 335 by the third flow path forming section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387). Opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path component 335. Thus, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is reduced.

  In this manner, the vertical winning width 65a and the slide displacing member 370 in the player's eyes can be reduced in the vertical arrangement width and the left and right width, so that in the design of the game area where the size in front view is limited to a certain standard, Since the vertical width of the area occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

  For example, as in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the gaming area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

  Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable role (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

  First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds. Designed.

  That is, after entering the specific winning opening 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 second to pass through the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration unit 336.

  Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is disposed at the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336 for 0.9 seconds. The configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the detected sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the ball cannot pass through the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

  Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winning in the V winning sensor as generally seen in a pachinko machine equipped with a V-variable attacker, a control for releasing the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R (the operation of the opening / closing plate is not possible). Control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. Thereby, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V-variable attacker in the above example, a ball entering immediately after the V-variable attacker is opened tends to cause an erroneous prize, but in the variable prize device 65 of the present case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, since a favorable effect (for example, an effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball) is generated by the entering ball, it is possible to eliminate the necessity for preventing the ball from entering immediately after opening. .

  The time required for the passage of the sphere can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth or irregular shape, etc.).

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 24B schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the type of the winning opening that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot A2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 19” (see 202b2 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 39” (see 202b3 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 49” (see 202b4 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b5 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot C2 is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), in any case, a four-round jackpot game is selected. For this reason, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls as compared with a case where a lottery is won in a lottery of a special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the big hit is obtained. a is defined in association with each other (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot a is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), in any case, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected. Therefore, the player who wins the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a larger amount of payout prize balls compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery is won. Motivation for performing a game for performing the second lottery (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning port 140) can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed at the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will increase even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not secured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern which has a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has an advantage that a ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable prize device 65 in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of disadvantages and highlight only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened. .

  That is, the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is prolonged can be reduced, so that a jackpot game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of payout of prize balls is good) can be realized.

  In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. The jackpot type may be provided in a small ratio (for example, about 20%).

  Accordingly, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game casually. That is, the player can visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, disappoint the player at the timing of the displacement operation, and enhance the interest of the player.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the certainty change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is obtained, the special symbol is easily changed to the jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24C). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol hit Is determined. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 is appropriately referred to.

  In this control example, the driving mode differs only in the first round due to the difference in the jackpot type, and the driving mode is the same in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

  In the case of the jackpot A1 or the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls entering one side of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is a setting of an opening time for preventing a plurality of balls from continuously entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “balls with open balls”). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, the ball reaches one ball at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball may enter the specific winning opening 65a at once.

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. Drive control is performed so as to be displaced to the rear side position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the certainty detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. The drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position after 0.8 seconds have elapsed.

  As described above, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes over the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes the normal detection sensor SE12.

  The concept that 0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, It is set from the idea of a time longer than the time required to reach 336.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening / closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member is not moved until the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

  Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( See FIG. 22). Thereby, the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the attention force on the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball entering the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

  The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility of the line of sight being blocked by the ball is low, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the player's eyes Are easily collected on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by displacing the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying “attention to the flowing sphere!” On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is changed. Can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the center on the left and right, if the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is on one side of the left or right, the ball is generated. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by observing the rear side of the third flow path component 336 on the other side (see FIG. 22) without being blocked by the flowing ball.

  As described above, in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, so that attention to the spheres is improved. In addition to the above, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening and closing plate 65b is open. This is a setting of an open time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter the ball continuously on one side of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “ball entry with a ball”).

  In the present control example, the interval between the launches of the spheres is set to 0.6 seconds. Therefore, even if the interval between the spheres of the sphere does not change from that at the time of launch, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 second. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball is connected to each of the flow path components 334 before two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Entering 球 336 can be regulated.

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different between the case where one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides and the case where there are two (or more) spheres. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player who views the downstream ball. Thus, the visibility of the ball on the downstream side may be reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot C2, or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The open / close plate 65b is operated for a long period of time up to the operation time T1.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of the pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present control example, the open / close plate 65b maintains the open state during the first round of the round game R, so that a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a with a ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path components 334 to 336, the next spheres The ball may enter the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the sphere arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher in the third operation pattern than in the sphere arranged on the upstream side. It is easy for the situation to drop.

  In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit C2, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

  As described above, the control mode is such that the open / close plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required for the arrival is controlled from the structure, the possibility of the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the biting of the ball can be eliminated.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different depending on whether one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player watching the downstream ball, so that the downstream ball is arranged. The visibility of the ball on the side may decrease. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the specific winning port 65a can be pitched in the first round of the round game R. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to decrease.

  On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a has an effect that the progress of the round game R can be performed early. That is, the specified number of balls as the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls). It is easy to satisfy the winning at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

  In particular, since the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operating pattern X with a probability of 100% at the special symbol 2 jackpot, if the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11. Has been promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is initially low.

  Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short time. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  When the first round of the round game R is completed, regardless of the jackpot type, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid so as to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. 165c is driven and controlled, and after a lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, so that the specific winning opening is obtained. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open the opening 65a, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time. After the second round, since the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is discharged through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to close the specific winning opening 65a by displacing the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (the fourth round) is repeated with the first inter-round interval Int1 interposed between the round game Rs, and the open / close plate 65b Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the timer means drives the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to hold the open / close plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the elapse of the time.

  In the present control example, the case where the short opening movement of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

  As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening / closing plate 65b is changed by the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening / closing plate 65b, and each flow is changed. The visibility of the detection sensors SE1 disposed downstream of the road components 334 to 336 and the third flow channel components 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged downstream of the third flow path component 336 can be motivated to devise the manner of firing the ball.

  For example, since the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may be reduced when a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336, if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally increasing the firing interval of the sphere (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the firing mode.

  On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is increased, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 second) is left after the start of the round game R so that a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is also good. In this case, a situation in which a ball is arranged in the third flow path forming unit 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (in the case of the operation pattern Y, 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R) is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being interrupted by the ball.

  On the other hand, if a period until the launch of the ball is provided, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured to be symmetrical left and right, and a ball can be made to enter from the right or left side through the specific winning opening 65a.

  That is, for example, the above-described launch mode for extending the launch interval of the ball and the launch mode for leaving a period until the launch of the ball are maintained in the left-side ball entry, and the ball on the right side in the arbitrary launch mode is maintained. Even if the game is fired, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into right and left, at least the first ball is fired to the right, and the number of balls (for example, the second) To the left and the remaining balls to the right.

  In this case, by not paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, paying attention to the sphere flowing down the left flow path, it is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked by other spheres. Meanwhile, it can be visually recognized whether or not the sphere flowing down the left flow path passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the ball is continuously fired toward the right portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the round game R from being delayed.

  It should be noted that the distinction of the launching of the ball to the left and right is not intended to make one ball entering the left channel. In particular, it is sufficient that the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow path components 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left flow path. In the above, it is only necessary to hit the ball so as to arbitrarily enter the left and right flow paths.

  Accordingly, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a or the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the entry path of the ball is a small number of paths. ), It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls falls to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. 2, the nail arrangement is asymmetrical in the left and right directions, but may be a symmetrical nail arrangement.

  Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

  FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) provided in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is not shown, and the rear side is visible through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape having a front side opened from a bottom wall 511 and an outer wall 512 erected from an outer edge of the bottom wall 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The rear case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A supporting plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape fittable with a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened.

  The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  The shape of the positioning projection 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a smaller shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. When the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is correspondingly formed in a rectangular shape.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the right inside of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the lower inside of the rear case 510, And a third operation unit 800 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510. In addition, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and a substrate having a light emitting means, such as an LED, are disposed on the inner left side of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and are formed of a light transmissive material, and light diffusion processing is performed entirely. The diffusion decoration plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

  Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located at a position to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located at a position below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located at a position above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. 28 illustrates the operation units 600 to 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 600 changes from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

  In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state where the surface facing the front side of the covering member 787 is different from the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

  28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be viewed well, but outside the center frame 86, it can be said that the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. In addition, the field of view is easily blocked by nails provided on the base plate 60, various winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Thus, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in relation to the configuration of the operation unit 500, its role is the same. In addition, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, the center frame 86 does not curve downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed so as to protrude so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper part of the center frame 86 (the upper part of the outer frame) is the third operation. The unit 800 is disposed so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the overhang state. In FIG. 31, the first decoration member 870 faces the front side, and the individual operation state of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, and a series of the third operation unit 800 is arranged. The united state is illustrated.

  Since the displacement in which the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 are switched occurs in a displacement mode in which the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement are combined, when executed in the effect standby state of the third operation unit 800, the surrounding decoration members and Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced downward from the effect standby state by a degree sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative member Assuming that the displacement of 870 and 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

  FIG. 33 shows the third operation unit 800 in the overhang state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly displaced from the overhang state, and FIG. 34 shows the first operation unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the third operating unit 800 is displaced from the state of FIG. 33 to the effect standby state, and a state in which the first operating unit 600 is displaced to the extended state. Illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operation unit 800 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operation unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, if the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes state from the effect standby state while the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), a collision may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the effect standby state to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhang state is controlled to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operation unit 700 is in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. It is possible to avoid overlapping visually. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a case in which the second operation unit 700 is slightly retreated from the opening 511a but is closely disposed to the third operation unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotation member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing obliquely leftward in the effect standby state, and a first effect thereof. A second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b are provided. Each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c is arbitrarily decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

  In the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first presentation surface 661a is inclined obliquely toward the player (the front surface is inclined 45 degrees toward the arrow L with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a is oriented in the third direction. From the inside of the frame of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86, the first decorative rotation member 660 is visually recognized in a diagonal direction passing through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 in the player's eyes. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player who visually recognizes the inside of the frame of the center frame 86 can be displayed. Face to face. In this case, since the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the second production rotation surface 661b faces directly in front, the visibility of the second production surface 661b in the eyes of the player who visually recognizes the second decoration rotation member 660. Can be improved.

  As described above, the second decoration rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and to increase the visibility of each effect surface 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

  In other words, it is designed not only to change the attitude in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle intended to be related to the player's line of sight. That is, since the player's line of sight is more frontward and rearward as the arrangement is closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, it is possible to improve the visibility by directing the production surface in the forward direction (the direction of arrow F). Therefore, the player's line of sight tends to be inclined as the arrangement becomes closer to the frame of the center frame 86, so that the visibility can be improved by making the presentation surface inclined to face the line of sight.

  With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The overhanging decorative portion 652b has a decoration such as a figure or a pattern on the front of the board, and in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 is not provided. By being arranged in the upper right corner, it is hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhang state (see FIG. 28), the overhang decorative portion 652 b of the center frame 86 is overlapped with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in front and back. It is configured such that a player can visually recognize it by being arranged inside the frame.

  In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, using the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives an illusion to the player as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged.

  More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and the second decorative rotating member is in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600. The left edge of the first presentation surface 661a at 660 substantially coincides with the region right end RE1 of the region where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the overhang state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration of the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 becomes the right end RE1 of the region. Can be visually recognized as if the player is expanding beyond. Thereby, a surprising effect can be realized.

  As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a decoration on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is set to the same polka dot pattern, A typeface similar to the typeface of a number (for example, a number for notifying the success or failure of a lottery) variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a certain number is written on the front side of the board of the overhang decorative portion 652b. An example in which this is done is illustrated.

  As an example of associating the above-described display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. Or a wooden stick arranged so that the right end is aligned with the right end RE1 of the region on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example in which the decoration is performed and the ignition is associated with the extended state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated.

  The effect of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type. By controlling the brightness of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, a plurality of types of effecting modes can be configured. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

  Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types. It is possible to prevent the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 from being restricted when the display area is enlarged.

  In addition, the target associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, the covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. The decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the decoration (the decoration of the first covering portion 875 and the second covering) formed on the members (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) of the third operation unit 800. (Decoration of the setting part 885).

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is changed to the second decorative rotating member 660. , The player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes a fixed unit 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed unit 610, A drive transmitting device 630 for transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported at a rotating tip end of the rotating member 620, and A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, A decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

  The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 which is disposed facing the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 in a front-rear direction, and a base member 611 which is disposed on the front side of the base member 611 and forms a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611. And a front lid member 612 fastened and fixed to the front cover member.

  The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for disposing the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Prepare.

  The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and operation thereof will be described later.

  The rotating member 620 is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in a middle portion of the main body 621 as an elongated hole extending in a linear direction, and an axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621. A circular through hole 624 formed as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the above, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Prepare.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is in contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is in contact with the projection of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front side). A biasing force is generated in the clockwise direction).

  In the shaft support of the cylindrical portion 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the distal end of the support fastening portion 615 in a state where the support fastening portion 615 is inserted through the cylindrical portion 622. You. Thus, the rotating member 620 is supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

  The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, details will be described later.

  The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in a state meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

  In a state where the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

  The front lid member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d penetratingly formed along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the arc-shaped hole 613d is located on the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

  The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member including a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633. The transmission gear cam 634 extends from the angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in a plate shape in an outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. Setting part 634b.

  The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side. Here, the widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

  The extension 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thus, by reading a change in the output of the detection sensor KS1, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can comprehend the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634.

  The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a cylindrical portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 and having a cylindrical cross-section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. A tubular portion 643 protruding in parallel with the tubular portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be meshable with the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643. A bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom portion behind the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is disposed. And an extension support portion 646 extending to the front side in the portion.

  With the above-described configuration, a driving force can be transmitted between the gear teeth 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620.

  In a state where the tubular portions 642 and 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the tubular portions 642 and 643. Thus, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are supported by the main body 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

  The bottomed cylindrical portion 645 has a bottom rear surface located close to the front edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654 a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front front surface of the bottom portion. And an insertion hole 645b that is formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and that can be inserted through the cylindrical support portion 651a. The details of the shape will be described later.

  The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotation member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

  The first decorative rotation member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a rotation axis orthogonal to the first rotation member 650, a front rotation member 652 supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotation member 652. An illumination board 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and provided with light emitting means such as an LED on the front side; a rear rotation member 654 coaxially fixed to the front rotation member 652 and fixed to the rear side; A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring passage, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It includes a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a shaft right-angle rotating member 657 that is externally fitted to and supported by a cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

  The main body member 651 is provided with a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a tubular shape on the back side. The cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a position of the diameter of the distal end portion. On one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b, there is provided a cutout portion 651c cut out so as to reduce the wall portion.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed to have a thickness through which electric wiring can be inserted, and the cutout portion 651c has a function as an opening for securing an entrance of the electric wiring.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a includes a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid in this order from the base end side. The fastening screw inserted through the long guide hole 616 of the member 612 and the female screw portion 651b at the distal end thereof is screwed into the female screw portion C2 to be fastened and fixed.

  That is, the above-described cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be displaceable along the long hole 616.

  The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of a circumferential portion thereof. In the assembled state, the opening C2a is arranged to face the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electric wiring. To form

  A part of the electric wiring passes through the inside of the rotation member 657 at right angles to the shaft and is guided into the inside of the second decoration rotation member 660, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 662. Further, other wiring is formed on a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the main body member 651 on the upper and lower sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal passes through the gap) and is guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illuminated board 653.

  The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference at the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. The gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illuminated board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative section 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decorative section 652b with light from a light emitting unit arranged on the illuminated board 653 is executed. It is possible.

  Since the front rotation member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotation member 654, the rear rotation member 654 and the front rotation member 652 rotate integrally.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical portion formed by the half cylindrical shape portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the half cylindrical shape portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and the gear of the front rotary member 652. It has gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with the teeth 652a.

  With such a configuration, the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, and the shaft right-angle rotation member 657 are linked, but the operation will be described later in detail. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. And a wiring fastening plate 663 which is disposed between the rotating member 657 and the right-angle rotation member 657 and is fastened and fixed to the distal ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  In the present embodiment, the decoration board 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later. Therefore, when being guided by the connector of the decoration board 662, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are Where there is a possibility that the electric wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring may cause twisting or disorder of the wiring. To avoid being placed in

  In the present embodiment, since the electric wiring is fixed to the electric decoration board 662, it is inevitable that the electric wiring is twisted. On the other hand, since the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, an excessive load is imposed on the electric wiring, The situation in which the wiring is cut off can be avoided.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. You.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that the wiring retaining plate 663 functions as a stopper and does not fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the shaft right-angle rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 comes off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  The illuminated substrate 662 is disposed so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illuminated substrate 662, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged on the front side and having an optical axis oriented in the thickness direction, and arranged on the back side and oriented in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side illuminating the second effect surface 661b) and having an optical axis directed in the width direction. It is.

  As described above, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (the second effect surface 661b is not illuminated). By arranging the second production surface 661b on the front side (extending state of the first operation unit 600), the third production surface 661c (surface facing upward) is illuminated by being disposed on the front side. When the LED emits light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

  That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the illuminated substrate 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the illuminated substrate 662, so that the second illuminating surface 661b is illuminated by the light illuminating the third illuminating surface 661c. Can also be illuminated. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

  The decoration fixing member 670 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material so that characters and figures for decoration can be visually recognized by a player, and includes an illumination substrate 671 that irradiates light diagonally left forward from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always a line of sight inclined obliquely to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 671 to the left, it is possible to irradiate the light on the side where the eyes of the player are easily arranged.

  The decoration fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion which are raised on the rear side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. The front and rear gap functions as a gap that passes when the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

  40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of the arrow XLII in FIG. FIG. 10 is a side view of the first operation unit 600. Note that, for easy understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws is omitted.

  In the effect standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. Thereby, the displacement resistance at the time of starting displacement while the cylindrical portion 634a slides on the transmission slot 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of the displacement, the assistance of the inertia cannot be obtained as compared with the middle of the displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the driving motor 631 tends to increase. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

  The same applies to the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission slot 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the effect standby state and the position in the extended state) is the same as that of the transmission slot 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thus, the load on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting the displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are determined. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

  Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the shaft right angle rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotation axis. The power is transmitted to the second decoration rotating member 660.

  The rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotation member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 (see FIG. 41).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is The rotation angle between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 is the same.

  Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In addition, illustration of the base member 611 and the fastening screw is omitted for easy understanding of the shape.

  The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhang state. Is set to

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c faces the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 is formed with a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion, and connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a to form a curved line (substantially arc shape). And a curved portion 616b formed at the bottom.

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connection portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging condition is a curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

  The first operation unit 600 is configured to be capable of changing the state as described above, and the rotation member 620 is disposed on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

  Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the displacement resistance generated between the guide slot 616 and the guide slot 616 due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 becomes large. The configuration is made so that the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 is along the displacement direction, so that the suppression is achieved.

  For example, the displacement of the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward. In addition, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend obliquely upward to the right. Have been.

  In this way, by making the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 follow, the displacement resistance of the portion displacing the inside of the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIGS. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when 620 rotates in the inclination direction in the aspect with a constant angular velocity. In addition, the positive and negative values of the numerical value are shown as a positive displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount. In FIG. 48B, the numerical value of FIG. 48A is shown as a bar graph.

  In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operation unit 600 is shown. The rotating member 620 in the posture in the extended state is illustrated by a solid line.

  In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. I have.

  The guide slot 616 functions as a slot for guiding the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 with the rotation of the rotating member 620. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is provided is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

  An outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 includes the vertical displacement of the tip of rotation (the main driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. The resulting vertical displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is a result of the addition.

  In the effect standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the arrangement of the rotating arm is 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). Range). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction are doubled.

  Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the speed is high at the end of the downward displacement.

  Next, details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

  Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 be stopped in the intermediate effect state (the middle position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a mode in which a curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. Accordingly, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b due to its own weight, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from dropping vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

  The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the production standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate production state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing its direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocated.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction on the driven side can be kept small as compared with the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 has a linear portion. While being placed at 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it were rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

  According to this displacement mode, since the sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be generated by using the advance by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, the entire supported member 640 is moved from the start of the displacement. The load required for the displacement can be suppressed low as compared with the case where the slide displacement is performed in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required at the start of the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, while the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main driving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the supported member 640 is maintained. The rotation direction on the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). Accordingly, as described above, the direction of the change in the posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being inverted).

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are performing a reciprocating operation (return operation). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

  Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driven portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component, In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 is reduced. can do. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  The operation caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connection between the linear part 616a and the curved part 616b is defined as the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the turning angle of the turning member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angle width of 20 to 45 degrees in FIG.

  First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, the guide slot 616 may be composed of only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a bent portion is used to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b, the speed of the driven member 640 at the end of displacement is prevented from being excessively high. This will be described below.

  In both cases of being guided by the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is moved downward. Displacing downward is the same.

  The difference is that, when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half portion of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the lower half of the curved portion 616b. In the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (leftward). The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided to be displaced leftward.

  Thus, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the driving side becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the driven member 640 on the driven side is swung right and left, so that the supported member 640 is swung left and right. It is possible to secure a large displacement speed of the driven side 640.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to an end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the vertical direction becomes equal. If the displacement is slow at the start of the displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end.

  When the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620. And becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period as compared with the vertical displacement UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees to reach the displacement lower end. The quantity UE1 increases.

  Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 may perform an operation of bouncing back, and when performing an effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement, the first operation unit 600 It adversely affects the performance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616 b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side increases becomes the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

  In this case, the term “uniform” is used not only to mean that the speed is brought to be the same over the entire range of the displacement, but also to mean that the magnitude of the speed is suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the side where the approach to the curved portion 616b starts, and enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. After the start, the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases.

  That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

  Further, by lowering the speed required on the driven side of the supported member 640, that is, the displacement required per unit time at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (lifted). When the operation is started, the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced in a unit time, so that the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 associated with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating a change in the angle θ [degree] with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

  The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

  In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the shaft right-angle rotating member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ is the same as the rotation angle of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660.

  The change of the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first operation unit 600 is 45 degrees. The angle from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

  In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is inclined leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is rightward by 45 degrees). Each time the state is switched in the order of the intermediate production state and the overhang state, the second decoration rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third production surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

  The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide slot 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 according to the angle θ.

  Thus, even when only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotation member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotation member 660 is controlled based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The arrangement and posture can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  That is, if the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state is determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decoration rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the second rotation member 620.

  Here, the change amount of the angle θ is not proportional to the rotation angle amount of the rotation member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not always necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being constant. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotation member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

  On the other hand, the change in the angle from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases from the approach position to the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It is below the level of the angle change up to the state (down to about 7 degrees).

  As described above, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 is configured to change in magnitude, so that the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes. Can be configured. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is likely to be small and the posture can be easily maintained, while in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation member 660 can be set. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to be large, and the surfaces facing the player (directing surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

  From the configuration described above, it is possible to form a gradual change in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660, as described above, the arrangement change and the posture change due to the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. And rotation displacement about the rotation axis are simultaneously executed.

  The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It grows noticeably at the timing of entry.

  That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the upper and lower sides of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state slightly move up and down (bounce back). Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third effect surface 661c toward the front side (see FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture change in the rotation direction is changed. It is visually noticeable. That is, the player can visually recognize that the second decoration rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

  In the present embodiment, at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotation member 620, the second effect surface 661b of the second decoration rotation member 660 is directed to the front side, and is arranged in the vicinity of the decoration fixing member 670. It is desirable that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of the displacement, in view of being integrally viewed (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to make the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side uniform, the rotating member 620 is Excessive displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side in a state where the supported member 640 is arranged at the displacement lower end can be prevented in advance, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the center positions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the cylindrical portion 643). Are configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 as a rotation axis of the rotating member 620. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the rotating distal end of the rotating member 620 becomes unsteady due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating distal side of the rotating member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

  In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b moves in a direction (upper left direction) that rebounds around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement of the rotating member 620. Is preferably configured to hinder the displacement of In other words, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is inclined in the upper left direction in the short direction, and the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in this direction can be suppressed. The rebound of the member 640 can be prevented.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side, and when the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end. Is different from the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driven side.

  The former is supposed to be displaced downward and left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driving side (the rotational direction of the rotating member 620) if there is no guidance, but in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction as a direction along the guide slot 616, and is displaced downward.

  On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, and thus has a displacement direction not along the guide long hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide long hole 616. Accordingly, the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  The feature of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. In the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the extended state to the effect standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

  The load required for raising and displacing the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) mainly depends on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640. It is used for raising and displacing the rotation member 650 and the second decoration rotation member 660, and for rotating the second decoration rotation member 660.

  That is, as the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is smaller, the load required for raising and displacing the rotation member 620 can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating and displacing from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. The angle θ is designed to be the lowest. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the load required for raising and displacing the rotating member 620.

  At the end of the rising displacement of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 about the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( (Vertical orientation).

  Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load that is twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can endure the load with a slight elastic displacement locally by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotation member 620 is broken and broken. . In addition, an excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front cover member 612. Therefore, the rotation member 620 can be prevented from being damaged.

  The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotation angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the arrangement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small, such as a change from the effect standby state to the overhang state, if the angle θ changes, the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates. .

  The change of the angle θ from the effect standby state to the overhang state is about 135 degrees, and the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the effect standby state, it feels as if it collides with another operation unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a clockwise rotation manner, the other operating unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) changes its posture. Collisions can be avoided.

  In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

  For example, in the case where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is changed from the overhanging state arrangement to the effect standby state. , The overhanging decorative portion 652b extends to the upper left side of the supported member 640 and collides with another operation unit 800 or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. May have an adverse effect on the production.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven member 640 on the driven side of the supported member 640 as a reference. When 640 projects to the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced away from the third symbol display device 81, it retreats in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

  The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's eyes can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, the difference is about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the posture change angle of the supported member 640, which is 45 degrees.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640 are obtained. The difference between the change and ((a1 + b1)-(a2 + b2))-(b1-b2) = (a1-a2) is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

  Accordingly, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

  Therefore, it is as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b provided on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by the driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620 to the player. Can be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that, in the player's eyes, there is a section where the movement is slid or a section where the rotation is performed. It can be shown, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

  This operation is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. Affected by the dominant side.

  Therefore, in the section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced. The appearance decoration portion 652b can be visually recognized as being slid.

  As described above, the description has been given of the case where the rotating member 620 is rotatable and displaceable so as to constitute the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state, and is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the opposite direction at a position in the middle of the displacement range.

  For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the driving direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to a lower speed in order to make the stop position accurate.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency near the intermediate effect state as compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force that is distributed to the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, so that the rotation member 620 relatively moves. It is possible to reduce the amount allocated to the rotational displacement, and it is possible to automatically suppress the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620.

  In other words, as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 can be reduced, so that the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 is set to a low value in advance. Even if it is not performed, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped near the intermediate effect state.

  Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is a field of view of a player who looks at the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). An effect standby state (see FIG. 28) retracting below the opening 511a in order to secure the position, and an overhanging state (see FIG. 30) arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to attract attention. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state.

  FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the elevating / reversing effect device 770 are shown in an exploded state, and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to a lower right corner of the rear case 510, and a right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmitting device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 in which a distal end portion of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be able to be guided and is capable of elevating and lowering, and a rear left side fastened and fixed to a lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750, a set of left and right front plate members 710 and a pair of front support members 760 fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and a back on the front side of the metal bar 702. A blind decoration member 768 fastened and fixed to the case 510, and a lifting / reversing effect device 770 configured to be capable of being displaced by the lifting / lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a mode that combines vertical movement and vertical displacement. .

  The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap formation portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of detection sensors 713 provided to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and the front side of the left side of the drive transmission device 730 is directed to the front side toward the upper side. A front upper inclined portion 714 which is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774 e of the vertically inverted reversing effect device 770 and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. And a plurality of fastened portions 718.

  The detection sensor 713 is provided with a plurality of photocoupler sensors at intervals so that the detection groove is disposed at a position where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each of the detection sensors 713 includes a position of the detected portion 735 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, and an overhang of the second operation unit 700, respectively. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

  That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, or the extended state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can be grasped the state of the second operation unit 700.

  The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projection 511b projecting from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a long plate shape in a U-shape as viewed from the front. A main body 721 to be formed, and a support cylinder 722 having a cylindrical shape projecting rearward at a bent portion of the main body 721 and having an inner peripheral side formed to have a size capable of being inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 511b. A long hole 723 formed in the right end of the main body 721 in a long hole shape along the long direction, and a front end (the projecting direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) at the left end of the main body 721. (In a direction parallel to) and a cylindrically fastened portion 724 in which a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side in a cylindrical shape, and rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrically fastened portion 724 and the support tubular portion 722. Cylindrical fastening with a cylindrical projection projecting into the inner circumference It includes a 725, and a torsion spring SP2 to provide a biasing force of the rise in the main body 721 (direction of lifting the left side) with the rear case 510 is wrapped around the supporting tube portion 722.

  The left side of the main body 721 is formed with a step so as to be displaced on the front side as compared with the base end side of the support cylinder 722, and a support plate is formed in a gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is provided.

  The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 is supported undetachably.

  Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the rear case 510 toward the front. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from causing a displacement in which the rotating arm member 720 is tilted to the front side, so that the displacement of the rotating arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

  The right side portion of the main body 721 is disposed in a gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side of the main body 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

  The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passing through the center of the width passes through the center of the support cylindrical portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load becomes zero.

  The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731 , A transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

  The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projections 711a that project in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into a shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. When these fastening screws are screwed and fixed, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

  The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

  The gear cam member 734 is extended in such a manner as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a detected portion 735 which is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft portion toward the front side and is formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b. And a cylindrical protruding portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the distal end of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

  The detected part 735 is formed so as to be able to be disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and changes the attitude of the gear cam member 734 by the output from the detection sensor 713 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part for enabling detection.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. Is done.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. When the fastening screw is screwed and fixed, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical projection 736a.

  The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and is disposed at the left end side and guided by the up and down direction, and is provided at the lower end side of the guided member 741. A left and right long horizontally long member 742 to be fastened and fixed.

  The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal bar 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and the vertical direction displacement along the metal bar 702 is possible. Since the tips of the ridges projecting from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side abut on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally long member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  The horizontally long member 742 has an elongated hole 743 formed in an elongated oval shape on the left and right with a vertical width in which the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the elongated hole 743. And a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744 as a reference. Prepare.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, the elevating plate member 740 is rotated through the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

  The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is inserted, and which supports the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in a state where it can be displaced back and forth. In other words, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

  A coil spring CS2 is provided so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction in which the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting reversal effect device 770 are separated from each other.

  The guide part 745 is constituted by a pair of left and right parts, and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside from a long plate part 745a forward and backward. 745b.

  The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-described up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction, and functions as a portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction. The details will be described later.

  The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side toward the upper side on the right front side, and is a rotating cylindrical portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. And a plurality of fastened portions 752 in which female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed are formed.

  The blind decoration member 768 includes a three-dimensional decoration part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which LEDs are fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a. The three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by light emitted from the LED.

  Each of the front support members 760 has a fixing plate portion 761 configured to have an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and the right and left inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the plate back faces upward. And a receiving inclined portion 762 which is formed to be inclined toward the front side.

  The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into a corresponding female screw portion. Plate.

  In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is disposed in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide route is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided on the guide route, whereby the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaced vertically while being displaced. Hereinafter, this vertical displacement will be described.

  FIG. 52A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 52A and 52B show the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

  FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  FIG. 54A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30. FIG. 54B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 54A and 54B show the extended state of the second operation unit 700.

  The vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of the driving force at the time of vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG.

  At the time of starting the transmission of the driving force from the effect standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projection 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the long hole 723 of the rotary arm member 720. Since the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same is true in the overhang state.

  On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the direction of displacement of the cylindrical projection 736a is orthogonal to the length of the elongated hole 723, the gear cam member 734 receives the rotation from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

  The displacement resistance of this displacement is based on the configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversing effect device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the elevation reversing effect device 770. The configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740 reduces the number.

  56. That is, the pair of rotary cylinder portions 774e are provided with the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is disposed on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 56). ), And the rotary cylinder 774e rolls around the cylindrical portion 774d, thereby displacing along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

  Further, as the arrangement of the rotary cylinder portions 745b aligned in front and rear, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b is designed to be arranged slightly above, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, thereby enabling the rotation. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the design is such that the position of the center of gravity (position of the rotation axis) of the effect device 780 is located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always inclined forward by gravity. Biased in the direction. Due to the influence of the biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b, which is disposed close when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is disposed slightly above, and is positioned close when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b to be formed is disposed slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, according to this configuration, since the front rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, the rolling can be stably generated with the first horizontal plate 774b. Since the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, the rolling can be stably generated with the second horizontal plate 774c. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotary cylinder portion 745b can be normally caused, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  The displacement of the elevation reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guide. For this reason, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be reduced at the time of the upward displacement in which the elevation reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, as compared with the downward displacement.

  The vertical displacement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the driving motor 731. The driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the displacement in the ascending direction becomes relatively large due to the necessity of opposing gravity, but the displacement in the front-rear direction in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force required for raising and lowering the elevation reversal effect device 770 from becoming excessive.

  The length of the coil spring CS2 is set to be a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed below the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 causes the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed above the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it is earlier, the second operating unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate effect state by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

  Further, for example, in the case where the stop control is performed in the same manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descending by its own weight is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the arrangement can be maintained by moving the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state side.

  In addition, for example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the overhung state of the second operation unit 700 and the stop of the drive motor 731 is stopped to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is used. Because the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the intermediate production state moves downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than that in the intermediate production state. Then, even after the stop control of the drive motor 731, the second operating unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side by applying the urging force of the coil spring CS <b> 2.

  Here, the action of the vertical reversal effect device 770 displaced in the front-rear direction with the vertical displacement will be described. As a premise, there is known a movable role that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 is displaced in and out of the frame framed by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player escapes from the player's field of view.

  Most of such movable auditoriums are designed with an emphasis on appearance when they are arranged inside the center frame 86. In the state of retreating outside the center frame 86, attention is paid to the player. Often, they don't consider appearance, assuming they won't.

  However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is configured to be long, and at the end of the field of view such that the display area of the third symbol display device 81 passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is viewed. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outside position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), the appearance of the movable role retracted to the rear outside position of the center frame 86 is poor, There is a possibility that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After the decorative surfaces are formed on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is set such that the displacement direction of the device 770 becomes closer to the rear side with the player side (front side) as the base end. (Declining toward the rear), that is, a displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view so that each decorative surface can easily fit in the player's field of view. Make up.

  Thus, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be easily put in the field of view of the player. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front side surface (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, which is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), FIG. 54, a first main decorative surface 787a1) and an upper side surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, which can be visually recognized by the player in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52); The decoration (a figure, a pattern, a character, a picture, or the like) formed on the decoration surface 787a2) is formed as a decoration related to each other.

  In other words, the first main decoration surface 787a1 and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are formed as first decorations related to each other, and the second main decoration surface 787b1 and the second decoration surface 787b2 are related to each other. , And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations from each other.

  The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, a state where attention is paid to a ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state where attention is paid to a display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81 are switched. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving his / her eyes.

  Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” and “big hit”) that can be visually recognized by the player through the covering member 787 in the overhang state are displayed on the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. The player can be made visible through the side surface.

  Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the effect standby state so that the third symbol display device 81 can be easily visually recognized, and the cover member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the player's attention.

  In addition, as described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the contents of the decorative surface that the player can visually recognize in the extended state are different. A case can arise.

  For example, if the vertical reversing effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (when overlooked or when the operation speed is excessively fast), In the configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the effect standby state, so that the player is unfolded on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The attention must be paid to the effect of the liquid crystal, and the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped also from the upper side surface as in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the up-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that the player can cover in the overhang state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) which were visually recognizable by the player.

  This allows the player who has overlooked the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state to be notified of the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 on the decorative surface that is visible on the covering member 787 even in the effect standby state. It can be reported continuously. Accordingly, the attention power of the covering member 787 can be kept high regardless of each state such as the effect standby state or the extended state.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the up-down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end face of the game area from the rear side of the rear end face of the game area. A description will be given of such a displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the plate rear surface of the center frame 86 are disposed to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. And a flow path forming portion 86a protrudingly formed at the bottom.

  The flow path forming portion 86a is configured such that the sphere jumping from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then moves to the center thereof. The rear side of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball flowing down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 backward, flowing forward again, and guiding toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area. (See FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged behind the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

  Since the ball that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a enters the first winning opening 64 with a high probability, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered in the flow path forming portion 86a. In the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), since the effect device 780 is disposed immediately behind the flow path forming portion 86a, it is easy to configure a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of the player. Can be.

  In the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the covering member 787 is disposed on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52A). The front surface portion is disposed on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the front surface portion of the covering member 787 is disposed on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

  That is, the covering member 787 is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the front-rear position same as the front-rear position of the game area at the same time as being displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Therefore, it can be seen to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving to the front side (approaching the player side).

  In the second operation unit 700, where the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction with the vertical displacement, the front-rear position of the front end face is the second decoration in the extended state of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. It is configured to match (coincide with) the front-back position of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

  Thus, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in front view in the extended state. Are matched, and these can be easily made to be visually recognized integrally.

  On the other hand, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate rendering state and the rendering standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared with the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

  The elevation reversal effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, the details of the elevation reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to.

  The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side. A pair of guide extending portions 774 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 and a vertically extending connecting portion are formed integrally with the left and right central positions of the lower elongated portion 772. An upper elongate portion 775 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and a linear motion plate member 784 of the rendering device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper elongate portion 775 so as to be able to be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the rear side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device, a lower elongated portion 772, and an upper elongated portion. A light emitting effect means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775, Provided.

  The insertion cylindrical portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship slidable on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, since the insertion cylindrical portion 773 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744, the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be suppressed.

  The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a having a width in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a, and having a horizontal direction in the width direction, and a first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c, which is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is in the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a to the left and right sides. It comprises a pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d provided, and a rotating tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

  The width of the second horizontal plate 774c is longer than the width of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expanded portion in the width direction is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the assembled state, and abuts each other to suppress the tilting displacement in which the guide extending portion 774 falls forward. That is, the second horizontal plate 774c has a width enough to be vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the elevating plate member 740, so that the main body member 771 is tilted forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740. Can be suppressed.

  The tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a pair in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is arranged to be shifted to the front side compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This displacement is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52A). That is, by disposing a pair of cylindrical portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be in contact. Thus, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and it is easy to avoid occurrence of a local load.

  The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect a pair of left and right tubular portions 776a with a plurality of tubular portions 776a which are disposed on both left and right sides in such a manner that a pair of left and right sides are vertically arranged and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. A plurality of falling-off prevention plate portions 776b to be formed.

  The falling-off prevention plate portion 776b includes an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole is screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. And functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, which will be described later in detail.

  The transmission device holding plate 777 has a motor support plate 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical projecting portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the front side, a pair of insertion holes 777d formed at upper and lower ends so as to allow fastening screws to be inserted, and a fastening on the rear side. And a fixed wiring fastening member 777e.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in a state of being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby pivotally supporting the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off. Part.

  The insertion hole 777d is configured such that a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted, and the transmission device holding plate 777 causes the upper elongated portion 775 to be inserted by the fastening screw. Is fixed.

  The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and retaining the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. In this case, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

  The light-emitting effecting means 778 includes a left and right long plate-shaped two upper and lower electric decoration substrates 778a on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are disposed on the front side, and light transmission disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrates 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed of a conductive resin material and formed by light diffusion processing.

  The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photo-coupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the orientation of the upside down member 781 of the rendering device 780 by disposing an arc-shaped protruding portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

  The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and is inserted from the back side into the through-holes formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at corresponding positions in the fastened portions. The fastening screw is screwed into and fastened and fixed, so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b is formed with an insertion hole 778c for inserting a fastening screw on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screw inserted from the front side into the insertion hole 778c is a female screw of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

  In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without any countermeasure. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always connected to the front side of the insertion hole 778c. , The head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

  Therefore, even when the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 to be arranged so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction can be increased.

  The rendering device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and the upside-down reversing member 781 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777 c of the transmission device holding plate 777. A drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the upside down member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft; and one end of each of both longitudinal ends of the upside down member 781 And a pair of linear motion plate members 784, the other ends of which are pivotally supported, and the guide portions 776 guide the displacement in the left-right direction. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 disposed between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and rotatable (reversed) with a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction; Joint support with member 784 A pair of shaft support members 786, a pair of end plate members 785 d which are fixed to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a state where the phases are fixed so as not to fall off, and before and after the end plate members 785 d And a covering member 787 formed to have a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

  The upside down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding in a gear shape on the back side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, and a main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends in the length direction to the rear side, and protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. And an arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

  The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center. The cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the distal end side. The vertically reversing member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 so as not to fall off via the transmission gear 781b.

  The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the rotation, so that the upside down member 781 rotates. That is, the upside down member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end where the one-side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c which is displaced as the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

  The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effecting means 778. That is, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can be arranged on one of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

  Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the vertically reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture (a pair of detection sensors 778d (The posture in which the arc-shaped protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves (1) and (2)).

  The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a that is bored at one end and is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c. A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side formed at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ) Formed as bevel teeth 783c.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off.

  The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a that projects in a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arc-shaped plate portion 784b protruding in an arc shape about the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a. A pair of long hole portions 784c, a pair of upper and lower support plate portions 784d arranged in parallel at a position between the long hole portions 784c, and a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting rearward, and an intermediate portion between the support plate portions 784d. A pair of ridges 784e, which are formed on the sides facing each other and are formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape which is disposed at an end of the support plate 784d and is opened on the back side and has an inner peripheral side And a pair of fastened portions 784f in which female threads are formed A ring holding member having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between an arrangement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d and a shaft support member 786. A half 784h and a magnet holding half 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786 are provided.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and is slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the other cylindrical portion 783b is screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall into the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. It is supported by.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. Accordingly, the arcuate plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to radially oppose the other cylindrical portion 783b, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thus, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

  The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened through a female screw formed in the cylindrical portion 776a from the rear side through the insertion hole of the drop-prevention plate portion 776b. When the screw is screwed in, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

  In the supporting state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement, and the protruding ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. , But will be described later in detail.

  The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference of the shaft rotation member 785 with the beveled tooth member 785c, but details thereof will be described later.

  The shaft rotation member 785 is a member disposed in a pair on the left and right sides and supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The shaft rotation member 785 includes a metal rod 785 a formed in a substantially cylindrical shape from a metal material, and a length of the metal rod 785 a. A concave groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the direction, a member provided at the left and right inner ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783; A bevel tooth member 785c having a bevel gear (bevel gear) meshing therewith; an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a; and an end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal bar 785a in a manner to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d. Metal part Di is and a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that is screwed into the fixed.

  The metal bar 785a is arranged between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding ridge portion 784e is arranged in the concave groove portion 785b. Here, the concave groove portion 785b is configured to have a dimensional relationship that enables sliding with the ridge portion 784e, and is configured to have a dimensional relationship that restricts lateral displacement with respect to the ridge portion 784e.

  That is, the groove width of the concave groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left and right width of the ridge portion 784e, the diameter of the groove deep portion of the concave groove portion 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

  Thus, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that the shaft can rotate and the displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed.

  The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the umbrella member 785c partially enters the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the umbrella portion 785c with the umbrella member 785c from the opposite side (rear side) of the linear motion plate member 784. Assembled in

  In this assembled state, although the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arrangement hole 784g, it cannot be dropped to the front side because the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The displacement to the rear side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the beveled tooth member 785c is undetachably supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783.

  The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed in an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as a tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a are formed. Are formed and fixed in a dimensional relationship of interference fit.

  The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or a female screw may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female screw. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

  The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is slidably contacted on the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d. Can easily match the axis passing through the center of rotation of the beveled tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

  The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the metal screw provided is attracted to the magnet Mg.

  The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f, and a ring holding member for the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e with the half 784h and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. And a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786, the plate portion of the shaft support member 786 has the back side of the metal rod 785a. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding half portions 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding half portions 784i and 786c.

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides opened in a pair in the front and rear directions, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and different on the opposite surface. A decoration consisting of a figure, pattern, character, picture, etc. that can be read in a meaning is formed.

  That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface that is visually recognized by a player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof, When the first main decoration surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and enters the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), the first sub decoration surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player and the back surface thereof And a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 to be formed. The second sub-decoration surface 787b2 is formed on a side where the player can visually recognize the second sub-decoration surface 787b1 in a state where the second main decoration surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and enters an effect standby state (see FIG. 52).

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides opened in an assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside at a portion between the extending portions 787c. .

  The extending portion 787c is formed such that its ends are in contact with or close to each other when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

  The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged at the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effecting means 778 or a left and right center upper portion of the upper elongate portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). This is a portion for opening the arc plate portion or the like so as to be visible, and is formed in a concave shape so as to at least avoid interference with these portions.

  The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 is directed to the front side and the first sub-decorated surface 787a2 is directed to the upper side in accordance with the operation of the rendering device 780 (see FIGS. 29 and 52). The state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30) can be switched. First, a mechanism that constitutes a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

  FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 57 (a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of an upside-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) Shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57A around the cylindrical projection 777c in a front view. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

  In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated by 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. You.

  That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch between the upright and downside orientation members 781 and the upside-down vertically arranged state. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the rendering device 780.

  As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds (proportionally) to the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement of the other cylindrical portion 785b is the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. Corresponding to

  Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear motion displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same time at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is larger.

  First, a brief description will be given. The configurations of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside down reversing member 781 moves forward. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to move in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c when viewed. The pair of right and left linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

  As shown in FIG. 57B, the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction by about 24 degrees from the vertical arrangement state shown in FIG. 57A. The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end). It is illustrated as

  Also, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view, The angle is set to be equal to or less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Since the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged on the near side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engaging transmission) between the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c is opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, Occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

  FIG. 58A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58B, the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. To be displaced). In FIG. 58B, in order to facilitate understanding, the beveled tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c are illustrated as being overlapped, and the overlapping width is set to beveled tooth portion 783c. It is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

  The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward and the left shaft rotating member 785 moves forward. Rotate in the turning direction.

  In addition, while the upside down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees about the other cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 becomes Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the beveled tooth member 785c rotates about the metal bar 785a is twice as large as the angle of rotation about the other cylindrical portion 783b of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and This is less than the amount that can reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. That is, the displacement amount until the contacting representative tooth is rotated to the position of the adjacent tooth (the displacement required for the rotation of an angle of 30 degrees according to the fact that the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in equal parts of 12). Volume).

  The gear teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c. However, in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the pressing is not performed. Since the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c, the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction of the beveled tooth member 785c is changed from the state of FIG. ) Is maintained.

  The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c is based on the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside-down reversing member 781 from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f of the shaft rotating member 785 ( 54 (see FIG. 54).

  That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the right shaft rotating member 785 from rotating and displacing in the backward direction. The shaft rotating member 785 on the right side receives the urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

  Also, with respect to the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side, the arrangement of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the arrangement of the magnet Mg is on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives the urging force in the backward direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

  In the present embodiment, the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57A until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate a load exceeding.

  As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c undergo elastic deformation so as to absorb the displacement of the beveled tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58B. When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), the beveled tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f are rotated. When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

  Therefore, at the start of rotation, the amount of elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotation direction of the shaft rotation member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

  Thereby, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782, and the effect of the covering member 787 can be reduced while reducing the load of the control design of the driving motor 782. The effect can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs due to the attraction force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate. .

  The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attracting force of the magnet Mg is configured as a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. 52 (b) is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force (see FIG. 52 (b)). When the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f on the upper side) is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force.

  That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg causes the rotation of the shaft rotating member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, an effect that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of the linear movement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of the rotational displacement. When the vertically reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57B, the degree of the linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is settled, and a rotational displacement occurs.

  According to the present embodiment, a similar effect occurs because the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projection 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so that the displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 in the left-right direction is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the displacement in the left-right direction of the translation plate member 784 is large, and the rotation displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

  On the other hand, since the displacement of the cylindrical projection 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and increases in the up-down direction as the longitudinal direction of the upside-down reversing member 781 falls closer to the left-right direction, the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller. The rotation amount is small and the rotation amount is large. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is large.

  Therefore, in the rotation operation of the upside-down reversing member 781 starting from the vertical arrangement state and ending in the vertical arrangement state, first, the degree of the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases, and then the degree of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 decreases. The degree of displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 in the left-right direction increases again.

  When the linear displacement and the rotational displacement are generated in such an order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is provided at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, a change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

  59 (a) to 59 (c) are front views of the rendering device 780. FIG. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the reversing operation of the elevating reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 59 (a) shows the rendering device 780 with the upside down member 781 in the upright vertical arrangement state, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the rendering device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertical arrangement state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59 (c), the rendering device 780 in an upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 is illustrated.

  The upside down member 781 is turned 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), thereby changing the state to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is inverted by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). Thus, the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player is switched (see FIG. 59 (c)).

  When the vertically reversing member 781 is displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front in the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, every time when the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so that the upside down reversing member 781 is rotated and displaced by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. ) Can be repeatedly switched between the states.

  As described above, while the upside-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the shaft rotation member 785 engages with the beveled tooth portion 783c to rotate the shaft rotation member 785 by 180 degrees. I do. Here, from the rotation direction of the beveled tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotation members 785 and the cover member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d arranged in the left and right directions rotate in opposite directions.

  Therefore, at an intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second sub-decoration surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59B). ).

  Accordingly, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorating surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 ( Or, it can be avoided that the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is visually recognized together.

  Therefore, the decoration surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally left and right shifted in content, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information provided by the covering member 787 to the player can be reduced.

  Thereby, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be reduced. Further, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotation displacement is stopped, the game is performed until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. The effect that the line of sight of the user is easily maintained by the covering member 787 can also be achieved.

  The rotational displacement is performed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops, and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are changed to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787a1). In the state where the two main decoration surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has been raised to near the upper and lower center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub decoration surface 787a2. (Or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

  In particular, especially when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the field of view on the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is changed to the third operation. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

  On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is disposed below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or). The second sub-decoration surface 787b2) can easily enter the player's field of view.

  As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being visually recognized during the rotational displacement in the extended state, or the player side. For example, in the effect standby state, it is formed as a side surface that can be noticed by the player.

  Thus, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the production performance with respect to the cost of arranging the second operation unit 700 (occupation of a place, burden of concealing it well) becomes excessively low. The occurrence of a state can be easily avoided.

  After the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54B), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. Can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, since the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is formed of a metal screw, the cost of the member can be reduced and the maintainability can be improved as compared with a case where a dedicated metal member is designed. .

  As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by a linear motion displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are performed by performing rotational displacement. 750 and the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof will collide with the covering member 787.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), the space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be performed.

  Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable on the assumption of. Thus, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally caused.

  The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside-down reversing member 781, and in this state, they are opposed to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 at the front and rear. Therefore, when the cover member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, Failure occurs.

  On the other hand, the configuration in which the extending portion 787c is arranged close to the other is to produce an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for production, Preferably, it can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). By the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extending portion 787c can be retracted from a position before and after the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, and the extending portion 787c and the upper elongated portion 775 can be retracted. It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion of the lower elongate portion 772 collides with the connecting portion.

  Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be reduced.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, it is possible to perform the design while ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to increase the left and right width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the magnet Mg Is changed to a magnet having a large attraction force, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c.

  As shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c, and can prevent the effect from being reduced by the fastening screw.

  In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric in accordance with the right and left decorations.

  That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion into which the fastening screw is inserted, it becomes impossible to arrange the LED on the electric decoration board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). Further, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, the fastening screw is likely to be dark and visible at the time of emitting light.

  Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to dispose the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid a brightly lit and conspicuous portion. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric.

  Note that the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right symmetric. In particular, when the decoration of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 is the same on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage caused by arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the illuminated substrate 778a can be easily designed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extended portion 787c. Even when not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit into the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is Are designed to fit in the upper and lower widths of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775. The upside down member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits in the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement trajectory fits in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

  As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the rendering device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and can be made invisible, so that the rendering effect due to the appearance of the rendering device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

  Returning to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported by the distal ends of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. The unit is configured to be able to be displaced up and down as the elevating arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. In FIGS. 60 and 61, a portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed outside is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder to which the cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. The member 820, an inner rotating member 830 supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted through the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted through the inner peripheral side. The rotatable outer rotating member 840, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the held member 810 And a drive transmitting device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

  The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

  The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is concavely formed at a center portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting electric wiring. A detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler-type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 projecting forward from the front as cylindrical portions that support the transmission gear 863 so that they cannot fall off, and a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 so that they can not fall off. And a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that are protruded.

  The perforated lid member 817 has a circular hole 818 formed in the center in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed to have such a size that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

  The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting unit such as an LED on the front side which is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822. A disc-shaped illuminated substrate 823 to be provided, and a light-transmitting resin material formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting resin material capable of covering the illuminated substrate 823 from the front side A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821.

  The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the front end portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, thereby fixing the cylindrical member. The member 820 is non-rotatably fastened and fixed to the held member 810.

  The cylindrical portion 821 is formed so as to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is creeped to the front side through this penetrating portion, and is disposed behind the electric decoration board 823. Connected to the connector.

  The illuminated substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, pentagonal vertices and an inner light emitting portion 823a arranged at a center position equidistant from the vertices, and an outer light emitting portion 823b arranged at 15 locations on the circumference at equal intervals. And. The inner light emitting unit 823a is configured by an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is configured by an LED whose optical axis is directed radially outward (diametrically).

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b is applied to the plating portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 arranged closely and at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 is irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decoration member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decoration member 870 are coaxial. Are arranged at regular intervals on the circle of the first decorative member 870, regardless of the rotation direction of the first decorative member 870, the light from the same number (three in this embodiment) of LEDs is always applied to each first decorative member 870. Can be irradiated.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress a change in the light amount of the light LD1 applied to the first decoration member 870 during the rotation operation.

  The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable on the circular flange portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Formed.

  The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange portion 831a, so that the inner portion is slidably fitted to the inner rotating member 830.

  The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the side of the circular plate portion 822 of the cylindrical portion 821 and also on the side of the main body portion 831 on the side of the circular flange-like portion 831a which is advantageous in terms of strength. The possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 is damaged or deformed by a load generated at the time of poor sliding (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive) can be reduced.

  The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end and a radially elongated direction at a position obtained by dividing the periphery of the main body 831 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in a posture along the plurality of metal rods 832; And a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at a radially outer portion of the linear moving member 833.

  The main body portion 831 includes a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an intermediate angular position (five places) between the above-described circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal bar 832. It has a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c which are recessed and formed at circumferentially spaced intervals at the end opposite to the circular flange portion 831a.

  The sliding ridge 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral side curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and to reduce a contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section.

  The arrangement of the sliding ridges 831b is set at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. In other words, the sliding ridges 831b are located on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the center axis of the outer rotating member 840. Position (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

  Thus, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the load is applied so that the outer rotary member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced radially. Even if the outer rotating member 840 is displaced, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge 831b, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be increased. Can be kept low.

  The recessed portion 831c is a portion where the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 enters and is disposed. By disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, relative rotation of each other is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 can be matched.

  The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protruding portions 833a and 833b that are arranged at intervals so as to be arranged in the linear motion displacement direction and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protruding portions 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on a side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted through the rotating member 834, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. And a recessed groove 833d to be recessed.

  The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the overhanging portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being fitted to the outside as much as possible, it functions as a displacement regulating groove for preventing the rotating member 834 from dropping in a radially outward direction, which will be described later in detail.

  The rotating member 834 includes a bevel gear 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b protruding in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The beveled tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and the decorative members 870, 880 are formed by screwing fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions so as to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, but details will be described later.

  The outer rotating member 840 has a cylindrical body 841 and a plurality (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at a position obtained by dividing the circumference of the body 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. Of the main body 841, a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 which can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. And a detected portion 844 extending outward.

  The extension arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842 a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842 a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850. By screwing a fastening screw into the female screw in a state where the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the side bar portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

  The gear teeth 843 are provided so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a portion that switches the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described later in detail.

  The intermediate arm member 850 is a member that is formed in a long shape, and includes a base rod 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotation member 840, and another part of the base rod 851. A thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end side rod portion 853 which extends from the front end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base side rod portion 851. And a rotation transmitting portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853.

  The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and has a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that can rotate relative to each other with the cylindrical projecting portion 833a inserted. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole formed in an arc centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projected portion 833b while being inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear having the supported hole 854a as a central axis. And a bevel gear 854c that meshes with the bevel gear 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

  The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 815 so as not to fall off. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to be able to transmit the driving force via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 which are displaced and are pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance according to the load in the rotation direction applied to the load response gear 865 is variable.

  The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and is recessed so as to be able to enter the concave portion 831 c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission projection 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and a shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a coaxial double annular bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission projection 864a. And a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion to the front side.

  In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 has an intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a enters the recessed portion 831c. Alternatively, they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

  The arrangement of the recess 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

  If the intervals are equal, it is possible to assemble the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c by adjusting the arrangement of the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864. It is possible to do. As in the present embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are set. It is considered that there is little influence due to misalignment at the time of assembling, so that equal intervals are effective.

  If the intervals are unequal, during the assembling operation, the number of steps for assembling the center annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 and then assembling is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is increased. By utilizing the arrangement, the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be adjusted.

  The load response gear 865 is provided so as to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear 865 is caused by the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840. The state in which the rotation of the 865 is permitted and the state in which the rotation is restricted (restricted) are switched.

  That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, and release transmission of the driving force. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is constituted by a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in two directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and a portion for configuring the displacement is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is configured such that one of the inner rotating member 830 and one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834 b fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834 b of the inner rotating member 830. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

  The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Is provided.

  The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated so as to easily reflect light.

  The first covering portion 875 has a frame formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material on the inside of the frame, and has a figure, a pattern, and a picture of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as “picture etc.”) drawn on its surface. When the front surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covering portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like. Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits light intensely by the light emission control by the electric decoration board 823 or changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention is different. Can be made.

  For example, at the player's point of view, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to pay attention to which of the first covering portions 875 is stopped, and at the same time, the inner rotating member 830. Is controlled so as to rotate, the first covering portion 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed with the rotation, so that the player can be changed over until the rotation stops. Can be gathered in the first covering portion 875.

  The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton 881. , Is provided.

  The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

  A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the screw to ensure the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the united state (particularly, one united state, see FIG. 32).

  The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, and a character pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pattern") drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern is played. Is visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (at least two, at most five) second covering portions 885 form a pattern drawn on a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is formed in a circle so that the five second covering portions 885 are visually recognized as a “circular body” when viewed from the front when the five second covering portions 885 are combined. Decorated to form part of the body.

  The pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the union state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a picture that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. That is, the design does not have a clear upper, lower, left and right pattern, and the design is such that a change in the outer shape is not conspicuous even when rotated (in the present embodiment, a circular shape).

  Therefore, the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by a player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the united state, the second covering unit 885 side is firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2, so that the uniting when the second covering unit 885 is disposed on the front side. The effect performance in the state can be improved.

  In each of the second covering portions 885, a magnet Mg2 is provided on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed.

  Also in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are replaced only by the metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent on the opposite side. Since the portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when they are integrated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this prevents the performance performance from being reduced.

  In other words, since the first covering portion 875 has an independent pattern or the like, the degree of integration in the united state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, There is no possibility that a pattern or the like to be visually recognized by a person cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance performance of the performance using the pattern drawn on the first covering portion 875 from being reduced.

  Further, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the vertical displacement (stop from) and the rotational displacement as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation (stop from). ), The arrangement of the combined first covering portions 875 can be shifted. Thus, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacing mode that cannot be realized by a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but is constituted by a single circular member. The production effect of the production by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

  From the above situation, in the united state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, a state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual united state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is the front side. Is also referred to as one union state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state will be described.

  FIGS. 64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) ), FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

  64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850, which is displaced by the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840, is performed. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in the rear view and the front view, and illustrates a state in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A). .

  64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A) is illustrated by an angle θ31.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual united state in a front view (see FIG. 66) (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”). Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is allowed, the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is allowed. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

  Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

  From the configuration between the above-described members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projection 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear member 833.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting unit 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the member 834 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and is simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with displacement in the radial direction.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes the circumferential displacement, even in the radial end position, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed, Since the displacement can be maintained, the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the direct translational displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

  On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration using the elastic recovery force of the beveled tooth portion 783c and the beveled tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58) is generated. This is intended to reduce the impression that the disposition of the covering member 787 at the end of the displacement in the translational direction (see FIG. 59B) is fixed.

  That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and the change width of the left and right positions is small at the end of the laterally outward displacement ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the effect of the operation of the covering member 787 is maintained at a high level by increasing the rotation speed of the covering member 787.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes a radial displacement, a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 is shifted. In the embodiment, since the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72-degree intervals) about the rotation axis, the loads cancel each other. Accordingly, the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 can be suppressed, and the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

  As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while rotating in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with the surrounding decoration member, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the posture of the elevating arm member 801 is determined when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

  In addition, with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmitting unit 854, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotation member 834 also similarly have a radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830. Displaced and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

  When the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced, the beveled tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the beveled tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member are rotated. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832.

  The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with reference to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the rotation direction is increased so that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), Are set in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

  Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotating state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in the present embodiment, 180 ° When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as a result of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the beveled tooth portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a turn (180 degrees rotation). ).

  That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is twice as large as the angle of rotation about the supported hole 854a of the beveled tooth portion 854c.

  Here, unlike what was described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) indicates the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. It does not cause an effect of delaying rotation.

  That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between the adjacent second decoration member 880 and the decoration member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850. Accordingly, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, so that the attraction force may be lost.

  Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 is started, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation is performed with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. There is no delay effect.

  Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decoration members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement centered on the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

  The quickness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be not constant.

  For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state where the diameter of the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced and the integrated rotation operation is possible is 45 degrees. , The angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66 (b)), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated at an angle of 45 degrees is 27 degrees (FIG. 67 (a)). reference).

  That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotation member 830 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible, as compared with halfway through the rotation. Thus, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the time of starting rotation of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed.

  The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotation member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required to rotate the decoration members 870 and 880 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts from a possible state can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts is excessively increased. It can be prevented from becoming large.

  In addition, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be suppressed low. it can. Thereby, the possibility that the side surfaces of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) can be reduced, and the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in the design of the side surface portion can be improved.

  At the time of the switching rotation operation, the arrangement of the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement also overlaps with the extension arm 842 provided adjacent to the extension arm 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the cylinder is supported is disposed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 collides with a peripheral part without taking measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. In other words, the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are disposed rearward of the proximal rod 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, so that the proximal rod 851 and the distal rod 851 are disposed on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap in front and back, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

  In addition, the base rod 851 is disposed on the front side of the extending arm 842, and the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting section 854 are disposed on the rear of the extending arm 842, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, so that collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individual united state; see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates the resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that the gear teeth 843 receive the resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 is the above-described reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view in the individual united state), or in a direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise in front view in the individual united state). When rotation in the same direction is continued even after the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the state where the rotation is restricted by the rotation in the (circumferential direction) (for example, from the individual union state to the one union state), the outside The load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the maintenance of the attitude of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released. And rotate synchronously.

  In other words, regardless of the rotation direction, in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated, when the inner rotation member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the regulation of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. The inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decoration member 870, and the second decoration member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the united state (this rotation operation is hereinafter referred to as " Integrated rotation operation ").

  The integral rotation operation occurs in a state in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation occurs in a united state in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are arranged close to each other.

  Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are displaced in the radial direction, it is not necessary to consider the collision with the surrounding decoration members. In the state, the integral rotation operation can be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60), the switching rotation operation involving the radial displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without any radial displacement, and any of the operations can be performed in both driving directions. Therefore, it is not always possible to execute an arbitrary operation in an arbitrary rotation direction.

  For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64A and FIG. 66A, the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 counterclockwise in front view, and if the rotation is continued as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. The rotation operation can be performed, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in front view. However, the integral rotation operation is immediately performed by counterclockwise rotation in front view. Can not be performed.

  Also, for example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, and after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where the rotation is regulated. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and immediately, the integrated rotation operation is performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

  As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 according to the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines, for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted. It is possible to control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

  At the time of the reversal effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and at the time of the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

  For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state, and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control is performed so as to execute the control in the normal effect. Accordingly, even when the state of the movable part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 and the surrounding decorative members accidentally collide. .

  The driving direction of the driving motor 861 is described as a forward rotation and a reverse rotation. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotation member 830 is rotated clockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66A)). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state).

  First, a description will be given of drive control during a normal effect before the time of the reverse effect. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

  Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is displaced up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are simultaneously rotated together with the up and down displacement. It is controlled so that an action can be caused.

  Of course, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be caused to rotate integrally with each other while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be integrally rotated. The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering arm member 801 may be performed in a state where the integral rotation operation is stopped.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and it is determined that this output is switched. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as an initial position, and by setting a plurality of types of driving times from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop at the posture of.

  Next, the drive control during the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled so as to continue to rotate forward until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the reverse rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  When the drive of the drive motor 861 is continued in the same rotation direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated. After the start of the integral rotation operation, the outer rotation member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotation member 830, so that the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the start of the integral rotation operation, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

  When switching from the reverse effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detection target 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven to rotate forward. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the forward rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  Next, the integrally rotating operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is performed. After the start of the integral rotation operation, when the outer rotation member 840 starts rotating, the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the unitary rotation operation is started, the process returns to the normal performance again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control described during the normal effect, which are arranged before the reverse effect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and determines the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can be shared with the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the driving direction of the driving motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, regardless of the attitude of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the one united state.

  Therefore, in the motion effect, when controlling to switch to the union state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the jackpot notification from the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

  Further, as described above, the decoration in the union state is designed so that the content recognized by the player does not largely differ depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotation direction. That is, even when the arrangement of the decoration members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents recognized by the player as one union state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

  Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one united state differ in the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one united state can be omitted, and thus the first decorative member in the individual united state Regardless of the position of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized by both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, it is possible to realize various effect modes with the single drive motor 861.

  FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end of the held member 810 where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is arranged to the front end where the electric decoration substrate 823 is arranged. The electric wiring is guided from the rear end to the front end through this opening, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electric wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

  The light LH <b> 1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823 a of the electric decoration substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824 a bulging to the front side at the center of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that can be visually recognized by a player at the center of a circle where the first decoration member 870 or the second decoration member 880 is arranged on the circumference when the decoration members 870 and 880 are united. I do.

  The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the electric decoration substrate 823 is irradiated inside decoration members 870, 880 (first decoration member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decoration members 870, 880 Works to illuminate from inside.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and a single united state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the case where the decoration member 870 is illuminated by the light LD1 and the case where the decoration member 880 is illuminated can be switched.

  In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 which has been plated. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated so as to be directed to the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 at the time of irradiation with the light LD1 can be favorably increased.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the illumination substrate 823 is fixedly disposed, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illumination substrate 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the decoration members 870 and 880 are controlled. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plating unit 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plating unit 871a. obtain. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is easily changed by the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to perform the effect of causing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illuminated substrate 823. It is designed such that its center is located near the center of the first covering portion 875 in a front view.

  Since the light LD1 is arranged so as to direct the optical axis in the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature is obtained. The first decorative member 870 illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

  Therefore, the plurality of light LDs 1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875 regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a with reference to the outer light emitting portion 823b. Accordingly, light can be stably radiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 is visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

  Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion where the plating process is performed in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and includes an outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. Prepare. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a. However, since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b Light intensity can be reduced.

  This avoids a situation in which the intensity of light visually recognized outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, and the player feels dazzling, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875 is reduced. be able to.

  Although the electric decoration board 823 is sandwiched between the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 from the front and rear, it is not completely closed at the joint, so that all of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b is inside. It is not what is irradiated.

  First, between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 disposed to face the member edge portion 875a, the internal structure is visible in FIG. The gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

  In addition, between the member outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 facing the metal bar 832 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, member interference with the metal bar 832 occurs. A large gap VA2 exceeding a region required to avoid the above is formed.

  First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal bar 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, so that the length of the metal bar 832 can be sufficiently secured. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

  The gap VA2 is, secondly, a fastening screw inserted into the skeleton portions 871 and 881, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are connected to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembling path of a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

  Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of securing a light passage for allowing light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, light traveling outward through the gap VA passes at equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visually perceived as light to be emitted.

  Therefore, by executing the integrally rotating operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be similarly rotated. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while the entire lighting is continued), and the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction. A light emission effect visually recognized in the rotating light emission mode can be executed.

  In the united state (see FIG. 32), since the entire second skeleton 881 is formed of a translucent resin material, the reflection of the light LD1 by the second skeleton 881 is suppressed.

  Accordingly, the light (weak light) away from the optical axis of the light LD1 can be irradiated into the frame of the second covering portion 885. Can be reduced. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

  In the frame of the second covering portion 885, a color (in this embodiment, set as an arbitrary color as the color of the circular body) is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed inside. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c to be provided is disposed in the circumferential direction. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decoration part 885c is refracted and acts so that the entire light diffusion decoration part 885c emits surface light.

  By this surface light emission, it is possible to equalize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decoration portion 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, and each light diffusion decoration portion of the five second decoration members 880 can be achieved. 885c can be made to be visually recognized by the player as one.

  Here, it is as described above that the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by the player. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance in the united state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

  The member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 of the first covering portion 875 that comes close to (contacts) the member outer end 875b is , Protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal bar 832 is provided.

  Thereby, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the player's view. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the effect on the performance can be reduced.

  Thus, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of view.

  In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state by itself in one union state (see FIG. 32), it is compared with the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are both in the extended state (FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and the line of sight when observing the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction is easy to pass. Therefore, without any countermeasures, the side effect of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, and the effect of the effect is easily reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in one union state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation in the oblique direction is performed. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as the second covering portion 885, and the degree of visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. Thereby, in the one union state, the second covering portion 885 can be more easily seen than the first covering portion 875, and the effect can be improved.

  In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 to rotate the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 operates as a torque limiter. Rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

  Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridge 831b, when the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases, and the torque limiter 866 is increased. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the allowable value of the load transmission, and it is easy to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

  Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotation member 830 can be suppressed. For this purpose, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 are only the front end that comes into contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. In other parts, a gap is provided. Thus, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, so that the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

  For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper for suppressing displacement to the front side with respect to the central annular gear 864 is considered necessary. The sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface thereof contacting the front and rear with the short-diameter annular portion 822 a of the circular plate portion 822. Touch

  The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A ridge 822b protruding from the side is formed in an annular shape.

  Since the protrusion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be. Thereby, the displacement resistance in the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fastening screw is not used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases is reduced accordingly. Can be.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the description of the fixing, FIGS. 62 and 63 are appropriately referred to.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 to a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875. After the first cover portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by being screwed into the first skeleton portion 871, the overhang portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed. This can be performed by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted to the outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 to a female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the frame rear portion of the second covering portion 885. After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by being screwed into the second skeleton portion 881, the overhang portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed. This can be performed by allowing the screw to enter the recessed groove 833d (to be slidably fitted to the outside) and screw the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 are associated with the linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to perform a linear displacement or a rotational displacement.

  In the fixing process, the overhanging portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) Is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton portions 871 and 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

  Since the skeleton portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and The member 834 can be prevented from dropping from the linear member 833.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear member 833, the skeletal portions 871 and 881 in which the portions defining the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear member 833 are fixed to the rotating member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the number of assembling and disassembling steps can be reduced.

  That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, by removing the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released only. In addition, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 can be released. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, a description will be given of the combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800. FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d) schematically show an example of a combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800 in a time series. FIG. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

  70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800. Are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by characters or the like.

  That is, the characters “normal” are written vertically on the first production surface 661a, the characters “execute” are written horizontally on the second production surface 661b, and the characters “triggered” are written on the third production surface 661c in the longitudinal direction. The symbols “!” Are shown along the respective lines.

  In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has a character of "start of war", the first sub decorative surface 787a2 has a character of "pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has an "attack". And the character "Patience !?" is shown on the second sub-decoration surface 787b2.

  Also, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and five integral “○” are provided in the second covering portion 885. Symbol is shown.

  In FIG. 70 (a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is arranged in an effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decoration surface 787a2 as a surface that cannot be seen in front view but is visible from the player's eyes is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 70B, the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state.

  By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be sequentially replaced. Also, during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after the stop, the first operation unit 600 is set to the intermediate effect state, so that the third effect surface 661c protrudes inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 Movement can be lively.

  For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so that the jackpot expectation of the lottery is increased, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who has visually recognized the operation of the first operation unit 600. it can.

  When the one-piece rotating operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. Can be visually recognized integrally.

  Thereby, the attention to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, it is possible to smoothly guide the player's line of sight to the third symbol display device 81.

  The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) disposed so as to be able to irradiate the first decorative member 870, an LED for irradiating the light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 to be noticed. By turning on the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to pay attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870.

  At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched in a state where the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched according to the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870. .

  When the lighting pattern of the LED is switched in accordance with the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870, the LEDs to be turned on are sequentially switched in the rotation direction, so that the light and the first decoration member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. You may make a player visually recognize it as it is. In addition, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 that is illuminated with light utilizes the fact that the first decoration members 870 sequentially reach the position where the light is illuminated from the LED by the integrally rotating operation. The member 870 may be switched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the second decorative rotation member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 both have decorations that are formed in a vertically long shape, and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, since the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similarly to the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, the effect of being integrally viewed is enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71A is reached, the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the course shown in FIG. Since the second decoration rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a decoration formed to be horizontally long, the sense of unity with the decoration fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operation unit 700 having the decoration similarly formed in the horizontally long shape is provided. Can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

  In FIG. 35, the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the covering member 787 and the second The vertical spacing between the second decorative rotating member 660 and the second decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, and the effect of being visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging at a visible position and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized as expanding to the right from the region right end RE1. Even if the arrangement of the two production surfaces 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent a cramped impression from being given to the player.

  In addition, as a result, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration surface The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  In this case, the decoration of the overhang decoration portion 652b is formed with the contents related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1). The effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhang decorative portion 652b can be integrally viewed can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70D illustrates the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700. When the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned on the left and right sides of the covering member 787 of the second operation unit 700. , The reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

  In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 whose right and left sides are different are directed to the front side, it has been described above that a state having no discriminating power can be achieved, as shown in FIG. 70 (d). Alternatively, different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

  According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the content “Pinch !?”, and in this state, stop driving the second operation unit 700 to pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be collected in the second operation unit 700.

  For example, when notifying that the lottery has been missed, control is performed so as to return from the state of FIG. 70 (d) to FIG. 70 (c), and the case where the lottery result has not yet been notified or that the lottery is a big hit is notified. In such a case, by performing control such that the inversion is continued from the state of FIG. 70 (d) and the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) is performed, the line of sight of the player can be collected in the second operation unit 700.

  In FIG. 71A, the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. Above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 as a surface which is not visible in a front view but can be visually recognized by a player's eyes is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decoration surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are horizontally written, so that the player can visually recognize them integrally. Easy to do. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of “attack activation”, it is even easier to visually recognize them integrally.

  In the effect standby state (see FIG. 70A), the first operation unit 600 has the first effect surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are written vertically. Because of this, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the whole. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize them.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each of the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is viewed integrally with the side surface of a different member (for example, the front surface of the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the decorative fixing member 670). Make up. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In FIG. 71 (b) to FIG. 71 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. The arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is different between the state illustrated in FIG. 71B and the state illustrated in FIG. 71C because the third operation unit 800 performs the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, regardless of the state in which the switching rotation operation is performed, the player can be visually recognized as the same union state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  That is, in a state where the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, the configuration is such that the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decoration member 870. Thereby, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the notification of the jackpot from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

  In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the game of winning or not winning a jackpot Person's expectation can be similarly maintained. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be kept high.

  As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized independently and a case where the decoration is integrally viewed in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed in each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only by each of the operation units 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration related to each other in each of the operation units 600 to 800.

  The drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is affected by the arrangement of the drive units. That is, if the driving of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is performed at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that the member operations will collide and cause a failure. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units. Is controlled as follows.

  For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhang state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state. You.

  The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed to the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrarily changed, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation is performed, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 This is executed when it is determined that the state is an intermediate effect state or an effect standby state.

  The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Is done.

  As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at an arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

  Next, details of the distribution device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In the description of the details of the distribution device 300, FIGS. 1 to 25 are appropriately referred to. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

  FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 300. In FIG. 72, a light-transmissive window 162d is formed in the front design member 162 as a difference from the contents shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 disposed on the front side of the distribution device 300 has a front plate formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a central side region of the front plate that is larger than a peripheral region. The window 162d is formed as a region having high light transmittance.

  In the present embodiment, a light-transmissive seal member SL1 having a central area cut out in accordance with the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front and rear thickness of the window portion 162d is smaller than the front and rear thickness of the area around which the sealing member SL1 is adhered, thereby giving a difference in the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window 162d can be increased.

  The first purpose of the window portion 162d is to improve the visibility of the distribution device 300 in consideration of the line of sight passing through the plate portion of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the distribution device 300. In particular, it is formed for the second purpose to eliminate complaints from the player that it is not possible to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300. That is, the window 162d is formed in a shape and a size in consideration of the shape of the distribution device 300.

  The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the peripheral range is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate is disposed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or a plurality of groove patterns are formed so as to perform the same function as the light guide plate, and the front design is provided for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or a pattern may be directly drawn on the front design member 162, or a range corresponding to the window 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

  The shape of the window 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width may be used, or a shape in which a portion extending right and left outward is omitted so that the left and right width is equivalent to the left and right width of a range extending upward ( (A pentagonal shape like a home base) or a shape along the edge of the front plate of the front design member 162.

  Further, the window 162d is formed as a single range, but is not limited thereto, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a high light-transmitting range may be formed by a combination of a plurality of portions partitioned by a lattice-like portion or a ladder-like portion, or a range may be defined in a manner in which a plurality of small windows are aligned, The range may be partitioned in such a manner that the windows are arranged randomly. Further, the shape of the window may be variably configured.

  Further, the surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape by graining, a large number of grooves and protrusions may be formed on the surface, or a smooth surface may be formed.

  The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but may be any mode that can ensure higher light transmittance than the surroundings (corresponding to the formation range of the seal member SL1). Various aspects other than the same shape as the surface shape of the member SL1 can be adopted.

  FIG. 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, a light-transmissive window 162 d is formed in the front design member 162.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape, and has a vertically short and long left and right long main window portion 162d1 and a sub-window formed above the left and right central portion of the main window portion 162d1. 162d2.

  In the present embodiment, the main window 162d1 and the sub window 162d2 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

  The main window portion 162d1 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is a shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second passage 335 and the third passage 336 are formed to have the same vertical width as that of the spherical passage, and the second passage 335 is inclined. The V-shape is inclined upward toward the left and right sides.

  Thereby, the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 can be accommodated inside the main window 162d1 in a front view, so that the second flow path component 335 and the third The visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming section 336 can be improved.

  The left and right ends of the main window 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path component 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right position as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path component 334 is not visible through the main window 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall 334a is particularly reduced.

  This improves the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a, as compared to a case in which the shape is required to be visually recognized by a player, such as a case in which a good-looking shape is required. can do.

  The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated with light from the light emitting unit 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the seal member 313.

  Thereby, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, the player can grasp the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow down state of the ball. Since it can be configured to be easy, a comfortable game can be provided to the player.

  FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII of FIG. 16. FIG. 75 is a cross-section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. FIG. In FIGS. 74 and 75, as a difference from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18, a light transmitting window 162 d is formed in the front design member 162.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a direction looking down (viewing with an angle), a part of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the front position is opened and closed. It is visible below 65b.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper projecting portion 376 is hidden behind the opening / closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 as long as the upper projecting portion 376 is visible. can do.

  The view toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines outward toward the left and right as it approaches the front side. Is secured.

  That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface for preventing a ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 from jumping up, while the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to form the upper projecting portion 376. To avoid unnecessarily obstructing the field of view.

  In addition, the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface makes up for the disadvantage that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as the above-described inclined surface, the projection area of the upper surface portion 314 can be increased when viewed downward (as viewed from an angle) as shown in FIG. Has the advantage that it is easy to improve the effect of the effect of visually recognizing light through the light diffusion processing surface 314c, but since the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 is large, the ball flowing under the upper surface 314 can be moved by the player. There is a disadvantage that the range to be hidden from view may be widened.

  In other words, when the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes forward, it works advantageously for the light effect, but may work disadvantageously for the visibility of the flowing ball. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined toward the left and right sides, the sphere enters the third flow path component 336 from the second flow path component 335. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at the location, and the visibility of a ball flowing below the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a direction looking down (viewing with an angle), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub window portion 162d2. This forces the player to adjust the position of the eyes and the line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen in order to visually check the state of the member 313, which may hinder a comfortable game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting unit 351 for directing light to the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and passes through the sub-window 162d2, the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351. Part of the light reaches the sub window 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. Therefore, whether or not the light emitting unit 351 on the straight line LL1 is turned on can be grasped by looking at the sub-window 162d2.

  Since the light diffusion processing is not performed on the seal member 313, the action of stopping the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window 162d2. Thus, when the light emitting unit 351 is turned on, the red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window 162d2, so that the sub-window 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

  Thereby, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub window portion 162d2 before the light reaches can be easily understood, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is turned on. Note that light diffusion processing may be provided on the seal member 313 (or a wall portion where the seal member 313 is provided). In this case, it is possible to easily make the seal member 313 emit light uniformly.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap with a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range where the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 can be arranged.

  In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a rides.

  Further, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the flow of the sphere is inhibited by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so that the flow-down range of the sphere is limited to the front design member. It is shifted to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141. Therefore, the ball flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

  Therefore, on the straight line LL1, a ball flowing on the front side (for example, the game area) of the base plate 60, a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path component 336) The arrangement of the sphere flowing down) can prevent light from being reflected and refracted by the sphere. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the ball flows down.

  In addition, the arrangement of the seal member 313 in the present embodiment may be beneficial to the player because it is possible to continue the state in which the seal member 313 is difficult to visually recognize unless the player changes his / her eyes.

  For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always in the field of view, the light enters the eyes of the player every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, so that some players feel dazzling. By arranging it difficult, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting unit 351 reaches the sub window 162d2 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light diffusion process may be formed on the fixed member 161 in a range intersecting with the straight line LL1, so that light may hardly reach the sub-window 162d2.

  In this case, unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the seal member 313 can be directly seen, it is difficult to determine whether the light emitting unit 351 is turned on toward the seal member 313. Can be. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a game preference, the goal can be achieved if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained. Therefore, the game burden on such a player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the sub window 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion may be provided inside so that light can be easily diffused.

  In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visually recognized through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub window 162d2 is illuminated.

  The light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 that directs light to the seal member 313, that is, the light emitted from the LED arranged on the straight line LL1, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting unit 351 has been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, light emitted from a plurality of LEDs arranged at four places on the left and right at the lowest stage will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, the lower member 380, and the detection sensor SE1 along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inside at the lowest level are referred to as inside light emitting means 351 c, and the LEDs arranged on the left and right outside at the lowest level are referred to as outside light emitting means 351 d. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processing surface 332e formed in the left and right range is illuminated.

  This light emission production is performed at a branching point BP1 where the flow of the sphere is branched by the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336). Run on the back side).

  Therefore, when the sphere flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on, the place where the sphere flowing on the front side of the light diffusion processing surface 332e that emits light in a range extending right and left is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

  The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 75). Although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, light near the optical axis can pass therethrough. The protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are viewed in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction. It is curved.

  Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front and rear long projecting portions 317 and the left and right inner projecting portions 318, so that the light travels obliquely downward and forward. Light can reach the light diffusion processing surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

  Since the light diffusion processing surface 340 is formed in the entire lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the light is made to reach the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that the third flow path configuration 336 is formed. The visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between a sphere flowing down inside the third flow path component 336 and an out sphere flowing down the lower side of the third flow path configuration part 336 through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75). can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is outside (upper side) of the light diffusion processing surface 332e and inside of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b. Be placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting unit 351d, a light emission effect in which the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated is executed.

  This light emission production is performed at a branching point BP1 where the flow of the sphere is branched by the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336). ) Is performed on the upper side and the front side.

  Therefore, when a sphere flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b emit light on the upper side and the near side of the sphere, and flow through the branch point BP1. Since the ball is hidden by the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it is difficult for the player to grasp how the ball has flowed through the branch point BP1.

  In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed vertically, and the light diffusion processing surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-rear direction, the light diffusion processing surface 314c also has an angle of view (see FIG. 74) that looks into the light diffusion processing surface 333b from above. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1.

  Further, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed vertically, and a light diffusion processing surface 340 is provided below the light diffusion processing surface 333b. It is formed up to the side back surface (see FIG. 14). Therefore, separately from the function of making the branch point BP1 difficult to visually recognize in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 emits light, and when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, Generates a shadow by blocking light (light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340), so that the player can easily recognize that the ball is flowing down.

  Here, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is provided in front of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processing surface 333b, a situation in which light may be hidden by a sphere may occur. In the present embodiment, however, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) ) Are arranged outside (upper side) of the range in which the ball flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that the situation where light is blocked by the ball disposed at the branch point BP1 can be avoided.

  Therefore, regardless of the manner in which the spheres flow in the distribution device 300, the light emitting surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by causing the outer light emitting means 351d to emit light. When the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (see FIG. 17) disposed in front of the light diffusion processing surface 333 blocks the light, so that a shadow is generated. It becomes easy to grasp the flow-down state of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming section 335.

  In the present embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which light is blocked by a sphere disposed at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing the flow of the sphere is employed. The configuration will be described.

  The sphere that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position (see FIG. 20), flows directly below and passes through the certainty detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 is moved downward. In the state where it is arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), it flows down right and left outward along the inclination of the ball guide 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the downward flow of the ball in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the through-hole edges 382a of the plate-like portion 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 are located on the left and right outer sides of the positive change detection sensor SE11. It is arranged so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface inclined downward and outward toward the left and right sides. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow outward in the left-right direction.

  Thereby, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the sphere that has started flowing down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide 371b flows back and inwards in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through-hole edge 382a. And the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

  The light diffusion processing surface 319a is provided inside the front-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processing surface 319a cannot occur, so that light is hidden by the sphere regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processing surface 319a. It is unlikely to occur.

  In this way, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged simply shifted left and right, but also light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and rear positions on the front side. The light emitting units 351c and 351d are designed by intentionally providing a difference in arrangement with the optical axis, and the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b to which the light from the light emitting units 351c and 351d reach are made different. The position before and after the light reaches, diffuses, and is visually recognized can be different.

  In the above description, the case where the inner light-emitting unit 351c emits light and the case where the outer light-emitting unit 351d emits light are described separately, and it is described that the opposite light-emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off. The actual light emission control of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to one side, but may be a control mode such as both lighting and both extinguishing. Hereinafter, the light emission control pattern and the appearance of the internal flow path of the distribution device 300 at that time will be described.

  77 (a) to 77 (d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the distribution device 300. In FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (d), streaks as shape lines of the light diffusion processing surface are omitted for easy understanding, and light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned on and off, respectively. The case where the combination is different is illustrated, and the range where the light from the light emitting units 351c and 351d shines brightly is illustrated in a hatched pattern.

  That is, FIG. 77 (a) illustrates a state where both the light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off, and FIG. 77 (b) illustrates that the inner light emitting unit 351c is turned on and the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned off. An inner lighting state is illustrated, and in FIG. 77 (c), an outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting unit 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned on is illustrated. In FIG. 77 (d), the light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off. The both lighting states in which both are lit are illustrated.

  In the both-lights-off state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), each of the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b is not illuminated, and the visibility on the back side is secured, but the impression without sharpness is played. Give to the person. In particular, it is difficult to distinguish between a sphere flowing on the upper side of the third flow path component 336 and an out sphere flowing on the far side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

  In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the light diffusion processing surface 340 below the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, so that the sphere flowing above the third flow path component 336 is illuminated. The visibility is maintained high, and the visibility of the out sphere flowing down on the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336 is reduced.

  Further, since the light diffusion processing surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the sphere at the branch point BP1 can be improved. In addition, since the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processing surface 332e are maintained in a state where they are not illuminated, the situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light can be avoided.

  That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming part 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 through the front frame-shaped part 333 passes. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the manner in which the ball flows in the BP1. In addition, since a light is illuminated at a place to be noticed in grasping the flow-down state of the ball, it is possible to reduce a possibility that the player misses the noticed point, and to reduce a game stress of the player. it can.

  The light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed on the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 13), and it is difficult to see behind the front frame portion 333 from the player's point of view. It is configured to be.

  In the case of viewing the back through the front frame-shaped portion 333, when viewed in the front-rear direction, the user can see the back through the two inner surfaces of the front frame-shaped portion 333 that are opposed to each other. Since there are many boards that need to be seen through, it is more difficult to see the back side.

  The same applies to the case where the front frame-shaped portion 333 is seen through the back side with a line of sight inclined from the left and right inside to the diagonally left and right outside direction (a line of sight inclined toward the normal detection sensor SE12 from the front left and right center position). The same goes for players who do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, where the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular cylindrical shape, the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner surfaces (partition plate) The part 338 and the side surface opposed to the part 338 are disposed. For this reason, it is more difficult to visually check the back side because there are many boards that need to be seen through.

  As described above, according to the front frame portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only in the front-back direction but also in the oblique direction.

  In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), since the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, the sphere flowing to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light, so that the falling ball Visibility becomes low.

  On the other hand, since the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed on the inner side (lower side) of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 is improved. Can be. In other words, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is improved to improve the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

  In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b are illuminated in a wide range. The situation illuminated by light is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, which can produce both effects, but not only complement each other with advantageous effects.

  For example, since the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inside lighting state.

  Various modes are exemplified as the control mode for turning on and off the light emitting units 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game in which a ball may enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), the inside lighting state is configured so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in other round games, control may be performed so as to make the entire area brighter by configuring the outside lighting state or both lighting states.

  Further, for example, the control may be performed in such a manner as to alternately switch between the both-lit state and the both-lit state regardless of the type of the round game.

  The timing at which the light-emitting units 351c and 351d are turned on is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to be turned on after the reach erecting during the symbol change, or it is detected that a ball has entered the winning opening 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled so that 351c and 351d are turned on.

  Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the ball in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b disposed on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides.

  Therefore, regardless of whether the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the sphere that has deviated to the left and right outside of the opening / closing plate 65b and rides on the upper side surface of the extending portion 162b is moved to the left / right outside (opening / closing plate). 65b), it is possible to prevent the ball riding on the extending portion 162b from flowing down the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Therefore, the flow-down state of most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be set to the flow-down mode in which the inner rail 61 is rolled, so that a situation in which the ball jumps up (bounces high) near the out port 71 can occur. Can be avoided. Thereby, the main window part 162d1 and the third flow path component part 336 arranged behind the main window part 162d1 are hidden by the jumped sphere, and the visibility can be prevented from being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the open / close plate 65b in the open / closed state is formed in a flat shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming part 335 is inclined downward toward the left / right center (partition plate part 338 side).

  Therefore, the vertical distance between the opening / closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 increases as the position approaches the left and right center side, so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 The sphere flowing toward the third flow path component 336 can be easily distinguished.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the opening / closing plate 65b is shaped so that the ball riding on the upper surface flows into the specific winning opening 65a without leaking. However, various shape measures are taken so that the flow of the ball is not delayed. Have been.

  For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with a ball flowing backward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the left and right inside. . The guide plate portion 163a2 is not formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction, but is formed in a plate shape extending downward and inward in the right and left direction in accordance with the vertical position displacement of the ball flowing from the opening / closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

  That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is disposed rearward toward the left and right inner sides, and is closer to the opening / closing plate 65b than near the left and right outer end portions where the ball riding on the opening / closing plate 65b abuts. The left and right inner portions where the ball delivered to the receiving member 163 having a lower floor surface abuts extend in the direction inclining so that the position is on the lower side.

  This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position (the contact height in the entire length of the ball) of the ball contacting the guide plate portion 163a2, and to smoothly guide the ball. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship with the opening / closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can be brought into contact with the ball at the center height position in the entire length of the ball. You.

  For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end portion of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b (the rotation base end side portion) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed halfway. That is, at the left and right center positions where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening / closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface portion 163a is inclined downward toward the left and right sides, and It is configured such that it is turned upside down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the direction.

  In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of switching the flow-down state of the sphere between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and includes the left and right inner side surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (partition plate portion 338). 74 is designed as a position on the same plane as that of the side surface opposed to (the position directly above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

  In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening / closing plate 65b may occur with low resistance.

  For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b collides with the receiving member 163 (the inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, after the ball bounce has settled and started rolling, It is possible to suppress the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening / closing plate 65b.

  Note that the ball rolling from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to contact the lower surface portion 163a, the ball moves left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. Will be washed away.

  Note that the ball is not likely to fall to the vicinity of the central position of the opening / closing plate 65b in the left and right direction because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) restricts the ball from falling. I can say. However, ball bouncing may occur due to collision between balls.

  In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the left and right outer side (the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged) than the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the receiving member 163 is moved from the vertical position of the ball rolling surface. While rolling of the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b is suppressed, rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with low resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a has a forward speed due to a collision with another ball, vibration of a game machine, or the like, the ball is prevented from flowing back to the opening / closing plate 65b. be able to.

  To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, so that the ball flows backward near the ball passage hole 163b. By avoiding the sphere, the flow of the sphere is made smooth to avoid the situation where the sphere stays.

  In addition, the rearward rolling of the sphere from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball is switched to the left-right flow after the rearward flow is completed, but the pair of switching positions EP1. And a rolling mode along an oblique linear direction connecting the range between the circle and the ball passage hole 163b.

  In other words, the flow is not a flow that intersects at right angles as in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, but is a flow along the hypotenuse connecting the other ends of the front-rear straight line and the left-right straight line, one end of which is located at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (in a right-angled triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is equivalent to being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides).

  Furthermore, compared to the case where the ball easily flows backward across the left and right positions of the opening / closing plate 65b, as in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the ball easily flows forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1. Thus, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, a situation in which the flow of the balls stagnates can be easily avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in a range on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16). And an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate-like shape that is inclined upward so as to leave a space.

  The upper surface portion 163f is a device for lowering the possibility of the ball clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by increasing the position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

  This prevents the ball from being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and prevents the ball from being caught between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening / closing plate 65b is closed and displaced while the ball is riding. Can be avoided.

  The direction in which the symmetric protruding portion 161f extends left and right is a direction along the inclination angle of the second flow path forming section 335 (a direction inclined at 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and the second flow path forming section 335 is rolled. The ball is disposed at a position (5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming part 335) in contact with the ball at the center height position in the entire length of the ball.

  Thus, when the thickness of the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sphere contacts the symmetrically protruding portion 161f at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. Thus, the rolling of the ball can be performed more smoothly than when the load in the direction of lifting the ball or the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is generated on the ball from the symmetrically projecting portion 161f.

  If the visibility of the branch point BP1 is allowed to decrease, the thickness of the symmetrically projecting portion 161f is formed to be approximately the entire length of the sphere, so that the symmetrical protrusion 161f is symmetrical at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. The situation where the protruding portion 161f contacts the ball can be avoided.

  Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described in detail again. FIG. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In FIG. 78, for easy understanding, the middle member 330 is transparently viewed with imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 provided below the middle member 330 is seen through.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slid in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 that is also opposed to the front position (see FIG. 78). Gaps are maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a dimension short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  This avoids the situation where the front end of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the positive change detection sensor SE11. can do.

  Further, the front end of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed so as to be inclined such that the arrangement is shifted rearward toward the left and right outer sides. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being trapped and staying between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

  That is, even when a sphere is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so Since the generated load has a directional component directed to the left and right sides, the ball can be pushed to the left and right sides. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the benefit of the player can be changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 requires reproducibility (stability) and smoothness.

  FIG. 79A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78. FIG. 79B is a sectional view taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. In the description of FIG. 79, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protruding portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface which is located on the lower side toward the left and right sides, and the sphere flows along this inclination. obtain. In the present embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the ball rolling on the inclined surface, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 that changes the inclination of the inclined surface is suppressed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is supported not only on both left and right end portions but also on the lower protrusion 373 by the plate-shaped portion 382 of the lower member 380. Thereby, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the recessed portion 372 can be supported under both sides (supported by both ends), so that a change in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. it can.

  In other words, even if the load applied from the ball to the pair of left and right ball guides 371b is different (even if the balls ride with an unbalanced number), each ball guide 371b is supported by the left and right ends. Therefore, the inclination of the ball guide 371b and the slide displacement member 370 to the left and right (displacement in the rotation direction about an axis extending in the front-rear direction) can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the partition 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recess 372, upward displacement is restricted. That is, the lifting operation of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in an appropriate state, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be suppressed, and malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

  The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion that is formed so as to protrude forward on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and is inclined so that the upper surface on which the ball can roll is lowered toward the left and right sides. Formed as a surface.

  The contact between the ball guide 371b and the ridge 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in the present embodiment, a pair of hemispherical protruding portions 372a is protruded from the recessed portion 372 to the protruding portion 383 side, and when the space is filled, the hemispherical protruding portion 372a and the protruding portion are formed. 383 is configured to make point contact.

  Here, as described above, since the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in the left-right direction, the load applied to the ball guide 371b by the weight of the ball is vertical. The slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the left-right direction (the direction intersecting the front-rear direction which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370) due to the left-right component.

  At this time, it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge 383 because the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b is easily stabilized, while contact friction is easily generated. , May cause functional problems.

  For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction while the ball rides on the ball guide 371b, a situation occurs in which the displacement in the front-rear direction becomes poor (for example, no displacement occurs) if the contact friction becomes excessively large. there's a possibility that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact between the hemispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 is a point contact, the area where the frictional force is generated can be reduced, and the contact friction can be reduced. Can be kept small. Accordingly, even when the ball is on the ball guide 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be favorably displaced in the front-rear direction.

  In particular, the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b is such that the ball can enter the certainty detection sensor SE11 from the state where the ball cannot enter the certainty detection sensor SE11. Since this is a displacement operation for switching the state to a proper state, by performing this displacement operation satisfactorily, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, by setting the displacement speed of the displacement operation to be high, an action of changing the rotation of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be generated.

  FIGS. 80A and 80B are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide 371b. FIG. 80 (a) illustrates a state where a ball is riding on the slide displacement member 370 at the front position, and FIG. 80 (b) illustrates a state where the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear position. In FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), an example of the rotation direction of the sphere is shown by an arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation direction of the ball that has rolled rearward and reached the slide displacement member 370 is the forward rotation direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 Acts so that the rotation direction (guiding direction) of the ball is reversed (backward rotation direction).

  Accordingly, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped directly below. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball reaching the branch point BP1 to the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front and rear long projecting portions 317 are not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the ball can be moved regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 disposed on the upstream side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. It is configured as an appropriately guided shape.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position, the ball that has contacted the front and rear long projecting portion 317 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve of the end of the long front and rear protruding portion 317 has a substantially circular arc shape whose front and rear width is longer than the vertical width (see FIG. 18), The downward component gives a larger load than the directional component. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation where the ball abutting on the front-rear long projecting portion 317 rebounds in the front-rear direction and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the flowing direction of the ball is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In the present embodiment, since the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves left and right outward, the ball is guided left and right outward along this curve.

  Here, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is located at the front side position, when a ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with a momentum, the load at the time of the collision pushes the slide displacement member 370 backward. It is possible that the state may be switched to a state where the ball can pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected to be lower by contacting the front and rear long protrusion 317 before the ball collides with the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Therefore, since the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

  In addition, since the load applied from the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 backward is reduced, the urging force (the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 at the front position is provided. The urging force of the return spring) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force for driving the plunger against the urging force can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

  Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in a state where the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the ball.

  The left and right inner protruding portions 318 abut against the ball at a position forward of the front side displacement end position of the upper protruding portion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed right and left outward and downward. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front and rear long projecting portions 317. Accordingly, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so that the arrangement is stabilized by the inertia due to its own weight, and a state in which the ball does not easily flow backward under the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 can be achieved.

  Further, the contact between the ball and the upper protruding portion 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position at which the ball contacts the front-rear long protruding portion 317. (See FIG. 80 (a)), the portion in contact with the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, which is disposed at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced to the near side by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protruding portion 376, considerable energy is required to ride on the lower bottom surface 336a from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. , The degree of backflow of the sphere can be reduced.

  Further, the upper protruding portion 376 has a front end portion on the partition plate portion 338 side formed in an acute angle shape, and does not have a collision mode in which the plane collides with the ball in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper protruding portion 376 is large in the left-right direction and small in the front-rear direction.

  As a result, the ball abutting on the upper projecting portion 376 can flow smoothly in the left and right outer directions, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in a state where the ball is disposed at the branch point BP1. When the control mode is such that the ball is caught between the upper protruding portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a malfunction occurs.

  Returning to FIG. 78, FIG. 79 (b) and FIG. 79 (c), the description will be continued. Because the slide displacement member 370 is configured to project toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward falling direction by the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide 371b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper protruding portion 376, that is, the portion where the upper and lower protruding ridge portions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides, is set to The lower frame portion 332 is configured to be sufficiently secured and to be able to contact the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 over the front and rear width. Accordingly, the tilt displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction can be prevented.

  In addition, since the upper and lower ridges 374 are formed long in the front and rear direction, when a load for tilting and displacing the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction is applied, a load applied to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is one point. You can avoid concentrating on Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be increased).

  In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at a front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter, also referred to as projecting portion 378a) on which the recessed portion 378 is formed. It comes into contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

  In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position at which the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, a light diffusion processing surface is not formed on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, and a surface that is disposed opposite to the protruding portion 378a so as to be in contact with each other is formed as a flat surface. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

  Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the front side flesh of the protruding portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate part 338 through.

  As described above, since the position where the driving force is transmitted is the left and right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the drive force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a posture shift in the rotation direction about the vertical axis in the slide displacement member 370 at the time of longitudinal displacement.

  Further, since the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotation direction about the vertical axis. .

  Here, when maintaining the posture and returning the posture of the slide displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protruding portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protruding portion 372a. Is small, the load is locally applied, and the durability of the hemispherical protrusion 372a may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even when the sliding force occurs, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be eliminated in the process of transmitting the driving force while the front surface of the protruding portion 378a is in surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338. Can be corrected to posture.

  The partition plate portion 338 against the protruding portion 378a functions not only for the purpose of positioning the slide displacement member 370 by abutting at the time of longitudinal displacement, but also for receiving a load in the forward tilt direction applied to the slide displacement member 370. Having.

  That is, in the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when the load on the slide displacement member 370 changes its posture in the forward tilt direction due to its own weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide is performed. When the protruding portion 378a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the gap allowed by the displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

  In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protruding portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the displacement of the protruding portion 378a is suppressed. can do.

  Next, portions of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 that have not been described in detail will be described again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

  FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81 (c) is the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81 (a). It is a side view of the rotation member 620 in a visual view.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIGS. 82 and 83 show a state in which the dish-shaped lid C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c), the rotating member 620 is designed to be asymmetrical in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing the operation. Hereinafter, the details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described.

  The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622.

  The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and has a surface formed on a base-side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that can be abutted (the shape is designed in relation to the base-side protruding portion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base-side protruding portion 617a, thereby defining the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ).

  The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and comes into contact with a front-side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the tip-side protruding portion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the distal-side protruding portion 617b, so that the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced is defined (for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range, see FIG. 40). .

  The third side surface 621 c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front lid member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, so that the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced is defined (for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range, see FIG. 40).

  As described above, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abut on the corresponding front lid member 612, and the displacement is regulated. In particular, a plurality of contact locations are formed at the end of the displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620.

  The purpose of forming a plurality of contact portions in this way is to distribute the load in the turning direction received at the time of contact at the plurality of positions, and to disperse the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at the plurality of positions. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

  The load in the front-rear direction that can be generated on the rotating member 620 includes, for example, a load in the forward falling direction due to receiving the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660 and a twist due to inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped. Load in the direction of rotation (load in the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620).

  In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum, by considering the moment of force, the farther the contact position receiving the load is from the cylindrical portion 622, the more the load becomes. The load generated at the contact position is reduced. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

  The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 is a range including the concave portion 621d formed in a direction to be retracted from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and the concave portion 621d. And a thickened portion 621e formed as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622 so as to include a region in contact with the base-side protruding portion 617a.

  Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the concave portion 621d, it is possible that breakage due to an impact load may occur without any countermeasure. Is formed, the influence of the concave portion 621d on the strength surface can be offset. Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the breakage of the rotating member 620.

  Further, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion that can come into contact with the base-side protruding portion 617a, an impact load that can be generated between the rotating member 620 and the base-side protruding portion 617a. , The durability of the rotating member 620 can be improved.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIGS. 84 and 85 show a state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

  The extension 634b is formed to have a width (circumferential length) that is at least three times as long as the width of the detection sensor KS1 in rear view. Here, forming the extension 634b to have a sufficiently large width has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of detection.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed in front of the supported member 640. However, where a load in the forward falling direction can be applied to the rotating member 620, without any countermeasure, the rotating member 620 may be bent and deformed in the front-rear direction, resulting in malfunction.

  On the other hand, by forming the extended portion 634b facing the back surface of the fixed member 610 in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620 as in the present embodiment, The load applied from the extending portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the portion 634a in the forward falling direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d. Can be secured). Thus, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forwardly displaced displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while preventing the extension portion 634b from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, a structurally advantageous effect can be obtained by securing a long width of the extension 634b, while the end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Even if the control mode is such that the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the state (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 is moved to the end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia. The structure is devised to reach.

  For example, first, the inertial force of each member is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force due to the rotational displacement in which the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are rotated clockwise around the axis O1 in rear view. This occurs in a direction in which the rotating member 620 is displaced to the end position on the initial position side (a direction in which the rotating member 620 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view).

  For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (this embodiment) which is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a constituting the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644. Here, the same as the center of the overhanging decorative portion 652b) is disposed at a position left and right away from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a.

  Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 occurs in the direction in which the gear teeth 654a rotate. In the present embodiment, the gear teeth 654a receive a load in a direction in which the gear teeth 654a rotate counterclockwise in rear view due to the weight of the front rotation member 652.

  The load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth 625 in the direction of rotating counterclockwise in rear view. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction for displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side.

  As described above, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load for rotating the rotating member 620 even after the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off. Configured to occur.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, when the extending portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, and the turning member 620 has not reached the displacement end position, the drive motor 631 is energized. Even when the cutting is controlled, the turning displacement of the turning member 620 is continued by the above-mentioned load, and the turning member 620 can reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

  FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88 show the extended portion of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the transmission gear cam 634. It is a rear view of 634b.

  In FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88, the rotation operation of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is time-series. Is illustrated in FIG.

  86A corresponds to the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86B corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87A corresponds to the first operation unit. FIG. 87 (b) corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

  The arrangement of the electric wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 will be described. An electric wiring 618d whose end is fixed to a connector 618c provided on a substrate accommodated in the rectangular box portion 618 is provided so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

  The electric wiring 618d is disposed so as to bypass the lower side of the partition 619 formed protruding from the front lid member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and to enter the opening C2a. The electric wiring 618b has a length in consideration of the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to be bent by its own weight.

  The partitioning portion 619 includes a columnar portion 619a formed at both upper and lower ends, and a plate-like portion 619b protruding in a long plate shape so as to connect between the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619a and the plate upper portion 619b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611.

  A female screw is formed inside the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening formed in the base member 611 in a position corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. The member 612 is fastened and fixed. That is, the partition portion 619 can not only function to limit the arrangement position of the electric wiring 618d but also function to secure the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front lid member 612.

  Next, focusing on the movement of the opening C2a, a device for the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d will be described. First, description will be given focusing on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 started from FIG. 86 (a). The dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced downward in the time series of FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b), and 88.

  In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the state where the width direction end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86 (b)), the dish-shaped lid is used. While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change much, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

  Thereby, before the dish-shaped lid part C2 starts full-scale downward displacement, the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved in a direction away from the partition part 619, and the dish-shaped lid part C2 can be displaced downward. In this process, the electric wiring 618d can be prevented from being caught between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619.

  In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partitioning portion 619 come closest to each other (see FIG. 87B), the opening C2a faces the side (downward) where the electric wiring 618d is retracted from the partitioning portion 619. ing.

  This can avoid a situation where the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the partition 619 and the electric wiring 618d is disconnected even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be disposed close to the partition 619. And the like can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, so that the electric wiring 618d is intentionally loosened downward. Thereby, while the length of the electric wiring 618d itself is secured, unnecessary loosening of the electric wiring at the displacement end position (for example, fluttering due to loosening in the front-back direction) can be avoided.

  Further, the length of the electric wiring 618d is designed to be a length that does not abut on the extension 634b during the operation of the first operation unit 600. Thus, even if a partition is not provided between the extending portion 634b and the electric wiring 618d, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d contacts the extending portion 634b and receives a load.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension portion 634b is disposed away from the connector 618c (the connector 618c is based on the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634). Is arranged on the opposite side), it is possible to secure a large range in which the electric wiring 618d is arranged while avoiding contact with the extending portion 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electric wiring 618d. be able to.

  Next, description will be made focusing on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 started from FIG. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87 (b), 87 (a), 86 (b), and 86 (a).

  In the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition part 619 side from the displacement lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid part C2 comes closest to the partition part 619, and the lower side. Is facing. Thereby, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while ensuring that the electric wiring 618d is loosened downward.

  The direction of the opening C2a is such that even after the dish-shaped lid C2 has passed through the lower end of the partition 619, the opening C2a faces downward while rotating gradually (the electric wiring 618d in the vicinity of the opening C2a is closed by the partition 619). The state of being arranged along the longitudinal direction is maintained (see FIG. 87 (a)).

  Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a posture facing the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), and the electric wiring 618d is formed. It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition part 619 and the dish-shaped lid part C2.

  Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid part C2 and the partition part 619 to cause a disconnection, and the electric wiring 618d is caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, the arrangement of the openings C2a is changed in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2 to limit the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and the dish-shaped lid C2 and the dish 619 Since the electric wiring 618d is prevented from being disposed between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partitioning part 619 when the distance between them becomes narrow, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed.

  Therefore, compared to the case where the electric wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed to be arranged closer to each other, so that the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed. Degree of freedom can be improved.

  Further, the restriction on the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d is realized not by using a separate member such as a binding band but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, and is also used to restrict the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d.

  This eliminates the need for a dedicated member for bundling the electric wiring 618d such as a binding band. Further, unlike the binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electric wiring 618d can be arranged on an appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, so that the electric wiring 618d is stretched or bent. Can be easily avoided.

  In the present embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening having a center angle of about 110. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of a shape adopted as a portion (connection terminal or the like) of the electric wiring 618d passing through the opening C2a.

  Next, an arrangement structure of the electric wiring 618d arranged on the front side with respect to the opening C2a will be described. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

  In FIG. 89, only parts necessary for explanation are shown, and illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are illustrated by solid lines, and the box is provided for easy understanding. The shape member 661 is shown by an imaginary line so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 89 illustrates an example of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid C2 having an opening C2a through which the electric wiring 618d is inserted. The electric wiring 618d is configured such that the wiring connected to the terminal of the electric decoration board 653 (see FIG. 41) and the wiring connected to the terminal of the electric decoration board 662 branch between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is formed in a long hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. And a pair of insertion holes 663b formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted on both sides of the insertion hole 663a.

  Since the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the rotation member 657 (see FIG. 39) perpendicular to the shaft is prevented from falling off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663.

  Fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

  As described above, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has a function of temporarily retaining the electric wiring 618d.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the inside of the wiring insertion long hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being sandwiched. In the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the second decorative rotation member 660 is a rotation operation in which a rotation operation of less than half a rotation (a rotation operation of about 135 degrees) is performed in a reciprocating direction instead of an operation of one or more rotations. Therefore, it is configured such that the second decorative rotating member 660 does not rotate a plurality of times and the electric wiring 618d is not twisted.

  The load (the load in the twisting direction) applied to the electric wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is considered to be large in the vicinity of the wiring insertion long hole 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, Since the wire insertion long hole 663a is formed in a long hole shape and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held between the wire insertion long holes 663a, the displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the long hole shape is allowed. ing.

  Therefore, even if an overload in the twisting direction occurs in the electric wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electric wiring 618d in the wiring insertion long hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved.

  The relationship between the twist direction of the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 includes Rotational twisting occurs. That is, with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, a twist in the counterclockwise direction in rear view occurs.

  The opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 is also displaced in the counterclockwise direction in rear view with the rotational displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the tilting direction, so that the load applied to the electric wiring 618d by the twist can be reduced. The durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved).

  The dish-shaped lid C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state where the slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid C2 is large to a state where the slack is small.

  Correspondingly, the rotation operation of the illuminated board 662 starts from a state in which the terminal of the electric wiring 618d on the illuminated board 662 side is disposed on the back side (the main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89). It is configured as an operation of changing the state to a state of being arranged on the front side (the wiring receiving member 655 side). Accordingly, the state can be changed such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

  That is, in the time series from FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 88, the electric wiring 618d is in a state where the electric wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 has a large slack (the state where the terminal on the electric decoration board 662 side is arranged on the back side). ) Changes to a state in which the slack is small (a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is arranged on the front side).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the slack is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. Thus, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

  The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be described. I do.

  In the time series operation shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, while the electric wiring 618d is not connected to the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. The electric wiring 618d of the portion disposed therebetween is twisted in the rotational direction of the electric decoration board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the electric decoration board 662 side)). That is, they are twisted in opposite directions.

  In the present embodiment, the first operation unit 600 is designed to minimize the torsion of the electric wiring 618d in the effect standby state, and to maximize the torsion of the electric wiring 618d in the extended state. I have.

  Thus, even if the electric wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a has a large slack, the electric wiring 618d is loosened in a state where a problem hardly occurs (effect standby state, see FIG. 86A). In a state in which it is preferable to reduce the slack of the electric wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88) while reducing the generated load, the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the power The twisting of the decorative board 662 due to the rotation operation can be maximized, and the slack of the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed (the displacement of the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed).

  As described above, as a means for improving the durability of the electric wiring 618d, a state in which the twist is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and the slack is reduced by the twist and the surrounding member (for example, the extension portion 634b) is electrically connected to the electric wiring 618d. It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

  As another embodiment, in the time series operation shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, the direction of rotation of the illuminated substrate 662 is reversed (when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (from the side of the illuminated substrate 662 to the insertion hole 663b). In the clockwise direction). In this case, the torsion direction of the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the torsion direction of the electric wiring 618d due to the rotation of the illuminated board 662 are in the same direction. Deformation can be offset.

  Next, features of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. FIGS. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b), and 92 show front views schematically showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

  In FIGS. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b) and 92, the outlines of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box 618 are schematically shown, so that it is easy to understand. In this state, in a state where the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652 are omitted, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated in a time series.

  In FIG. 90 (a), an arrangement corresponding to the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 40) is shown, and in FIG. 90 (b), the width direction end of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is formed. An arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 84) arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is shown. In FIG. 91 (a), an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 43) is shown. FIG. 91 (b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82). An arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 45) is shown.

  In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90 (a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in a top view. Thus, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be arranged outside the player's field of view (see FIG. 28). Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2), so that the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73. Visibility can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in a case where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged rightward enough to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in a top view, the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular It will collide with the shape box part 618 and cause a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is changed prior to the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b or with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b ( FIG. 90 (b) and FIG. 91 (a)). This change in posture occurs as a rotation operation in a direction to retreat from the rectangular box portion 618 (obliquely upper left direction when viewed from the front, a rotation direction around the axis O1), so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 Collision can be easily avoided.

  In the present embodiment, after the overhang decorative portion 652b is retracted from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91 (a)) due to this posture change, the full-fledged dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the overhang decorative portion are provided. The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

  The downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is caused by the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the direction in which the axis O1 approaches the rectangular box portion 618 along the shape of the guide slot 616 (rightward direction). ) (See FIG. 91 (b)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b may collide with the rectangular box portion 618.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a recessed portion 618 a formed on the left side surface along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed as a recess at a position where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end of the guide elongated hole 616. As described above, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is examined with one object of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

  Further, the posture change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is continued with the downward displacement of the axis O1, so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be displaced in a direction to retreat from the rectangular box portion 618. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (b), the displacement dimension XL1 (retreat distance) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b to the left is the displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1 to the right. Designed to be above (equal or exceed). Thereby, collision between the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in opposite directions, and cancel each other. The displacement in the left-right direction of the overhanging decorative portion 652b was suppressed to be small.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in the same direction. Are superimposed, the displacement amount of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the left-right direction increases.

  Thereby, despite the fact that the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is constantly changed about the axis O1, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displayed to the player from FIG. 90 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), it is displaced in the vertical direction with a small lateral displacement (narrow displacement trajectory), and from FIG. 91 (b) to FIG. 92, it is guided so as to be largely displaced in the horizontal direction. I can show you.

  Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) for guiding the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b seen by the player. Thereby, a surprising effect can be executed.

  That is, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be shown to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b protruded from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the range of the left and right of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), where the width is small and the lateral displacement cannot be sufficiently secured, the unexpected displacement of jumping in the lateral direction can be shown to the player. Therefore, attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be improved.

  For convenience, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the axis O1 configured to be rotatable about this rotation axis are described. The meaning is the same. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit 600 along the line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. FIG. 93 illustrates a cross-sectional view in a plane where the axis O <b> 1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed on the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed on the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and an opening 645a is formed and communicated therewith. The gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameters of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the rotation member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the displacement of the rotation member 657 in the axial direction can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical rotation member 657 has a small gap between the step formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the base end side in the axial direction (the upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. It is arranged in a space. This can prevent the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and stabilize the arrangement of the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 in the direction of the central axis of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  Fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the overhanging decorative portion 652 b is disposed on the rear side as compared with the second decorative rotating member 660, and thus the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the second decorative rotating member 660. (See FIG. 2). In other words, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the third symbol display device 81 and the overhang decoration portion 652b are arranged apart from each other, the overhang decoration portion 652b is overlapped with the region right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Are arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to easily cause an effect of making the player see (illusion) as if the display area is enlarged to the right.

  In particular, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are visually recognized at the same time (for example, see FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third symbol display device 81 on the near side. On the other hand, the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed close to the third symbol display device 81 from the front side is part of the display because it is easy to visually recognize independently of the display of the third symbol display device. The effect shown (illusion) can be emphasized.

  In other words, by preparing one object that is particularly conspicuous (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the other configuration (corresponding to the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhang decorative portion 652b) is determined. We try to reduce the degree. This makes it difficult to distinguish the display of the third symbol display device 81 from the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion formed of a hard resin and cannot change its shape on the way. However, the overhanging decorative portion 652b has a light emitting mode (color or brightness) of a light emitting unit such as an LED provided on the electric decoration board 653. By controlling so as to change the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the LED provided on the electric decoration board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the region right end RE1 of the display region (see FIG. 29), and it is easy to cause an effect of making the player see (illusion) that the display region is enlarged to the right. be able to.

  Next, the details of the second operation unit 700 will be described again. FIG. 94 is a front view of the second operation unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 along the line XCV-XCV in FIG.

  As described above, the second operation unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the longitudinal displacement are generated synchronously (sliding in the longitudinally inclined direction) in the sliding displacement. It is devised that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not excessively conspicuous.

  For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operation unit 700, the displacement in the front-back direction inclined obliquely does not consist of a single displacement, but is a combination of the displacement in the up-down direction and the displacement in the front-back direction. It is configured.

  That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to be vertically displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, in addition, a left rear plate member 750 and a blind decoration member 768 are arranged before and after the elevating plate member 740 to prevent the elevating plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 can be restricted in the vertical direction.

  The right side of the elevating plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the rendering device 780 (a front upper inclined portion 714, 751). And the receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the elevating plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be restricted in the up-down direction.

  The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. As described above, in realizing the sliding displacement in the front-back direction that is inclined obliquely, the guides for the displacement of the elevating plate member 740 and the rendering device 780 as components are configured separately in the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. Have been.

  This makes it easier to maintain the displacement resistance low as compared to a configuration in which the guide is guided in the front-back direction that is inclined obliquely.

  The extended state of the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a state that can be controlled to execute a displacement (see FIG. 57) for switching the state of the covering member 787. That is, in the present embodiment, in other states of the overhang state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)), The second operation unit 700 is controlled so as not to generate a displacement for switching the state of the installation member 787.

  By controlling in this manner, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are placed at positions overlapping the left and right positions reached by the left and right end portions of the covering member 787 when the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is executed. Even if it arrange | positions so that it may arrange | position, it can avoid that the cover member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

  A description will be given of a configuration of the effect device 780 with respect to a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787. First, a drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force of displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left and right center positions of the rendering device 780 (the center of the insertion cylindrical portion 773 inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). (Where the center is located directly above).

  Thus, not only can the posture of the effect device 780 be tilted left and right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also the left and right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

  Further, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operation unit 700 capable of executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 supporting the elevating plate member 740. The left and right positions are equal to the right and left center positions of the rendering device 780 or the right positions.

  As described above, the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported only by the rotating arm member 720 that can be displaced in the left-right direction with the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 serving as the supporting position, but in particular, the arrangement of the staging device 780. When the position of the cylindrical fastening part 724 at the time of execution of the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is assumed to be likely to occur or the posture of the posture is likely to fluctuate, By setting, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780.

  Note that the control for executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 is switched, It is possible to control to change the state of the two operation unit 700 to the effect standby state or the intermediate effect state.

  That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and to set the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is temporarily set. As the projecting state, after performing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787, the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed to be long in the left-right direction so as to overlap the inner end of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-back direction. Thereby, the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden so as not to be seen by the player, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and the shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the player knows that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction.

  Further, when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusing member 778b is visually recognized so as to overlap the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decoration portion 768a in a right and left line in a front view (see FIG. 94). The arrangement of the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in this state is arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 in front view and over the left and right lengths of the lower edge.

  On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, substrates on which LEDs are fixed are provided on the front side, respectively, and the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a are irradiated with light emitted from the corresponding LED. Can be performed. By this light-emitting effect, an effect of making the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 appear to be separated by light is performed, or the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is brightened by light. And can be directed.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member for hiding the rotating cylindrical portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member for performing a light emission effect jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. It can be configured to have both.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally long member 742 is a cover that is provided behind the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a and separated from the back of the light diffusing member 778b (left side range) with a front-side interval therebetween. The cover 742a is provided.

  The covering cover 742 a is a blindfold member formed over the vertical width of the horizontally long member 742, and is disposed so that electric wiring can be passed through a gap between the horizontally long member 742 and the horizontally long member 742. That is, the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the rendering device 780 is guided to the rendering device 780 side from behind the blindfolding decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742 a and the horizontally long member 742, and the drive motor 782. , An electric decoration board 778a, a detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

  At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged in a folded state in front of the electric wiring, so that the configuration is such that the line of sight of the player is easily blocked. This makes it easier to prevent the player from being visually recognized.

  In other words, by arranging the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, which are originally provided for producing light, in front of the path of the electric wiring in order to function as a blindfold of the electric wiring, The size of the cover 742a required for blindfolding can be reduced to the minimum size.

  Since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed, the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a does not overlap with the horizontally long member 742 in the effect standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33). Not available.

  In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the horizontally long member 742 is set to the outside of the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. Thus, the electric wiring can be hidden by the horizontally long member 742 and the light diffusing member 778, and therefore, regardless of the state of the second operation unit 700 (the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state), the electric wiring can be hidden. Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 96 shows a horizontal arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction. FIG. 97 shows an upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781. (See FIG. 59 (c)).

  The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but include a curved forming portion 783d that is formed to be curved upward from the lower side surface in the state where the vertically reversing member 781 is horizontally arranged. The curve forming portion 783d is formed so as to protrude in a direction to withdraw from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid a collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the drive gear 782a when the vertically reversing member 781 is vertically arranged.

  FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is not disposed on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are disposed close to each other but near the left and right ends. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act so as to unite the covering members 787 directly, but acts independently on the pair of covering members 787.

  Thus, for example, when the operation of one of the covering members 787 becomes defective, it is possible to prevent the operation of the other covering member 787 from becoming defective.

  Further, for example, at the start of the displacement in which the pair of covering members 787 start to separate from each other in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the direction opposite to the left-right displacement. That is, when the rotation operation is started from the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

  Accordingly, at the time of starting displacement when the pair of covering members 787 start moving away from each other in the left-right direction, a change in load applied to the covering member 787 by the magnet Mg can be suppressed. Compared to the case where it is necessary to remove the magnet, when the pair of covering members 787 starts to be displaced from each other in the left and right direction, the covering member 787 vibrates due to a sudden change in magnetic force, and the displacement is not good. It becomes stable, and it is easy to avoid a situation in which an operation failure occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on the left and right sides on opposite sides, and this effect will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f to which the metal screw that is in contact with the magnet Mg and to which a magnetic force is applied is fixed is disposed on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side when the upside-down reversing member 781 is in the upright vertical position, FIG. 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated in relation to the metal screw on the magnet Mg is the same in the front and rear directions on both the left and right sides.

  More specifically, for example, when the upside down member 781 changes from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)), the left side of the front view is covered. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the forward movement of the attracting force is applied to the magnet Mg by the forward displacement of the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (disposed on the upper side). While a load is generated, the cover member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (disposed on the lower side) is displaced forward with the magnet. A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction of the attraction force.

  Also, for example, when the upside down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)) to an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)), the left side cover member 787 in a front view is shown. Rotates backward, so that a rearward load is applied to the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attraction force due to the rearward displacement of the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side). On the other hand, since the cover member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward rotation direction, the cover member 787 is moved closer to the magnet Mg (disposed on the lower side) by the rearward displacement of the metal screw. Generates a backward load as a reaction of the attraction force.

  As described above, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 or the linear motion plate member 784 that supports the covering member 787 while maintaining the posture is determined on both the left and right sides. In the same direction.

  Here, in the case where a load in the front-rear direction is generated on both the left and right sides (for example, by disposing the left magnet Mg in the lower position, the arrangement of the left and right magnets Mg is set to the lower position, and the left shaft rotating member 785 is In the case where the design is changed so that the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the magnet Mg and the metal screw are raised and lowered by a load generated when the metal screw is peeled from the attracted state. The mode of the displacement applied to the reversal effect device 770 is such that the up-down reversal effect device 770 is rotated about a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

  In this case, it is easy for the vertical reversal effect device 770 to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the beveled tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of removing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the beveled tooth member 785c is used after the attraction of the magnet Mg is removed. In the configuration in which the cover member 787 is rotated vigorously, it is assumed that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is likely to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

  Furthermore, it is difficult to release the load from the lifting / reversing effect device 770, and the lifting / reversing effect device 770 may be damaged, or the durability of the lifting / reversing effect device 770 may be reduced. Therefore, from the viewpoint of stabilizing the displacement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 for a long time, it is considered that a countermeasure is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state, the cover member 787 that rotates and the main body member 771 that supports the cover member 787 while maintaining the posture and the straight member 771 Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the left and right sides is the same in the front-rear direction, the up-down reversal effect is produced by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state. The mode of the displacement applied to the device 770 may be a mode in which the up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, it can be easily offset by the displacement (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction) of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state is damaged by the elevating / reversal effect device 770. Can be avoided.

  In the second operation unit 700, the direction of the slide displacement of the rendering device 780 (the direction having the vertical component and the front-rear component, that is, the direction in a plane orthogonal to the horizontal direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. The displacement start direction (left-right direction) from the state (vertical arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781) is orthogonal.

  Therefore, it is easy to avoid that one displacement is caused by the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when the slide displacement of the effect device 780 is performed, it is easy to avoid a situation in which a displacement (displacement in a direction away from each other) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other is unintentionally started. be able to.

  Next, the details of the third operation unit 800 will be described again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. FIG. 99 (a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99 (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod is switched at the thickened portion 852.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed to face the distal rod 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and the base reinforcing portion 852 a disposed to be opposed to the distal rod 853. And a recessed portion 852b formed by cutting out light from the front side along the axial direction.

  The base-side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. Accordingly, even when the rotating arm member 850 comes into contact with the distal end side rod portion 853 formed on the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation. can do.

  The concave portion 852b acts to reduce the deformation resistance of the thickened portion 852 due to elastic deformation. Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  Curved portions 852c that are concavely formed in a curved shape are formed on both side surfaces in the short direction of the thickened portion 852. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmitting portion 854 formed on the end of the distal end rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the united state. Formed from various shapes.

  In the present embodiment, in the individual united state (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the unified state, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other is changed. Since this is reversed, which side of the short side surface of the intermediate arm member 850 is disposed closer to the curved portion 854d depends on which united state is configured.

  On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any of the united states. Thereby, the state change to the united state can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, since the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be able to abut against each other in a plane, an excessively large load is locally applied between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the united state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  The third operation unit 800 is configured to be able to move up and down by the elevating arm member 801. The direction of the up and down displacement and the start of the displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. The directions are not necessarily orthogonal to each other.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 66A, since the virtual position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set as a direction different at intervals of 72 degrees, the displacement starting direction of all the rotating members 834 is , And the direction of the vertical displacement cannot be orthogonal.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that a rotation operation (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) may occur unintentionally due to a load or inertia generated when the third operation unit 800 is displaced vertically. Means for taking measures against this malfunction will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically illustrating the displacement between the metal bar 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

  In FIG. 100, among the virtual position lines 832F of the metal bar 832, the virtual position line 832F extending downward in the individual united state, and the angle between the virtual position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 is 0.5 degrees. A virtual position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until it changes is illustrated.

  That is, FIG. 100 illustrates a state in which the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 100, at the start of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotation member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 in a state where the rotation operation of the rotation member 834 is suppressed. It is configured to be able to.

  The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which the bevel teeth 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) cause the meshing rotation. .

  Here, a backlash (gap) is indispensable for erecting the meshing of the gear teeth, and the setting of the size of this gap changes the quality of rotation response. Various modes can be selected for setting the backlash, but in the present embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

  That is, until the angle θ51 in the united state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is only filled, and the meshing rotation is not started. On the other hand, the pivotal tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operation unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

  That is, at the time of starting the switching rotation operation from the united state (individual united state), the rotation operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the slide movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

  FIG. 101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 is appropriately referred to. In FIG. 101, the third operating unit 800 in the union state is illustrated, and the torque limiter 866 and the magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance to the displacement of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated.

  Here, the rotation member 834 is configured not to rotate when the inner rotation member 830 slightly rotates (eg, rotates about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)) with respect to the outer rotation member 840. ing.

  Thus, as in the present embodiment, even in a configuration in which the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880, an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction. In addition, since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the united state can be limited to the linear displacement, the united state by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

  In other words, when the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the time of starting displacement from the united state, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 rotate in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the magnetic force. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, it is considered that the magnetic force is easily lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement at the time of starting the displacement from the combined state of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is only the displacement (the metal rod 832) along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged. (Displacement in the sliding direction along the axis), it is easy to maintain the united state by the magnetic force.

  Accordingly, even when the inner rotating member 830 is slightly rotated unintentionally (for example, rotated about 5 degrees) due to an unintended load or the like, the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 870 are formed. The united state of the member 880 can be easily maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the forward rotation, the torque limiter 866 disconnects when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, so that the switching rotation DR1 is generated so as to reduce the resistance (slip). In the rotation in the opposite direction, the idle rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idle). The torque limiter 866 is configured as a set in which the forward and reverse rotations are reversed.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the left rotation of the torque limiter 866 generates a resistance until the applied load reaches an allowable value in a clockwise rotation when viewed from the front, and causes the switching rotation DR1 to idle when the applied load exceeds the allowable value. On the other hand, in the counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front, the motor is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 of idling.

  In addition, the right torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 of idling in a clockwise rotation direction in a front view, while the applied load is an allowable value in a counterclockwise rotation direction in a front view. The switching rotation DR1 is generated until the resistance is reached, and the idle rotation occurs when the rotation exceeds the allowable value.

  As described above, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed in both directions as described above.

  Further, in a state where no load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction is generated, resistance in both the forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) mounted on the torque limiter 866. In addition, it is possible to suppress a rotating operation of the outer rotating member 840 that may be caused by an unintended load (an inertial force of vertical displacement or an impact force when the door is opened and closed). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side in the width direction of the second covering portion 885, and is arranged concentrically in a state where the five second covering portions 885 are united in an annular shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attraction force between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is arranged adjacent to and adjacent to the magnet Mg2.

  With such a configuration, when the magnet Mg2 is disposed on both sides in the width direction of the specific second covering portion 885 (that is, the second second covering portion 885 is disposed adjacent to and adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides). Both of the covering portions 885 are separated from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state as compared with the case where both of the covering portions 885 receive the urging force in the direction approaching the specific second covering portion 885 from the magnet Mg2). It is possible to prevent the gap generated between the second covering portions 885 from increasing at the position, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

  In addition, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the united state is configured as a slide movement in the radially outward direction, and the uniting by the magnetic force is started before the rotation around the metal rod 832 is started. At a position where the magnets Mg2 are separated to such an extent that they are released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in the direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (direction toward the center of the concentric circle). The second decorative member 880 serves as a resisting force for the radially outward sliding movement of the second decorative member 880.

  In addition, since this resistance force is generated with the same magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load received by the third operation unit 800 from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. That is, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be more easily stabilized than when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

  Since the shape of the second decorative member 880 is common to all five and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also common, the front and rear positions of each magnet Mg2 are equal. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid applying a load having a component in the front-rear direction to the second decorative member 880 due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, so that the magnetic force is generated at the time of starting displacement from the combined state or immediately before reaching the combined state. Occur in the front-rear direction, and the second decorative member 880 can be easily prevented from vibrating in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In FIG. 102, an arrangement state corresponding to the individual united state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and for easy understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member arranged on the rear side is illustrated. 840 is made visible.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, at least one portion that restricts rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102) can be secured, In many cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two places. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

  First, there is a contact protruding portion 845 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The contact protruding portion 845 is formed to have a shape tapering outward in the radial direction at an intermediate angle position between the adjacent extending arm portions 842, and the inside thereof is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

  The contact protruding portion 845 is disposed so as to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is disposed so as to be able to contact the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , The intermediate arm member 850 is prevented from rotating excessively.

  In the thickened portion 852, the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation is reduced by the concave portion 852b (see FIG. 99 (a)). Similarly, the contact protruding portion 845 is lightened. Accordingly, even when the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at a high speed and the curved shape portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the contact protruding portion 845, the load generated at that time is reduced by the contact protruding portion. Since it can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the thickening portion 845 and the thickened portion 852, the damage of the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

  The contact protruding portion 845 is not provided at all positions as the intermediate angular position of the extending arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. Thus, the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 in the axial direction is shifted, and the direction in which the outer rotating member 840 is pulled out of the molding die can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841. . Therefore, the design of the molding die can be facilitated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted as a price for facilitating the design of the molding die, but in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted. As a second configuration, a base-side reinforcing portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852.

  The proximal reinforcing portion 852a is disposed to face the distal rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99 (a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can be contacted when the distal rod portion 853 rotates excessively. Is arranged to prevent the intermediate arm member 850 from over-rotating.

  The base-side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. Accordingly, even if the rotation arm member 850 comes into contact with the rotation tip side, which is the side where the inertia force in rotation tends to be large, it is possible to prevent the deformation amount from becoming excessive.

  The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to abut on the curved portion 854d in a plane, so that an excessive load is locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in a united state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  As described above, when the contact protruding portion 845 is disposed to face the contact portion 845, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is caused by not only the contact with the contact protruding portion 845 but also the adjacent turning arm member 850. The curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, or the proximal reinforcing portion 852a of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 and the distal end rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

  On the other hand, even when the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm member 850 is contacted. With such a configuration that the base end side reinforcing portion 852a and the front end side rod portion 853 of the base 850 can be brought into contact with each other, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted.

  The configuration of these abutments is such that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (circulated). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of one contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, and there is little configuration that restricts the rotation only of the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted portion. However, in reality, the load at the time of contact can be dispersed by the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely reduced.

  Also, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending in an annular shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on one plane along the rear side end of the abutting projecting portion 845 is performed by the abutting and projecting. Similarly to the portion 845, it is omitted in a portion overlapping the detected portion 844 in the axial direction.

  The omission of the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be described as a cost of facilitating the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 described above. The effect of the portion 846 is realized by (the configuration for supporting) the rotating arm members 850 adjacent to each other even in a place where the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

  That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be described as a correction of the displacement of the front and rear positions of the rotating arm member 850. That is, when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the united state (see FIG. 64A) (see FIG. 65A), and returns to the united state, the leading end of the rotating arm member 850 is moved. Even if the disposition is unintentionally shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the proximal end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99 (b)) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 so that it can be contacted. By doing so, the front and rear positions of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the contact.

  This operation cannot be achieved when the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, because the contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extending arm portion 842, the distal end of the rotating arm member 850 is disposed at a lower position. Even if it is displaced back and forth, the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 is disposed to be in contact with the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842 so that it can be brought into contact therewith. The front-back position of the arm member 850 can be corrected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is generated by the extended arm portion 842. Thus, the effect of correcting the front-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be exerted on all the rotating arm members 850 while partially forming the annular plate-shaped portion 846.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103 (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the relative arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in the united state.

  The state illustrated in FIG. 103A is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has been rotated from the state in FIG. 65B to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in the present embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed). The state illustrated in FIG. 103B corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F has been rotated from the state in FIG. 67B to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in the present embodiment) (the switching rotation operation is performed). (Completed state).

  Comparing the union state and the individual union state (see FIGS. 64A and 66A), the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 near the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, so There is a difference that the curved portion 852c abutting on the projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c abutting on the curved portion 854d is reversed.

  For the purpose of coping with this difference, the contact protruding portion 845 has a line-symmetric shape in a front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body portion 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d , A line symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to a longitudinal direction line (a straight line connecting the rotation base end and the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850.

  Further, the curved shape of the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to have the same curved shape in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c. Thus, in the individual united state and the one united state, the united state can be configured in a similar engagement relationship.

  In the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to be sandwiched between the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. This can suppress the displacement of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 in any of the rotation directions, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained, and the united state is maintained. Can be made easier.

  104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions (a state intermediate between the individual united state and the united state), and FIG. 105 illustrates the united state.

  FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along the line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front and rear arrangement of the metal bar 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be arbitrarily set.

  If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player can visually recognize the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

  With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. Thereby, the middle arm member 850 as a functional member, not a decorative member, can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the appearance of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

  In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal bar 832 also functions as an effect member that reflects light due to the gloss of the surface, so that the light effect by the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 107) is obtained. The production effect can be improved. That is, the metal bar 832 can be used as a reflection member for producing light.

  When the intermediate arm member 850 is disposed on the front side of the metal bar 832, light that enters the player's eyes may be blocked by the intermediate arm member 850, but in the present embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is connected to the metal bar 832. Since it is arranged on the back side of 832, it is possible to avoid that light is blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the appearance is deteriorated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light is reflected via the metal rod 832 in a state where the metal rod 832 is exposed (see FIGS. 104 and 107) during the switching rotation operation. The range in which the light effect is performed can be extended. That is, it is arranged not only in a range behind the translucent decorative member 824 on which the electric decoration board 823 (see FIG. 60) is disposed, but also so as to protrude radially outward of the translucent decorative member 824 in front view. The reflected light can be visually recognized by the player also in the range ER1 in which the metal bar 832 is exposed and visible (see FIG. 104).

  The bulging portion 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having a light diffusion shape formed in an annular shape on the inner peripheral surface as a portion for receiving light. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be applied to the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

  Accordingly, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visually recognized as being annularly bright not only during the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is released. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the effect of utilizing the annular shape of the third operation unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the translucent decorative member 824 is not only a bulged portion 824 a visually recognized in the united state, but also an extended portion that extends radially outward from the bulged portion 824 a in front view. 824c.

  The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the united state, and has a low function as a decorative portion. However, the extension portion 824c has an effect of blindfolding the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. .

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extending portion 824c is difficult to use for production, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extending arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in such a size as to be able to cover and block the mechanism.

  Since the decorative pattern is provided not only on the bulging portion 824a but also on the front side of the extending portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in a range where the mechanical portion is shielded and blindfolded. The effect can be improved.

  An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the vertical displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the vertical arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  According to the present embodiment, the up / down displacement and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be executable independently. For example, due to the inertial load at the time of the up / down displacement of the third operation unit 800, There is a possibility that a rotational displacement occurs in the third operation unit 800 in conjunction therewith. In this case, the posture of the third operation unit 800 changes, or the combined state of the third operation unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attraction force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, there is a possibility that the production effect is reduced.

  In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical movement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly, the integral rotation operation) of the third operation unit 800 may be controlled to be executed simultaneously.

  Thereby, the rotational displacement at the time of the vertical movement of the third operation unit 800 can be shown to the player as a rendering operation, so that a reduction in the rendering effect can be prevented. Further, while the integral rotation operation is continued, a load is continuously applied in the direction of displacing the decoration members 870 and 880 inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so that the union state of the third operation unit 800 is released. Can be avoided.

  In addition, even if control for simultaneously executing the vertical displacement and the rotational displacement is not performed, the posture of the third operation unit 800 is set in advance so that the rotating arm member 850 is not easily displaced by the vertical displacement. Control may be performed to adjust the attitude of the unit 800 in the rotation direction.

  The fact that the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotation member 840 by the detection sensor 813 changes (see FIG. 68) indicates that in the present embodiment, the rotation mode of the inner rotation member 830 is executed by an integral rotation operation. means. Therefore, based on this, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated with each other and designed.

  This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not linked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid a state in which this assumption may be broken.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. The position of 840 is maintained.

  Therefore, for example, during the execution of the switching rotation operation, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases, and the operation resistance between the inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 increases. Becomes larger and exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may be interlocked and the switching rotation operation may not be properly performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

  For example, the direction of displacement of the rotation tip of the intermediate arm member 850 for displacing the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 from the combined state is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make the resistance of the rotation of the metal rod 832 unlikely to occur, and the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, and the rotation member 834. And the resistance generated between the arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be reduced.

  In a state where the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is determined by the metal rod. Since it is along the rotation direction of 832, especially when the speed is insufficient, it is easy to configure a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached after the start of the switching rotation operation, and the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 have the radial outer end. In the state of being placed at the position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 receive inertia so as to rotate around the metal rod 832.

  Under the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the beveled tooth portion 834a and the beveled tooth portion 854c mesh with each other. It passes through the radially outer end position and pivots radially inward (see FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b)).

  In a state where the outer end of the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is easily displaced in the direction along the metal bar 832, so that resistance to the rotating operation of the metal bar 832 can be easily suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, reduction of the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is realized by the relationship between the members and the design of the drive control. I have.

  During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained, and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change. Therefore, the end timing of the switching rotation operation is determined by the change in the detection mode of the detection portion 844 by the detection sensor 813. It cannot be determined.

  For example, the control for stopping the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by setting a sufficient drive time necessary for the switching rotation operation in advance, and controlling to stop the drive at the drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the displacement amount may be different even if the driving time is the same, and before the united state is reached. Driving may be stopped. In this case, the effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, instead of the control mode in which the drive motor 861 is stopped at the timing when the united state is reached, the change in the detection mode of the detection target 844 by the detection sensor 813 causes the switching rotation operation to end and the integrated rotation operation to be completed. It may be determined that it has started (see FIG. 68), and after this determination, control may be performed to stop the drive motor 861. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive of the drive motor 861 is stopped in a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 have not reached the united state after the execution of the switching rotation operation.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as the drive control. However, the integral rotation operation can be performed without being affected by the state of the third operation unit 800. It is.

  As the drive control, the switching rotation operation can be performed without being affected by the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 in the rotation direction. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. Can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A), and the state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be performed even from.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection target portion 844 moves to the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation ends. Until the vehicle enters, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

  For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be performed in a driving period that is set in advance as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation. Control may be performed such that driving of the drive motor 861 is continued until the drive motor 861 enters the detection groove.

  In the latter case, the operation mode shifts to an integral rotation operation after the end of the switching rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative member 870, 880 can be determined to be in the united state.

  On the other hand, although the drive of the drive motor 861 is executed for a time period sufficient for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by shifting from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation. If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined that the third operation unit 800 has an operation failure based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

  In the latter case, the switching rotation operation is performed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the detection groove is detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in a state where the union state (see FIG. 32) is maintained. The driving is continued until the section 844 enters.

  In the united state of the third operation unit 800, as described above, the appearance is unlikely to differ even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the union state, it is easy to avoid a reduction in the effect.

  Further, in the case of performing the control for returning from the reversal effect to the normal effect shown in FIG. 68, since the detected portion 844 is already arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor The period until the output of the signal 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period in which the detected portion 844 disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is retracted from the detection groove is sufficient, and thus the length required for the control for returning from the reverse effect to the normal effect. Can be minimized.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 for starting the switching rotation operation for switching from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the return operation is usually prolonged. However, there is a case where the switching rotation operation from the reversal effect as the return operation to the normal effect is shortened.

  That is, a part of the return operation for returning the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) is viewed even if the rotational arrangement is different. By performing in the one union state in which the appearance is unlikely to change, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of the third operation unit 800 during the return operation.

  Further, by performing a part of the return operation in advance, the period required for the switching rotation operation as the remaining return operation can be shortened.

  Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, the structure commonly used by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be described in cross-section, including the reason for the difference in the adoption mode.

  First, as a first cross-sectional description, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 commonly used in each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 is confirmed, and the mode of adoption (the number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the detection piece will be described.

  The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extension 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device included in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members such as the rotation member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decoration part 652b, and the second decoration rotation member 660, if the posture of the rotation member 620 is determined, the arrangement and posture of the other displacement members are determined. , The arrangement and posture of the plurality of displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices provided.

  The detection sensor 713 of the second operation unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 of the second operation unit 700, and the detection target 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, respectively. I do.

  The detection sensor 713 that determines the effect standby state is necessary to determine the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 for judging the overhang state is necessary for judging the arrival at the end position of the ascending displacement, in addition to the reversing operation of the elevating and reversing effect device 770 and the judging of the displacement due to the unintended load. Is required. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate effect state is necessary for determining whether the vehicle has reached the vertical position in the intermediate effect state, and is also necessary for determining a position shift due to an unintended load. Hereinafter, the inversion operation and the effect of an unintended load will be described in order.

  First, the inversion operation will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 generated in conjunction with the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the inverting operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 (see FIG. 59) is possible.

  The reversing operation may cause the up-down reversal effect device 770 to be displaced in the up-down direction. For example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines an effect standby state) is employed, the overhang state It is not possible to determine the vertical position shift in the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that an appropriate effect operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the elevating / reversing effect device 770 has been displaced in the up-down direction by performing the inverting operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the extended state, and appropriately adjust the attitude of the gear cam member 734 based on the determination result. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the direction to be corrected (to be in the overhang state), it is possible to keep the arrangement of the vertical inversion effect device 770 properly.

  In the present embodiment, since the reversing operation is allowed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of operation), the correction of the displacement during the reversing operation is performed by the gear cam. It is easy to rotate the member 734 to the operation end side, which is easy.

  Next, the effect of an unintended load will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting / lowering plate member 740 generated in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates by the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the front / rear position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting / lowering plate member 740 The longitudinal reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth with reference to the lift plate member 740 for displacement (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

  Therefore, with the vertical reversing effect device 770 being displaced in the front-rear direction by the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the vertical position of the reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuate. The posture of the member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine include an impact load when a player hits the gaming machine, a load when opening and closing the front frame 14, and the like.

  Since there is a possibility that the up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for judging the effect standby state) is used, It is not possible to determine the vertical position shift in the appearing state or the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that the vertical reversing effect device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate effect state and the vertical position of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuates, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the change. The drive motor 731 can be rotated in a direction in which the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is appropriately corrected (to be in an intermediate effect state) based on the determination result. Thus, the arrangement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 can be appropriately maintained.

  Note that, when it is determined that the detected portion 735 has deviated from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is disposed on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, In the embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has deviated, control is performed such that the drive motor 731 is driven in a direction in which the effect device 780 is displaced downward. This can prevent a situation in which the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 collide with each other.

  In the present embodiment, when the detected portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state again by this driving, the displacement of the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to be displaced upward. It can be seen that this has occurred on the side to be driven, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

  In addition, if the detected portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by this driving, the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load is generated. Is found to have occurred on the side that lowers the effect device 780, and when the detected part 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by continuing to drive to effect the upward displacement again. By stopping the driving, it is possible to offset the influence caused by the unintended load.

  Note that the detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore a plate having a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713 is used. It is formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside down member 781 of the second operation unit 700, and the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the vertically inverted member 781 (see FIG. 56), and the vertically inverted member 781 is in an upright vertical state and an inverted vertically arranged state, respectively. And corresponding to.

  The second operation unit 700 is disposed as a pair of left and right in an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A) and an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59C) of the upside down member 781. Are placed in a united state in which the covering members 787 close to each other.

  For example, when only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that reverses the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781) is used, the posture shift of the upside down rotation member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is reduced. Since the determination can be made, it is possible to control the driving of the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the united state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture shift of the upside down member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the union state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state may be changed due to unintended load or poor control. Even in the case of a change, the change in the state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the united state has been released is continued, which is not preferable in production.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 and the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 is provided. Therefore, regardless of the upright or inverted vertical arrangement state, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the union state has occurred, and based on the determination result, the union state can be determined. By controlling the drive of the drive motor 782 to the return side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state. Thereby, the effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

  Note that the arc-shaped protruding portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore has an appropriate width for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. Is formed as a plate-shaped portion. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the outer rotation member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detection target 844 can enter the detection groove (FIG. 60). reference). The third operation unit 800 has one detecting device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detecting device stops the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. The rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotating member 830 in the state of being performed is used (also used).

  Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore a plate having a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813 is used. It is formed as a shape. Thus, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840, and has a small number of one. Therefore, the detection sensor 813 is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs such that the united state is released when the outer rotation member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detection target portion 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 determines the displacement. Can not.

  Therefore, rather than performing control to determine the deviation from the united state and then return to the united state, the direction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are returned to the united state at fixed time intervals (individual united state (FIG. 66 (a) )), The drive motor rotates in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, and in the union state (see FIG. 103 (b)) in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise in a front view). It is considered that control for driving the 861 to rotate for a predetermined time (for example, a short time) is preferable.

  With this control, even when the union state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the union state by driving the drive motor 861 at a fixed time interval. Since it is possible, it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 from being maintained for a long time while being released.

  As a second transverse explanation, the operation of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be described. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the united state of the decorative members 870, 880. As described above, similar techniques are employed, but the design philosophy of the directions of the loads generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different from each other.

  The second operation unit 700 is designed such that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws disposed on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions. In other words, it is designed such that the line of action of the magnetic force is parallel to a plane orthogonal to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the rotation operation of the covering member 787.

  In this case, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as the resistance of the slide displacement in which the covering member 787 approaches and separates from each other can be reduced as compared with the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal bar 785a. Thus, the operating resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of the operation can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 disposed on the decoration member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is the five rotation axes of the rotation operation of the decoration member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to a plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830).

  In this case, the degree to which the decoration members 870 and 880 are loaded in the rotational operation direction by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be reduced, so that it is easy to avoid a malfunction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 wobble in the rotational operation direction due to the magnetic force. be able to.

  As a third cross-sectional description, a description will be given of a display on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 and an effect of visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, and 800 integrally.

  In the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is disposed so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged near the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third symbol display device 81, the display region and the overhang decorative portion 652b are united. Can be easily recognized as a display effect.

  In the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is disposed so as to have the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display region of the third symbol display device 81, the display region and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are combined. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

  In the third operation unit 800, each of the first covering portions 875 that can be visually recognized by the player in the individual united state has a different decoration, and in the extended state, the third covering unit 875 surrounds the perimeter in a front view. The display area of the symbol display device 81 is arranged. Therefore, for example, in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a range close to the first covering section 875, a display corresponding to the position where the first covering section 875 is arranged is performed, so that the display area and the first The covering portion 875 can be easily recognized as a group of display effects.

  Further, if the third operation unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate integrally, a roulette-like operation effect in which each first covering portion 875 rotates can be executed. By moving the display so as to run in parallel with the first covering portion 875 in the range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display region of the symbol display device 81, the display region and the first covering portion 875 are moved together. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shapes of the flow path components 334 to 336 are fixed has been described. However, in the distribution device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path components 2334 having a variable internal shape. Is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but is disposed on the left side. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration section 2334. Further, the left and right sides may be configured differently so that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming section 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming section 334.

  FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 2300 in the second embodiment along a line corresponding to the XVI-XVI line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the distribution device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 formed in the front-rear direction below the curved protrusion 334 b, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 guided to be displaceable, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame-shaped portion 332 so as to generate a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420.

  In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in a state where the solenoid 2430 is not excited is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the slide member 2420 is slid to the rear position RP by the driving force of the solenoid 2430.

  In the present embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and projects inward (upper side) from the bottom surface 2334c where the ball can roll, and the rear side In the arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude (submerge) inside (upper side) of the bottom surface 2334c.

  That is, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the ball contacts the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear arrangement RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 does not contact the ball.

  The upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 occurs while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the influence on the flow-down state of the ball can be suppressed.

  The falling direction of the sphere rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is a diagonally forward and downward direction, and the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member 2420 follows the flowing direction of the sphere. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 affects the strength of the rotation of the ball.

  Since the sphere rolls forward with the bottom surface 2334c, rotation in a direction in which the sphere rolls forward in the traveling direction (forward) occurs. When the solenoid 2430 is energized from the non-excited state (see FIG. 108) to slide the slide member 2420 from the front arrangement FP to the rear arrangement RP, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 is rolled. A rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from the energized state to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), and the slide member 2420 is slid from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, the bottom surface 2334b A load (frictional force) is generated in the forward direction via the upper surface of the slide member 2420 with respect to the lower end of the ball rolling. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction is reduced, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  Further, since the upper and lower positions of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP are higher than the upper and lower positions of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, the load in the direction of pushing the ball upward. Occurs. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the falling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by performing the control of causing the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 when the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the flow of the ball flowing down the inside of the distribution device 2300 is performed. The speed can be variable. Thus, the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be controlled to be variable.

  In the present embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is disposed behind the second flow path component 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state where the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

  In other words, the ball is brought into contact with the slide member 2420 at a stage before the ball is introduced into the second flow path forming portion 335, which is easy for the player to visually recognize and attract attention, so that rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of being displaced or displaced in the vertical direction. Thereby, a sense of incongruity given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is disposed above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, while before and after the slide member 2420 is displaced (at the time of stop), the contact load is applied. No contact load is applied to the ball passing through the slide member 2420.

  Therefore, the ball arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the operation of the slide member 2420 and the ball arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the stop of the slide member 2420 flow down (rotation, change in rotation, flow down speed). , Flow velocity change, etc.).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described. However, in the distribution device 3300 of the third embodiment, the position of the probability change detection sensor SE11 is the normal detection sensor. By being moved to the rear side of SE12, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As a modification example of the arrangement of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, a description will be given on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side similarly to the first embodiment, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the distribution device 3300. May be configured to be different from each other, and also on the left side, as will be described in detail below, may be arranged side by side so that the positive detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right of the distribution device 3300. May be configured to be symmetric.

  FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3300 according to the third embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front position. In FIG. 109 (b), the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. The state where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b), the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the third flow path component 336 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a) and FIG. 109 (b), the rear frame 3332 which partitions the ball guide path to the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is provided in the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300. Is configured to be open from the left side so as to receive a ball.

  The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109 (b)) is at the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 and the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the positive change detection sensor SE11. Is set as a position where the rear side inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed on the left and right is aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is disposed slightly forward).

  By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is placed on the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. If the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position while the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear side position while flowing to the right while abutting, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is It can be configured to flow to the right while abutting on the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  That is, both the downflow path of the sphere passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the downflow path of the sphere passing through the positive change detection sensor SE11 flow to the right after passing through the third flow path component 336. It consists of. The only difference is the front and rear position flowing to the right.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 from the viewpoint of the player who views the third flow path component 336 from the front side.

  The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending in a rod shape from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 to the front side, an upper front projecting portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376, And an upper horizontal projecting portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376.

  The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed as a pair of left and right holes on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. And is configured to be able to be housed on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

  That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed behind the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336, so that the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c does not contact the ball, and the slide displacement member 3370 Is disposed at the rear side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed over the front-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

  By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, the lower left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, and the ball can be displaced by sliding. Bridges can be made to member 3370.

  Accordingly, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, erroneous guidance of the falling ball can be easily avoided by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c.

  In addition, the arrangement of the sphere passing through the third flow path component 336 is such that the sphere is placed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide 3371c formed flush with the upper surface of the sphere guide 371b. 371b can be prevented from colliding head-on in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball-shaped guide portion 3371c causes the ball to collide with the ball guide portion 371b head-on, causing the ball to flow backward, or the ball being pinched between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. This can make it easier to avoid a situation in which the operation becomes defective.

  The upper front protruding portion 3376b has the same shape as the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, and is the same as the relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. Are formed integrally with the upper protruding portion 376 in the positional relationship described above.

  The upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c has the same shape as the left and right inner protruding portions 318 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, and is the same as the relative position at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. Are formed integrally with the upper front protruding portion 3376b.

  Accordingly, the action of the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c on the abutted ball is an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protruding portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. Occurs.

  In other words, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged fixedly like the front and rear long projecting portion 317 and the left and right inner projecting portion 318 (see FIG. The action of the portions 3376b and 3376c for urging the ball reaching the front position of the upper protruding portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 can be eliminated.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is By being moved to the rear side of SE11, the positive detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) schematically show a configuration on the downstream side of the third channel configuration unit 336 in the fourth embodiment, a third variation detection sensor SE11, and normal detection. It is a schematic top view of sensor SE12 and slide displacement member 4370.

  FIG. 111A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the positive change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the positive change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. In FIG. 111B, the illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for easy understanding.

  The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass, and open the other to allow the ball to pass. The front slide member 4371 that slides left and right and the rear slide member 4375 that slides right and left above the normal detection sensor SE12 are provided.

  The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide and displace in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when the state changes from the front open state shown in FIGS. 110 (a) and 111 (a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110 (b) and 111 (b), the front slide member 4371 moves leftward. , And the rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide to the right.

  The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 disposed so as to cover over the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17). , And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slid and displaced.

  The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane having the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111B), a ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a can flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111A), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a contacts the upper contact portion 4373, receives a load, and flows downward (to the lower right).

  Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front slide member 4371 comes into contact with the ball at a different location, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Is done.

  The rear slide member 4375 has a slide plate 4376 arranged so as to cover the normal detection sensor SE12 and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 17). And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 slide and displace integrally.

  The upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed in a shape opposite to the upper side surface 4372a in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111A). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111A), the ball disposed on the upper side surface 4376a can flow toward the positive change detection sensor SE11 due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111 (b)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, thereby flowing downward.

  Therefore, when the rear side slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the rear side slide member 4375 comes into contact with the ball at a different location, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Be composed.

  With this configuration, the ball that has passed rearward above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return to above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. The attention power to the sphere that has passed through the flow path configuration portion 336 can be improved.

  As a mode of returning to above the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so that the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward on the upper side surface 4372a. You. In this case, the ball normally rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows backward along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the positive change detection sensor SE11 side.

  As described above, when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 matches the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370, the ball can return to the positive change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine configured so that a ball that has passed over the certainty detection sensor SE11 on the downstream side does not pass through the certainty detection sensor SE11, the ball after passing through the third flow path forming part 336 is compared with a gaming machine configured so as not to pass through the certainty detection sensor SE11. The attention to the driving timing of the ball and the slide displacement member 4370 can be improved.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the spherical flow path is common up to the third flow path component 336 and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path component 336 has been described. In the sorting device 5300 in the form, the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed on the upstream side of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the sphere changes on the upstream side of the third flow path component 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the distribution device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position and the ball is guided to the positive change detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370. In FIG. 112 (b), the slide displacement member 5370 is The state in which the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is shown in the left side position.

  Also, in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the first flow path forming part 334 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

  The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and is provided so as to protrude upward from an upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371 which forms a rolling surface of the ball. And an upper protruding portion 5376.

  The thin plate portion 5371 is formed so thin that a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 can ride on. Since the left side surface 5376a facing the sphere of the upper protruding portion 5376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave channel side, the flowing sphere can flow smoothly backward.

  According to the present embodiment, as in the distribution device 5300, the front and rear width of the flow path of the ball is formed longer, and the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is higher than that of the ball flowing on the rear side. While adopting the configuration, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370 is on the near side where the visibility of the ball is high, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the flow-down state (flow-down path) of the ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly closed, and has a structure in which a ball can enter. On the other hand, the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path component 334.

  Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path forming portion 334, a velocity in the reverse direction hardly occurs, so that a ball does not easily enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, provision of a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, and the member cost is reduced.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge has been described. However, in the distribution device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, the right third flow path configuration portion A junction channel 6341 extending to the right from the downstream side of the left curved projection 334b is connected to 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 6300 in the sixth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the distribution device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the distribution device 6300 is formed by a merged flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a space with a space for one ball on the front side of the curved projection 334b. The passage 6341 is connected to the third passage component 336 as the right passage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the spheres flowing down the right flow path and the spheres flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, so that the spheres may collide with each other.

  The junction channel 6341 includes a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This makes it possible to make a difference in the height position between the sphere flowing from the merging flow path 6341 into the connection point JP1 and the sphere flowing down the right flow path and flowing down the third flow path component 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow generated at the time of collision between them.

  The flow of the sphere can be delayed by the contact between the spheres at the connection point JP1 as compared with the case where the sphere does not contact with each other. This makes it possible to change the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1, depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

  Since the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entering mode, the slide displacement member is changed by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1. There is a possibility that the ball can reach the branch point BP1 when the positions 370 are different.

  The premise of the contact between the spheres is that the spheres merge, and that there are spheres flowing down the merge channel 6341. When the player wants to make contact between the balls, the player only has to adjust the firing intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see FIG. 74) and play the balls. If it is desired to avoid the contact, the game may be adjusted by adjusting the firing intensity so that the ball enters only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (right side).

  According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the launching strength of the sphere is related to the presence or absence of contact of the sphere at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the sphere reaches the branch point BP1. , Which directly affects the interests of the player. Therefore, the player's willingness to adjust the firing strength of the ball can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of the open ball. That is, the two balls contacting at the connection point JP1 can be caused to flow down to the branch point BP1 in a state of being arranged close to each other.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow-down path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path constituted by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 has been described. However, in the distribution device 7300 of the seventh embodiment, the flow path is the first flow path. The sphere is configured to be able to flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 114 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 7300 along the line CXV-CXV in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball formed at a substantially central position on the left and right as well as the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a can pass. A passage hole 7163b is provided.

  The ball passing hole 7163b is the same as the detection sensor SE1 that is used to detect a ball entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state based on the determination of the specified number of balls. Is formed as a sphere passage opening of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of.

  On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a tubular channel 7164 extending in a rectangular tubular cross section in a direction inclined downward toward the rear is provided. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow a sphere to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. That is, the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 7163b flows down the inside of the cylindrical flow path 7164, and is configured to be able to reach the branch point BP1.

  The length of time required for the sphere to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336, and the first flow path constituent part It is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through 334.

  Therefore, for example, when the distribution device 7300 is drive-controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, the distribution device 7300 passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path components 334 to 336. The ball that moves can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to the front position, whereas the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b and has flowed down the cylindrical flow path 7164 is the slide displacement member 370. May reach the branch point BP1 while the is located at the rear position.

  In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position.

  That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, whether the ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the ball passage hole 163b or the ball passage hole 7163b, the probability change detection is performed. It can be configured such that whether or not a sphere passes through the sensor SE11 changes. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the downward flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

  As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed in a general direction during a game, the tubular channel 7164 reduces the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the channel components 334 to 336. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so as to avoid it.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while maintaining the visibility of the branch point BP1 high, the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, so that the ball reaches the branch point BP1. The type of time required can be increased, and the player's attention to the specific winning opening 65a can be improved.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the guide long hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 connects the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one place, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connection position to displace the axis O1. Is described, but in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide long holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of places (two places), and at the connection position, the path of the axis O1 is bent and the displacement direction is changed. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 is bent right and left twice below the linear portion 616a.

  That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (substantially arc shape), and a first curved portion thereof. The first curved portion 8616b is connected to a lower end portion of the second curved portion 8616b, and includes a second curved portion 8616c formed on a curved line (substantially circular arc shape) in which the center of the radius of curvature is reversed left and right.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

  In addition, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched. Therefore, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

  As described above, the intermediate position at which the axis O1 can be easily stopped can be configured at a plurality of positions. Therefore, the axis O1 is stopped halfway, and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43) stopped halfway is stopped. The types (variations) of postures can be increased.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 is constituted by a single path has been described. However, in the first operation unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is formed by a straight line. It has a first path composed of the shape part 616a and the curved part 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 117 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide long hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b similarly to the guide long hole 616 of the first embodiment, and also includes a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b. An angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends inclining rightward from the connection portion, and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a middle position of the curved portion 616b. .

  The angle maintaining portion 9616c is used when the rotation member 620 is turned to the tilting side from the state where the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). When it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained, it is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1.

  As described above, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining unit 9616c, so that the posture of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the rotation direction is such that the third production surface 661c faces the front. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

  In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced, the box-shaped member 661 that rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, the posture in which the third production surface 661c faces the front can be maintained over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

  When the axis O1 of the connecting portion 9616d is displaced, a change in the angle θ due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so that the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. .

  On the other hand, even when the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed on the curved portion 616b and the angle when the axis O1 is disposed on the connecting portion 9616d is different from the magnitude of θ, so that the path along which the axis O <b> 1 is displaced differs between the left and right, so that the middle position of the box-shaped member 661 interlocked with the rotation of the rotation member 620 can be changed.

  Also, regardless of whether the axis O1 is displaced on the left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end are of one type. The posture of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or the lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the arrangement of the axis O1 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged between the ends of the displaceable range (middle position) (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1, and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated in a plurality of types. it can.

  The guide slot 9616 is formed of only a plurality of paths, and does not include a mechanism for limiting a path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of operation failure due to the failure of the mechanism that restricts the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

  On the other hand, the branch of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled in the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. Hereinafter, this will be described. First, a case where the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction will be described.

  First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is used so that the turning displacement of the turning member 620 does not stop halfway. Drive control.

  In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b by the inertia of displacement along the direction (vertical direction) in which the linear portion 616a extends, and is displaced as it is to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

  Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the rotating member 620 is provided at the stage where the axis O1 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. The drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is drive-controlled so as to stop or decelerate halfway, and then the drive motor 631 is drive-controlled again in the same direction.

  In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the linear portion 616a extends (vertical direction) is reduced. Therefore, whether the axis O1 displaces the path on the left side or the path on the right side has little displacement resistance. The side is chosen.

  Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, since the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that meshes with the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 is used. Also, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the members downstream of the transmission of the driving force. That is, since the displacement resistance is smaller by that amount, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, control is performed such that the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is selected depending on whether the drive motor 631 is stopped or not stopped in the middle. be able to.

  Note that in the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load directed obliquely to the upper right from the rotating member 620, so that it is less likely that the axis O1 is displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d. The axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting portion between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being upwardly displaced (bounced back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball once flows down to the near side by the distribution device 300 and then flows down backward has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be secured by forming a plurality of path bends or forming a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the ball without forming a part that flows down to the near side.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Any shape can be used as long as the shape can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so as to protrude a large number of fine projections from the plane, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding sphere.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300 and flows down the flow path components 334 to 336 in sequence has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed at the left and right central portions of the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball may be formed so as to be able to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

  For example, when the balls enter the ball one by one, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the ball can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged immediately below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 may be reversed. That is, when entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction, or immediately after the flow in the front-rear direction (flow toward the front side). May branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the flow direction and the inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction of the flow path and the inclination may be designed in consideration of the daily “kick”.

  The term “lay” means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical posture, but installed in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, the pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) that has fallen backward by about one degree (fifty-fourths). In consideration of the installation angle of about 1 degree in comparison with the above description of the distributing device 300 alone (in a state where there is no skein), the first flow path forming portion 334 and the second flow path having the front-back inclination are considered. The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

  That is, in the distributing apparatus 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is inclined downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also examined, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path which is lowered and tilted by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is hardly affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

  In this case, regarding the flow of the sphere in the distribution device 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path component 334 and the sphere in the third flow path component 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path component 335. Become smaller. Therefore, the falling speed of the ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, and the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, since the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336, the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336. Can be passed between.

  As described above, the flow of the ball inside the distribution device 300 is affected by the slapping of the pachinko machine 10 due to the presence of the flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the inclination angle of each of the flow path components 334 and 336 is smaller than the angle of the skewing (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path components 334 and 336 changes depending on the quality of the skewing (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the inclination angle to be larger than the angle of the skewing.

  Further, the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and in a configuration in which the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path causes There is a possibility that the degree of slack of the pachinko machine 10 may be grasped. If one wishes to grasp the degree of skein, a configuration may be adopted in which the flow path of the distribution device 300 is easily visible.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 so as not to grasp the degree of “skew” from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 is arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged so as to cover it on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is configured to lower visibility on the lower side.

  In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made worse, except for the normal player's eyes (a range of 0 ° to about 30 ° in front view). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comprehending the degree of the “pause” of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down the respective flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of the inclination may be reversed, or the inclination may be similar.

  In addition, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a straight flow path, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a channel shape bent stepwise may be used.

  In addition, the flow path is configured so that the flow path is bent at a right angle at the connection point of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, a clune may be used as each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). Thereby, even if the ball enters the distribution device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 is moved downstream of the ball. In this case, the third flow path component 336 can function as a blind for a ball flowing down.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is secured by securing the path length of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protruding ridges are formed from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting with the flow-down direction of the game ball, and are provided alternately so as to collide with the game ball. Thus, the ball may be decelerated. As a result, it is possible to secure the time required for the ball to flow down without increasing the length of the path.

  The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, the first flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335 are not formed with a ridge, and the ridge is formed only in the third flow path forming section 336, so that the third flow path forming section 336 is formed. Up to this point, the sphere can be made to arrive quickly, while the sphere flows down the third flow path component 336 slowly.

  Also, the projecting direction of the ridge may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the flow path of the ball toward the inside of the path, or may be projected upward from the lower side at a predetermined interval. It may be in such a direction.

  In the case of projecting from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. Therefore, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by projecting inward from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the ridge goes to the partition plate portion 338 side without going to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, since the ridge itself may function as a blind of the slide displacement member 370, it is preferable to design the formation height and the formation position in consideration of the line of sight of the player. .

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed to be movable. In this case, the falling of the ball may be dammed in the outgoing state, and the falling of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sunken state.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball is blinded by the ball flowing down on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable makeup member may be arranged in front of the distribution device 300, and the makeup member may blind the flow path components 334 to 336. This decorative member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

  Further, when the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the near side. For example, when a mirror is provided on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is placed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. Then, a blindfold function can be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be disposed behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning openings 63 may be blindfolded. It may be something.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described where the flow path components 334 to 336 are formed of linear flow paths that can guide balls one by one. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or may have a large or small flow path width so that spheres can easily stay there. It may be configured.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect of the blindfold is produced by the ball heading to the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 140 is disposed on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by a discharge path and a ball arranged in the discharge path.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (front side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism sorts the balls flowing to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls are sorted out. The sphere may be made to flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

  The distributing mechanism may be one that is displaced by its own weight of the ball, may be driven by a driving device so as to perform a constant operation from opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a fixed pattern when the pachinko machine is turned on. Control may be performed as follows.

  In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of entering ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows to the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, in a case where a ball (excessive winning) exceeding the counted number (10 / round) is found in a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming unit 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of payouts of the extra prize balls, so that the player can grasp the additional profit obtained at an early stage. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if the number of special symbols 1 to be held is four (full), then if there is an incoming ball, The sphere may be configured to flow to the second flow path forming section 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the ball flowing on the side of the second flow path forming portion 335, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of the special symbol 1 is full. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  When the ball is displaced by its own weight, the predetermined operation may be repeated each time the ball arrives, or a different operation may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming portion 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a. The sphere may flow to the second flow path component 335 side. Alternatively, the reverse may be used.

  In addition, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 disposed on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be different from each other.

  Here, if the ball flows from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, there is a possibility that the game is prolonged due to the long ball discharging time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, up to the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are caused to flow down to the second flow path forming unit 335 side, and the subsequent balls are set to the second You may comprise so that it may discharge | emit without passing through the flow-path formation part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the ball of the counted number to flow down the flow path components 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is disposed above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path components 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or in front view. You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned at the near side of a display area.

  In this case, the line of sight for viewing the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball with the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. It can be easily grasped whether or not it has been acquired.

  Further, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with reference to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily required. It is not limited. For example, the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 is configured so that the ball that rolls on the third flow path forming part 336 does not displace vertically in front view and can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner. Is also good. In this case, not only the ball that has entered the distribution device 300 but also the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball that flows down the third flow path component 336.

  In the first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described. It is not limited to. For example, control may be performed such that the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be made to enter the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows following the preceding ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds elapses enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship functioning as a blindfold for the leading ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the leading ball switches (downward) to the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Being hidden makes it invisible. In addition, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not entered the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the probability change state are made similar to maintain the player's expectation. In a simple gaming machine, the effect of the display effect can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has collided with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 is configured so that the velocity and rotation of the ball until being guided by the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be configured in a plurality of types (for example, a cloon). And increasing the width of the path to increase the degree of freedom of the ball in the downflow direction). Depending on the speed and rotation of the ball, only the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be used. It may be configured to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as a separate body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a sphere was described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at a timing hidden by a sphere may be interwoven.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by forming the outer phase of the gap by changing the width of the guide slot 616, or the displacement resistance may be changed by utilizing the magnetic force or the urging force of the coil spring.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 is configured to be bent at an intermediate position, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent a plurality of times. In this case, a plurality of positions where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 in the vertical direction increases can be formed.

  Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape that can guide the supported member 640 so that a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 in which the axis O1 can move are formed, and the axis O1 is moved by a predetermined switching unit (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that switches by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide slot 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed obliquely to the front left in a state where the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, the rendering surface may be directed obliquely forward and rightward in a state where it is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or may be arranged below (upper side) the third symbol display device 81. The effect surface may be configured to face obliquely upward (downward) to the front.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be arranged on the base end side of the displacement. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the direct-moving member suitably functions to ensure the rotation angles of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  For example, when the member that slides horizontally is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above horizontal (such as the angle a1). Is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (such as the angle b1) can be used. Regardless of this preferred effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the decoration is applied to three side surfaces that intersect at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed in a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side faces the front side.

  In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display easily integrated with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decoration rotation member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-back direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is provided in the vicinity of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet generates an attraction force between the magnet and the magnet provided at the right front plate member 710. May easily occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  Further, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may be formed not in a straight line but in a bent shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Also, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured to generate the biasing force against the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the beveled tooth portion 783c and the beveled tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described. It is not limited to. For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, an allowable value may be provided for sliding friction between a rotating shaft and a support cylinder supporting the shaft.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which it projects to the front side by a downward displacement may be used. In this case, a mode in which the upper edge of the center frame 86 is extended from below to the front, or a mode in which the center frame 86 projects forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14) may be used.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction and the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized in a uniform manner to reduce the discriminating power has been described. is not. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, the embodiment may be configured to rotate while facing the left and right outer sides. In addition, even in the case of rotation in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted to rotate.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member are commonly used in the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 by using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783 and the intermediate arm member 850). The 834 is configured to be rotated (reversed), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case will be described in which the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation has been performed by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state where the detection target portion 844 is disposed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detection unit 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, it is detected that the detection unit 844 has entered the detection sensor 813. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decoration member 870 and the configuration of the second decoration member 880 are different from each other has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be provided on both the decorative members 870 and 880, or the decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of the oil damper, since the resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. It is easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating unit 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear member 833 is disposed on the proximal end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear member 833. When the metal rod 833 is disposed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the light LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. It is.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward and left inward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured so as to be non-slant (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or to be slanted down left and right. May be. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball to the second flow path component 335 as compared to the latter.

  In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path forming portion 335 may be configured not to be inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. May be configured. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball to the third flow path component 336 as compared with the latter.

  Further, the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward in the left-right direction is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-slant (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction. In this case, the degree to which the ball is urged toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so that the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the outer light emitting unit 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer light emitting unit 351d may be configured so that the optical axis passes through the inside of the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point (the arrangement position is lowered). In this case, when the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting unit 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the back side. The state (dark state) that does not reach the light diffusion processing surface 333b can be obtained.

  In other words, while the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d is continued, the flow-down state of the sphere at the branch point and the light diffusion processing surface 333b (and the light diffusion processing surface illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processing surface 333b) 314c, 340). Since each of the light diffusion processing surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's eyes than the sphere, the player can easily understand the flow-down state of the sphere at the branch point. .

  In the first embodiment, the timing of controlling the lighting of the light emitting unit 351 has been described during the big hit game, but the timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light emission control may be performed based on detection of winning in the winning openings 63, 64, 140, or the like, or light emission control may be performed based on an input operation of the frame button 22. Alternatively, the light emission may be performed due to occurrence of a prize exceeding a predetermined number (a number of prizes defining the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of change based on the entry of the prize holes 64 and 140). You may make it control.

  In the first embodiment, when the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is confirmed because the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective. Thus, a case has been described where the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a detection sensor for detecting the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, although not appearing in the manufacturing stage, when the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is shifted due to repeated operation or some external force, the occurrence of the shift is determined by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. It can be determined based on the defect.

  In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is the linear motion displacement in the front-rear direction, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotation operation (for example, a roulette type) may be performed, or a shape portion (for example, a funnel-shaped crune) that makes the flow of the ball irregular may be provided so that the ball can flow in a plurality of directions. good.

  In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is employed as a device for switching whether the ball passes through one of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, it may be employed as a device for guiding a ball to a starting winning opening (winning holes 64 and 140), a device for guiding a ball to a specific winning opening 65a, or other winning openings. Alternatively, it may be adopted as a device for guiding a ball to a winning area.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is disposed at the lower corner of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution device 300 may be arranged at the upper corner (for example, above the center frame 86) of the game area, or at the left and right corners (outer left and right than the left and right edges of the center frame 86). It may be arranged on the center side of the game area. For example, in the case of being arranged at the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player who looks at the distribution device 300 is inclined obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere may be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

  Further, the structure of the flow path components 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the front-rear direction, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be provided near the fixed member 161.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window 162d is designed based on the shapes of the flow path components 335 and 336 and the arrangement of the seal member 313 when viewed from the front is described, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, a shape that allows the slide displacement member 370 (only) to be visually recognized from the player's eyes (obliquely viewed downward) may be used, or a shape that reduces the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 may be used. Further, the shape may be such that one of the front side position and the rear side position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other side is invisible.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the number of spheres entering one flow path can be reduced by disposing the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 in a pair of right and left so as not to join (dispersing the entering spheres). This allows the slide displacement member 370 to switch any of the paths of the spheres that have passed through the respective flow paths, while producing an action that can easily avoid clogging of the spheres.

  In this regard, the shape of the window 162d is such that only one of the pair of left and right configurations (for example, the ball guide 371b and the upper protruding portion 376) of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized and the other cannot be visually recognized. Shape may be sufficient. In this case, it is possible to make the player predict the flow path of the ball on the side where the player cannot visually recognize the ball, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is defined as the backward direction (the forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336). Although the description has been given of the case where the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction is suppressed by sliding, the amount of rotation in the state immediately before the ball falls is suppressed, and the player can be seen as if the ball is temporarily stopped, but it is not necessarily described. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, the direction in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide 371b may be the forward direction (the direction opposite to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

  In other words, the ball guide 371b is displaced in the forward direction so that the ball guide 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, so that the positive change detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to project toward the branch point BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide 371b is displaced so that the ball does not ride on the ball guide 371b, the upper protruding portion 376 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide 371b, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 What is necessary is just to secure the passage of the ball to.

  In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction can be accelerated by sliding the ball at the time of sliding displacement of the ball guide portion 371b. Can be shown to the player as if it had immediately dropped (falled smoothly).

  In the first embodiment, in the control of the rotating member 620, the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is turned off. Although the control mode in which the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off in response to this, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, and the drive motor 631 is rotated slightly weaker and then stopped. Is also good. Thereby, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (the position in the effect standby state).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 are constituted by straight inclined grooves in the second operation unit 700 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve so as to be curved forward at the lower end side, the displacement of the rendering device 780 is adjusted by vertical slide displacement, longitudinal slide displacement, and longitudinal posture displacement. It can be a displacement mode.

  Various shapes are exemplified as the shapes of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762. For example, the shape may be a U-shape (or an inverted U-shape) as viewed in the left-right direction, or may be a shape curved into an S-shape.

  In the first embodiment, in the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, and the driving motor 782 and the covering member 787), the case of displacing so as to avoid the collision has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a design method for avoiding collision between members by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 may be used.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the second operation unit 700, a case is described in which the rotation tip of the rotation arm member 720 is disposed at the left and right positions that match the left and right centers of the rendering device 780 in the extended state as the upper end position. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is disposed closer to the right than the left and right center of the rendering device 780, so that the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the right side of the lifting plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to secure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720. Thereby, the lifting plate member 740 can be stably supported.

  In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that is invariant in shape and visually recognized by a player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individual united state or the union united state. In the union state, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are connected to each other by making the bulging portion 824a partly (central portion) visible to the player. Although the case where the design is made so as to suppress the discomfort has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be provided in a positional relationship where the display portion is provided in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by a change in the irradiation mode (brightness or darkness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the target visually recognized by the bulging portion 824a is displayed on the display unit. Can be changed by switching, so that the degree of freedom of production can be improved.

  Also, for example, the design of one of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is changed so that the shape of the covering portions 875 and 885 is extended toward the center of the circular shape in the united state. The extended portion may be configured to cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, in any one of the individual united state or the union state, the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so that the player does not visually recognize the bulging portion 824a, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion. The degree of restriction on the degree of freedom of design of the portion 885 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are attracted by the magnetic force in the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load due to the uneven engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the urging force of the spring member.

  In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, by adopting an operation mode that gives momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or more than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

  As an operation mode that gives momentum, for example, the rotation may be controlled in the reverse direction as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, a reaction can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in a direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is released radially outward from the combined state. Thereby, it is possible to easily release the suction by the magnetic force.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured so that radial displacement occurs before the reversing operation has been described as a device for suppressing the wobble at the time of the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state is set. Even if the reversing operation occurs before the directional displacement, the magnetic force generated between the plurality of (five) decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the wobble generated in the third operation unit 800 during the switching rotation operation is suppressed. can do.

  In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 perform the 180-degree inversion operation, but are not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to unite again by a 120-degree inversion operation. In this case, before and after the switching operation, the decorative members 870 and 880 have the same visible side in front view, and the viewing angles of the covering portions 875 and 885 are different (for example, before the operation, the rightward direction is 60 degrees). (After the operation, leftward 60 degrees).

  Further, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the length to be non-common, or by forming the formation range and the shape of the beveled tooth portion 854 c to be non-common, 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the united state by the reversal operation of degrees and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the united state by the reversal operation of 120 degrees may coexist. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 is configured to be inverted by 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decoration members 870, 880 are switched in the switching rotation operation. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

  Note that the angle of the inversion operation in the switching rotation operation can be arbitrarily set. The angle may be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair of right and left asymmetrical positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be disposed on the left side, right side, or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or may be arranged at symmetrical positions. You may make it arrange | position on the opposite side (directly opposite side) across the axis | shaft.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured in a common shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by changing the shapes of the supported holes 854a and the guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide and displace along the metal rods 832 are arranged, the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rods 832 can be adjusted. 833 may be different from each other.

  For example, by changing the design so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole having a large diameter and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 whose design of the shape of the guide hole 854b is correspondingly changed, the linear movement in the switching rotation operation is performed. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833.

  Thus, the decoration members 870 and 880 have a difference in the displacement timing from the united state of the decoration members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear motion member 833 to the radially outward position. Therefore, the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

  In this case, the load for removing the suction can be reduced, so that the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

  In addition, it is not necessary to cause the displacement mode in which the displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) occurs in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 every time. For example, it is configured such that the displacement mode that causes the displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the united state (outbound path), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation reaches the united state (return path). May be.

  For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is changed from a united state (a state where the rotating tip is disposed on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 are disposed at the outermost diameter position. The manner in which the intermediate arm member 850 is rotated is different from the manner in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions, and the intermediate arm portion i850 is rotated into a united state. With this configuration, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode in which a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) is caused in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

  In the first embodiment, the number of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 has been described for each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where the extension 634b can be detected, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two detection sensors KS1 may be used. The following or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. In addition, as an arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extension portion 634b of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state or the overhang state can be detected is exemplified.

  Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, and a plurality of detection sensors 813 instead of one detection sensor 813 are arranged at positions where the detection target 844 can be detected. You may comprise so that it may be. As the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, five arrangements (rotational) of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state of the third operation unit 800 are provided. (5 modes differing in direction).

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the rolling of the ball is continued irrespective of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be equal to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front-side arrangement FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball is enhanced. In addition, stagnation of the ball can be easily caused.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the description that the protrusion is formed inside the first flow path component 2334 is not described, but the protrusion that decelerates the ball is provided in the first flow path component 2334. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the arranging height of the ridge is brought into contact with one of a ball that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front position FP and a ball that the slide member 2420 rides on the bottom surface 2334c at the time of the rear arrangement BP. Alternatively, the height may be set so as not to contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action by the ridge can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in the front arrangement FP or the rear arrangement BP.

  In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 has been described in the case where the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c are integrally formed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a state in which the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c as separate members protrude and retract in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is disposed at the front side position and the rear side position, and contact the ball. And a non-contact state may be configured.

  Note that the front and rear arrangement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all. However, as in the present embodiment, when the probability change detection sensor SE11 is provided on the rear side, an error Winning can be easily avoided.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured as separate members, and may be configured to perform a synchronous operation (interlock) at the same time. In addition, you may comprise so that it may slide in the front-back direction.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the slide members 4371 and 4375 slide and displace at the timing when the ball has passed backward on the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front side due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball detection sensor may be provided behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

  In this case, when the state is changed from the rear open state to the front open state, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 can be guided to the additional ball detection sensor. The profit obtained by the player when the ball enters the additional ball detection sensor (for example, a plurality of jackpots may be acquired or ranked higher than the right obtained by entering the probability change detection sensor SE11). Of the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336, the greater the power to shift to the probable change state.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, near the raised floor portion 6342, the connecting portion JP1 side may be configured as a curved flow path facing backward. Thereby, both the sphere that enters the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the sphere that enters the connection point JP1 from the second flow path component 335 can have a backward velocity component, and these can be used. The collision can prevent the backflow from occurring.

  Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the left and right center positions of the distribution device 6300. Further, the structure of the flow path components 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the front-rear direction, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be provided near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the spheres flow toward the near side after gathering at the connection point JP1, and it is possible to improve the attention to the spheres flowing inside the distribution device 6300.

  In the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is configured as a slot having a branch, and it is configured to switch where the axis O1 passes through the guide slot 9616 depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide long hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as a long hole. And the case where the long hole is closed may be alternately switched. In this case, since the axis O1 can be prevented from being displaced along an erroneous path, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

  For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a guide valve 9616 having a branch is provided with a switching valve that restricts the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing any path. In this case, while the shape of the guide slot 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be limited by the switching valve, so that the axis O1 can be prevented from being displaced along an erroneous path. It is possible to prevent the member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, control examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 87, as a first control example, a control example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 120 is a front view area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 121 is a schematic view schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 provided, and FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 118) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably mounted from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that fires a ball on the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. A firing rail (not shown) or the like that guides the user is provided. The contents of a number of entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 118), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 119) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 119) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17 has a lower plate 50 formed in the center thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off. That is, in the present control example, a firing means for firing a ball to a game area formed on the game board 13 and a firing for varying the firing intensity based on the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the operation handle 51. Intensity varying means. Thereby, the player can perform the act of firing the ball using the firing means and the act of varying the firing intensity of the ball by simply operating the operation handle 51. Accordingly, an operation of firing a ball toward a specific game area in the game area formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, and the game can be executed without imposing an excessive burden on the player. be able to.

  In the present control example, the firing intensity is varied based on the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the operation handle 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player can select the firing intensity. It is also possible to provide such a configuration that the launch means launches a sphere at a launch intensity corresponding to the operation result (selection result) of the launch intensity selection button.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the first entrance opening 64, the second entrance opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the ordinary symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 118). Hereinafter, a configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 119.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 118) surround the front and rear, so that a ball is placed on the front of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 119) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). The configuration is such that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 includes a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be able to operate when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (wins). In other words, the first symbol display device 37 performs the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and the ball enters the second entrance 640. This is a display means for displaying a lottery result of a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball is entered. In this control example, since the pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is used, the first symbol display device 37 uses two types of special symbol lottery ( The result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one special symbol type (first special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 responds to one type of special symbol. What is necessary is just to provide a display area.

  In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate the current gaming state (for example, the normal state, the time saving state, the probable change state) of the pachinko machine 10 by an illuminated state, or displays a special symbol (the first symbol). Whether the symbol is changing (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating a lottery result) is indicated by a lighting state, or the stopped symbol corresponds to a jackpot advantageous to a player. A lighting state indicates whether a symbol is a symbol corresponding to an unfavorable jackpot or an unsuccessful symbol, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a seven-segment display device. In addition, it is configured to be able to indicate in a lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated by a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emission colors. In the present control example, the various game states are notified by the combination of the light emission colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, various game states may be notified by changing the length (blinking mode) of a period during which the light emitting unit is turned on and a period during which the light emitting unit is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when there is a ball (winning) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the open state is attained in which a ball can be easily won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and a large number of winning balls are short-lived by allowing the specific winning opening 65a to win balls. The game which can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in a case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display), and an opening period (specific winning port of the variable winning device 65) of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is performed. A period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball 65a), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big jackpot game period is set.

  As described above, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball can be played at the timing when the specific winning opening 65a is opened during the jackpot game. Can be prepared to be fired in any direction, so that the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game to the player, an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  Also, by setting the ending period as the last period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the last round game, Since preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be executed, the game can be switched smoothly.

  As will be described in detail later, in this control example, a plurality of types of jackpot games are configured to be executable, and the number of round games (round number) to be executed during the jackpot game is determined according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. ) And the gaming state set after the end of the big hit game are configured to be different. With this configuration, the player can be interested in not only the presence / absence of a jackpot winning by a special symbol lottery but also the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning.

  In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning, the winning state, and the like. A different length may be set according to the type of the jackpot, for example, when the game content that is different from the game content at the time of the jackpot win is set as the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is won. , The ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of another jackpot game (for example, 2 seconds), and during the ending period, It is good to be able to perform the effect which guides the game content executed after the big hit game in advance. Thereby, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the end of the jackpot game are won, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is changed to the other jackpot game. It is preferable to set so as to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

  Also, without using a configuration to actually determine the game content at the time of the jackpot winning and the game content executed after the jackpot game is completed, for example, based on the type of the jackpot won and the game state at the time of the jackpot winning Then, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the specified content.

  Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, two states (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) having different probabilities of winning a jackpot in special symbol lottery, and A combination of two states (a high probability state of a normal symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol) having different probabilities of winning in the lottery of a normal symbol that can be set can be set to three types of gaming states. Specifically, a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), a time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol), and a probable change state (high probability of special symbol) (Probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) can be set. Both the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery are configured to be easier to win in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. Out of a plurality of game states that can be set, the probable change state is a game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery than the other game states, and the probable change state and the time saving state are more normal than the other game states It becomes a gaming state in which it is easy to win in the symbol lottery.

  In addition, in the case of winning in the normal symbol lottery, a hit game (general symbol game) in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed is executed. Specifically, the power-geared accessory 640 attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and a general per-game is provided in which a state is provided in which the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the probable change state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, are set, the gaming state becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the other gaming states. Further, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the period from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result (dynamic display period) is a low probability of the ordinary symbol. The configuration is such that a shorter period is more easily set than when the state is set. Therefore, when the strange state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time than in the other gaming states, so a new special symbol It becomes a game state in which it is easy to execute a lottery.

  Although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and only when the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game, A special symbol high probability state can be set after the big hit game is over. Then, according to the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game) And are configured to be executable. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area during the jackpot game is referred to as a probable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the probable jackpot game is executed is referred to as a probable jackpot. A disadvantage jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which a ball hardly passes through a specific area during a jackpot game is referred to as a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed is referred to as a normal jackpot.

  In the present control example, if a special symbol lottery is not won in a jackpot, it is determined to be out of place, and a bonus is not given to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In some of the cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, a privilege for opening the variable winning device 65 only for one round) is small. The winning game may be configured to be executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot (whether or not it is a small jackpot) as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot. Is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. At the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entrances 63a are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a change of a special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37 when a ball (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is triggered. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the ball, There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays an ordinary symbol (second symbol) with the passage as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display content by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three upper, middle, and lower symbol columns ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is: It is composed of ten types of main symbols to which identification information imitating the numbers “1” to “9” are attached. These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present control example, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the main symbol sz is formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each piece of identification information that imitates a number. As described above, by using the character corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game easily. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. After the game is over, a big hit game is generated. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 is configured such that a symbol row is formed such that numbers are ascending from right to left, and is scrolled and displayed from right to left. The row of symbols Z2 and the row of lower symbols Z3 are formed such that the symbols are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variably manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) fz which does not show the result of the lottery of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols sz. In FIG. 122 (b), a blank symbol (sub symbol) fz is displayed using a symbol imitating a triangle.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed vertically and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed diagonally. In a state in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbol (main symbol sz) is arranged on the pay line in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present control example, the same combination of main symbols). If stopped, a big hit movie is displayed as a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), in the present control example, each of the activated lines (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Until all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in the 81 main display area Dm are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in the present control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stopped and displayed, the user can be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In the present control example, a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2) among the three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3) described above, that is, a symbol row in which the variable display is stopped and displayed last among a plurality of symbol rows. In contrast, the number of main symbols is configured to be larger than other symbol columns. Specifically, the number of main symbols to which a specific number (for example, the number “4”) is added is larger than that of other symbol columns. Thereby, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state, the jackpot symbol passing on the activated line (in which the specific number is imitated) is more than when the identification information is in the reach state with other identification information. Since the number of (identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player has a high expectation of the jackpot winning.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Furthermore, a configuration in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Is reduced, or the variable display area is moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). (Including the difference of the third symbol), but the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in front view, and a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper right of front view. The small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating a special symbol lottery status (whether or not a lottery is in progress (change) and a lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the fourth symbol (showing the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) (Special figure 2 fourth design) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  The small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information for indicating the lottery status of the ordinary symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. A fourth symbol (fourth symbol in the ordinary figure) for indicating the lottery situation in FIG. 7 is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122 (b)) to indicate the situation where the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 122). 122 (b) small display area Dm2), is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol, a plurality of colors By using the display mode that indicates the number, the display mode that changes the color indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, and the display mode that indicates the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, so that the special symbol lottery result is displayed. May be configured to indicate

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (changing) and the lottery result) by using the fourth symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changed). Further, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), in the present control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is the main display area Dm. On the upper left side, an example is shown in which a general figure fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which a general figure fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the ordinary symbols is displayed is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. However, the position and size at which the fourth symbol display area is formed may be changed in accordance with the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a region in which the variable effect is executed from being restricted by the fourth symbol display region and the ordinary symbol fourth symbol display region, and to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect. . In this case, the fourth symbol display area and the ordinary figure fourth symbol display area are deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is removed. It may be configured to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 122A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage) are displayed. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example performs the case where the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display or the case where the winning game is being executed, that is, executing a new special symbol lottery. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in a state where the ball cannot be entered, the number of times of entry is reserved up to four times for each entrance. The same number of suspended symbols displayed as the number of suspended balls displayed on the sub-display area Ds is displayed. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of retained balls stored for entering a ball into the first entrance port 64 is four, and the maximum value of the number of retained balls is stored for entering a ball into the second entrance port 640. Since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the sub-display area Ds is partitioned into a running area Ds1a and a waiting area Ds1b. The waiting area Ds1b is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and includes eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the upper limit number (eight) that can be reserved and stored. They are displayed in order from the left. Then, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal of the youngest number in which the reserved symbol is not displayed among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8.

  In the example shown in FIG. 122 (b), four reserved balls of the first special symbol are retained and stored, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) is stored in the waiting area Ds1b. Four (hz1 to hz4) reserved symbols (hz1 to hz4) corresponding to the display mode (white circle) corresponding to (ball) are displayed on the first pedestal hr1 to the fourth pedestal hr4.

  The active area Ds1a is a display area in which the pending symbol displayed in response to the special symbol variation currently being executed is shifted and displayed, and the active pending symbol hz0 is displayed on the executing pedestal hr0. You. That is, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hz1 displayed on the pedestal hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the pedestal hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. With such a configuration, for example, when a notice effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol) indicating the expectation of the jackpot winning is executed for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. Further, the player can easily determine that the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the announcement effect has been executed is being executed.

  In addition, by enabling the display of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change being executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol can also be executed for the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game for a longer time than expected when the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change being executed is not displayed, while expecting that the mark form of the reserved symbol is changed.

  In the present control example, according to the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbol being displayed indicates the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved symbol). Or the reserved symbol indicating the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved symbol), so that the player can identify it. The special symbol 1 reserved symbol is a white circle (FIG. 122). (See (b)), the special figure 2 reserved symbol is displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124 (a)). This allows the player to know the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol, so that the ball can be inserted into the first entrance 64 based on the display content of the reserved symbol. This makes it easy to determine whether to continue the game.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (b), in the present control example, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol is displayed, and the pedestal of the youngest number (the pedestal of the youngest number is The special symbol lottery is configured to be executed using the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed on the pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order used for the special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order in which the reserved balls are acquired, and a special symbol is displayed for each reserved symbol. The digestion order information for indicating the order used for the lottery may be added. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner at which timing the reserved ball acquired corresponds to which reserved symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), a maximum of eight reserved symbols can be displayed side by side. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And a special figure 2 reserved symbol display area may be displayed separately. In this case, for example, when the game state (normal state) where it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 hold is set, the display area of the special figure 1 hold symbol is displayed more prominently than the display area of the special figure 2 hold symbol. However, when a game state (probable change state, time saving state) in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 hold is set, the display area of the special figure 2 hold symbol is displayed more prominently than the display area of the special figure 1 hold symbol. May be configured.

  In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical with respect to the left and right, and a right-handed game and a left-handed game are performed. In the case where the same game result is provided, there is no display, but for example, depending on the set game state, the right-handed game rather than the left-handed game If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a case where the left-handed game becomes a more advantageous game method than a right-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Alternatively, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  To describe in more detail, as a guidance display area, a display mode of “right-handed” for guiding a player to perform a right-handed game, and a display of a left-handed game for the player. And a display mode of “left-handed” for guiding the player may be displayed, and a display mode of “right-handed” may be displayed in a gaming state in which right-handed gaming is advantageous to the player, for example, a probable change state. It is displayed during the time-saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of “left-handed” may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Also, in the game state where the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the “left-handed” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is preferably displayed. Further, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above control examples may be appropriately displayed.

<About the effect contents of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131, a description will be given of characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. do. First, a display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is reached in a normal state (normal state). In this control example, the third symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z2, and a large hit is made on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122 (a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the winning, the reach state is established, and the upper symbol row Z1 as a part of the third symbol combination indicating the jackpot winning, An effective line in which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is set as a reach valid line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. After the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 shifts by one low speed (the main symbol (the third symbol simulating a number)) at which the player can visually recognize each piece of identification information (the third symbol). (The time required for about 0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the present control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols (one each of the main symbols numbered “1” to “3”, “5” to “9”, and “4”). Therefore, when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed at a low speed, the time required for one round is 5 seconds (0.5 × 0.5 ×). 10). Then, the middle symbol row Z2 that is variably displayed at a low speed is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the satisfaction of a specific transition condition.

  Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the reach state is determined by any third symbol (in FIG. 123 (a), identification information imitating “9” (third symbol imitating a crab)). , The middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)) that is variably displayed during the reach is the first identification information (the third symbol imitating an octopus) imitating the number "1". The low-speed fluctuation display is executed so as to be visually recognizable.

  In addition, in the present control example, the effect form of the variable effect is configured to be variable according to the change state of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state, and, for example, the medium state after the reach state is reached. Different rendering mode (reach mode) at the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes one round (after 5 seconds have passed since the low-speed fluctuation display was executed) and at the timing when the symbol row Z2 passed twice (after 10 seconds passed after the low-speed fluctuation display was executed) It is configured so that it can be changed to. Therefore, as in the present control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 which can be visually recognized first after entering the reach state, different presentation modes (reach modes) are provided to the player at any timing. Can be easily understood.

  In the present control example, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is the timing of one round of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state or the timing of two rounds, but is not limited thereto. For example, the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach is stopped) which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state is determined from the timing at which the reach effective line is passed or the identification information which becomes the combination indicating the jackpot. You may be comprised so that the shifted identification information may change to a different production mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this way, the game is configured such that the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information of which the reach is stopped is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach valid line. It is possible to give a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination and the timing at which it is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode). More specifically, the identification information (identification information that is the same as the identification information in which the reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating the jackpot after the reach state, is changed to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this case, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning combination for the player and the timing at which it is changed to a different effect mode (reach mode) are overlapped. The identification information (the same identification information as the identification information of which the reach has been stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot, is closely watched for the fluctuation effect while giving the player a great sense of expectation when approaching the reach effective line. Can be done.

  Here, in the present control example, as described above, a specific identification state (the third symbol imitating the numeral “1”) is first visible regardless of the reach state in any of the third symbols. The middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed at a low-speed fluctuation so that the third symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one kind with respect to the third symbol combination which is a big hit. (When the final stop display mode is determined in advance), until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed after the reach state (the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed). ) Is different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Specifically, when the reach state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number “1”, the middle symbol row Z2 is a low-speed fluctuation display with the third symbol imitating the number “1” as a specific symbol. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame off the reach as the final stop display mode, 5.5 seconds (first lap) and 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the reach state are set. In short, when the reach state is reached with the third symbol imitating the numeral "6", the middle symbol row Z2 is a low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol imitating the numeral "1" as a specific symbol. In the final stop display mode, it takes 8 seconds (first lap) and 13 seconds (second lap) from the reach state to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 at one frame off the reach.

  Therefore, in order to establish the reach state with different types of third symbols in the variation pattern in which the same variation time is set, the timing of reaching the reach state from the stop display timing of the third symbol is set in reverse. Processing had to be performed. In other words, there is a problem that a reach effect without uniformity is performed in which the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach state is changed according to the type of the third symbol in the reach state, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by the main controller 110 by lottery, and the determined fluctuation is determined. The time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation display effect of the effect period that matches the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command, synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the first symbol, and displays the fluctuation display effect of the third symbol. Is executed. The fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an addition time command indicating a fluctuation time to be added. The type of the third symbol in the reach state is varied based on the length of time. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as an addition time. You. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is added as the addition time. In other words, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify the fluctuation type that is longer than the basic time by 7 seconds based on the notification content of the addition time command. Thus, the type of the third symbol to be in the reach state can be set only by confirming the content of the addition time command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123 (b) to FIG. 126, description will be given on the effect contents regarding the second special symbol change (lottery) executed when the normal state is set. First, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation that has been won in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation in which the winning has been won in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the ordinary symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the ordinary symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. . Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 that is opened in a game per ordinary drawing is displayed therein, and the small display area Dm3 is displayed. Is displayed (indicated by six lines in the figure) for notifying the player that is formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 123 (b), since the winning winning ordinary symbol change is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is a display imitating the electric accessory 640 in the closed state. It is an aspect. With this configuration, the game will be executed soon for the player. It can be predicted that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 123 (b), an example has been described in which the normal symbol fluctuation being won is being executed, but a part of the normal symbol fluctuation in which the lottery result is out of execution (for example, the deviation fluctuation). (Probability of 1/100), a small display area Dm3 is formed, and an effect (gase effect) of displaying an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 is executed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the currently executed normal symbol change (out-of-position change) is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, the effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when the winning has not been won in the ordinary symbol lottery, so that the per-figure per game is executed for the player. The game can be performed while expecting the game to be performed. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), the effect of suggesting the start of the per-figure game by displaying an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 in the small display area Dm3 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a comment suggesting the start of a per-map game is displayed in a part of the sub display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

  In addition, a configuration may be employed in which the start of the game per ordinary figure is indicated using the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm. In this case, only when the special symbol change is executed while the normal symbol change is executed, the effect indicating that the game is executed per ordinary symbol will be executed. The player passes the ball through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter the ball than the first entrance opening 64, which is the execution trigger, and suggests the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in advance to the player who is executing only the ordinary symbol lottery. Will not be done. Therefore, a bonus (execution of an effect that suggests the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in advance) can be given to a player who is performing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the ordinary symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in the present control example is set as an execution condition that the special symbol change is executed or the game of firing the ball is continuously executed. You may.

  In addition, depending on the content of the game being executed, it may be configured to vary the degree of expectation of the suggested effect that suggests the start of the game per ordinary figure, for example, if the game is played normally In the case where a suggestion effect indicating the start of the per-figure game is executed, the per-figure game is executed at a rate of almost 100%, and the game (only the normal pattern lottery is executed without executing the special symbol lottery) If the player is playing a normal game, that is, if he or she is not playing a normal game, even if a suggestion effect indicating the start of the game is executed, only about 10% of the figure is You may comprise so that a game may not be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the hitting game to grasp the start timing of the game per ordinary figure based on the suggested effect to be executed, and impose a penalty. Can be.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (regular drawing reservation) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery can be determined in advance. Then, a command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, the stage prior to the execution of the normal symbol change, which is winning the suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the game per day, that is, the stage where the pre-discrimination result is the winning of the day-posting, which is the winning. Thus, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that the game per day is to be executed soon. In this case, the suggestion effect may be configured to be executed in an effect mode that is difficult for the player to understand, rather than the suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 123 (b). As a result, or a preliminary determination result for the acquired special figure reservation, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the same effect mode as the effect indicating the effect, and a situation advantageous to the player is achieved by the executed suggestion effect. You may be comprised so that a player may be notified only of coming soon.

  In this way, it can be seen that the more the divergence between the timing at which the per-figure game is actually executed and the execution timing of the suggested effect, the more the difference between the timing of the suggested effect and the mode of the suggested effect to indicate to the player that the per-figure game is performed. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggested effect is a game per ordinary figure, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggested effect is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124 (a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when a game per ordinary figure (game per long open) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 124 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when a game per ordinary figure (game per long open) is executed in a normal state (during a normal state). In the present control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the ordinary symbol executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is designed. The variation time of the symbol variation is designed to be 10 seconds. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, in any of the case where the right-handed game is executed and the case where the left-handed game is executed, about 1/2 of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67. ing. Further, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols (regular symbol reservation) can be stored.

  That is, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the winning is performed per ordinary figure at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when a winning is made in the normal state, the game is executed such that the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds to execute the game (the long opening). Further, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first entrance 64, the ball fired only by continuing the game aiming at the first entrance 64 becomes the second entrance. It is configured to be able to enter the ball entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second entrance 640 in the game-per-game in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol generated with a low probability. I have.

  When a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), in the small display area Dm2, a combination indicating that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is a hit (two combinations in the figure). With a circle, the identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the per-game per-game is executed. Then, a comment “Aim for the electric chute” is displayed above the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the open electric chute (electric accessory 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. In addition, since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executable in parallel (overlapping), the third symbol variation display and the small display executed in response to the special symbol variation are performed. The variable display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the normal symbol game.

  In addition, the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds indicates the number of holding memories (special figure 2 holding balls) of the second special symbol acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. Special figure 2 reserved symbol (shown by a black circle in the figure) indicates the number of the first special symbol retained memory (special figure 1 reserved ball) that has been acquired. (The left side of the waiting area Ds1b). That is, the state shown in FIG. 124 (a) is a state after four or more balls enter the second entrance 640 during the game per ordinary drawing, and the special figure 2 is reserved at the upper limit number. This shows a state after obtaining four pieces.

  In this control example, since the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 holding ball acquired later is acquired first. The special symbol lottery is executed prior to the special figure 1 reserved ball. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery can be successively executed with priority in a case where the game per normal drawing is executed during the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 reserved balls are obtained. As a result, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect with one period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Can be.

  In the present control example, the acquired special figure 1 holding ball and special figure 2 holding ball are displayed side by side (up to eight display) in the waiting area Ds1b. If the special figure 1 reserved ball display area displaying only the FIG. 1 reserved ball and the special figure 2 reserved ball display area displaying only the special figure 2 reserved ball are used, the special symbol lottery is executed with priority. If the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not acquired, the special figure 1 reserved ball display area is displayed so as to be more prominent than the special figure 2 reserved ball display area, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired. In this case, it is preferable to switch and display the special figure 2 reserved sphere display area more prominently than the special figure 1 reserved sphere display area. With this configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed next.

  The display screen shown in FIG. 124 (a) is continuously displayed until one of the end timing of the game per ordinary symbol in the normal state or the start timing of the second special symbol change in the normal state. It is configured so that: In other words, even during the per-game play, if the second special symbol change is started, a chance zone effect described later with reference to FIG. 124 (b) is executed. On the other hand, in the case where the second special symbol change is not started even when the end timing of the game per ordinary symbol is reached, for example, during the execution of the first special symbol change in which the long change time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected. When the game per day (5 seconds) is executed, the character "waiting for chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. 2. A standby screen is displayed to notify the player that the special symbol change has started.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), when the game per common symbol is executed during the first special symbol change, the main display area Dm corresponding to the first special symbol change being executed. While continuously displaying the third symbol variation effect (displayed with three arrows in the figure) executed in the above, the third symbol variation effect is displayed in a part of the main display area Dm (the small display area Dm3 formed at the lower right in the figure). In this case, the display area used to display that the per-figure game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed. May be varied, for example, when the first special symbol variation being executed is a big hit, the small display area Dm3 is formed smaller than the example shown in FIG. Or the small display area Dm3 is not formed. Then good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating the jackpot winning from being reduced by forming the small display region Dm3. In addition, when the normal symbol hitting game is started without forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol change (first special symbol change) being executed is a big hit change. Therefore, the player can watch the operating state of the electric accessory 640 even in a state where the execution of the per-figure-per-game is not notified in the small display area Dm3. When such a configuration is used, it may be configured such that even in a case where the special symbol variation being executed is not a jackpot variation (is a deviation variation), the same effect as the jackpot variation is executed. .

  On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol fluctuation) during execution is a deviation fluctuation or when the special symbol fluctuation is not executed, the small display area Dm3 is set to a smaller size than the example shown in FIG. It may be configured to be large or to display that the game per ordinary drawing has been executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm.

  That is, in a limited area such as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, when it is necessary to display a plurality of pieces of information (lottery results and winning game situations) in an overlapping manner, information that is advantageous to the player. May be displayed in priority, and may be displayed in various display modes based on the technical idea. In this case, the advantageous information may differ depending on the player.For example, some players may use information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery as advantageous information. Some players use low-ratio productions as advantageous information. Therefore, an operation means that can be operated by the player and an advantage degree selection that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation on the operation means. And a display mode corresponding to various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the degree of advantage selected by the degree of advantage selection means. Thereby, various information can be displayed in a display mode in which it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Next, the effects in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (b) to 126. FIG. 124 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 124 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed during the normal state, a comment of “entering a chance zone” is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period which is set to a period until all special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (change). It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the last second special symbol lottery (change) is completed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the current period is the advantageous period in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, the character "" Probable GET high probability "" is displayed as a guide display mode for indicating that a probable change state can be acquired with a high probability. Although the detailed description will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same, but it is larger than in the case of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery. In the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probable change state is easily set after the big hit game is over. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the jackpot win in which the chance zone period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is more probable than the period other than the chance zone in the normal state is obtained. Since the period is easy to perform, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the character "Probable GET High Probability" is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating that the probable change state can be acquired with a high probability.

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear that a plurality of special symbol changes are executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change) is performed. It is configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124 (a)) showing the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is not displayed, and the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. In the small display area Ds12, the number of reserved special figure 2 (in the figure, the number of reserved special figure 2 is “2” indicating that the number of reserved special figure 1 is two). "3") indicating that the number is three is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 124B, the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is smaller than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds (see FIG. 124A). Since it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in the chance zone, it can be assumed that a plurality of special symbol lotteries (changes) are actually executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the present control example, the number of special figure reservations is displayed using a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this. During the zone, the number of reserved special figures may not be notified to the player, or a special figure may be provided in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). You may be comprised so that the figure reservation number may be alert | reported. Further, it may be configured so that the player cannot easily identify the number of special figure reservations. The display may be switched to a display mode in which the color can be changed. In such a configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of special figure reservations, it is possible to prevent the current number of special figure reservations from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effects as in the present control example can be obtained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), a character 1801 imitating a rabbit indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. As described above, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed in parallel (overlap), the period in which the game per ordinary symbol is executed is the first special symbol lottery. There is a case where it overlaps during the fluctuation period (see FIG. 124A) and a case where it does not overlap. In the case where a game per common symbol is executed during the period of change of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the currently executed first special symbol change is completed, and the first special symbol is drawn. If it does not overlap during the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the per-figure game (during the per-figure game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is different depending on the variation state of the first special symbol when the game per ordinary game is executed, and the currently executed special symbol variation is changed to the first special symbol. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the change is the change or the second special symbol change.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the second special symbol change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to inform the player of the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125 (a) and FIG. 126, among the variable effects performed in the chance zone, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special fluctuation effect, and FIG. 125 (b) shows a special figure 2 holding ball. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special fluctuation effect executed in a state where the special figure 2 is obtained. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen at the time of restarting the 3rd symbol in the special fluctuation effect performed in the state which is not performed.

  Here, the effect contents of the special fluctuation effect (pseudo fluctuation effect) will be described. This special fluctuation effect is a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation and then restarted. This is a pseudo fluctuation effect that makes it seem that the pattern fluctuation has been executed. First, a reach effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special fluctuation effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. ), The third symbol is tentatively stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is indicated by a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, the character “sorry” indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a chance is given to the player. It is configured to make it seem that one second special symbol lottery executed during the zone has been missed. In other words, in the first half period of the special fluctuation effect, the special first effect in which the reach effect having the expectation for the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) with the effect result indicating the deviation is executed.

  After that, in the latter half period (about 30 seconds) of the special fluctuation effect, a fluctuation effect (special second half effect) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special latter half effect is configured so that the effect form is made different according to the number of reserved special figure 2 reservations. For example, in the state where the special figure 2 reservation ball is secured, FIG. As shown in FIG. 126, the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone, and in the state where the special figure 2 holding ball is not secured, as shown in FIG. Is performed in an effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol change executed after the end of the special symbol effect. That is, in the present control example, as the special variation effect, the type of the special symbol variation executed after the second special symbol variation being executed is terminated is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the effect corresponding to the determination result is provided. The effect mode of the special second-stage effect is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly think that a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one second special symbol change.

  Further, in the present control example, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone (see FIG. 125 (b)), the acquired special figure 2 reserved number The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the latter half of the period is made different. Although detailed description is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reserved ball nor the special figure 1 reserved ball is secured at the time of executing the special fluctuation effect, the special figure shown in FIG. Without performing the temporary stop display of the three symbols, one variation effect (variation effect that does not cause the third symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed) is performed using the entire variation period of the second special symbol variation. It is configured as follows. As a result, the above-described special fluctuation effect is executed only in a state where the number of special figure reservations is secured, so that a plurality of special symbol fluctuations are executed during one second special symbol fluctuation. I can make you think strongly.

  In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, an effect mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the acquired number of reserved special symbol 2 reservations. It is configured to be. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five or more times, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the second special symbol change being executed is a big hit. As described above, in the present control example, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the third symbol is temporarily stopped and the case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed. hard. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed, and it is assumed that the temporary stop display is performed five times or more. In spite of this, it can be assumed that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached five, and it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the effect result.

  It should be noted that other configurations may be used as the effect form of the special fluctuation effect. For example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol change. May be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol displayed temporarily during the second special symbol change is displayed. At least a part (for example, the background color, the effect of the third symbol, and the like) of the special variation effect may be configured to be changed stepwise according to the number of times. In addition, a display mode (for example, the first time and the second time) indicating the number of times of the temporary stop display may be displayed at a timing when the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again.

  As shown in FIG. 126, when the special fluctuation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserve ball is not secured, the character “CHANCE ZONE END” is displayed as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. An effect in which the variable display of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm is a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variable display in which the third symbol varies in the horizontal direction). Since the mode is executed as a special second half effect, after the player is made to think that the chance zone has ended, the effect result of the special fluctuation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Become. Therefore, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player.

  Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present control example, among the second special symbol fluctuations during the normal state, the above-described special fluctuation effect is executed in a part, and otherwise, a single second special symbol fluctuation is performed. On the other hand, it is configured such that one fluctuation effect is executed. Therefore, when a plurality of (four at maximum) special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired in a per-figure game, it is possible to prevent the special fluctuation effect from being executed unnecessarily long.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the effect content performed during the jackpot ending period in the present control example will be described. FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127 (b) is an ending of the probable variable jackpot game. FIG. 127 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the period. FIG. 127 (c) is a display mode displayed in the second half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. FIG. 127 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game. .

  In the present control example, if the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (probable jackpot game) in which a probable change state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, is likely to be set, The jackpot ending period is set to be longer than in the case of a jackpot game (usually a jackpot game) in which the probable change state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, is difficult to set. Specifically, it is configured that 17 seconds is set as the big hit ending period in the probability changing big hit game, and 15 seconds is set as the big hit ending period in the normal big hit game. With this configuration, during the ending period (before the probable change state is set), the player is notified that the game content is greatly changed via the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the probable change state). It can be informed clearly. Further, the content of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game can be notified to the player using a long ending period.

  Further, in the present control example, as described above, even if the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the ball won by the variable winning device 65 must flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). The probable change state is configured not to be set. Therefore, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the probability-change jackpot game, the probability-change state is not set after the completion of the probability-change jackpot game, and the time is reduced similarly to the normal jackpot game. A state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

  In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability change state is set during the ending period of the probability change jackpot game is executed, the effect content of the notification effect differs from the actually set game state, and the player There was a problem of giving dissatisfaction. Further, when the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the ending period of the probability change jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the effect mode of the notification effect performed in the ending period of the normal jackpot game (15 seconds), There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period is different from the length of the production period of the notification effect, so that the notification effect is performed with a sense of incongruity for the player.

  Therefore, in the present control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the big hit game. I have. And it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of the notification effect performed in a latter half period may be determined according to the game state set after a big hit game is over.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when the normal jackpot game is executed, the time reduction state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. The character "Chance mode 100 times" is displayed (see FIG. 127 (a)), indicating that a jackpot has been won during the second half period (7 seconds) during the reduced working hours (second special symbol lottery). When a jackpot is won in the game), a notification effect (see FIG. 127 (c)) in which characters of "hit and super chance GET during the chance mode" are displayed as a game guidance mode for indicating that the probability change state is likely to be set. It is configured as follows.

  On the other hand, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, the “super chance mode 100” suggesting that the probability change state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) as the notification effect performed during the jackpot ending period. The word "times" is displayed (see FIG. 127 (b)). After that, for the second half period (7 seconds), "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" as an alerting mode that is not directly related to the game content. Is displayed (see FIG. 127 (d)).

  In the present control example, the effect form of the notification effect executed during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. Thus, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, it is not necessary to execute the process for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect every time, so the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. Can be done.

  Here, a case will be described in which the ball cannot be caused to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, despite the fact that the jackpot game has been executed. In this case, in the display mode shown in FIG. 127 (b), the process of hiding the character “super” and the notification effect executed in the second half period (7 seconds) of the big hit ending period are performed in the normal hit mode. A process of switching to the notification effect (see FIG. 127 (c)) executed in the second half (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

  More specifically, as a display mode shown in FIG. 127 (a), a display layer (display image layer) in which characters of "super" are displayed and a display layer in which characters of "chance mode 100 times" are displayed ( Display layer), and a display layer (display layer) in which characters of “super” are displayed based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game ) Can be switched between the presence and absence of a display instruction. Thereby, it is possible to execute the notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to the specific gate during the big hit game by the simple control process. Furthermore, during the period set to the same length as the second half of the jackpot ending period, the effect mode is switched, so that the effect mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the present control example, the length of the jackpot ending period differs depending on the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types. In the present control example, the second half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may become the same length with respect to a kind. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the first half period of the jackpot is the same for jackpot type A and jackpot type B. Thus, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the latter half period of the jackpot has the same length.

  In the present control example, the ending period having a different length is set according to the type of the winning jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so as to be different.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 to FIG. 130, description will be given of the effect contents executed during the chance mode. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state is set 50 times after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, it is possible to set a case where a V-report effect for notifying that the ball during the jackpot game has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v and a case where the V-report effect is not executed. Is configured.

  Then, when the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, the player is notified that the probable change state (the special symbol high probability state, the normal symbol high probability state) has been set after the jackpot game has ended. If the effect mode (special chance mode) is set and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, that is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, or When the V notification effect is not executed despite passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the effect mode (which is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit game ( (Chance mode) is set.

  When the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the character “in chance mode” is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. A remaining period notification mode for indicating the period up to the end is displayed (see FIG. 128A). The example shown in FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the 20th special symbol change has been performed since the chance mode was set, and the remaining symbol notification mode is 80 additional special symbol changes. The character "80 times" indicating that the chance mode ends when executed is displayed.

  As described above, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode, from the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, it is determined whether the current game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Can be made difficult for the player to grasp, so that the player can play the game while expecting the current game state to be a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as long as the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the chance mode can be set as the effect mode even if the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game. While the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, that is, the fact that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the user is confused. In addition, when a V-reporting effect that notifies that the ball has passed the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the jackpot game is executed, an effect for indicating that the probable change state has been set after the end of the jackpot game. Since the super chance mode is set as the mode, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In this control example, if the V notification effect is not executed despite the fact that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the chance mode is set as the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game. Although it is configured to be set, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a case where the V notification effect is not executed despite the fact that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big hit game Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the super chance mode is set. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), during the current jackpot game A determination is made as to whether a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and whether a V notification effect has been performed. A determination result indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and a V notification effect Is determined to have not been executed, and in a case where a certain lottery result has been obtained (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery), the probability change state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game. The display modes shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d) may be displayed, and the super chance mode may be set as an effect mode after the end of the big hit game.

  With this configuration, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the possibility of setting the super chance mode can be left. Can be played with a sense of expectation.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game, the time reduction state is set as the game state, and the probability change state is set. And that will happen. Then, regardless of which gaming state is set, the remaining period of the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continues is displayed. That is, the first advantageous game state (probable change state) and the second advantageous game state (time saving state) as the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as the game state set after the end of the big hit game. , Can be set, the first advantageous game state continues for a predetermined first period (a period from the end of the big hit game until the special symbol change is executed 50 times), and the second advantageous game state is A second period longer than the first period described above (a period from the end of the big hit game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times) is configured to be continued, and the first advantageous game state is set after the big hit game is ended. After that, when the first period elapses, the second advantageous game state is set until the second period elapses, and the normal state is set when the second period elapses. In the configured gaming machine, Ri regardless of whether after the game finished probability variation state is set, running configured to be able to remaining period notification for indicating a remaining period of time (second period) of preferably up game state is completed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player of the period in which the advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues. Further, in the present control example, in a state where the remaining period of the second period (remaining period of the chance mode) is set, to indicate to the player whether the current gaming state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Is configured to be executable using a notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 128 (b), the effect content of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents of a game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied when the chance mode is set in the state where the probability change state is set, the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed. A variable game state suggestion effect (in FIG. 128 (b), displayed in a white display mode) is executed. Then, in the small display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, a comment of "big hit expectation UP" is displayed. With this configuration, while notifying the player of the period until the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the player predicts which gaming state is set among the advantageous gaming states. We can provide fun to let you. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG. 128 (b) is displayed when the special symbol change being executed is a jackpot change, or when the special symbol change is already acquired. Special figure 2 is a case in which the winning ball is included in the reserved ball, and the chance change state can be set in the chance mode in the chance mode (after the big hit game ends, until the special symbol change is executed 50 times). (During the period).

  With this configuration, in the chance mode indicating a period in which the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player continues, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the probable change state is set, Information about the jackpot winning) can be displayed using the same display mode, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. In addition, even when the time saving state is actually set, it is possible to display a display mode that is easy to be displayed when the probable change state is set based on the jackpot winning, so that it is higher than the design value. It is possible to make the player think that the probable change state is set in the ratio, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, it may be configured to execute the effect in the chance mode using a technical idea different from the technical idea of the above-described control example, for example, in a state where the chance mode is set in the probable change state. , A jackpot winning, or, if the acquired special figure 2 holding ball includes information for jackpot winning, a suggestion effect to indicate that the currently set gaming state is a time saving state (for example, The display mode of the remaining period notification may be configured to execute a display mode (display mode in which display is performed in the form of Chinese numerals) different from that shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b). Thereby, in the advantageous game state, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot has been won during the time-saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player than the probability change state, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. In addition, since the rate at which the probable change state is set as the game history can be made lower than the actual situation, the game can be performed while further expecting that the probable change state will be set at the next big hit game.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 128A and 128B, in the first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period (remaining period) in which the chance mode continues is variable. By causing the player to watch the remaining period of the chance mode carefully by configuring the presently set gaming state to be able to suggest to the player, a gaming state that suggests the currently set gaming state Although it is configured so that the state suggestion effect can be easily grasped, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, for example, when the probable change state is set. The first display mode (for example, the character of “chance”) that is easier to display than the case where the time saving state is set, and the case where the time saving state is set are more likely than the case where the probable change state is set. Table The second display mode (for example, the character “pinch”) that is easy to perform may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display state of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) may be varied to execute the game state suggestion effect.

  In the first control example, both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of executions of the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number. As shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and (b), the display of the remaining period notification for notifying the remaining period in which the chance mode continues (the high probability state of the special symbol or the remaining period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can continue) Using the aspect, the present gaming state is configured to be able to suggest, for example, the pachinko machine 10 configured to continue the high probability state of the special symbol until the next jackpot game is executed. Alternatively, the configuration of the chance mode described above may be used. In this case, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period (hour reduction) until the high probability state of the ordinary symbol ends. (A period until the state is ended) is notified by the remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time reduction state is set, the state returns to the normal state. If a probable change state is set and a probable change state is set, a display mode indicating that the special symbol high-probability state continues until the next jackpot game is executed, A period in which the effect of displaying the word “congratulations” as a display mode indicating that the remaining period in which the state continues until the next jackpot is executable, and the chance mode is set In the case where a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, it may be configured to display the characters "Congratulations".

  That is, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128 (a)) that is updated as needed in correspondence with the remaining period of the chance mode that is updated each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the remaining period of the chance mode exists. 128, that is, the remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128 (a). The remaining period in which the length of the remaining period of the chance mode can be roughly reported by changing the display mode (for example, changing the display color) in accordance with the length of the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. The notification mode may be used. Further, a plurality of remaining period notification modes are configured to be displayed, and a combination of the displayed plurality of remaining period notification modes is configured so that the player can grasp the length of the remaining period in the chance mode. You may.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, description will be given on the effect contents executed when the player operates the operation means in the chance mode. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation content and operation timing. ing. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation effect for changing the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and a variable effect performed in the main display region Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are provided. Is performed as a part of the guidance information for causing the player to operate the frame button 22, and in a case where the player operates the frame button 22, an effect in a different production mode than when the player does not operate the frame button 22. , An operation effect for enlivening the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. This allows the player to be motivated to play a game other than the act of firing a ball, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Here, among the operation effects described above, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be described. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, in the present control example, when the advantageous game state (time saving state, probability change state) is set, according to the number of special symbol changes since the advantageous game state was set. Different fluctuation times can be selected. Specifically, a period in which the number of special symbol changes is “first to twentieth” after the advantageous game state is set is a first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) is easily selected. The period from the “21st to 49th” is a second period in which a fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) longer than the first period is easily set, and only the “50th” has a specific fluctuation time (eg, , 20 seconds) is set, and the “51st to 100th” period is a third period in which the same fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) as the second period is likely to be set. It is composed.

  In other words, during the predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, that is, the predetermined period after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol change is easily executed in a short change time. In the case of winning, a plurality of jackpot games can be easily executed at short intervals. By this, the next jackpot game was executed as a part of the jackpot game executed last time? Can be made to remind the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Then, in the above-described second period and third period, the special symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation time shorter than the normal state is set is easily performed, and the special symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation time longer than the first period is performed. It is configured to be easy. Thus, during the chance mode, it is possible to secure a period for performing a suggestion effect for indicating whether the gaming state currently set during one special symbol change is the time saving state or the probable change state. it can. In a specific period (the 50th special symbol change after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol change for a specific change time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a certain change state is set for the player. It is configured so that a suggestion effect for 20 seconds for indicating whether or not the state is (executed) is executed.

  In this way, by configuring such that different change times can be selected according to the number of times of execution of the special symbol change, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each change number using an appropriate period.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode, in which the normal state is set internally, and is displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of display content, and FIG. 129 (b) schematically illustrates an effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display effect displayed in FIG. 129 (a). FIG. In the present control example, during the normal fluctuation period during the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select a background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22. By doing so, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are alternately displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the background image can be switched, the icon HR10 imitating the frame button 22 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm indicates that the icon HR10 is operable. In the figure, an arrow is displayed toward the button pressing direction), and a character of “sea mode” indicating that the sea mode is currently set is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. I have. When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the display is switched from the “sea mode” to the “mountain mode” as shown in FIG. 129 (b).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation effect in the chance mode during the high-speed fluctuation period will be described. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state and the probable-variation state are set to when the 20th special symbol fluctuation is completed), the background image is not switched and displayed ( It is configured to be difficult). That is, when the background image is switched and displayed in the high-speed fluctuation period in which the short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation, the background image is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode changes frequently, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the background image is not switched and displayed (is difficult). However, if all the operations of the player on the frame buttons 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, another effect is executed instead of the background image switching display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the characters “special mode” are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the current time is during the high-speed fluctuation period. Is notified to the player. During this “special mode”, a special symbol variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation effect for the third symbol is also a variation effect dedicated to the “special mode”. Is done. Then, even during the “special mode”, the icon HR10 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, the icon HR10 is displayed in the small display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. A game state suggestion effect in which the display mode of the remaining period notification is changed is executed.

  As described above, even when the player performs the same operation (presses the frame button 22), the content of the effect of the operation effect to be executed is varied depending on the operation timing, so that the player is provided with various effects. A game can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 at an appropriate timing. Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a) or FIG. 130 (a), the guidance display (icon HR10) for guiding the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 to the player is the same. In the case where the player performs the same operation (presses the frame button 22), the effect content of the operation effect to be executed differs depending on the operation timing. Therefore, until the frame button 22 is actually operated (pressed), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of operation effect is to be performed. it can.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, a plurality of operation effects are configured to be executable, and each operation effect is selected. The ratios vary depending on the set game state. That is, it is possible to predict whether the currently set gaming state is the probable changing state or the time saving state based on the appearance ratio of each operation effect performed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is repeatedly performed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the background image is switched and displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied even during the high-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, when the information of winning the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball) acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period, the special map including the information of winning the jackpot is included. Special jackpot special pattern change corresponding to 2 reserved balls, and special symbol change executed before the jackpot special symbol change (acquired before special figure 2 reserved ball that contains information to win the jackpot) (Special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball) and the special fluctuation effect using the fluctuation time are configured to be executable, and in a state where the conditions for executing the special fluctuation effect are satisfied, the player When the frame button 22 is pressed, the background image is switched from a currently displayed background image (for example, the sea mode) to a special background image (for example, the space mode). That is, when the switching of the background image is performed based on the fact that the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of the jackpot win is increased, and the player is actively encouraged by the player. Can press the frame button 22.

  In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22, the switching display of the background image can be executed. This special operation (long press) is determined to be executed when the player continuously presses the frame button 22 for two seconds, and is more effective than the normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. The period until it is determined that the operation has been performed is lengthened. Therefore, since the operation is difficult to be performed more frequently than the normal operation (press), it is possible to prevent the background image from being frequently switched even when the background image is switched and displayed. be able to. In this control example, a long-press operation is used as a special operation whose operation time is longer than that of the normal operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22 as an operation means, a plurality of operation units May be provided, and a special operation performed by operating a plurality of operation units in a predetermined order may be defined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the effect content performed during the “super chance mode” in which the player is notified that the probable change state has been set will be described. FIG. 131A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the effect contents when the first special symbol change is executed during the “super chance mode”, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the effect content when the 2nd special symbol change is performed during "chance mode".

  In the present control example, when a probable change state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change state is set with a high probability (the probability change jackpot game in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed) ). The probable change state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

  In other words, once the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50) until the predetermined number (50 times) of the special symbol lottery is executed. ), So that the probability change state can be looped with a high probability as long as winning. Therefore, the player who is executing the game in the probable change state can be motivated to play the game so as to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

  On the other hand, even in the state in which the probability change state is set, for example, the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state wins the probability change jackpot, and immediately after the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, In the state where the probable change state is set, the special figure lottery is executed while the special figure 2 reserved ball is not acquired and the special figure 1 reserved ball is acquired. In the present control example, as described above, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, The probability jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. That is, even if the probability change state is set, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the probability change state may not be able to be looped.

  In the case where the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery during the probable change state as described above, if the player determines early that the won jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed, In this control example, the third design corresponding to the probability variation big hit is used as the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state because the problem that the player's willingness to play decreases. A double-reach effect, which is a variable effect in which a (representing identification information with an odd number) and a third symbol (identification information with an even number) normally corresponding to a jackpot, simultaneously enters a reach state, is executed. It is configured to be easy. More specifically, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state wins a normal jackpot, the above-described double reach effect is always executed (FIG. 131 (a)). reference).

  Thereby, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state wins the normal jackpot, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. The effect can be prevented from being executed, and it can be suppressed that the player is predicted in advance to win the normal jackpot during the special symbol fluctuation period.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the present control example, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed during the “super chance mode” in the same manner as in the above “chance mode”, and the player is provided with the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12. On the other hand, the number of special map reservations is configured to be difficult to grasp. Then, above the main display area Dm, a character string “super chance mode” is displayed as a display mode for notifying the player that the current state is in the probable change state.

  Here, during the super chance mode, the double reach (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability change jackpot) shown in FIG. 2) and the double-reach effect, which is a fluctuation effect that simultaneously enters the reach state, indicates that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. In the present control example, the double reach effect shown in FIG. 131 (a) can be executed even in the fluctuation effect executed in response to the second special symbol change because there is a possibility that the player may be easily grasped by the player. Is configured. In other words, in the case of the jackpot winning, the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed is configured so that the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot can be executed. ing.

  With this configuration, even if the double-reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (a) is executed, it is determined whether the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation. This makes it difficult for the player to easily determine.

  Further, in the present control example, when the double reach effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution is set. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), an effect of changing to a third symbol (identification information with a number of 1 and identification information with a number of 9) corresponding to a probability change jackpot (to a probability change double reach). Promotion effect) is executed.

  With such a configuration, when the special symbol lottery being executed has won a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that the probability change jackpot game will be executed without fail. In addition, even if a double-reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to be promoted to a certain-variable double-reach in the middle while performing the game while expecting the player to perform the game. Can be.

  In the present control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach production being performed to the probable double reach production, when the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one lap has elapsed). The variable condition to be satisfied is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a third symbol corresponding to the reach state as a third symbol variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 (the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination). The variable condition that is satisfied when the symbol passes through the reach effective line may be set, or the variable condition that is satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player is a specific operation result. You may comprise so that a variable condition may be set.

  In the present control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol in the reach state may be used. You may comprise so that the number of symbols may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131 (a), blank symbols (indicated by triangles in the figure) are deleted, and “3.2.1” is displayed in order from the left as an upper symbol row Z1. A triple reach effect in which “1.2.3” is displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol column Z3 may be performed. Even in the case of such a configuration, the triple reach production can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot than the double reach production, so the special symbol lottery in this special symbol lottery. Can be visually notified to the player that the possibility of winning is high.

  In addition, the above-described technical idea may be applied to the fluctuation effect performed during the normal state. For example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is set to the reach state. When the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach production, the type of the third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probable big hit, or the third symbol in the reach state May be configured to increase the number. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a more advantageous effect to be provided to the player until the variable effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a flow of an effect when a fluctuation pattern in which a non-reach fluctuation effect is executed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, and FIG. 132 (b) It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow of the effect when the fluctuation pattern in which the reach fluctuation effect is performed is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol.

  Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, in the present control example, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by adding the basic time and the addition time is used. Stipulates. Then, the period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific fluctuation pattern.

  That is, in the present control example, as the effect of the third symbol change performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the reach state is displayed. The period until the stop display is made varies depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state. The third symbol corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol in the reach state. With this configuration, the third symbol variation effect (the third symbol variation effect executed in correspondence with the basic time) performed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to vary is common. Can be changed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation effect, since the addition time is not set, a common fluctuation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol is set. The upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped so that the reach state does not occur on the activated line. Stop display is performed in the display mode, and two seconds later, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order. Thereafter, after a stop display period (determination time) of one second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is definitely displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b), when the reach fluctuation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common fluctuation pattern of 30 seconds, until 5 seconds elapse from the reach state. Is set. That is, the effect form from the reaching state to the middle symbol row Z2 making one round is set as the common variation pattern. Thereafter, an effect mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) according to the addition time is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a description will be given of an effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 133 (a) shows the flow of the effect of the ending period for the normal jackpot, and FIG. 133 (b) shows the flow of the ending period for the probable jackpot. FIG. 133 (c) shows that the ball is played during the probable jackpot game. This shows the flow when the specific region (V gate) does not flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in the present control example, the ending period (ED period) is made different between the normal jackpot and the probable change jackpot, so that the ED period of 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the probable change jackpot is set. Make up. An ending effect divided into a first half period and a second half period is executed (see FIG. 127).

  In the present control example, at the start timing of the big hit game, the effect mode in the ending period is set, and it is determined whether or not a V prize has been made during the big hit period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to the specific gate) in the ending period ( The determination is made at the start timing of the (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

  First, with reference to FIG. 133 (a), a description will be given of the effect contents during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during the jackpot game from becoming complicated and increasing the processing load during the jackpot game, a round game (a prize ball can be acquired during the jackpot game) Before the execution of the big hit game (before the start of the big hit game or during the opening period of the big hit game), the effect mode of the effect (ending display effect) executed during the ending period of the big hit game is determined. Is configured.

  When the normal jackpot game is executed, the player is informed that the "chance mode" is set (the time saving state is set) after the jackpot game is completed before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. The display mode of the ending effect (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) is set. In the normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, an ending effect set in advance is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (b) and FIG. 133 (c), a description will be given of the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the probability-change jackpot game is executed. When the probability change jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the ending effect production mode is determined based on the determination result. To determine. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, the player is caused to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. It is determined whether or not to execute a V notification effect in which a guidance notification for guiding the player and a V passing notification for notifying the player that the ball has actually passed the specific area (V gate) 65v are executed. When it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed, a display mode for indicating to the player that the “super chance mode” is set (a probable change state is set) after the end of the jackpot game as the ending effect (FIG. 127) (See (b) and (d)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the V notification effect is not to be executed, a display mode for indicating to the player that the “chance mode” is set after the end of the big hit game as the ending effect (display mode in FIG. 127 (b)) The display mode in which the display of “super” is deleted and the display mode shown in FIG. 127 (c) are set.

  When executing the V notification effect, a comment of “Aim for V” at the start of the V round (first round) game and the position of the specific area (V gate) 65 v in the variable winning device 65 are schematically shown. A guide notification is displayed in which the schematically shown schematic diagram is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V-pass notification is displayed in which a comment of “V acquired !!” is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) despite the execution of the guidance notification, the player is notified of the specific area ( An emphasis guidance notification for further emphasizing and guiding the ball passage to the (V gate) 65v is executed. If the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the end of the V round game, the above-described V passage notification is executed, and the V is passed without passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When the round game is over, the character "V won't be obtained, sorry!" Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the ending period of the jackpot game comes, it is determined whether or not to replace the preset display mode of the ending effect based on the game result of the actual V round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed at the start of the big hit game, a display mode indicating that the “super chance mode” is set as the ending effect (FIG. 127 (b), ( Since d) is set in advance, when the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect. . On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the time saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the display mode of the ending effect will be changed to “Chance”. A process (replacement process) for switching to a display mode for indicating that the “mode” is set is executed, and the display mode after the replacement (the display of “super” is deleted from the display mode of FIG. 127 (b)) The ending effect is executed in the displayed manner and in FIG. 127 (c)).

  When the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, as in the normal jackpot game. , V round game is being executed, and the jackpot game in which it is not possible to grasp that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, an ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. Thus, it is possible to provide a state in which the “chance mode” is set after the jackpot game ends, even though the probability change state is actually set.

  Furthermore, when the "chance mode" is set in the state where the probability change state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability change jackpot game), so the probability change state is set by the effect during the jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to know in advance what will be done. In the present control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, the jackpot game ends even though the probability change state is actually set. The “chance mode” is configured to be set later. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, The V passing notification is configured not to be executed at a predetermined rate, and if the V passing notification is not executed despite the fact that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v, after the big hit game is over. You may comprise so that "chance mode" may be set. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the V notification effect can be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to easily cause an event in which the V notification effect is not executed despite the execution of the V information effect. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the “chance mode” is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first specific period (a period until the special symbol change is executed 100 times) is set in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol after the big hit game is completed. Is done. If the ball passes through the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state is set in a second predetermined period (special symbol change is performed 50 times) after the jackpot game ends. Period until it is set). Then, when the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol), the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode (FIG. 134 (b)). )reference). In addition, when the game state set after the jackpot game ends is a probable change state (a special symbol high probability state, a normal symbol high probability state), depending on the content of the effect during the jackpot game (the presence or absence of the V notification effect) In accordance with this, the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game is made different, and as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the probability change state may be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game). When notified, that is, when the display mode of the entry of the “super chance mode” (see FIG. 127 (b)) is displayed as the ending effect, the “super chance mode” is set as the effect mode (FIG. 134 (a)). )), During the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), when it is not notified that the probability change state is set, If the "chance mode" inrush display mode (see FIG. 127 (a)) is displayed as a ring effect is a "chance mode" as directed mode (see the display b in FIG. 134 (a)).

  As shown in the display a of FIG. 134 (a), when the “super chance mode” is set after the jackpot game ends, the “super chance mode” continues until the probability change state ends, and the game state changes to the probability change state. Is switched to the "chance mode" when shifting from the time saving state to the time saving state. In this case, while the “super chance mode” is set, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), a period (up to 50 times) until the probable change state ends as the remaining period mode is set in the small display area Ds 2. Is displayed. This makes it possible to inform the player of the period in which the gaming state most advantageous to the player continues for the player in an easily understandable manner. Note that, in addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131 (a), after the probable change state ends, a pre-notification effect of notifying the player in advance that the time saving state is set 50 times may be executed. For example, for example, the remaining period mode (shown as “49 times” in white in FIG. 131A) indicating the remaining period of the probable change state displayed in the small display area Ds2 is equal to or less than a predetermined period (for example, “ 10 times or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time saving state set later is continued is changed to a display mode different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probable change state (for example, It is preferable to display the image in the form of “50 times” without black. Thereby, even after the probable change state ends, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game state (time saving state) more advantageous than the normal state is set.

  Further, when the “super chance mode” is set, a remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probable change state and a remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time reduction state are displayed. Each time the special symbol change is executed, each remaining period mode may be decremented by one, or the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probable change state and after the probable change state ends The remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the set time saving state is displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probable change state is subtracted first. When shifting to the time saving state, the remaining time mode indicating the remaining time of the time saving state may be subtracted. Even in the case of such a configuration, for the player who is playing the game in the probable change state, it is required that the game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set after the probable change state ends. Can be notified.

  Next, the effect in the chance mode will be described with reference to the display b of FIG. 134 (a) and FIG. 134 (b). In this control example, the chance mode is set as the effect mode when part of the case where the probable change state is set and when the time reduction state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, a game state suggestion effect of changing the notification mode of the remaining period notification is executed. This game state suggestion effect is set so that the chance rate in the chance mode during the probable change state is higher than that in the chance mode during the time saving state.

  Next, the contents of the operation effect in the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In the present control example, the effect mode of the operation effect performed during the chance mode (the effect performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) is changed to the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player. ) Is changed in accordance with the operation timing, the operation method, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), during the chance mode when the time saving state is set, when the button PUSH “normal push” is executed as the operation method, the special symbol change is 20 During the high-speed fluctuation period until the third execution, the "reach suggestion" that indicates during the third symbol fluctuation whether the fluctuation effect being executed is in the reach state, or the game state currently set An operation effect of “state suggestion” is suggested to be executable, and after that (the number of special symbol changes is 21 or more), an operation effect of “background mode shift” for shifting the background mode is configured to be executable. I have. When the long press button “long press” is executed as an operation method, an operation effect of “background mode shift” for shifting the background mode during the high-speed change period until the special symbol change is executed 20 times. Is executable, and during the period (during the second period) in which the number of special symbol changes is 21 to 50 (during the second period), an operation effect of “state suggestion” indicating the currently set gaming state can be executed. After that (the number of special symbol changes is 51 or more), to indicate the game state set in the past (when the “chance mode” is set (after the end of the big hit game)), “Past state suggestion” ”Can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (b), during the chance mode in the case where the probable change state is set, if the button PUSH “normal push” is executed as the operation method, the special symbol change is executed 20 times. During the high-speed change period, the "reach suggestion" suggests during the third symbol change whether or not the variation effect being executed is in the reach state, and the "state suggestion" suggests the currently set game state. Or, the operation effect of “transition to background mode” for transitioning the background mode is configured to be executable, and during the period in which the number of special symbol changes is 21 to 50 (during the second period), “transition to background mode” is performed. , Or an operation effect of “state suggestion” is configured to be executable, and after that (the number of special symbol changes is 51 or more), an operation effect of “transition to background mode” is configured to be executable. In addition, as an operation method, when the button long press “long press” is executed, the operation effect of “background mode shift” for shifting the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of special symbol changes. .

  As described above, in the present control example, when the time-saving state is set, or in a part of the case where the probable change state is set, the “chance mode” can be set as the effect mode, The duration of the chance mode (100 time savings) is divided into a plurality of periods in accordance with the number of special symbol changes executed during the chance mode, and the player performs an operation for each set gaming state and period. It is configured such that the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the means (frame button 22) is operated is made different. With this, when the chance mode is set, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation effect performed by the operation effect. A game in which the operating means is operated enthusiastically can be executed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the high-speed fluctuation period is a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the “normal press” operation is performed on the frame button 22, the “transition to the background mode” is executed. Although the operation effect is configured to be harder to be executed than other periods, a high-speed fluctuation period (a period during which the background mode is hardly shifted) may be set at another timing. For example, after the big hit game is over. The period until the one special symbol change to be executed is completed is defined as a normal time reduction period, from the time when the second special symbol change after the jackpot game is executed to the time when the 20th special symbol change is executed. May be configured to be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

  With such a configuration, for example, during the first special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, as a notice mode for notifying that a high-speed fluctuation period is set, "the background mode cannot be changed from the next fluctuation. Display the comment "Please select the desired background now" in the sub display area Ds, so that a period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed fluctuation period) is suddenly set for the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game cannot be executed in a desired background mode and the desire to play the game is reduced. Further, as a guidance mode for explaining the game content of the "chance mode" to the player using one special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, the "chance mode may be in a probable change state. A comment "Do not give up!" Or a comment "Changing when the display mode of the remaining number of times changes!"

  In the case where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special symbol fluctuation after the end of the big hit as in the first control example, the gaming period of the big-hit game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set. During (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), the background mode in the “chance mode” is configured to be selectable, and when the “chance mode” is set, for a predetermined period (during the high-speed fluctuation period), What is necessary is just to comprise so that a player may be notified that a background mode cannot be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, a symbol of “）”), the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to the predetermined symbol. It is configured such that a hit game (a game per ordinary drawing) that is activated (opened state) only for a time is executed.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is made different depending on the set probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the ordinary symbol, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol ( When "normal state" is set, 10 seconds is set as the normal figure fluctuation time, and when the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set, 3 seconds is set as the normal figure fluctuation time. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to greatly separate the frequency at which the game per common symbol is executed in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol from the frequency at which the game per common symbol is executed in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. In other words, increasing the number of ordinary symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time by increasing the symbol fluctuation time in the symbol high probability state compared to the symbol low probability state In addition, it is possible to make it easier to win a winning in the general drawing lottery executed. Therefore, while it is difficult to execute the game per ordinary symbol when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, it is easy to execute the game per ordinary symbol when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. Can be.

  In the present control example, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to be more advantageous for the player in the set ordinary figure fluctuation time and the winning probability than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be advantageous to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the ordinary symbol, the same figure variation time (for example, 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. Thereby, for example, in order to make it difficult for the game to be executed per ordinary symbol during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (during the ordinary state), the time required for the variation display of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than during the time reduction state. In the pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be longer in the normal state, the normal symbol hitting game (normal symbol low probability state) in which the normal symbol hitting game (normal symbol hitting game) is difficult to execute is executed. When the game state shifts to the easy time saving state (normally high probability state of the symbol), the normal symbol fluctuation for a long period of time executed during the normal state (a game per ordinary symbol that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the time saving state) ) Can be prevented from shifting to the time-saving state during execution of the time-saving state, so that the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state is set for a long time. .

  As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, various devices are disposed in a game area of the game board 13, and a ball is formed in a left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Even if a game to flow down (left-handed game) is executed or a game to flow ball down to the right area (right-handed game), there is no difference (less likely) in the game value obtained by the player. A game board 13 is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are disposed symmetrically with respect to a vertical line at the center of the game board 13, and a ball enters the lower area of the variable display unit 80. The first entrance 64 that can be a chance for a lottery of the first special symbol, and the second entrance that is provided at a position below the first entrance 64 and can be a lottery for the second special symbol when the ball enters. 2 entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a attached to the 2nd entrance 640, and opened in a per-game winning game executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a second entry thereof. A variable winning device 65 is provided below the ball opening 640 and is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

  The ball fired by the left-handed game flows down the left region, passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left region at a rate of 1/2, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 does not pass through the through gate 67. The dropped ball also flows down toward the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower region by the nail implanted in the game board 13. Here, the ball that has flowed downward from between the nails enters the two general entrances 63. In this control example, about 1/50 of the sphere flowing down the left area is configured to enter one of the two general entrances 63, and the sphere enters the general entrance 63. When a ball is entered, ten prize balls (privileges) are provided.

  The first entrance port 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a ratio of one to fifteen balls, and four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. Is configured. In the state where the electric accessory 640 is closed (the state shown in white in FIG. 2), the second entrance 640 has almost no ball entering and the electric accessory 640 is open ( In the state shown in black in FIG. 2), the ball is fired in a left-handed game, and is configured such that one out of every two balls that flow down the left region enters the ball. When a ball is entered, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is configured such that in the state where the jackpot game is not executed, almost no balls enter the ball, and during the jackpot game, approximately 3 out of 2 balls enter the ball. When a ball enters, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Here, the variable winning device 65 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is a variable winning means that is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. By passing through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the winning device 65, it is possible to set a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game.

  Also, according to the type of the jackpot that has been won, a jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) in which a ball winning the variable prize device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate) and a jackpot game that is difficult to pass (normal jackpot game) In this control example, in the present control example, a jackpot game in which a ball winning the variable winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate), that is, a normal game is performed during the jackpot game For example, a jackpot (game) that can easily cause the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate) is a variable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the variable prize device 65 is difficult to pass through the specific gate, that is, A jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass a ball to a specific area (V gate) even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game will be described as a normal jackpot (game).

  Note that, as described above, even if the jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot be passed to the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability The state (probable change state) is not set. That is, in the present control example, at the timing when the big hit game is executed, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is not determined. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, a round game (V round game) in which the ball is most likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) is performed. It is configured to be executed. Therefore, the game state set after the end of the big hit game cannot be determined until the V round game ends. In this way, by configuring so that the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can obtain various benefits (high prize balls, special symbol high probability state) in the jackpot game. Can be played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the case of using the above-described configuration, the production mode of the notification effect (for example, the production mode of the jackpot ending period) for notifying the player of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game (for example, the jackpot) At the start of the game) it is not possible to set, the control process for the pitching out and the control process for the display must be performed densely. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the notification effect after the end of the jackpot game is set. Just before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate). Is executed, and when the sphere passes through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and when the sphere does not pass through the specific area (V gate). Only, the effect mode of the notification effect is switched. As described above, when a normal game is played during the jackpot game, a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game is set and the effect state of the notification mode is set in advance, and an unexpected game state is set. Only when it is determined that the presentation mode of the notification mode is switched, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the control process for setting the presentation mode of the notification mode during the jackpot game.

  Further, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probable variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the ending period longer than the normal jackpot game is set for the probable variable jackpot game which is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be. This makes it possible to notify the player that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed to the player (during the jackpot game) before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probable jackpot game In addition, simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the jackpot ending period to the production mode executed in the ending period of the normal winning game may cause an incompatibility production during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. There was a problem of being executed. Further, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) in the probability change jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (effect data ) Must be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the type of jackpot (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot). If the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during the probability change jackpot game, only the production mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is in the second half of the ending period of the normal hit game. It is configured to switch to an effect mode set by the user. As a result, there is no need to provide a special effect mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability change jackpot game, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. A notification effect can be performed.

  In the present control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. Is configured to switch and set the effect mode of the notification effect that is executed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific area (V gate). However, the present invention is not limited to this. By executing the notification effect from during the round period, the notification effect performed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, By continuously performing the round effect performed during the final round period of the jackpot game, and then executing the notification effect, the actual jackpot endian It may be configured to perform a notification effect of a period shorter than grayed period.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to comprise so that there may not be a big difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of the entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is attached to both the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 and the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80, The through gate 67 in the area is configured to allow half of the ball flowing down the left area of the game board 13 to pass through. Further, the through gate 67 in the right area is configured to allow half of a ball flowing down the right area of the game board 13 to pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, a symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is displayed. If the result is out of order, a symbol “x” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided for one of the maximum number of holdings, and is arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present control example, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, but may be set to two or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of the normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, in the present control example, although most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the balls may be used. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80 (below the electric accessory 640), a ball that is fired by a left-handed game and flows down the left area and a ball that is fired by a right-handed game and flows down the right area can win. , A variable winning device 65 having an opening width of about 50 mm is provided. In this manner, by providing the variable winning device 65 having a wide opening width, both the ball that has flowed down the left side of the electric accessory 640 by the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down the right side of the electric accessory 640 by the right-handed game are variable. A prize can be made to the prize device 65.

  Here, a specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow path of a ball having won the variable winning device 65. It is. As shown in FIG. 120 (a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and a ball flowing down on the open / close door 65b in an open state and winning the specific winning opening 65a is moved in the left-right direction. It is configured to flow down.

  Specifically, the ball that has flowed down the left area and has won the specific winning opening 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide channel 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d, and the first opening 65a1 It is guided to. In addition, the ball that has flowed down the right side region and has won the specific winning opening 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide channel 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2. Is done.

  Under the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, there are provided ball detection sensors (65s1, 65s2) for detecting a ball that has won the variable winning device 65, and this ball detection sensor is provided. When a ball is detected, payout control for paying out 15 balls as prize balls is executed. As described above, the opening (first opening 65a1) through which the ball that has flown down the left area and passed to the variable prize device 65 can pass, and the ball that has flowed down the right region and entered the variable prize device 65 pass. By providing an opening (second opening 65b1) and a ball detection sensor for each opening, even if the player performs a left-handed game during the big hit game, the player can perform a right-handed game. Also, a game having no difference can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b), a description will be given of the ball flow of the ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the sphere that has passed through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first sphere detection sensor 65s1, and flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e. Then, it flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 according to the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

  A discharge port 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3. The sphere flowing down the third flow path 65e3 enters the discharge port 65h and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the ball that has entered the discharge port 65h1 flows down, and the number of balls that have entered the discharge port 65h1 can be counted.

  The fourth flow path 65e4 is provided with a specific region (V gate) 65v, and a downstream end is provided with an outlet 65h2 into which a ball passing through the specific region (V gate) 65v enters. The specific area (V gate) is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the ball that has passed, and when it is detected that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period during the jackpot game Is stored, and when the big hit game is ended, the game state after the big hit game is ended is set by referring to the stored result.

  Here, the operation content of the switching valve 65y during the big hit game will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member that uses a V solenoid 209a (not shown) (see FIG. 137) as a driving source. When the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), the switching valve 65y moves the ball flowing down the second flow path 65e2. The closed state (see FIG. 120 (b)) for flowing down to the third flow path 65e3 is maintained, and in a state where the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state), the ball flowing down the second flow path 65e2 is moved to the fourth flow path 65e3. It is configured to maintain an open state for flowing down to the flow path 65e4.

  The V solenoid 209a is normally in an off state, and is driven and controlled so as to be in an on state only during a predetermined period during a jackpot game. Specifically, when a specific round game (a first round game) is started out of a plurality of round games executed during the jackpot game, the game is turned on, and a specific round game (the first round game) is started. Is controlled to be in an off state when the round game is completed or when a game time of a specific round game has passed a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). That is, the switching valve 65y is configured to perform a switching operation as part of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game.

  With this configuration, the ball can be won by the variable winning device 65 only when the big hit game is executed (when the big hit control is executed), and the variable winning device 65 is won. The sphere can flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, a bonus (setting of a high probability state of a special symbol) given based on the passage of the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v is the end timing of the jackpot game (processing executed at the end of the jackpot game). The bonus is provided to the player even if a fraudulent act of passing the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v at a timing other than during the jackpot game is performed. There is no.

  In the present control example, in the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game, switching control for switching the switching valve 65y is performed according to a predetermined rule based on the timing at which a specific round game is started. Although it is configured to perform the switching control based on other occasions, for example, the start of the jackpot game may be used as the execution trigger of the switching control, The end of the opening period of the game may be used as an opportunity to execute the switching control, or the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game may be measured. It may be an execution opportunity. When the switching control is executed when the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be determined, or the number of balls in a round game unit may be determined. May be determined. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game a state where the ball is easily passed to the specific area (V gate) is set.

  Further, the length of the opening period set when the big hit game is executed and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 65b may be made different for each big hit type. With such a configuration, even when the same switching control is performed on the switching valve 65y regardless of the jackpot type, the ball can easily pass through the specific area (V gate). During the period in which is set, a jackpot game in which the ball can easily reach the specific area (V gate) 65v and a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass can be executed.

  Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of a game in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) and a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a normal state). It is configured to be able to set three types of gaming states: a symbol high-probability state) and a time-saving state (a special symbol low-probability state, a normal symbol high-probability state), and an initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). Or the state after the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated (pressed)), the normal state is set.

  Then, during the normal state, a game mainly based on the first special symbol lottery executed by causing the ball to enter the first entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is "big hit A" (selection rate 1/2). And "big hit B" (selection rate 1/2) are selected. When the "big hit A" is selected, a big hit game (probably variable big hit game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big hit game is executed, and the "big hit B" is selected. During the jackpot game, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is executed.

  Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big hit game, a certain change state is set after the big hit game ends. In the certain change state, when the number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery (change) reaches 50 or when the big hit is won, the end condition is satisfied, and the game shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 50 in a state where the probability change state is set, the gaming state is changed from the probability change state until the 51st special symbol lottery is executed. It is shifted to the time saving state. In the present control example, the process of shifting the gaming state from the probable change state to the time saving state is executed at the timing when the special symbol change corresponding to the 50th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. It is sufficient that the 51st special symbol lottery is not executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, for example, immediately after the 50th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special symbol change). The game state may be shifted to the state immediately before the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery (the timing at which the execution condition of the 51st special symbol lottery is satisfied, but the special symbol lottery is not executed). May be transferred.

  Since the probable change state is a high probability state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be in an open state by a game per general symbol than in the normal state of a low probability state of a normal symbol, and a game mainly based on a second special symbol lottery. Is executed. In the probability variation state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/50, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is "big hit C" ( One of “big hit D” (selection rate 4/10) and “big hit E” (selection rate 3/10) is selected.

  "Big hit C" is a big hit type in which four rounds of the variable hit game are executed, "Big hit D" is a big hit type in which the seven rounds of positive change game is executed, and "Big hit E" is 16 rounds. Is a jackpot type in which a certain jackpot game is executed. That is, in the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the certainty big hit game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the execution probability of the probability-change jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 141, in the present control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a seven round game is always executed, and the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, an average of 8.8 round games (30 rounds for 4 rounds, 40% for 7 rounds, and 30% for 16 rounds) are executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that a four round game will be executed, so the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game may be the smallest in the second special symbol lottery. This is the case where the jackpot is won. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

  Next, the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) will be described. When the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins the "big hit B", when the number of special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state exceeds 50 times, or when the ball changes during the probability change big hit game Cannot be passed to the specific region (V gate) 65v, a time saving state is set. This time saving state is configured to disappear when the number of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous big hit game reaches 100 times, or when the big hit is won until the number reaches 100 times. . That is, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot B is won), the time-saving state is set for a period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (time reduction). The number of times is set to 100). On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the probable change state exceeds 50, the number of time savings is set to 50 after the probable change state ends.

  During this time-saving state, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set as in the probable state described above, the electric accessory 640 is easily opened and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. State. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as the normal state. Accordingly, the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed in the time reduction state than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the time reduction state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower jackpot probability than in the probability variation state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the probability variation state. In other words, in terms of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability-change state. In the present control example, the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same between the probability change state and the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed is different from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. For example, the fluctuation time is shorter in the probability change state than in the normal state. , The special symbol change may be executed.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (C3) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and an initial random number used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

  In addition, a random number counter C4 for the second symbol is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 for the second symbol, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 167). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the first ball opening 64 composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding first). And a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 including the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the one-ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the , The values of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the information having the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol execution area and stored. Special symbol fluctuation based on various values is started.

  In the present control example, the configuration of two types of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the type of the special symbol may be one. When the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol or the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved first area of the special symbol retaining ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. May be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and a special symbol change based on the various values stored may be started. With this configuration, even with the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to smoothly execute each of the special symbol changes.

  Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol) as in this control example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are performed. It may be configured to be able to be executed at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol retaining ball storage area (first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol respectively. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be immediately executed.

  In addition, in the present control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a deviation, but is not limited to this.For example, in a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation, A configuration may be made so that a smaller number of benefits (benefits different from those at the time of the jackpot winning) than at the time of the jackpot winning can be won at the small jackpot that can be given to the player. With such a configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to grant a privilege to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when the small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the acquired small hit type counter value is configured to be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and when the special symbol lottery is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may refer.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to win a small hit, for example, the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the big win and the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the small win are configured to be different. For example, if a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and further, based on the set big hit type, a new game state can be set after the big hit game ends. When the small hitting is won, the small hitting game may be executed while the gaming state at the time of the small hitting winning is maintained, and the gaming state may not be shifted after the small hitting game is finished.

  With this configuration, the presence / absence of the transition of the gaming state and the content of the transition can be made different depending on the winning type (big hit, small hit) which has been won, so that a variety of games can be provided. it can.

  Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passing of a ball) into the through gate 67 composed of four holding areas (holding first areas). The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b stores the values of the second random number counter C4 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

  When the start condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the first special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. In the symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the ball is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit in a special symbol lottery is defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, a determination value determined to be a big hit is defined differently according to a game state (probability state of a special symbol). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), in the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as a game state, “0 to 4” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit determination value. And other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as outlier determination values. In addition, for a high probability state (probable change state) of a special symbol as a gaming state, “0 to 19” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as a jackpot determination value, and other values ( “20 to 999”) is defined as the outlier determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 of “0 to 999”, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). In the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined to be a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

  In the present control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are configured to be set according to the game state. However, without being limited to this, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as the probability regardless of the game state. Or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, a special symbol state and a normal symbol state may be configured to be different from each other in a special symbol jackpot probability for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the special symbol states, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

  Further, in the present control example, two types of lottery results of “big hit” and “missing” are determined as the lottery result of the special symbol, but in addition to this, as a third lottery result , May be configured to be able to determine “small hit” as one type of “missing”. If this "small hit" is won, it is preferable to execute a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a shorter period (one round) than the "big hit". With such a configuration, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In the case where "small hit" is one of "missing", a prize ball can be given to the player by the small hit game, but since the big hit has not been won, the game state is changed ( It is preferable to configure so that the process of setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. Thereby, the privilege given to the player based on the big hit winning and the benefit given to the player based on the small hit winning can be clearly differentiated.

  As described above, in the case of winning the "small hit" as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small hit" is defined in the first random number table 202a. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the special symbol jackpot lottery and the small jackpot lottery can be executed in the same process, so that the main control lottery and the small jackpot lottery are executed in different processes. The processing load on the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a large hit and a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is changed at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored in the 1 special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referenced to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 141A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a lottery of the second special symbol. And a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 referred to when the jackpot is won.

  First, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit table 202d1. As described above, the special figure 1 big hit table 202d1 is a data table for selecting a big hit type set when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined according to the values.

  Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is in the range of “0 to 49”, “Big hit A” is defined in association with the type. The "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100" after the big hit game is completed, and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is Is a jackpot type for which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability change jackpot game (when not in V), the probability change counter 203ja is set after the jackpot game ends. “0” is set as the value. Further, “big hit A” specifies that “17 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A", so the first special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the “jackpot A” is determined is 50% (50/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined as "big hit B" as a big hit type in a range of "50 to 99". The "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds and the normal big hit game is executed. Is a jackpot type in which “0” is set to “1”. Further, “big hit B” specifies that “15 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit B” is 50, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot B" is determined is 50% (50/100).

  That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A and jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot games, Are different from each other in the ease of passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the "big hit A", and the ball is caused to flow down to the specific gate during the big hit game than the "big hit B". It is configured such that an easy jackpot game is executed. Therefore, "big hit A" becomes a big hit type that is more advantageous than "big hit B".

  Next, the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 241 (c). FIG. 241 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit table 202d2. The special figure 2 big hit table 202d2 is a data table which is referred to when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and a big hit type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the special figure 2 big hit table 202d2 in the first control example, as the big hit types of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "big hit C" to "big hit E" are displayed. Three jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 29”, and “big hit C” is defined in association with the big hit type. Have been. The “big hit C” is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 4 and the probability change jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type for which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the probability change counter 203i is set after the jackpot game ends. “0” is set as the value. Further, in the "big hit C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the special hit type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with “big hit C” is 30. When a big hit occurs, the rate at which the “big hit C” is determined is 30% (30/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of "30 to 69", and "big hit D" is defined as the big hit type. The "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 7 rounds, and the variable hit jackpot game is executed. Is a jackpot type for which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the probability change counter 203i is set after the jackpot game ends. “0” is set as the value. Further, in the “big hit D”, it is defined that “17 seconds” is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D" is 40, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot C" is determined is 40% (40/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set in the range of “70 to 99”, and “big hit E” is defined as the big hit type. The "big hit E" is a type of big hit in which the number of rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100" after the jackpot game is completed, and the value of the probability variable counter 203i is Is a jackpot type in which “50” is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability change jackpot game (when non-V), the probability change counter 203i is set after the jackpot game ends. “0” is set as the value. Further, in the "big hit E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

  Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "big hit E" is 30, so the second special symbol lottery is selected. In the case of a jackpot, the rate at which the "jackpot E" is determined is 30% (30/100).

  That is, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all execute the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is The "big hit E" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the "big hit A" is the jackpot type most disadvantageous to the player.

  As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability change jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the probability change jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50% than in the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the end of the big hit game, it is an advantageous big hit type. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is larger in the second special symbol lottery and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also specifies that the number of the second special symbol lottery is smaller. In addition, the number of prize balls that can be acquired on average is defined so as to be larger in the second special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls obtainable under the minimum condition, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other aspects. In the present control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are defined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of jackpot types that can be set in the above-described control examples may be used. The jackpot type may be settable.

  In the present control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all jackpots, but is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be executed according to the selected jackpot type. Further, in the present control example, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set for the same period (100 times of the number of time savings) after the jackpot game is completed in all jackpots. Without limitation, it may be configured so that the time saving state is not set in a part of the jackpot winning (a part of the set jackpot type), and the number of time savings (time saving termination condition) is changed according to the jackpot type. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game according to the selected jackpot type and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set may be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. The motion type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The rough display mode (variable time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, or the like is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal table 202b1 used when a normal state is set as a gaming state, and a state where a probable change state or a time saving state is set And a table 202b2 for probability change and time saving used in the above. Although details will be described later, in the present control example, since the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (b) and 143. FIG. 142 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. The normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and has a longer fluctuation time when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit than when the special symbol lottery result is lost. Is defined so that the variation pattern is easily selected, and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed and the result of the executed special symbol lottery.

  First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / failure determination result is a big hit, and the value of the obtained variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 19”. In this case, a normal (reach) having a fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern. When the normal is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 12 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the addition time is configured in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", it is added. If the time is "4 seconds" or "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds". If the time is "3", the addition time is "5 seconds". If the time is "4", the addition is performed. When the time is “5.5 seconds” and “5”, the addition time is “6 seconds”, and when the time is “6”, the addition time is “6.5 seconds” and “7”. Indicates that the addition time is “7 seconds”, when the addition time is “8”, the addition time is “7.5 seconds”, and when the addition time is “9 to 11”, the addition time is “8 seconds” and “12”. In this case, the addition time is “8.5 seconds”, when the addition time is “13”, the addition time is “9 seconds”, and when the addition time is “14”, the addition times are “9.5 seconds” and “15”. , The addition time is “10 seconds”, if it is “16”, the addition time is “10.5 seconds”, and if it is “17”, the addition time is “11 seconds”, “18”. , It is defined that the addition time is “11.5 seconds”, and that the addition time is “12 seconds” when it is “19”.

  When the command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and the command indicating the addition time (addition command) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the commands are included in the basic command. A variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information to be received, and a reach symbol (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. Accordingly, the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized first by the player in the reach state is always a specific third symbol (in the present control example, the third symbol having the number 1 added thereto). Even if it is configured so as to be a symbol, the reach effect can be executed in various third symbol types without changing the period from the execution of the variable effect to the reaching state.

  When the value of the obtained change type selection counter CS1 is “20 to 169”, a super (reach) with a change time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as a change pattern. When the supermarket is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 13 seconds to 22 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  Here, in the present control example, the effect form of the reach effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command, and specifically, the number of seconds included in the addition command is “ In the case of "3 seconds to 12 seconds", a normal reach effect (an effect that is stopped and displayed after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about one turn) is used, and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", a super reach effect (a middle symbol row) An effect that is stopped and displayed after Z2 fluctuates by about two turns) is executed.

  With such a configuration, for example, during the first predetermined period, the variable effect is executed in the same effect mode, and thereafter, in the case of performing the variable effect in which the effect mode branches, the same effect mode is executed. It is possible to set a period based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time) and to set a fluctuation effect after branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an additional time). . Therefore, for example, even when the entire fluctuation time is the same, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily change the fluctuation time only by changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time. A fluctuating effect can be set.

  In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when the normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when the super reach is executed are the same, and the fluctuation time set as the addition time is set. It is configured to vary the production mode of the reach effect according to the length of the reach effect. However, without being limited to this, the basic time for normal reach is set to 30 seconds, and the basic time for super reach is set to 40 seconds. Alternatively, the addition time may be selected from a range of “3 to 12 seconds” only for determining the type of the third symbol.

  Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “170 to 198”, SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an addition time of 35 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, the effect in which the fluctuation effect of the third symbol once in the reach state is switched to another fluctuation effect is executed. Even if it is configured that the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in which the can be visually recognized is always a specific third symbol (the third symbol with a numeral 1 in this control example), Without giving a sense of incongruity, the display order of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 can be changed in correspondence with the third symbol to be finally stopped during the change, so that, as in the above-described normal and supermarkets, There is no need to change the addition time and set the type of the third symbol in the reach state.

  Similarly, in the case where the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the result of the determination is incorrect, if the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 179”, the variation time is 8 seconds as the variation pattern. Departure is specified. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the deviation is determined, a fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation without being in the reach state is executed as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

  When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is “180 to 198”, the variation pattern has a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When the out-of-reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 22 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds in accordance with the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-described normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is out of order, the same variation pattern command is set as in the case where the lottery result is a hit. When the lottery result is out of order, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed so that the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that makes a big hit. On the side of the lamp control device 113, a correction process is performed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is won. Thus, when the out-of-reach effect is executed, it is possible to easily set an effect mode in which the third symbol is stop-displayed (out-of-stop display) in the vicinity of the third symbol to be a big hit combination.

  On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. Defines a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. When the special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. When the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is “100 to 198”, a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, in the present control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. The effect is configured to be performed. When the command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and the command (addition command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the commands are included in the basic command. A fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) is set based on information to be set, and a special reach is set based on information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as a variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. An effect mode of a special fluctuation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction is set. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, an effect mode is set in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 125 (a). If the addition command indicating the addition time of 0 second has been received (if the fluctuation pattern is a special deviation), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the fluctuation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 30 seconds has been received (when the fluctuation pattern is the special reach), the temporarily stopped third stop is performed as shown in FIG. 125 (b) and FIG. 126. A fluctuation effect in which the symbol is restarted is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the contents of the probability change / time saving table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability change / time saving table 202b2. The probability change / time saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when a change pattern is selected when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, and includes a special symbol type, a change frequency (a big hit game end). Each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of special symbol changes later), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, in the present control example, a high probability state (probable change state or time saving state) of a normal symbol is always set after the big hit game ends. Then, the set high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to be continued until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In the present control example, the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of execution of the special symbol change reaches 100 times after the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set as the time-saving end condition, and the high probability of the ordinary symbol A second time-save ending condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the state is set, and if any of the time-save ending conditions is satisfied, a normal symbol It is configured to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  During the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time shorter than that of the ordinary symbol in the low probability state (normal state) is set so as to be easily selected. Therefore, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time can be increased, so that an efficient game (special symbol lottery game) can be provided to the player.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period in which the number of special symbol changes is “1 to 20” after the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the type of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery In addition, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (short variation) having a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected. In other words, during a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol change is executed 20 times) after the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a high speed change in which the special symbol lottery is executed with a shorter change time than other periods. This is the period (first period). By setting the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to easily execute the next jackpot game in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot game. Has been executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed fluctuation period, since the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is “5 seconds” is always selected, it is easy to set the production period of the production (continuous production) that straddles a plurality of special symbol lotteries. .

  In addition, when a jackpot is won in a state where the normal state (ordinary symbol low-probability state) is set, at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, the holding ball of the second special symbol ( Since there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reserved ball has not been acquired, a special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) using the acquired reserved ball of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball) is easily executed. If a jackpot is won in a normal state in which a probable change state or a time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state) is set, at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, the special figure 2 is held. Since there is a high possibility that the ball has been acquired, a special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 reserved ball (special figure 2 lottery) is easily executed.

  In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the special symbol lottery of any symbol type (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) can be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The same variation pattern is selected for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times) after the high probability state of the symbol is set, regardless of the symbol type. This makes it possible to execute the same special symbol variation even when the special symbol lottery of any symbol type is executed, and sets the effect period of the effect (continuous effect) that straddles a plurality of special symbol lotteries. Can be made easier.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is performed when both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game have the high probability state of the ordinary symbol set. Is configured to reach the second entrance 640 at a ratio of one ball to two balls, so that it is only necessary to continuously execute a game of firing a ball during a high probability state of a normal symbol, The special symbol lottery can be executed without interruption. Therefore, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, the period until the 20th special symbol fluctuation ends (5 seconds × 20 times) is 100 seconds. Is set in advance as a high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous effect for 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous effect across 20 special symbol lotteries. In this case, only when the jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is sufficient to execute the switching process for switching the effect mode of the already set continuous production, and the process for executing the effect during the high-speed fluctuation period is simplified. can do.

  Further, a determining means for determining whether or not to temporarily stop the continuous production for 100 seconds set during the high-speed fluctuation period is provided. For example, after the special symbol fluctuation being executed is stopped and displayed, When it is determined that the period until the special symbol change is executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol change is interrupted, the continuous production during execution is temporarily stopped. You may be comprised so that the process which stops may be performed. Thereby, even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress the progress of only the continuous performance ahead. In addition, an operation means (for example, a frame button 22) operable by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, a process for temporarily stopping the continuous production being performed is executed. May be configured.

  In this control example, the same variation time (5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the high-speed variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A variation pattern in which a variation time other than seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more be set more easily when the special symbol lottery result indicates that the big hit has been won than when the big hit has not been won. With this configuration, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from switching the production mode of the continuous production for 100 seconds that has been set in advance to the stop display of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning. It is possible to notify the jackpot winning in an effect mode in which the player can sufficiently grasp the lottery result, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Also, instead of setting the production mode of the continuous production collectively for the time (100 seconds) assumed as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) is divided into a plurality of periods. The first continuous effect executed during one high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) is set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous effect is executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) The effect may be configured to be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an effect mode that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period (an effect mode in the second half of a continuous effect) is set in advance. .

  Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute a continuous effect for the entire period of the high-speed fluctuation period, and it is not necessary to execute a special first period (for example, a special symbol fluctuation executed during the high-speed fluctuation period (20 times) in the high-speed fluctuation period). Of these, the continuous effect may be executed only during the tenth to twentieth fluctuation periods.

  Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. The type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (the special symbol 1), and the number of changes (the number of special symbol changes executed after the end of the big hit game) is "21 to 49 times (the second period)". If the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is "hit", the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0-198", that is, the variation pattern in which the variation time is "30 seconds" in the entire range. (Spot) is selected, and when the lottery result is “out”, the fluctuation time is “30 seconds” for the range of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 179”. Is defined so that a variation pattern (short deviation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” is selected in the range of “180 to 198”.

  In the present control example, when the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol is set, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the ordinary symbol high probability state is set. During the second period in which 21 or more special symbol fluctuations have been performed since the setting of, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed as long as the game is continuously performed. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example is configured such that the left hitting game or the right hitting game causes the pachinko machine 10 to enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Since the game board 13 has a configuration in which a ball can enter, for example, if the game is interrupted during the probable change state or the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery is executed after the game is resumed. There are cases.

  As described above, unlike the case where the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, when the jackpot has been won in the first special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot game is executed (50% of the jackpot winning). 2 In the gaming state in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed (probable change state, time saving state), if the first special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed, the player wins during the jackpot winning. It is a disadvantageous lottery result. In the present control example, in the variable effect (variable effect using the third symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type is suggested to the player in addition to the presence or absence of the jackpot. It is configured to be possible, for example, when the main symbol sz to which the odd number is attached is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot winning, it indicates the jackpot winning in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed, and the even number When the main symbol sz to which a number is attached is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning, the configuration is such as to indicate a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed.

  Therefore, in the variable effect performed during the probable change state or the time reduction state, in the reach state (the combination indicating the jackpot winning in which the normal jackpot game is executed in the main symbol sz to which the even number is attached) (A state in which a part of the symbol sz is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner), the disadvantageous jackpot is won from a time before the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. In such a case, there is a problem that the player is made to think and the desire to play decreases. Therefore, in the present control example, in the gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed (probable change state, time saving state), when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed, As shown in FIG. 131 (a), both the main symbol sz with the odd number and the main symbol sz with the even number always reach the fluctuation state (double reach). Effect) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that a disadvantageous jackpot has been won from a point in time before the special symbol change is stopped and displayed.

  In order to execute the double-reach effect, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery in the second period, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “30 seconds” is selected. In addition, if the double reach effect described above as the variable effect performed during the probable change state or the time reduction state is executed only when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time when the double reach effect is executed In this control example, a part (approximately 80%) of the case where the first special symbol lottery is won and the second special symbol lottery are used because the player knows about the first special symbol jackpot winning. A variation pattern (30 seconds variation time) for performing a double-reach production in a part (about 25%) when winning and a part (about 5%) when it loses in the second special symbol lottery ) Is selected.

  With this configuration, when a double-reach effect is performed during the probable change state or the time reduction state, whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol And it is also difficult to understand whether the lottery result is a big hit or not, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game while having a sense of expectation until the effect result of the double reach effect is displayed.

  In addition, since it is configured to execute the double-reach effect even for the second special symbol lottery in which the jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the probability-change jackpot game is performed for the entire double-reach effect. Is a double-reach effect only for the first special symbol lottery, which indicates that the effect has been won in the jackpot executed (the main symbol sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot winning). Can be created more easily than in the case of executing Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the probability change jackpot game when the double-reach effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. If the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of changes (the number of special symbols changed after the end of the big hit game) is "50 times (specific period)", Regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, it is defined that a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of “20 seconds” is selected.

  In the present control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit game, a special symbol high probability state is set after the big hit game ends. As the probable change end condition for terminating the special symbol high probability state, the first probable change end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50, and the special symbol high probability state are set. And the second probable change end condition that is satisfied when a special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the special symbol is won. When any of the probable change end conditions is satisfied, the special symbol high probability state and the special symbol low probability It is configured to transition to the state.

  In other words, according to the game result during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed, a probable change state (a special symbol high-probability state, a normal symbol high-probability state) is set until the number of executions of the special symbol change reaches 50, Thereafter, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set until the number of executions of the special symbol becomes 50, and the number of times of execution of the special symbol change is 100 after the end of the big hit game. There is a case where a time saving state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) is set until.

  On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a game state suggestion effect for suggesting the currently set game state to the player is executed. For example, a ball is specified during a jackpot game. When the V notification effect that notifies that the player has passed the area (V gate) 65v is executed, the notification effect (super chance mode effect) that notifies the player that the current game state is in the probable change state is executed. If the effect mode during the jackpot game is set so that the V notification effect is not executed even when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the current game state A common effect (chance mode effect) is performed to make it difficult to determine whether or not is in the probable change state.

  Then, when the super chance mode effect is being executed, the probable change state ends at the 50th special symbol change (specific period). , The probable change state ends, and then an effect indicating that the chance mode (time saving) is set is executed. In addition, when the chance mode is being executed, an effect that indicates whether or not the probable change state has been set is executed in the specific period.

  In this manner, information other than the special symbol lottery result (information for guiding the transition of the gaming state, or information set in the past, using the special symbol variation period for indicating the special symbol lottery result in the specific period) When the information notification effect of notifying the player of the game state that has been performed) is performed, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is fixed by fixing the variation time of the selected special symbol variation. It is possible to reduce the variation of the effect mode (including the effect time) of the information notification effect for notifying the player.

  In the present control example, the execution period of the special symbol change (the 50th special symbol change after the end of the big hit) at which the probable change state ends is set to the specific period, and the change time of the special symbol change is fixed to “20 seconds”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special symbol change after the end of the jackpot, including before and after the special symbol change in which the probable change state ends, is a specific period (fixed period). (A period during which the specified fluctuation time is selected), and the information notification effect may be configured to be executable using the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the specific period.

  In addition, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the above-described specific period, the production mode of the information notification effect may be changed. May be changed to an effect mode that does not notify the information indicating that the game has ended, or the game state set in the past (the game set after the end of the previous jackpot game, regardless of the game state actually set) (State) may be changed to an effect mode indicating that the game state is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time reduction state).

  In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period may be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. It is better that the execution timing of the information notification effect is more likely to be delayed than that. As a result, the player can be interested in not only the content of the information notification effect but also the execution timing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as in the example described above, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the information notification effect is executed at the specific timing in advance. If the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed is varied from the specific timing described above. Alternatively, one execution timing is determined from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period without presetting the timing at which the information notification effect is executed. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of changes (the number of special symbol changes executed after the end of the big hit game) is "51 to 100 times (third period). , And when the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is "hit", the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is "30 seconds" in the entire range. Is specified so that the fluctuation pattern (hit) is selected, and if the lottery result is "out of range", the fluctuation time counter indicates that the fluctuation value counter CS1 has a fluctuation time of "0 to 179". It is defined that a fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds" (out of range) is selected, and a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds" (second super fluctuation) in the range of "180 to 198" is selected. .

  This third period is a period in which the gaming state is in the time saving state. In other words, even if the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probable change end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is set. Like the second period described above, the third special period is a period in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on a game method to be executed. During the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery executed during the third period is performed. Is configured such that a variation pattern with a long variation time is easily selected. Thereby, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time saving state, the first special symbol change is executed in the change pattern in which the long change time is set. In addition, it is possible to easily obtain the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from being frequently executed during the time saving state.

  During the third period, the double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is configured to be executed in the same manner as during the second period described above. It is stipulated that a variation pattern with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected in a part of the winning, a part in the case of the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery, and a part in the case of a winning winning.

  Next, the contents of various fluctuation patterns defined for the second special symbol lottery when the probable change state or the time saving state is set will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of changes (the number of special symbol changes executed after the end of the big hit game) is “1 to 20 times ( "1st period)", the fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) with the fluctuation time of "5 seconds" regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is prescribed to be selected. That is, during the first period, the same variation pattern (five-second variation) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

  Next, when the number of changes (the number of special symbol changes executed after the end of the big hit game) is “21 to 49 times (second period)” and the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is “win” Indicates that the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) in which the fluctuation time is “10 seconds” is in the range of “150 to 198” for the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 149”. Stipulates that a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of “30 seconds” is selected, and when the lottery result is “out”, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0-191”. A variation pattern (second short variation) with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected for the range of “”, and a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” for the range of “192 to 198”. It is prescribed to be selected.

  During the second period, which is the high probability state (probable change state, time saving state) of the ordinary symbol mainly in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the above-described double reach effect is executed (the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set) Other than the variation pattern, a variation pattern having a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected. That is, the second special symbol change is configured to be completed in a short period of time in a state where the ball can be easily inserted into the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. I have. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large amount of balls enter the second entrance 640 in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is stored up to the upper limit, and the player feels A good game can be performed.

  In the present control example, “10 seconds” is defined as the short-time fluctuation time. However, the fluctuation time may be further shortened. In this case, the ball fired on the game board 13 is the It is preferable to define a time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the interval (about 1.2 seconds) that can reach the entrance 2 640. With this configuration, despite the player continuously firing the ball, the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls decreases, and the priority is set to a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation where the first special symbol lottery is executed.

  Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the big hit game) is “50 times (specific period)”, the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired fluctuation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1, it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of “20 seconds” is selected. The variation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the variation pattern selected in response to the above-described first special symbol lottery, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of changes (the number of special symbols executed after the end of the big hit game) is "51 to 100 times (third period). , And when the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is “winning”, the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and the fluctuation time is “10 seconds”. The variation pattern (second short variation) specifies that a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “150 to 198”, and the lottery result is “ In the case of "out of range", a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected for a range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 191" and a range of "192 to 198". The fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with the fluctuation time “30 seconds” It is defined as being-option.

  As described above, in the first control example, the normal pattern table 202b1 and the probability change / time saving table 202b2 are provided as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, and according to the set game state. , The data table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different. Thereby, the type of the variation pattern selected according to the set game state can be made different, and the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player with various variation patterns, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, a configuration is adopted in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the same data table (probability variation / time saving table 202b2) when the probable change state is set as the game state and when the time reduction state is set. ing. Therefore, when the "chance mode", which is an effect mode that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time saving state or the probable change state is set, is selected in accordance with the special symbol lottery executed. Depending on the type of the variation pattern to be performed, it is possible to prevent the set game state from being grasped by the player. In this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the probable change state and the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time saving state are the same. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to refer to a different data table.

  In this case, a probable variation data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in the probable change state and a time reduction data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state are provided, and a small probability ( For example, as a type of the variation pattern selected in (5%), a specific variation pattern defined only in one data table may be provided. Thus, only when the specific variation pattern is selected, the player can grasp the currently set game state based on the type of the selected variation pattern.

  In addition, the rate at which each variation pattern is selected may be different between the probability variation data table and the time reduction data table. With this configuration, by analyzing the bias of the variation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the “chance mode”, the player is able to predict the currently set game state. Can be provided.

  As described above, in the present control example, the data table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different depending on the game state to be set. May be configured to select the data table to be set, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning, or the game state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning Jackpot type (special symbol stop display mode), third symbol display mode stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and whether or not the ball has passed to the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game Based on the result (whether or not a prize has been won) or the like, the data table referred to when a variation pattern is selected during the same time saving state may be made different. It may be.

  In this case, when a command indicating a selected variation pattern (variation pattern command) is set, a command including information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table) may be set. . Thus, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it is possible to determine the history of the current game state in addition to the type of the variation pattern set this time. Therefore, based on the received fluctuation pattern command, for example, it is determined that the ball has not been able to win the V and the time saving state has been set in spite of the fact that the probability variable jackpot game has been executed, and a special effect mode ( For example, "Sorry mode") can be set.

  Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 299 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low-probability cases of ordinary symbols and the other for high-probability cases in which the probability of hitting ordinary symbols is higher than that for low probabilities. The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 is set to the value of "0 to 2", and the ordinary symbol is defined as the high probability of the ordinary symbol. When the state is in the state, the obtained second hit random number counter C4 is defined as a normal hit in the range of “0 to 149”.

  That is, in the present control example, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the low probability. Thus, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the time reduction state, which is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, in the normal state, Since it is possible to make it harder to win per day, it is possible to make it harder for a situation where a game per day is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to easily execute a normal symbol win game based on a normal symbol win during the time reduction state.

  Further, in the present control example, a variation time of a different length is set as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation for indicating the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to the set game state, When the low probability state of the symbol is set, a longer fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set than when the high probability state of the symbol is set. In this way, by changing the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol change according to the game state, the ordinary symbol lottery is won and the second ball entrance 640 is reached. It is possible to easily set a game state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the ball can easily enter the ball.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is won, a plurality of balls are made to enter the second entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a per-figure-period game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened in an operation mode (long opening) in which the operation is possible. Therefore, even in the game state (normal state) where it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to easily make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640, and what kind of game state Even in the set state, the possibility that the second special symbol lottery is executed for the player can be left, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a big hit type selection table. 202d. Note that the first random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, and the big hit type selection table 202d have been described when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. 138, and thus description thereof will be omitted. .

  Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 138, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 167), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 166). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 165) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol retaining ball number. A counter 203d, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time saving counter 203h, a probability change counter 203i, a big hit start flag 203j, a big hit flag 203k, a certain change setting flag 203m, It has a probable variable passage counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a probable variable valid flag 203r, a probable variable valid timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present control example). Is a storage area for storing.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present control example). Is a storage area for storing.

  The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the change display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol holding ball when the special symbol stops changing. When various counter values are stored in the storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed prior to the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol retaining ball storage area When various counter values are stored in any of the 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are shifted and stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. And stores them in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer and stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Store each.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above. Is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is a storage area for storing the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) with the detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning). is there. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the value of the second random number counter C4 is read from the counter buffer. And stores it in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hit lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the start timing of the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4) corresponding to each winning start stored in the ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is based on a winning in the first ball entrance 64 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a winning start is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one every time a variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of retained balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is based on a winning in the second ball entrance 640 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81). The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S1701 in FIG. 166) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a winning start is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one every time the variable display effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning) and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 stores the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ) Is referred to in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f, the ball passes through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 156) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter for counting the number of balls to be held (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of retaining balls stored based on the fact that a ball has passed through the through gate 67. In the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166), zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the ordinary symbol change display is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

  The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the end of the big hit game (setting of the time-saving counter 203h, setting of the probability change counter 203i). The game state corresponding to (situation) is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203i is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is a value larger than 0, When the value is 0, the time saving state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value larger than 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203i is a value greater than 0, the probability change state is stored.

  Furthermore, in the state in which the jackpot game is being executed, a hit game state (a jackpot state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game are also displayed. It is configured to be stored. In addition, the game-per-figure-per-game information indicating that the game per game-per-figure is being executed is also stored.

  Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the startup process (see FIG. 166) performed, a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is set.

  Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the current game state.

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game ends, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the hour reduction counter 203j is set, the value of the hour reduction counter 203h is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation), and the hour reduction counter 203h is set. Is set to 0, the normal symbol high-probability state ends, and the normal symbol low-probability state is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the next big hit game Until is executed (until the jackpot is won), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the time reduction counter 203h may be set to “10000”.

  In the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of the ordinary symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes). Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of time reduction counter 203h is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a winning for a special public figure), the value of the time reduction counter 203h may be decremented.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is configured to be decremented by one. The subtraction may be performed, or the subtraction may be performed so that the value of the time reduction counter 203h becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the time reduction counter 203h. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state continues, and to interest the player in the game during the time reduction state.

  Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be changed according to the content of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The probability change counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which the special symbol high-probability state is set, and a value corresponding to a case where the special symbol high-probability state is set is set. Based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big hit game, a value is set in the probability change counter 203i after the big hit game ends (see S2102 in FIG. 170). And when the big hit game is won, it is cleared to 0. Accordingly, the special symbol high probability state is not set during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol high probability state is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (fluctuation). Is set to 0, the special symbol high-probability state ends, and the state shifts to the special symbol low-probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the next big hit game Until is executed (until the jackpot is won), the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue. In this case, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be set to “10000”.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the probability change counter 203i is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (changes) as a condition for terminating the special symbol high probability state and a condition for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i. Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the content of various processes executed by main controller 110 is satisfied, the value of positive change counter 203i is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-order lottery), or Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a winning for a special general drawing), the value of the probability change counter 203i may be decremented.

  Further, the value set in the probability change counter 203i may be made different based on the winning jackpot type and the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, or the value of the above-mentioned time saving counter 203h may be subtracted. Similarly to the content to be changed, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtractable by a condition other than the number of times of the special symbol change, or if the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i is satisfied, The value of the counter 203i may be configured to be decrementable at a time. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special symbol continues, so that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol can be watched without getting tired. Can be.

  Further, in the present control example, as a condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (variations). Although only the condition is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an end condition that can be satisfied by the contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted. May be configured. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special out-of-special lottery), Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning for a special public figure), the value of the probability change counter 203i may be reduced, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, The value of the probability change counter 203i may be decremented based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or the like.

  In addition, in the present control example, the value of the probability change counter 203i is configured to be decremented by one. The configuration may be such that the subtraction is performed, or the subtraction may be performed such that the value of the probable variable counter 203i becomes “0” regardless of the current value of the probable variable counter 203i. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probable change state continues, and to interest the player in the game in the probable change state.

  Further, the condition for terminating the probable change state may be changed according to the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). Thereby, not only can the player execute the jackpot game, but also the player can be interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

  The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether to start a jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. The big hit start flag 203j is set to ON when it is time to end the variable display indicating the big hit. The jackpot start flag 203j is set to off when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

  The big hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit game (special game state) is being performed. If the big hit flag 203k is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203k becomes a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON at the same time as the big hit game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 168). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit game (special game state) (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157), it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made by referring to the big hit flag 203k (see S201 of FIG. 157).

  The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probable state is determined by whether a ball enters a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the ball (falls down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into the specific area (V gate) 65v (passing through the positive change switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the positive change setting flag 203m is turned on. (See S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203m is set to off at the end of the big hit game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Note that the probability change setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the probable variable switch before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a probable variable passage counter 203n to be described later is a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by judging whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203m while the power is off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability change switch (flowed down the specific area) in one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203n and the ejection number counter 203t described later. The probable variable passage counter 203n is updated by being incremented by one each time the ball passes through the probable switch (flows down a specific area). In addition, after executing a process of determining whether or not the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to “0”. Note that the probability change passage counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and when the winning in the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Based on this, it is updated by adding one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203o) and the number of discharged numbers (the total value of the discharging number counter 203t and the positive variable passing counter 203n) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball throwing period after the end of one round and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that the ball is in a ball-running period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether or not the time necessary for discharging the game ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter for.

  The remaining ball timer 203q is a time required for discharging a ball winning the variable prize device 65 when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning ball to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is previously set to the remaining ball timer 203q. Is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. You. If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress improper assignment of the probable change state.

  When the game ball passes through the specific area (V-gate) 65v after the switching valve 65y switches the ball to the specific area (V-gate) 65v and the arrangement in which the ball cannot be distributed to the specific area (V-gate) 65v, the certainty change valid flag 203r indicates that the ball has passed through. This is a flag for determining whether or not (entering ball) is valid. When the probability change validity flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that a period during which the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203r was set to ON. After the switching valve 65y has been switched to the arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v, the period necessary for normal passage through the variable change switch can be determined by the variable change valid timer 203s. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the probable change switch is 0.3 second. The upper limit value of the probable change valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even after passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, it is determined to be illegal and not to pass.

  As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passed through the probable change switch, the game ball is pushed up from below the probable change switch with a piano wire or the like, and is passed. For example, it is possible to suppress damage caused by fraudulent detection that the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing.

  The discharge number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203t is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls winning the variable prize device 65 matches the number of discharges.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and displays an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, a description will be given of the contents specified in the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control unit 113 stores a fluctuating pattern selection table 222a, a normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b, a probable changing effect selection table 222c, and a continuous announcement execution selection. At least a table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation effect selection table 222f are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outlier, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the present control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) in which the third symbol is variably displayed by horizontal scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 is executed in accordance with the special symbol variation to be executed. In this fluctuation effect, the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type, the result of the determination as to whether or not the fluctuation is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the fluctuating effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to perform a game (special figure game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation has won a jackpot.

  The normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b indicates the effect of the third symbol when the change pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol change executed while the normal state is set. A data table that is referred to when selecting a mode. The data table is associated with a lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (result determination result), the number of special figure 2 reservations, the number of special figure 1 reservations, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents) are defined.

  In the present control example, when a normal symbol lottery is won in a state in which the normal state is set, a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed. Then, it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery by making the ball enter the second entrance 640 during the per-game game. In other words, in the gaming state (normal state) where the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (when a win is made per ordinary figure), during a predetermined period (during a game period per ordinary figure) ), It is configured such that a lottery opportunity (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol lottery can be easily obtained (a ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 640).

  In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142 (b)), a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of “10 seconds” and a fluctuation time of “40 seconds” When the second special symbol lottery in which the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of “40 seconds” is set is executed, the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is displayed. The effect mode of the variable effect is set with reference to this.

  Here, the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b. The normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b shows the third symbol change when the change pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol change executed while the normal state is set. It is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode of a variable effect, and includes a lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, a special figure 2 reserved number, a special figure 1 reserved number, and a value of a production counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents) are defined in correspondence with.

  As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142 (b)), in the present control example, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, a common time is set corresponding to the basic time (10 seconds). An off-reach effect is performed (see FIG. 125 (a)), and thereafter, the pseudo-fluctuation effect (FIG. 125 (b) to FIG. 125 (b) to FIG. 126 is executed during the addition time (30 seconds).

  Specifically, when the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of special figure 2 reservations is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations changes to a range of “0 to 79”. "Pseudo 3 effects" is specified as a pattern, "special 2 effects" is specified as a variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99", and if the special figure 2 reservation number is 2, the special figure 1 reservation number is set. Regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the range of “0 to 99”, “pseudo 2 effect” as a variation pattern, and if the number of special figure 2 reservations is 1, regardless of the number of special figure 1 reservations The value of the effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the fluctuation pattern is "simulated 1 effect", and the range of "90 to 99" is specified as the fluctuation pattern is "special pseudo 4 effect".

  In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, “special end effect” is performed when the special figure 1 reservation number is 1 to 4, and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0. "Simulation-free production" is set.

  When the lottery result is out of order, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of “0 to 99” and the variation pattern is “ When the number of reserved special figure 2 is two, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of reserved special figure 1 is within the range of “0 to 99” and the variation pattern is “ When the pseudo figure 2 effect is “1 special figure 2 reservation number”, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in a range of “0 to 99”, and the fluctuation pattern is “pseudo 1 effect”. However, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0, “simulation-free production” is defined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect form of the pseudo fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the presence / absence of the number of special figure 2 reservations and the number of special figure 1 reservations is determined, and the next execution is performed. It is configured to execute a pseudo fluctuation effect in an effect mode corresponding to a special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easy to think that the pseudo fluctuation effect executed during one special symbol fluctuation period is a fluctuation effect corresponding to the next special symbol fluctuation.

  Further, since the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect (the number of temporary stoppages of the third symbol) is configured to correspond to the acquired number of reserved special figure 2 reservations, during the normal state. It can be assumed that all of the special figure 2 reservations acquired during the game executed per day are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect in which the jackpot has been won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot has been won as a result of acquiring many special figure 2 reservations during the per-figure game executed during the normal state. Can be made. In addition, when the pseudo-variation effect that has been won is executed, it is assumed that all the special figure 2 reservations have been consumed, and then the variable effect using the special figure 2 reservation is executed (Chance Zone Continuation), it is possible to provide the player with an extraordinary effect.

  Further, in the present control example, since pseudo fluctuation effects (special pseudo 2 effects, pseudo 4 effects) that are set only when a jackpot is won are provided, the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation effects and the special figure The player can be interested in the two reserved numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the contents of the probable changing effect selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the during-probability-change effect selection table 222c. In the probable changing effect selection table 222c, a fluctuating pattern having a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as the fluctuating pattern of the special symbol fluctuating executed during the probable changing state (time saving state), that is, during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. It is a data table referred when setting the fluctuation effect in the case. The probable changing effect selection table 222c is referred to when setting the effect mode of the variable effect for the special symbol change to be executed, and is executed in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). In the effect mode setting process in FIG. 1 (see S4903 in FIG. 183), the process is in the “super chance mode”, which is an effect mode for notifying the player of a probable change state (S5005 in FIG. 183: Yes). If the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be executed is “30 seconds” (S5007 in FIG. 183: Yes), or a special figure executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). In the 2nd effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184), the “super chance mode” which is an effect mode for notifying the player of the probable change state. There are (in FIG. 184 S5112: Yes), when the change time of the variation pattern currently being executed (the basic variable time) is "30 seconds" (in FIG. 184 S5114: Yes), it is referred to.

  In the present control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, it is determined that the jackpot that can be won only in the first special symbol lottery (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed) is won. In order to prevent a situation in which a player grasps a lottery result before the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, The third symbol (the third symbol with an even number attached) to show the jackpot winning in which the jackpot game is executed, and the third symbol (the odd number in the third symbol) to show the jackpot winning in which the odd-numbered jackpot game is executed (The third symbol attached) is configured to execute a double-reach effect in which both reach the state.

  Furthermore, in the probable state, which is a high probability state of a normal symbol, or in the time saving state, when the above-described double reach effect is executed, the player is notified that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery. In order to make it difficult to grasp, in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the certain-variable big-hit game is executed whenever the big hit is won, the above-described double-reach effect is executed. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set are configured such that a variation pattern with a variation time of “30 seconds” can be selected. When the variation pattern of “30 seconds” is selected, a double reach effect is executed. As described above, regardless of the type of the special symbol, the same fluctuation time (30 seconds) is set, and a double-reach effect that is the same fluctuation effect is executed. Various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by making it possible for the player to recognize the symbol type of the special symbol change being executed by the player, and by sharing the effect data used for the change effect. Can reduce the amount of effect data used for

  As shown in FIG. 146, in the probability changing effect selection table 222 c, different effect modes according to the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol lottery result), and the value of the effect counter 223 f. Stipulated. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a probability change big hit (big hit A), the value of the effect counter 223f is set in the range of "0 to 49". "Double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99" for the "probable change single reach", and "double reach" is defined for a normal jackpot (big hit B); I have.

  When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is "special double reach" in the range of "0 to 49" and " "Probable change double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, "double reach" is set in the range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 4" and "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10". The “non-reach” is defined in the range of “11 to 99” for “probable change double reach”.

  With such a configuration, both the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed and the case where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probable change state are the “double reach” (the normal winning as shown in FIG. 131 (a)). (A reach effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the "reach state") is executed, so that when "double reach" is executed for the player, It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

  Furthermore, when "special double reach" is set, the effect mode of "double reach" is set first, and then the effect mode in which the effect mode is changed to "probable double reach" shown in FIG. 131 (b). Is executed. Therefore, even when “double reach” is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to play a game while expecting to be promoted to “probable double reach” on the way. In this “special double reach”, the timing at which the staging mode of the reach effect is changed is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two turns, but the timing is not limited to this, and the player can use the operation buttons 22 The effect mode may be changed based on the timing at which is operated.

  In the case where the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, when a change pattern (special departure) with a change time of “10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 second)” is selected. After the off-reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (a) is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the off-state. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (special hit) of the fluctuation time of “10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 second)” is selected, after the symbol fluctuation of 10 seconds, the display mode indicating the jackpot win ( For example, “777”) stops the third symbol.

  As described above, as a variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a special variation pattern in which a plurality of variation effects are executed in a pseudo manner during one special symbol variation period, By providing a normal fluctuation pattern in which one fluctuation effect is executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special symbol fluctuation has been executed. Therefore, a game can be performed while expecting the chance zone to continue.

  In addition, the greater the number of variable effects (including simulated) performed in the chance zone, the higher the expectation of the jackpot win, so that the player can play the game while expecting the chance zone to continue for a long time. Can be done.

  In addition, in this control example, the same time as one pseudo fluctuation time (10 seconds) executed in a special fluctuation pattern in which a plurality of fluctuation effects are performed in a pseudo manner during one special symbol fluctuation period. Since the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal fluctuation pattern is defined as follows, for example, the second special symbol fluctuation executed in the normal fluctuation pattern is followed by the second special symbol fluctuation executed in the special fluctuation pattern When executed, the variable effect for 10 seconds is repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the pseudo fluctuation effect is repeatedly executed as the special fluctuation pattern or whether the special fluctuation pattern and the normal fluctuation pattern are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the new second special symbol change has been executed, so that the player can play the game while expecting the chance zone to continue.

  In this control example, when a variation pattern having a variation time of “40” seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation in the normal state, a variation effect of the special variation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation time other than “40 seconds” may be selectable as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state. In the present control example, the pseudo fluctuation time, which is a part of the fluctuation effect of the special fluctuation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds. It is configured to be easily executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting that the execution period of one variation effect is lengthened.

  Returning to FIG. 144 (a), the description will be continued. The continuous announcement execution selection table 222d is a continuous announcement effect that is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods based on winning information (whether or not a big hit has been won) included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110 side. 6 is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not the execution condition is satisfied. Here, when the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied, a special effective time for effectively determining the operation on the frame button 22 is set. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, a continuous announcement effect is executed.

  When the continuous announcement effect is executed, the mode shifts to a background mode (sky mode) different from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a special symbol corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied. A continuous production using the period until the result of the lottery is displayed is executed. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the high-speed fluctuation period (the 20th special symbol variation after the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set) During this period, the background mode is less likely to shift based on the operation on the frame button 22 than in other periods. Even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be shifted by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

  Also, unlike normal background mode transition, it is possible to execute a background mode transition in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot win is increased, so that a staging effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is likely to be shorter than other periods, so if you switch the background mode like in other periods, you will overlook the result of the important special symbol lottery Therefore, it is configured to make it difficult to shift to the background mode. However, when the transition to the background mode is performed based on the execution of the continuous announcement effect, since the continuous announcement effect using the variation time of the special symbol change is performed a plurality of times, the continuous announcement is immediately performed after the transition to the background mode. There is no display of the production result. Therefore, even if the transition to the background mode is executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, effects (operation effects) other than the background mode transition can be executed, and even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player is motivated. By operating the frame button 22, the user is prevented from getting tired of the game early. Among them, by executing the background mode transition based on the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect being provided, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player and improve the interest of the game be able to.

  Here, the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 147 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), in the continuous preview execution selection table 222d, the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) included in the received prize information and the number of special figure 2 reservations (holding ball of the second special symbol) are displayed. Number) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, it is specified whether or not the condition for executing the continuous announcement effect is satisfied.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is “big hit”, the special figure 2 reservation number is “3”, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 79”, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is Is established, and in the range of "80 to 198", "no continuous notice" where the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not satisfied is defined. In addition, when the reserved number of the special figure 2 is “4” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 149”, “continuous notice” for which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied is “ In the range of “150 to 198”, “no continuous notice” where the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not satisfied is defined.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is “missing”, the special figure 2 holding number is “3”, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 194”, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is not satisfied. In the range of “without continuous notice” and “195 to 198”, “with continuous notice” that satisfies the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is defined. In addition, when the reserved number of the special figure 2 is “4” and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 189”, “No continuous notice” for which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not satisfied is “ In the range of "190 to 198", "continuous notice" that satisfies the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect is defined.

  As described above, in the present control example, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is more likely to be satisfied as the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, and the case where the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is more than the case where the lottery is out. It is configured such that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is easily satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game (a game in which a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640) so as to execute a continuous announcement effect. 10 operation can be increased. In addition, the larger the number of special figure 2 reservations, the higher the jackpot expectation when the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied. Therefore, in order to execute a continuous announcement effect with a high jackpot expectation, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game (a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640), and increase the operation of the pachinko machine 10. be able to.

  In this control example, when a winning information command (winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110 side, the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d is referred to, and only the presence or absence of the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied. Is determined (determined), even if the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied, the continuous announcement effect is not executed at that time, and after the execution condition is satisfied, within a specific period. When the frame button 22 is operated, a continuous announcement effect is executed. Accordingly, when a plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 during one special symbol fluctuation period and a plurality of winning information commands are received, the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied is played. Can be difficult to understand. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous announcement effect will continue, and it is possible to suppress the effect of the continuous announcement effect from becoming monotonous.

  In this control example, as described above, the configuration is made so that the player is not notified (suggested) that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect has been established. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) effect for notifying (suggesting) to the player. For example, by displaying the characters “waiting” in the sub display area Ds, It may be configured to notify (suggest) to the player that the execution condition has been satisfied. With such a configuration, when the notification (suggestion) effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated to execute the continuous announcement effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), it is determined that the valid period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is set (that the valid period is being performed). Is configured to display an icon HR10 imitating the frame button 22 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as an effective period notification mode that can be notified to the user, but is set when the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied. It is configured such that it is difficult (or difficult) to determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether the special valid time set or the normal valid time is set. With this configuration, the player does not know whether the continuous announcement effect is performed or the normal operation effect is performed until the frame button 22 is operated, so the player attempts to execute the continuous announcement effect. The frame button 22 can be operated arbitrarily.

  Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 allows the player to determine whether the currently set validity period is a special validity period or a normal validity period. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the currently set effective period is the special effective time or the normal effective time based on the display timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. May be configured. In addition, the period in which the special effective time is set is different from the period in which the normal effective time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the special symbol change), and the special effective time is set. May not be notified (suggested) to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when to operate the frame button 22 to execute the continuous announcement effect. Can be operated. Similarly, in a case where the player is not notified (suggested) that the special effective time has been set, an effect that notifies (suggests) that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied (for example, Only the character "waiting" is displayed in the sub display area Ds). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being uselessly operated in a state where the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is not satisfied. In addition, when the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied and the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, the information for notifying the player that the current time is outside the special effective time is An information display (for example, "not now" is displayed in the sub display area Ds) may be executed, or a guidance display for guiding the special effective time (for example, "Press again two seconds later in the sub display area Ds"). ")" May be executed.

  In the present control example, when the winning information command including the winning information for the second special symbol is received, the process for establishing the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is executed with reference to the continuous announcement effect table 222d. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied even when a winning information command including winning information for the first special symbol is received.

  Returning to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. The V notification execution selection table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining whether to execute the V notification effect during the big hit game. In the present control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable prize device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and a ball that has won in the variable prize device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol is set after the big hit game ends. Then, according to the type of the jackpot game to be executed, the jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, A jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is configured to be executable.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and the sphere flowing into the variable winning device 65 depends on the arrangement of the switching valve 65y. ) It is configured such that it can be divided into a third flow path 65e3 that cannot pass (is difficult) through 65v and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through a specific region (V gate) 65v. The switching valve 65y is drive-controlled so that the ball is switched to the arrangement state where the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round game in the case where the certain-variable big hit game is executed.

  The V notification effect is for the player executing the jackpot game to aim at the period (V period) in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the specific area (V gate) 65v. A V guidance effect for guiding a game method, a V period effect notifying that the current time is a V period, a V success effect notifying that a ball has passed a specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period, A V failure effect that notifies that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period, and a V failure effect. By executing the V notification effect, it is possible to easily perform a game for passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and execute the specific area (V gate) when the probability-change jackpot game is executed. ) Since the player is notified that the ball has passed 65v, it is possible to inform the player that the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Here, in the present control example, after the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) is configured to be set. In such a case, the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 134). Further, the "chance mode" is configured to be set in a part of the case where the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit game. With this, even if the “chance mode” is set after the end of the jackpot game, the possibility that the probability change state is set internally can be left, and the player is notified that the probability change state is set. The game can be performed while expecting. However, if the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, it is possible to easily ascertain whether or not the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game during the jackpot game. If the “chance mode” is set after the jackpot game even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v, there has been a problem that the player may be distrusted that the probability change state has disappeared. . In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 which has the certainty change end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol change is executed 50 times as the certainty change end condition for terminating the certainty change state as in the present control example, the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Since the probable change state ends without performing, there is a possibility that the probable change state was not set even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

  Therefore, in the present control example, a process of determining whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the big hit game is executed, and the presence or absence of the V notification effect during the big hit game is determined based on the processing result. Then, during the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v (when the probable change state is set after the jackpot game ends), the “chance mode” is set after the jackpot game ends. Is set. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the probable change state is set internally, so that the player playing the “chance mode” may be distrusted. Without giving, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the certain change state is set.

  Here, the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (b). FIG. 147 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the V notification execution selection table 222e. The V notification execution selection table 222e determines that it is the timing to start the probable variable jackpot game in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. In this case (S4701: FIG. 180: Yes), it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the current big hit game (S4704 in FIG. 180).

  As shown in FIG. 147 (b), the V notification execution selection table 222e is made to correspond to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed this time (the jackpot type that has won the jackpot) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. V notification (the determination result of whether or not to execute the V notification effect) is defined. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “big hit A” and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 149”, “V information present” indicating that the V information effect is to be executed is In the range of “150 to 198”, “no V notification” indicating not to execute the V notification effect is defined. In addition, the jackpot type is “jackpot C, D, E”, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 189”, and “V notification” is in the range of “190 to 198”. Stipulates that “V notification is not provided”.

  When the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the big hit type “big hit A” in which the probability change big hit game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 75%. Here, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, 50% is a probability variable big hit game ("big hit A"), and the remaining 50% is a normal big hit game ("big hit B"). ing. Therefore, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 37.5% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 62.5%. The effect will not be executed. In addition, it is configured such that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot game being executed is about 20% in the case where the V notification effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and the big hit type “big hit C, D, E” in which the probability change big hit game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 90%. . Here, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be a surely changing big hit game ("big hit C, D, E"). Therefore, the big hit game in which the V notification effect is not executed is actually executed at a rate of about 10% of the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this way, by providing a case in which the V notification effect is not executed also for the jackpot winning by the second special symbol lottery in which the probability change jackpot game is always executed, the case where the V information effect is not executed, that is, the jackpot game When the “chance mode” is set after the end, it is possible to increase the ratio of the gaming state being the probable change state.

  In addition, as described above, the jackpot ("Big Jackpot A") in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot ("Big Jackpot C" in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery) are executed. , D, E ”), the rate at which the V notification effect is executed is different. More specifically, the first special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is hard to be executed is more effective than the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is more likely to be executed. Is configured to be difficult to execute. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency at which the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game can be increased, so that the first special jackpot game can be executed normally. Even when the “chance mode” is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery, it is possible to easily give the player a sense of expectation.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), the execution ratio of the V notification effect is made different depending on the jackpot type, but the execution ratio of the V notification effect is made different according to other factors. For example, the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, or according to the number of jackpots won (ie, the number of extended play) without shifting to the normal state. The execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed, or the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed according to the operation result of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Since the execution ratio of the V notification effect is made different according to various conditions in this way, a plurality of apparent probability change ratios (rates at which the V notification effect is executed in the entire jackpot winning) can be set, so that the game It can improve the interest of the people.

  In the present control example, the above-described V notification effect can be executed only when the probability change big hit game is executed, that is, only when the big hit game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may be configured to be executable even when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, in accordance with the timing (the timing at which the first round game is executed) at which the V period (the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability changing jackpot game. A V-reporting effect may be executed, and a V-failure effect may be finally executed to notify that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Further, in a case where the V failure effect is executed in spite of a normal game being played during the jackpot game, for example, a ball is passed to the specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability change jackpot game. In spite of having made it, the V failure effect may be performed, and the “chance mode” may be set after the big hit game ends.

  Further, in the present control example, a pattern in which the V notification effect is not executed during the probable variable jackpot game can be set whether the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot or the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a jackpot is won, the probability change jackpot game is always executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the V notification effect is always executed. good.

  Returning to FIG. 144 (a), the description will be continued. The button operation effect selection table 222f indicates the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the fact that the player has operated the frame button 22 as the operation means when the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode. This is a data table that is referred to when deciding, and is a chance mode in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined that a valid operation has been performed on the frame button 22 (S5314: Yes in FIG. 186), the reference is made (see S5315 in FIG. 186). In this way, by changing the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the player operates the frame button 22 with reference to the button operation effect selection table 222f, there are various variations for the player. Operation effects can be provided.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 148 (a), the contents of the button operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 148 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the button operation effect selection table 222f is referred to when the time saving state is set and the time reduction state selection table 222f1 is referred to when the probable change state is set. And a probability change state selection table 223f2.

  In the present control example, the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode in a case where the time saving state is set and a case where the probable change state is set. Then, regardless of the set gaming state, a common variable effect is executed during the “chance mode”. Further, a variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to the same variation pattern table (probability variation / time saving table 202b2) when the probability change state is set and when the time reduction state is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, from the special symbol change executed during the “chance mode” and the change effect of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol change, the currently set gaming state is in a certain state. Since it is difficult to determine whether the player is in the time-saving state or the time-saving state, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the current state to be in a certain state.

  However, if a player playing the "chance mode" is not provided with information that can indicate the currently set game state, the player may get bored of the game in the "chance mode" early. there were. Therefore, in the present control example, a plurality of types of operation effects are configured to be executable during the “chance mode”, and the execution ratio of each operation effect is made different according to a set game state. . In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but by changing the rate at which each operation effect is selected, the current gaming state can be predicted based on a plurality of operation effects that are actually executed. Is configured. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a pleasure of predicting the gaming state.

  The effect of the operation effect performed when the normal state is set, and the effect of the operation effect executed during the “super chance mode”, which is the effect mode for notifying that the probable change state is set. In the same manner, the effect form of the operation effect performed as part of the fluctuation effect is configured to determine and execute any one of the plurality of effect forms. Description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148 (b), the contents of the time reduction state selection table 223f1 specified in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 148 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction state selection table 223f1. The time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect form of the operation effect in the “chance mode” in which the time-saving state is set, and includes a timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, The effect form of the operation effect that is different according to the type of the operation method executed on the frame button 22 by the player and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is “normal push”, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “0”. In the range of “-149”, “absence” indicating that the operation effect is not executed is shown, and in the range of “150-189”, it is determined whether or not the currently-running effect is in the reach state. In the range of “reach suggestion” indicating an effect suggested in the “reach suggestion” and “190 to 198”, “state suggestion” indicating an effect for suggesting a currently set game state is defined. When the operation method is “long press”, “transition to background mode” indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is set such that the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”. .

  Here, in the present control example, a plurality of operation methods that can be executed by the player with respect to the frame button 22 are set, and a determination is made when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 2 seconds. And "Long press" which is determined when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed continues for 2 seconds or more. Then, different operation effects are executed according to the operation method of the player. Accordingly, various operation effects can be executed by the player arbitrarily selecting an operation method. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the present control example, the above-described two types of operation methods are used as operation methods that can be operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a second frame button) may be provided so that a different operation effect is selected according to the type of the frame button pressed by the player, or during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). A plurality of operation methods may be set in accordance with the order of the operations performed on the plurality of operation means. Furthermore, when the player presses the frame button 22, it is determined to be “normally pressed”, and when the pressed state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), it is additionally determined to be “long press”. , An operation effect dedicated to “long press” may be executed.

  Further, as operation means operable by the player, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player, a lever member that allows the player to tilt in the up, down, left, and right directions, and a rotation member that allows the player to rotate. Operation means including a moving member may be provided. In addition, it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation by providing a proximity sensor having a predetermined detection area and causing the proximity sensor to detect a hand that has entered the detection area, instead of directly operating the member. Possible operation means (for example, a touch sensor or the like) may be provided, as long as the player can arbitrarily perform a predetermined operation and can select a different operation method according to the operation content.

  Further, in the present control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods of “normal pressing” and “long press” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided. However, only one operation method may be provided. Here, when only one type of operation method is provided, a configuration may be such that different operation effects are executed according to the interval at which the operation is executed. Thereby, even if the operation method itself is one kind, it becomes possible for the player to select various operation effects.

  Returning to FIG. 148 (b), the description of the contents of the time reduction state selection table 223f1 is continued. When the operation timing is during the normal working hours fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is “normal push”, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, the background mode is shifted. "Transition to background mode" is specified. When the operation method is “long press”, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, and “state suggestion” indicating an effect for indicating the currently set game state. Is stipulated.

  When the operation timing is a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal working hours fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, the background mode is set. A “background mode transition” indicating that transition is to be performed is defined. When the operation method is “long press”, the acquired value of the effect counter 223f falls within the range of “0 to 198” in the past (when the “chance mode” is set (after the end of the big hit game)). "Past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set gaming state is defined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the contents of the probability change state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change state selection table 223f2. The probability change state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referred to when determining an effect state of the operation effect in the “chance mode” in which the probability change state is set, and includes a timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, The effect form of the operation effect that is different according to the type of the operation method executed on the frame button 22 by the player and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is “0 to 119”. In the range of “3”, “absence” indicating that the operation effect is not executed is indicated, and in the range of “120 to 139”, it is indicated during the fluctuation of the third symbol whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed is in the reach state. The “reach suggestion” indicating the effect to be performed is in the range of “140 to 189”, the “state suggestion” indicating the effect for indicating the currently set game state, and the range of “190 to 198” is the background. "Background mode transition" indicating transition of the mode is defined. When the operation method is “long press”, “transition to background mode” indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is set such that the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”. .

  In addition, the background mode is shifted to a state in which the operation timing is in the normal working hours fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 169”. The "state suggestion" indicating an effect for indicating the currently set game state is defined in the range "170 to 198" for "background mode shift" indicating that the game state is to be changed. When the operation method is “long press”, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, and “state suggestion” indicating an effect for indicating the currently set game state. Is stipulated.

  When the operation timing is a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal working hours fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, the background mode is set. A “background mode transition” indicating that transition is to be performed is defined. When the operation method is “long press”, the acquired value of the effect counter 223f falls within the range of “0 to 198” in the past (when the “chance mode” is set (after the end of the big hit game)). "Past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set gaming state is defined.

  As described above, when the "chance mode" is set as the production mode after the end of the jackpot game, the operation is performed by referring to different data tables in the time saving state and the probable change state. The effect mode of the effect is configured to be selected, and the rate at which each effect mode is selected is made different according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the currently set game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so that the player can eagerly operate the frame button 22.

  Further, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probable change state, time saving state) in which the “chance mode” can be set as the effect mode, an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, an operation effect of “state suggestion” executed by “normal pressing” in the “first period” is provided as an effect mode (advantageous effect mode) that is easily executed when the “first period” Is the advantageous game state set when the operation effect of "state suggestion" is executed by the "normal push" inside? The game can be performed while giving a sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, since the operation effect is configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times during the “first period”, the more times the operation effect is executed in the advantageous effect mode described above during the “first period”, the more the operation effect is executed. Since the degree of expectation in which the advantageous game state is set can be increased, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

  In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probable change state, time saving state) in which the “chance mode” can be set as the effect mode, an advantageous game state (probable change state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, since the operation effect of “transition to background mode” executed by “normal pressing” during the “first period” is provided as the effect mode (fixed effect mode) executed only when When the operation effect of “transition to background mode” is executed by “normal pressing” during “1 period”, it can be grasped that the advantageous game state is set.

  Further, as the above-described advantageous effect mode and the confirmed effect mode, an effect mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, “normal pressing” in the “second period”) is used. More specifically, when the production mode of “state suggestion” is executed by “normal pressing” during the “first period”, the degree of expectation that the probable change state is set increases, and the “second period” In this case, the expectation that the time saving state is set is increased when the execution is performed by the “normal pressing” in “”. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of performing a game while analyzing which operation mode the operation effect was executed during which period when the “chance mode” is set. be able to.

  As described above, with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), the contents of the effect form of the operation effect that can be selected and are referred to when the operation effect is selected. Although the contents of the data table (the effect selection table at the time of button operation 222f) have been described, the first control example is configured to refer to different data tables according to the set game state. In each of the data tables, the same presentation mode is defined with different selection ratios. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, and by executing the operation effect a plurality of times, grasping the selection ratio of each effect mode, The game state can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the operation effect a plurality of times.

  In the present control example, different data tables are referred to according to the set game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the currently set game state and the currently set game state may be referred to. The effect mode of the operation effect may be selected by referring to a different data table based on the effect mode being performed. Thus, when the probable change state is set, different operation effects can be performed when the “super chance mode” is set as the effect mode and when the “chance mode” is set. it can.

  Here, when "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode, for example, it is not necessary to execute "state suggestion" which is an effect mode indicating that the current game state is set. Instead, the rendering mode of “reach suggestion” and a specific lottery result (a big hit or a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time longer than a predetermined time is set) are shown in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. It is preferable to define an effect form of “look ahead suggestion” that indicates whether or not information is included. Thereby, even in the state where the “super chance mode” is set, the player can be motivated to execute the operation effect.

  Further, the type of the data table (the button operation effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special symbol), the third symbol display The third symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 may be configured to be different depending on the stop display mode or the presence or absence of the V winning during the jackpot game.

  In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, the case where the "chance mode" is set after the end of the normal big hit game, In the case where the ball cannot be won in the middle and the “chance mode” is set after the big hit game is completed, the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the “chance mode” can be made different. Specifically, during the “chance mode” in which the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game of probability change, the production mode of “suggest past hit type” indicating that the previous jackpot game was a probability change jackpot game is indicated. It is better to specify. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the probable change state is set even though the time saving state is actually set. In addition, an effect mode of “Past game history notification” for notifying that a V prize could not be made even though the previous jackpot game was a probability change jackpot game may be defined. This makes it easy to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, dependent state setting area 223g, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 223h, special effect flag 223i, V winning flag 223j, V effect execution flag 223k, V notification flag 223m, time reduction counter 223n, special continuous notice At least a flag 223o, an effect mode storage area 223p, a continuous notice execution flag 223q, a SW valid time counter 223r, a special valid time counter 223s, an operating counter 223t, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four holding areas (first area to fourth area) for a special symbol. Winning information included in the output winning information command is stored in order from the first area. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  In the present control example, up to four reserved balls of the first special symbol and up to four reserved balls of the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, respectively, so that the winning information storage area 223b includes: Four reserved areas for the first special symbol and four reserved areas for the second special symbol are formed. In the present control example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are used. When a new special symbol lottery is executed in a state where both are held, the oldest stored prize information (winning information stored in the first area) is executed among the reserved areas of the second special symbol. It is configured to transition to an area. The winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the holding area with the next lower number. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured such that the second special symbol lottery is executed in preference to the first special symbol lottery.

  In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, for example, regardless of the type of the special symbol, the special symbol lottery is executed in accordance with the order in which the reserved balls are acquired. In the case of the machine 10), eight holding areas are provided in the winning information storage area 223b, and the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is stored in order from the first area. good. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of simultaneously (overlapping) executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (a so-called simultaneous fluctuation type pachinko machine 10), the configuration of this control example is adopted. On the other hand, instead of one execution area, a first execution area for a first special symbol and a second execution area for a second special symbol are provided, and a first area of a holding area corresponding to each special symbol is provided. May be shifted to an execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a first for counting the reserved ball number of the first special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the reserved ball number of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls of each special symbol based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and counts the number of reserved balls in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Is to be managed.

  More specifically, the main controller 110 adds the first special symbol to the number of reserved balls by entering the first entrance hole 64, or a new first special symbol lottery in the main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is subtracted in order to execute the command, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) ) Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is added by entering the second entrance 640, or when the main controller 110 executes a new second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol is selected. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command (special figure 1 reserved ball count command, special figure 2 reserved ball count command) transmitted from main controller 110, voice lamp control device 113 derives the main controller from the retained ball count command. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of 110 is acquired, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, the second It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved symbol. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122 (b)). As described above, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be done. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which execution of the special symbol lottery is suspended.

  The special figure variation start flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a special figure variation pattern command for notifying a variation pattern of a special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81. Note that the special figure change start flag 223d has a first special figure change start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure change start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol. On and off are set in accordance with the type of the special symbol indicated by the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110.

  The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command for notifying the special symbol change stop type output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81. The special figure stop type selection flag 223e includes a first special figure stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special figure stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol. On and off are set in accordance with the type of the special symbol included in the stop type command (special figure stop type command) transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 198”. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated. Although a detailed description is omitted, the effect counter 223f is composed of a plurality of counters, and is defined so that the update rules are different from each other. Each of the counters is configured such that the counter updating process is executed each time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, when a plurality of types of variation pattern selection and various effect selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the values of different counters of the effect counter 223f are acquired and the process is executed. ing. Thus, even when the process using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed a plurality of times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process), various effects and the like can be selected using the same value of the effect counter 223f. Can be suppressed.

  In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g, the current gaming state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113. Further, the current state storage area for storing the currently set game state and the past game state storage for storing the game state set before the current game state is set are stored in the slave state setting area 223g. And an area, so that it is possible to calculate through what process the current gaming state has been set. Thereby, for example, when the time saving state is set, whether the time saving state is set after the big hit game is ended, or the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, and thereafter, the probability change condition is satisfied. It is possible to determine whether or not the time saving state has been set, and perform an effect based on the determination result (a past state suggesting effect for suggesting a past gaming state to the player). Further, the slave state setting area 223g is configured to be able to store a game state such as a big hit game state, a normal hit game state, in addition to a normal state, a probable change state, and a time saving state.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the general symbol holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a counter for the normal symbol held in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the retained ball number. It should be noted that the detailed contents are different from the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c only in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the ordinary symbol, and the other items are the same, so that the description is omitted.

  The special effect flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, and is turned on when a condition for executing the second special symbol change during the normal state is satisfied. Is set to Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol change is executed in the normal state, or when the special figure 2 hold is acquired while the first special symbol change is being executed. Then, when the first special symbol change is executed in a state where the special effect flag 223i is set to on, that is, when the special figure 2 hold is 0, it is set to off. In this control example, a “chance zone” effect (see FIG. 124 (b)) is executed to indicate a period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

  The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v. You. Specifically, when a V winning command is set by main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command has been received in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determining processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4407 in FIG. 177). : Yes), set to ON.

  The V winning flag 112j is referred to in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the big hit related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) (S4801 in FIG. 181), and the specific area ( It is determined whether the ball has passed through the (V gate) 65v (whether a prize has been won). Then, if it is determined in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) that the setting is on (S4801: FIG. 181: Yes), the setting is turned off.

  In this control example, a V notification effect is configured to be executable as an effect for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big hit game (V winning), and the V notification effect is performed according to the presence or absence of the V winning. It is configured to vary the effect mode of the effect executed at the time of winning (at the end of the V round) and at the time of the ending of the big hit game. Furthermore, it is configured such that the effect mode at the time of the V winning and the effect mode at the time of the ending of the jackpot game are variable depending on whether or not the V notification effect is being executed. As described above, in order to enable the effect variably set based on the presence or absence of the V winning to be executed at a timing different from the time of the V winning (at the time of ending), the presence or absence of the V winning is determined by the setting status of the V winning flag 112j. It is configured to be distinguishable.

  The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the V notification effect is to be executed during the big hit game, and is set to ON when it is determined to execute the V information effect during the big hit game. Specifically, in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes), and when the current jackpot is a probable variable jackpot ( In S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the presence or absence of the execution of the V notification effect is determined with reference to the V notification execution selection table 222e. If it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

  Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, during the big hit game, the V winning is not performed. It is referred to when it does not occur (S4802 in FIG. 181), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), a process for switching the effect mode of the ending effect is executed ( After that, it is set to off (S1804 in FIG. 181).

  In the present control example, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game, and when the execution of the V notification effect is determined, the ending is performed at that time. An effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d)) for indicating that a probable change state is set is set as an effect mode during the period. In other words, when the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, the player is notified when the V prize is won, so even if the ending effect is performed during the ending period, the player is not changed. An effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d)) for indicating that the state is set is configured to be set. Therefore, if no V prize is won during the jackpot game, the ending effect production mode is switched to an effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set. Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the V notification effect is not executed during the probability change jackpot game, even if a V prize is won, the fact that the time reduction state is set as the ending effect production mode is indicated without notifying the player of the fact. (See FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) is set in advance, so that it is necessary to execute a process for switching the effecting mode of the ending effect even if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game. There is no.

  The time reduction counter 223n is a counter for measuring a period in which the time reduction state (normal symbol high probability state) is set, and when the normal symbol high probability state is set (after the end of the big hit game), A predetermined value (“100” in this control example) is set. When the special symbol change is executed in a state where the value of the time reduction counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1. When the value of the time reduction counter 223n becomes “0”, the normal symbol is changed. It is determined that the state has shifted to the low probability state. Further, a detailed period in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the value of the counter 223n during the time reduction.

  The special continuous announcement flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect was satisfied during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode, and is a continuous announcement. Set to ON when the execution condition of the effect is satisfied. When the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period in which an operation on the operation unit can be effectively determined is set, and a specific operation is performed on the operation unit during the special effective period. In such a case, a continuous announcement effect is executed.

  More specifically, in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) which is a part of the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure winning information command (corresponding to the special symbol) In the special figure prize information command process (see S4406 in FIG. 178) executed when a special prize information command is received (see S4406 in FIG. 178), the present time is in the high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the counter 223n during the time reduction is greater than 75). Is determined (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and when it is determined that the continuous preview effect is to be executed with reference to the continuous preview execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to ON (S4502 in FIG. 178). (S4507 in FIG. 178).

  Then, the chance mode executed when the “chance mode” is set in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the change effect corresponding to the second special symbol change. In the middle stage effect setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185), the setting status of the special continuous announcement flag 223o is referred to (S5210 in FIG. 185), and when it is set to ON, the operation on the frame button 22 is enabled. As a special valid period that can be determined, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special valid time timer 223s (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then set to off.

  In this way, only when the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied, the special validity period in which the operation on the operation means is determined to be valid is set, and the player specifies the operation means within the special validity period. By enabling the continuous announcement effect only when the above operation is performed, the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the continuous announcement effect. Also, a plurality of pieces of information for executing the continuous announcement effect (information indicating whether or not the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied, information indicating a period in which the special effective period is set (set period), , The information indicating the content of the operation performed on the operating means to execute the continuous announcement effect), by varying the notification mode of the announcement effect for informing the player, the difficulty of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is facilitated. Can be variably adjusted.

  Note that, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is easily satisfied when the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game in order to execute the continuous announcement effect. In addition, in the state where the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is satisfied, when the player performs a specific operation on the operation means outside the special effective period, the timing at which the special effective period is set is determined by the player. It may be configured to execute a guidance notification effect to guide the user. This allows the player to more enthusiastically operate the operation means, and suppresses the player from getting tired of the game early.

  The effect mode storage area 223p is a storage area in which various effect modes set during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol are stored, and different effect modes are stored in accordance with the value of the counter 223n during the time reduction. Then, when determining the current effect mode, the stored effect mode is read. Specifically, in the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the counter 223n during time saving is read (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the effect mode (high-speed period (high-speed period) corresponding to the read value) is read. A high-speed fluctuation period), a normal first period (first period), and a normal second period (second period) are set and stored. Then, the information stored when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol has shifted to the low probability state is cleared.

  The continuous notice running flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is set as the fluctuation effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, in the effect mode setting process during the chance mode (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185). An effect mode corresponding to the effect is determined. Then, it is set to off when the continuous announcement effect ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a different effect mode that does not correspond to the continuous announcement effect from being set in a new variable effect executed during the continuous announcement effect.

  The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring an operation valid period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the fluctuation display period of the third symbol, and when the operation valid period is set. Is set to a value corresponding to the length of the operation validity period, and the value is decremented as time elapses. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting the operation validity period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22, the effect (operation effect) executed when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated is excessively executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, as the operation means, other than the frame button 22 (first operation means), a second operation means or the like may be used. When a plurality of operation units are provided, a different operation validity period may be set for each operation unit. In that case, by providing the SW valid time timer 223r for each operation means, the operation valid period of each operation means can be set in an overlapping manner.

  The special valid time timer 223s is set to the frame button 22 which is set only when the chance mode effect setting processing (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed in a state where the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON. A timer for measuring an operation effective period (special operation effective period) for effectively determining the operation of the above. When a special operation effective time is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective time is set to It is set so that the value is subtracted as time elapses. Then, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not the time is within the special operation validity period (S5306 in FIG. 186). 186, S5306: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively handled. In this control example, the case where the frame button 22 is operated during the normal operation valid period (the period when the value of the SW valid time timer 223r is larger than 0) and the case where the special operation valid period (the value of the special valid time timer 223s is 0). The operation effect is different from the case where the frame button 22 is operated within a period longer than the operation period. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special operation effective period, In addition, a continuous announcement effect is performed over a plurality of special symbol change periods from the next special symbol change to the end of the target special symbol change. When the continuous announcement effect is executed, the background mode is changed to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period in which the background mode shift is suppressed by the operation of the normal frame button 22, the player can be more likely to win the big hit simply by executing the background mode shift.

  The in-operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring a period during which the player is pressing the frame button 22. When the player measures and presses the frame button 22, the counter 223t is operated with time. The value of the counter is updated. The type of operation performed on the frame button 22 by the player is determined based on the value measured by the in-operation counter 223t (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on the erroneous data, Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) stored by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 151, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 151 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is “special symbol loss”, it is displayed in FIG. 151 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display it. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the special figure entrance 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 152 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, and FIG. 152 (b) shows the back surface B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. .

  As shown in FIG. 152, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, a position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image is set as an initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image extending over the mountain changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. Then, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color of the sky begins to gradually change from black to white and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image which repeatedly returns to the back image showing the dawn is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “town stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “sky stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored and resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing after power is turned on.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ', and the position is shifted from the position a including the initial position to the position a'. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the fluctuation starts. When the stage change is determined by the lottery at the time, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the back BD are immediately displayed in the third symbol. The display 81 can be displayed on the display 81 while scrolling or changing the color tone over time. Rukoto can. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of the images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surfaces BD use the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to move the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image is displayed. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. This allows the image data corresponding to the remaining images to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  On the rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  In the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, the third symbol display device is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 after the ball entry to the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 occurs, even though the variable effect is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present control example, a third symbol having a different display mode is displayed according to the set background mode (back image). Therefore, every time the background mode is switched, display image data of the third symbol corresponding to the switched background mode is stored in the third symbol area 235d. This eliminates the need to store the image data for all the third symbols corresponding to all the background modes in the third symbol area 235d, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In this control example, since the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22), the background mode may be switched a plurality of times in a short period of time. There is. Therefore, in the present control example, the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third symbol area 235d for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after switching the background mode. Thereby, even if the event of frequently switching the background mode occurs, it is possible to suppress the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d from being executed in a complicated manner. Further, the third symbol storage area 235d may be configured to store a plurality of third symbol image data corresponding to a plurality of background modes in advance.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set as the variation effect display data table for the variation effect, one table is prepared for each variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any one of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies a back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the backs A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 153) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 154). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 154).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 154, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , During the main processing (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 187). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 199 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 189 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 189 (b) of S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 199 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 199 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 155) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 189 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 155), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 155, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 189 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 200). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 189 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). Thereby, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. As for the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (see FIG. 195 (a)). ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and the display data table for demonstration is displayed. When the display data table other than the above is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 191 (a), S6705 in FIG. 192 (a), and S6805 in FIG. 192 (b). , FIG. 193, S6905). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 191 (a), S6705 in FIG. 192 (a), S6805 in FIG. 192 (b), FIG. 193, S6905). With the final display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, the respective control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  In the first control example, as described above, in a state where the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are both stored, The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority. In addition, by passing a ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V provided in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to be. Furthermore, as a termination condition for terminating the probable change state that is a game state advantageous to the player, a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), in addition to the termination condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. It is configured to provide an end condition that is satisfied when executed.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). More specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in the present control example, 999, 99, and 99, respectively). 999), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning) or a ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 162.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. After the execution of the through gate passage process, next, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various determinations (win / fail determination) and determinations on the special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and in a variation display mode determined by predetermined control, The first symbol display device 37 is controlled to enable variable display, the third symbol display device 81 sets various commands for causing the third symbol and the fourth symbol to perform the variable display effect, and determines the determination result ( The control for stopping the display in the display mode indicating the result of the determination is performed. Hereinafter, the special symbol changing process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol big hit (during a big hit game) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (during a jackpot game) (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not during the big hit (big hit game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). ), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter The value of 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display is based on the lottery of the first special symbol) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display is based on the lottery of the second special symbol) are acquired. (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S208.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203. It is determined whether (N1) is larger than 0 (S210).

  In the process of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S210 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the operation is set (S212). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S213), and the process is performed by the process of S208. Move to. In the process of S208 performed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is performed (S208), and then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S209), and thereafter, the present process ends. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S214). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then the present processing is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the variation time counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in accordance with the updated value of the variation time counter. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S209) is set at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and then the processing of S215 is executed. It is updated (subtracted) each time it is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S214 (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the processing of S215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 A display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to E is determined.

  In the present control example, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and in the case of the jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is turned on (S218), and the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219). ), And the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, if the jackpot control process of the main process executed by the main control device 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 113) is executed, the process goes to S1901: Yes. The process branches to set an opening command (S1902). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the process of S217, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S220.

  The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1801) of a main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Sent to. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special figure determination command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol big hit determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 140 (a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 matches the big hit determination value. A result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

  When the process of S302 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a big hit (S303). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to the big hit. (S304), based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2, a special symbol big hit symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S305), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S303: No), a special symbol departure symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S306), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S209).

  In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S401).

  In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol big hit is set (S401: Yes), the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 141 (a) to (c)) is acquired. The big hit type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is obtained (S403), and the current game state (normal state, hiding state, probability change) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is obtained. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to (state) is read (S404).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405. Then, a special figure variation pattern command is set (S406). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. The external output processing of the main processing of the main controller 110 (S1801 in FIG. 167) ) Is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the special symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the special symbol (S408), and the change time of the selected variable pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of a special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this processing ends. The special figure stop type command set in the process of S407 includes the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the current special symbol change, that is, information indicating a rough type such as out of reach or out of reach. Then, in the external output process (refer to S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, it is output to the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order (S401: No), the processing of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

  Next, the content of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This updating process (S221) is a process executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and updates the remaining period of the period in which the probable change state is continuously set, A process for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time reduction state is continuously set is executed.

  When the update process (S221) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is the special symbol high probability state (S501). If it is determined that the value is greater than (S501: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S502), and then it is determined whether the value of the updated probability change counter 203i is 0 (S503). If it is determined that it is 0 (S503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. If it is determined in the process of S501 that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S501: No), the value of the probability change counter 203i is not present because the current state is not the special symbol high probability state. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S503, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is larger than 0, and the probability variation state (the high probability state of the special symbol) continues (S503: No). , Skip the processing of S504 and proceed to the processing of S505.

  In the processing of S505, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S505: Yes), the time reduction is performed. The value of the counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S507). If it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S508), and the value of the probability change counter 203i, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the current gaming state are set. Is set (S509), and the process ends. Further, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) in the processing of S505 (S505: No), or it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 in the processing of S507. In this case (S507: No), the process directly proceeds to S509.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) is to determine whether a ball has entered (starting winning) one of the first opening 64 and the second opening 640. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to the holding upper limit number (up to four at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640). This is the process of storing each.

  When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of the determination of the success or failure, a selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. . Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (started winning) the first ball opening 64 which is the first starting port (S601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S601: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S602). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604), and the sound lamp control device 113 In step S605, a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the first entrance 64 (the number of lottery rights reserved for the first special symbol) is notified.

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read out. Are held (stored) in the storage areas of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

  Further, when it is determined in the processing of S601 that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or in the processing of S603, the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is a value (S603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S607.

  Next, the processes in S607 to S612 are the same as the processes performed for the winning of the ball to the first starting port (the first entrance 64) performed in the processes in S601 to S606. Is only a process executed for the second entrance 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After executing each of the processes from S601 to S612, a pre-read process is executed (S613), and this process ends.

  The pre-reading process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but a hit / fail judgment is made from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Processing to determine the result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the type of stop, and the like are executed. Note that, in the present control example, the processing is performed to determine the result of the determination of the success or failure, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on the newly stored counter values. For example, if there is a new start winning, for example, all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are determined. A process for determining a determination result, a determined variation pattern, a stop type, and the like may be performed.

  In this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, a special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. In such a case, the content of the special symbol lottery right (prize information) is determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, the information on the added winning is added. The configuration is such that the pre-reading process (S613) based on (winning information) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process of S603, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. When it is determined that the number is the upper limit number (4) (S603: No), that is, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 with the number of reserved special balls reaching the upper limit, prefetching is performed. The configuration may be such that the process (S613) can be executed. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, it is possible to cause the player to continue playing the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaching the upper limit, added value can be added. Can be suppressed from decreasing the willingness to play when a ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the ball has reached.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the prefetching process (S613), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S613).

  In the pre-reading process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, a random number per first which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (S701). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the free storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S702).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading suspension storage area, the result of the rejection determination is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low-probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state are determined. This is the timing at which a new hold is generated (the timing at which a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b), and Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot determination is performed based on the held winning information, the gaming state set at the timing at which the jackpot determination is performed based on the newly held winning information this time ( This is because it is difficult to predict the probability state of the special symbol).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the result is a big hit (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can specify the big hit type and the fluctuation pattern is set based on the read various counter values (S704), After that, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information capable of specifying a loss winning and a fluctuation pattern is determined. The setting is made (S705), and then the present process ends.

  Here, the winning command set in the processing of S704 or S705 includes, in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned determination (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the determination), as well as common information of S701. The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In this control example, since there is only one special symbol probability state (special symbol low probability state), it is possible to set information (win / fail judgment result) to be set in the winning command regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbol probability states (a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state), a winning / failing determination result in the case of a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability It may be configured to determine the winning / failing determination result in the case of the state, and to set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (a value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a jackpot may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the sound lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing a special symbol lottery based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is accurately determined. , And a determination may be made based on the gaming state. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present control example, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which the pre-reading process is executed, and in the pre-reading process, the validity determination is predicted in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the winning information (holding storage) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set as a winning command and received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to predict the result of the determination of success or failure based on the information included in the winning command.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to analyze (predict the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the prefetching process executed untitled is illegally obtained by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and various processes related to the ordinary symbol variation (lottery). (Process for executing the normal symbol variation, process for setting the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol variation to be executed, process for updating the ordinary symbol variation being executed, process for stopping the ordinary symbol variation, result of the ordinary symbol lottery (A process of determining the game content of the regular game per game performed when is a win).

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S801). As for the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Up to the middle (until the winning game ends) is included. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, when it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at present (S802: No), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is turned off. The value (M) is acquired (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

  If it is determined in step S804 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the condition for executing the new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, the hold is stored. In order to execute the ordinary symbol change using the winning information, the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding 1 to the ordinary symbol holding 4 in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted, such as the normal symbol hold 1 → the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time-saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current time is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (medium time saving) (S808), and the time-saving counter 203h is set to on. (S808: Yes), a win / fail determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 140 (b)) (S809). , S811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203h is off (S808: No), the hit / failure determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for low probability time (see FIG. 140B). Are acquired (S810), and the process proceeds to S811.

  In the process of S811, it is determined whether or not the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is a hit (S811). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S811: Yes), the display mode of the hitting time "O" is determined. The display mode is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, in the process of S811, if it is determined that the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is not a hit (is a loss) (S811: No), the display mode of "X" which is a display mode at the time of the loss is set. Then (S813), the process proceeds to S814.

  In the processing of S814, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state) by referring to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S814), and during the time reduction (normal symbol high probability state). When it is determined that there is a symbol (S814: Yes), the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S814 that the time is not during the working hours reduction (high probability state of the ordinary symbol) (S814: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this processing ends.

  In the present control example, as described above, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is varied according to the set probability state of the ordinary symbol, but is not limited to this, regardless of the set gaming state. Alternatively, 3 seconds may be set as the fluctuation time. With this configuration, at the timing at which the gaming state is switched, specifically, from the normal state in which generally a long fluctuation time is likely to be set (the low probability state of a normal symbol), the time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be set At the end of the jackpot game in which the gaming state switches to the state (high probability state of the ordinary symbol), the ordinary symbol fluctuation for a long fluctuation time is executed, and the time reduction state is set even though the time reduction state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

  In addition, the method of setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and the fluctuation time is varied according to the game state, the fluctuation time is varied according to the number of balls reserved for the ordinary figure, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in the present control example, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation is changed to the set ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) And the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved ordinary symbols) may be variably set. Further, the ease of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 may be changed depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  In this manner, by changing the degree of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that is set, it is possible to change the degree of entry into the second entrance 640. Since the ease of entering a ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various game properties can be created.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S802 that the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not in the variable display mode (S802: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed by the second symbol display device 83 elapses. It is determined whether or not the processing has been performed (S817). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S817: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S817 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the process of S818, when the current lottery of the ordinary symbol is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “○” is stopped (lit). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order, the “X” symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S812 or S813 is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S818, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is changed to the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S812 or the process of S813. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is not a hit (is out of place) (S819: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S819: Yes), the value of the hour reduction counter 203h is determined as to whether or not the current gaming state is during the time reduction (high probability state of the ordinary symbol). If it is determined by referring to (S820) that it is during the time reduction (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S820: Yes), the open time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 as the content of the game per ordinary figure. The game content (opening operation) × 2 times per second is set (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S820 that it is not during the time reduction (normally high probability state of the symbol) (S820: No), the open time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds × 1 The game content (opening operation) is set (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

  In the processing of S822, opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to start based on the scenario set in the processing of S821 or S823 (S822), and this processing ends.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, based on the ordinary symbol probability states (high-probability state, low-probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct (the timing of performing the processing of S808 to S811). The probability of the ordinary symbol set at the timing (period at which it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the process of S817) for performing the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

  That is, in the present control example, the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol and the fluctuation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol, which is performed in parallel during the period in which the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the timing at which the determination of whether or not the ordinary symbol is successful is made at the timing of the ordinary symbol. Is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, a case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may occur.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the ordinary symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is accepted, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is set. When the pattern is set, the opening pattern executed when the electric accessory 640a is long opened (when the normal pattern is in the high probability state) while the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ).

  Therefore, in the present control example, the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In this control example, the open / disabled control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal symbol hitting game is performed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol win / fail determination. The configuration is such that the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the hit game of the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened only when it is in the state, Based on the game state that is constant, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  Although detailed description is omitted, various types of information (the result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, etc.) determined in the ordinary symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 108) are described below. Commands indicating the contents of various types of information are set, and are output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

  Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the content of the through gate passage processing (see S164). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and store it in the execution area. Further, using the acquired value of the ordinary random number counter C5, a win / fail determination (see S811) is performed in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163) before the actual win / fail determination is performed. This is a process for acquiring the lottery result (whether the result is a success / failure determination) in advance.

  In the through gate passage process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol-reserved-sphere counter 203f is obtained (S902), and Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the acquired ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (whether the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls has not reached the upper limit value) (S903).

  In the process of S903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S903: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (S904). ), The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S905), and the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 140 (b)) ( (S906), a general-purpose winning information command including a normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the process of S906) is set (S907), and the process ends.

  The general-purpose winning information command set in the process of S907 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. You. With this configuration, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the ordinary symbol stored and stored, and execute an effect based on the preliminary determination result.

  Specifically, in the state where the chance zone is set, that is, in the state where the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the fact that the game per game is executed during the normal state, When the winning information command includes information indicating the winning of the ordinary symbol, an effect of continuing the chance zone until the next ordinary winning game is executed can be executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next regular symbol game is executed, the first special symbol lottery is executed. As an effect mode of the fluctuating effect executed correspondingly, instead of the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the effect mode of fluctuating the third symbol in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 122 (b)), It is preferable that an effect mode corresponding to the 2 special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 124B) is set. With this configuration, in the case where a plurality of games per regular figure are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, if the chance zone is not completed despite the fact that the second special symbol lottery has been performed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will immediately execute the next per-figure-per-game. Can be grasped, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone. In addition, in the present control example, as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variable effect of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is configured. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict when the chance zone ends or whether the chance zone is extended.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 166), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present control example) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704). If it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not, it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1712 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1712 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1705: Yes), S1707: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter updating processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub-side control. An external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 156). Send a ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 157) and the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. This is information for setting an effect (a fluctuating effect, a decorative effect, etc.). In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 158) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1804).

  The details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. In the jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning port 65a (hereinafter, winning port) is set for each round of the jackpot state. , Etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed, or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 65a). When any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 65a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning port (specific winning port 65a) and the like are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S822 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). The open / close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S821 and the processing of S823 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. I do. In this control example, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B executes the process. The changed symbol display is terminated, and the stopped symbol is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variable pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159). .

  Further, in the present control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode (missing symbol) indicating the slip. The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processes of S815 and S816 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the process is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the displayed variation, and displaying the stopped symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S812 or the process of S813 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes from S1801 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), the first time, ie, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached, is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is also updated.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and that the illegal game aimed at the timing at which the determination value corresponding to the hit is obtained is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the process of S1809, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 165 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing in S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (FIG. 166, S1701) When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from the processing in S1801. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process (S1804). The jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, various types of jackpot control according to the jackpot are performed. This is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203k is set on (S1903). Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the big hit start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), then whether a special symbol big hit is present (that is, the big hit flag 203k is on). Or not) is determined (S1904). In the process of S1904, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the present is a big hit (the big hit flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round. (S1905).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting processing for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906). ), End this processing. The details of the jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). . Here, in the present control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1907: Yes), the ending command is set (S1908), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit.

  In the first control example, when a special symbol lottery is won, a process of determining a large hit type is performed using the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141 (a)) (S402 in FIG. 159). The ending period corresponding to the hit jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the processing of S1908, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Note that, as in the first control example, the length of the ending period is not set at the time of winning the jackpot, but whether or not there is a V prize during the jackpot game (whether or not a ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V)). The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined in accordance with.

  Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), if it is determined that the start timing of the ending period (the end timing of the last round), a V prize has been won during the current jackpot game (probable change setting flag 203m). Is set to ON), and when it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON, the ending display for 17 seconds indicating that the probability change state is set (FIG. 127 (b), (Refer to (d)), 17 seconds is set as the ending period of the jackpot game, and if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203m is not set to ON, the time saving state is set to 15 seconds. To perform the ending display (see FIGS. 127 (a) and (c)), set 15 seconds as the ending period of the jackpot game. It may be configured to.

  With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the jackpot game ends according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending according to the game state actually set The period can be set.

  In addition, in the case of using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game in this manner, any time between the time when the game result during the jackpot game is determined and the time when the ending period starts is used. The ending period of the jackpot game may be determined at such timing. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, after the first round game is completed (the ball is moved to the specific area). (After the round game in which a prize can be won to the V gate 65V), the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, and based on the determination result, the round game from the second round to the last round is executed. The ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the existing period.

  Further, in the above-described example, the length of the ending period is set based on the presence or absence of the V prize during the big hit game. However, instead of this, for example, the winning is performed as in the first control example. The ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the jackpot type that has been set, and specifically, the ending period of 17 seconds when the winning is won in the probability variable jackpot and 15 seconds in the case of winning the normal jackpot in advance. If it is necessary to set and change the length of the ending period based on the game result during the jackpot game, that is, to make the V prize during the jackpot game despite the fact that the variable hit jackpot game has been executed May be configured to change the length of the preset ending period when the ending is not possible. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the big hit game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. In the process of S1909, if it is determined that it is the timing of ending the jackpot (S1909: Yes), a jackpot ending process for setting a gaming state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1910), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that it is not the timing of ending the jackpot (S1909: No), a winning process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1911), and the identification is performed. Abnormality processing is performed to determine whether the ball that has entered the winning opening 65a has been normally ejected (S1912), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormal process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1906). The jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the identification corresponding to the big hit type is performed. The opening pattern of the winning opening 65a is set (S2003).

  Here, although the detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the content of the round game executed in a specific number of rounds (first round) among the round games executed plural times during one big hit game According to the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probably variable jackpot), as the first round game, the ball is caused to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). The round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated so as to be easier is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (the V gate 65V) only during the specific period in the jackpot game executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. The game during the jackpot game can be executed without any problem.

  In the present control example, when the first round of the probability change jackpot game is executed, the ball is caused to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) for the player on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. A V notification effect in which a character "Aim for V" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating a chance period is configured to be executable. This makes it possible to inform the player of the specific period in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (the V gate 65V) in the jackpot game executed for a long time. Further, based on the fact that the detecting means detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), it is determined that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The character "VGET" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for providing guidance. Thereby, it is possible to easily notify the player that the condition for setting the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied.

  In addition, the notification mode of the above-described guidance notification may be changed in accordance with the satisfaction of the condition. For example, “Aim V” based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific gate or the remaining time. May be changed, the size of the display area may be changed, or a character with more emphasized content (for example, “Aim at V quickly”) may be changed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where the ball easily flows down to the specific area (the V gate 65V).

  Further, in the present control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-prong for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y is changed so that the ball is moved to the specific gate. It is possible to set a period that is easy to flow down and a period that is difficult to flow down, but is not limited to this. For example, the switching valve 65y is operated with a common operation pattern from the start of the big hit game, and the specific winning opening 65a is set. By changing the timing of the opening state according to the type of big hit, a period in which the ball easily flows down to the specific region (the V gate 65V) and a period in which the ball is difficult to flow may be set. Thereby, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the present jackpot game easily passes the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not the game is a game. Further, since the operation contents of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and the failure of the V combination (the switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processing of S2002 and S2003 is skipped, and the opening of the normal specific winning opening 65a is set (S2004). ), And the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S2005), and the process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio ramp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the first round. Can be set. As a result, in the big hits A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) only by the player firing the ball in the first round, so that the probability change state (after the big hit game is completed) Special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) can be set.

  Next, the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S1910). The big hit end process (S1910) is executed in the big hit control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and is a process for setting the gaming state after the big hit end as described above.

  In the big hit end processing (S1910), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203m is on (S2101). In the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203m is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set. Is set to 50 (S2102), and the flow shifts to the process of S2103. On the other hand, if the probability change setting flag 203m is off in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2103.

  In the process of S2103, 100 is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2103), and then a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. When receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the slave status setting area 223g according to the gaming status notified by the status command. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the big hit flag 203k and the probability change setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this processing ends.

  By executing the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 170), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ending according to whether or not the ball has passed the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. it can.

  Next, the details of the winning processing (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1911). The winning process (S1911) is executed in the big hit control process (see FIG. 168), and is a process for controlling according to the winning in the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

  In this winning processing (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round valid period (S2201). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the processing of S2201, if it is not the round validity period (S2201: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the current time is the round validity period (S2201: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected (S2202), and the process for the specific winning opening 65a is performed. If a winning is detected (S2202: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203o and updated (S2203), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S2204), the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if a winning in the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S2202: No), the process of S2203, S2204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205). If the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and the round time has elapsed. If it has been performed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round game of the current big hit. In the present control example, the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time elapsed and the number of winnings regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the end condition of the round game may be changed, or the end condition of the round game may be changed depending on the number of rounds to be executed.

  In the process of S2207, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S2209). If it is determined that the closing is based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid is closed. 209a is set to off (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the end of a round other than one round (S2209: No), the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 2665k is turned on. Is not set, the process of S2210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2212.

  In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the probability change valid flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. If the value of the winning number counter 203o is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), and if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S2206 (S2206: No), The process skips steps S2207 to S2211, and shifts the process to step S2212.

  In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the probable change valid flag 203r is on (S2217). In the processing of S2217, if the probability change validity flag 203r is off (S2217: No), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probable change valid flag 203r is ON (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the probable change valid timer 203s (S2218), and it is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2218). S2219). If the value of the probability change valid timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S2219: No), the process shifts to the process of S2213 to monitor the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) and update the probability change setting flag 203m. Execute the process. Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203s is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) illegally and from being given a probable change state.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probable variable valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the probable variable valid flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), and the value of the probable variable valid timer 203s is reset (S2221). ), End this processing.

  In the processing of S2213, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213). If the sphere has not passed the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), This processing ends. On the other hand, if the sphere passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203n (S2214), and the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215). , V winning command (S2216), and the process ends.

  Next, the abnormal processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S1912). This abnormal process (S1912) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and determines whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has been normally ejected as described above. It is processing for.

  In the abnormal processing (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is a round validity period (S2301). If the current time is not a round validity period (S2301: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the outlet 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball outlet switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the outlet 65h1 (see FIG. 120B) detects the passage of a ball.

  In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the ball has passed the outlet 65h1 (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203t (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the ball has not passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

  In the processing of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), since the ball is in the throwing period, 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203q and updated (S2305). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the positive variable passage counter 203n and the value of the discharge number counter 203t) is awarded. It is determined whether the number matches the value (the value of the winning number counter 203o) (S2307).

  In the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings do not match (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2309. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period in which the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120 (b)) is closed (the period in which the switching valve 65y is in the closed state), the sphere is illegally flown into the fourth flow path 65e, and the specific area is set. (V-gate 65V) can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharges and the number of winnings match (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2309. In the processing of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to off (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203o, the discharge number counter 203t, and the positive change passage counter 203n are reset (S2311), and the process ends.

  Executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 172) causes a problem that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It can be detected and notified early.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 to FIG. 186, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 173, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-on processing of S4117 is performed (see FIG. 174) due to the instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of steps S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process of S4008. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 via S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is a process related to display (staging), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114. An output process is performed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. The details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then an effect update process is executed (S4111). After performing the process of S4111, the process shifts to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S4111, a command determination process (S4112) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the flow shifts to a process in S4113. Details of this command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4113, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S4113, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S4118). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4112) will be described.

  When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), a status command reception process is performed (S4202). This processing ends. In this state command receiving process (S4202), a state command indicating the current game state is received, a mode effect mode according to the game state is set, and a corresponding effect mode is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying (for example, a back image) is set. For example, when a status command indicating a probable change state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set. When a status command indicating a time saving state is received, a chance mode shown in FIG. Is set for the display command. The details of the game state actually set and the switching control of the effect mode in the executed mode effect will be described later. Details of this state command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4201 that no status command has been received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4203). : Yes), the special figure change start flag 223d corresponding to the received special figure change pattern command is set to ON (S4204), and a change pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether a special figure stop type command has been received (S4206), and it has been determined that it has been received. (S4206: Yes), set the stop type selection flag 223e (first special figure stop type flag 223e1, second special figure stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command to ON (S4207), The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4206 that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4206: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Here, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the normal symbol. The value is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). More specifically, when a special design reserved ball count command is received, the first special design reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special design reserved ball count counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the reserved design ball count command. (I.e., the number of reserved balls in the special symbol variation display), and updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. I do.

  Also, when a command for retaining the number of ordinary symbols is received, the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 included in the retained number of balls command (that is, the number of retained balls in the variation display of the ordinary symbol) is included. Is updated, and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  Here, the command of the number of retained balls is that the ball enters the various entrances (first entrance 64, second entrance 640, through gate 67) (start winning), and the value of the various number of retained balls counter Is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter is decremented, or when various fluctuation start processing is executed. Every time the setting is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4210. The value can be adjusted to the value of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f.

  Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is shifted from the values of the various retaining ball number counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110. Also, at the time of starting winning, at the time of variable display setting, that is, when the reserved ball number command is notified based on the change of various reserved ball numbers, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. It can be corrected and adjusted to the values of the various reserved ball number counters of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4212), and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area (the sound lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize information. The details of the winning command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether a symbol confirmation command has been received (S4213), and it has been determined that a symbol confirmation command has been received. (S4213: Yes), stop display of the third symbol is set (S4214), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether a general-purpose related command has been received (S4215), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4215: Yes), A related process is executed (S4216), and thereafter, the present process ends. It should be noted that a detailed description of executing the general-purpose-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the general-purpose related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the jackpot-related command has been received (S4217), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4217: Yes). ), And executes a jackpot-related process (S4218), and thereafter ends this process. A detailed description of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing ends.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S4202). This state command reception processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is performed according to the set game state. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the details of the status command receiving process (S4202) will be described.

  When the state command receiving process (S4202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g is different from the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4301: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4302).

  In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is displayed. The setting is performed (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

  In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not the command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then the changed gaming state is changed to the normal state. It is determined whether the game is in the time reduction state (S4306). If it is determined that the gaming state is the time reduction state (the status command received this time is a command indicating the time reduction state) (S4306: Yes), the counter 223n for the time reduction is determined. The value is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the flow shifts to the process of S4304.

  In the processing of S4306, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time reduction state (S4306: No), it is then determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the flow shifts to the process of S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4304. .

  In the processing of S4304, the gaming state set in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), and the information indicated by the state command received in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g is set. The corresponding game state is set (S4305), and this processing ends.

  Here, when the command set in the processing of S4308 and S4311 is notified to the display control device 114, the variable effect display during the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present control example, the type of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the status command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode and background), and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each of the game states set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only on the basis of the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The display controller 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting from the display controller 114 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp controller 113 is appropriate. A determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is, and when it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is set. It is preferable to rewrite the display data into simple display data.

  With such a configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. , And a variable effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the variable effect display having the content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is executed and the player's willingness to play is reduced. The simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller data amount than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display may be used.

  In the present control example, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern. May be configured.

  Next, the contents of the winning command processing (see S4212) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). The winning command processing (S4212) is set when a winning symbol command (winning information command) is set when the special symbol lottery right is obtained from the main controller 110, or when a normal symbol lottery right is obtained. This is a process executed when a general drawing prize information command or a V prize command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probable change switch) during a jackpot game is received.

  When the winning command processing (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). It is determined whether or not the command received this time is a general-purpose winning information command (S4402). If it is determined that the received command is a general-purpose winning information command (S4402: Yes), the winning information (normal) is included in the received command. It is determined whether or not winning information per drawing (prize information per drawing) is included (S4403). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), then the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, It is determined whether the current state is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S4404).

  Here, if it is determined that the present state is not the normal symbol high-probability state, that is, if it is determined that the present state is the normal state (S4404: No), the state where the lottery right of the normal symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure during the normal state is acquired. Since there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command to suggest opening of the electric tulong is set (S4405), and the flow shifts to the process of S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, the display control device 114 is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control process of the other audio lamp control devices, and during the normal state. (For example, a small display area Dm3 is displayed in the main display area Dm on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) indicating that the game is executed per day and the electric accessory 640a is opened long (opened for 5 seconds). An effect that stimulates whether or not it is formed) is executed.

  In the present control example, the suggested effect is configured to be executed only when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state, but is not limited thereto. The above-described suggestion effect may be configured to be executed even when it is determined that the general-purpose winning information command includes winning information indicating a specific out-of-prize winning. This makes it possible to set a case where the game per ordinary map is executed when the suggested effect is executed and a case where the game is not executed, so that the player performs the game while predicting the game content to be executed in the future. Can be made.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery to be won per ordinary figure is acquired during the normal state, the suggested effect is configured to be executed. Based on the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery or the special symbol lottery stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game for the general symbol is actually executed, that is, the general symbol indicating the winning of the general symbol Preliminary game state processing is performed to determine whether or not the game state at the timing at which the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (the timing at which the game per common figure is executed) is the normal state. If it is determined that there is, the above-described suggestion effect may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to more appropriately indicate that the chance zone is set.

  Returning to FIG. 177, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4402, when it is determined that the general-purpose winning information command has not been received (S4402: No), when it is determined that there is no hit information in the processing of S4403 (S4403: No), the time-saving counter is executed in the processing of S4404. When it is determined that the value of 203h is larger than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4406.

  In the processing of S4406, the special figure prize information command processing is executed (S4406), and the processing shifts to S4407. Details of the special figure winning information command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4407, the command received this time is the V winning command (the command (see S2216) set when the ball flows down to the certainty switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S1911 of FIG. 171)). It is determined whether the received command is a V winning command (S4407: Yes). If the command is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409. If it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the processing shifts to S4413.

  In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409). If the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set off (S4410), a display command for notifying the V prize is set (S4411), and the V information is notified. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4412), and the flow shifts to the process of S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, if the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process also proceeds to S4413.

  In the process of S4413, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the special figure winning information command processing (S4406) executed in the winning command processing (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command processing (S4406).

  When the special-prize winning information command processing (S4406) is executed, first, the current gaming state is extracted based on the information set in the dependent state setting area 223g (S4501), and the value of the counter 223n during the time reduction is set. It is determined whether it is larger than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during the working hours is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special continuous announcement flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special continuous announcement flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the presence / absence of the continuous announcement is selected using the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d (FIG. 147 (a)) (S4504). It is determined whether or not the notice has been executed (S4505). If it is determined that the continuous announcement has been performed (S4505: Yes), the special continuous announcement flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

  Also, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time reduction is 75 or less (S4502: No), in the process of S4503, it is determined that the special continuous announcement flag 223o is on (S4503). : No), if it is determined in the process of S4505 that there is no execution of the continuous notice (S4505: No), the process also proceeds to S4507.

  In the process of S4507, a display command is set based on the information included in the received special map winning information command (S4507), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the general view related processing (S4216) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the general-purpose-related process (S4216). The general figure-related processing (S4216) includes a general figure change pattern command indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a general figure start command indicating that the general figure game has started, This is a process that is executed when a general-purpose hit end command indicating the end of the general-purpose hit game is received.

  When the general-figure-related processing (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether a general-figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4601). A command is set (S4602), and it is then determined whether the value of the counter 223n during time reduction is greater than 0, that is, whether the symbol is in a high probability state of a normal symbol (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), the currently received general drawing is received. It is determined whether the variation pattern command is a general pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the ordinary symbol lottery that has been won per ordinary figure (S4604), and when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been won per ordinary figure (S4604: No) ), The processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is per-drawing (S4604: Yes), a display command indicating that the long-opening is waiting is set because the per-figure fluctuation is performed in which the long opening winning is performed ( S4605), this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily predict that the chance zone is likely to be set soon.

  In this control example, a process of displaying the display mode (display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 123B based on whether or not the normal symbol change is a hit change is used. However, the display mode shown in FIG. 123 (b) is not limited to this, and is a specific out-of-usual variation (for example, a part of out-of-usual variation in which the same variation time as the per-usual variation is set) (Display mode for forming the small display area Dm3) may be configured to be displayed.

  Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. When a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is executed in the symbol fluctuation effect, a smaller display area is displayed than when a fluctuation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (for example, a reach effect) is not executed. It is preferable to change the display content so that the display area of Dm3 is reduced. In this way, the variable content suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed independently and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery have a relationship, and the display content is variably controlled, so that It is possible to suppress a situation in which a large amount of game information is provided to the player in vain and the player is confused, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game.

  Returning to FIG. 179, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4601 that no general figure change pattern command has been received (S4601: No), it is next determined whether a general figure start command has been received (S466). Is determined (S4606: Yes), then, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0 (S4607), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No). Then, a display command indicating that a long release is being performed is set (S4608), and this processing ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124A is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the long open win is being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is larger than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and the process ends.

  In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the per-figure-period start command has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether or not the per-figure-period end command has been received (S4609). (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4610), and if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), then the normal symbol hold is performed. It is determined whether the value of the ball number counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and when it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4611). If it is determined that the switch is not turned on (S4612) (S4612: No), a display command indicating a chance zone entry is set (S4612). 3), it sets off a special presentation flag 223i (S4614), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4610 to S4612, when it is determined that the determination result is other than the above-described determination result, this processing ends as it is.

  Next, the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4218). In the jackpot-related process (S4218), a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703). If it is determined that the jackpot game is a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), the chance mode entry (time saving state is set) is determined. The ending display mode shown is set (S4708), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a probable change jackpot, whether or not to execute a V notification effect is determined using the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147 (b)). Is selected (S4704), and it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), and an ending display mode indicating entry into the super chance mode (a probable change state is set) is set. (S4707), and terminates this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4708 described above.

  That is, in the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, the ending periods of different lengths are set in accordance with the set jackpot types (normal jackpots, probability change jackpots), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game executed this time at the timing is configured to be set in advance. With this configuration, various controls (variable display control of the jackpot game information variably displayed according to the progress state of the jackpot game (for example, control for displaying information for indicating the acquired number of prize balls, Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls in accordance with the number of balls won to the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode at the start timing of the big hit game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation, or may be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period in which the control processing is small during the jackpot game period. Is also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4709) and the round number command has been received. If it is determined (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is one round (V round) (S4711). If it is determined that the round is one round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4712). If it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712: Yes), a display command for guiding a V winning is set (S4713), and the process ends. Also, in the processing of S4711, when it is determined that the current round number is not one round (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the first round is started (S4711: No), in the processing of S4712, V is determined. When it is determined that the effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714), and if it has been determined that it has been received (S4714: Yes). ), An ending process is executed (S4715), and this process ends. If it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4786 (S4714: No), the process ends.

  Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). The ending process (S4715) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and is an ending display mode executed during the ending period. Is finally executed.

  When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801). If it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning The flag 223j is set to off (S4805), execution of ending display corresponding to the ending display mode already set is set (S4804), and this processing ends. If it is determined in step S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and the V effect execution flag 223k is set. Is determined to be off (S4802: No), the process directly proceeds to S4804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set. Then, the flow shifts to the process of S4804.

  When the display switching command is set in the process of S4803, the display control command is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode in the latter half of the ending period (FIG. 236 ( d) is switched to a display mode (see FIG. 236 (c)) corresponding to the setting of the time saving state. In this control example, since the display period of the display mode switched based on the display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1827 is a flowchart showing the content of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4901: No), it is in a state where the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A special figure 1 effect mode setting process for generating a display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S4903), and data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted. (S4904), and proceeds to the processing of S4905. Details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223d2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), it means that the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223d2 is set off (S4906), and then, the special figure 2 effect form setting process is executed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the flow shifts to the process of S4909. The details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4909, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4909: No), the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Since this state has not been performed, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure The 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is set to off (S4910), and then the special figure for display 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911). finish.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903). The special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed when the variable effect of the first special symbol is set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 of FIG. 182). A process for setting an effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state being executed is executed.

  When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0 (S5001). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), and a display for indicating the value of the reduced time reduction counter 223n is performed. The command is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. In the process of S5001, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time reduction is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5004.

  In the processing of S5004, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read out (S5004), and it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined that the mode is the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5007). If it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probable changing effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), and the determined effect is determined. The display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S5009), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the current mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the current mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to the above-described S5009. In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the mode is the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the effect setting process in the chance mode is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5009. Details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907). The special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed when the variable effect of the second special symbol is set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 of FIG. 182). A process for setting an effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state being executed is executed.

  When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal state (S5101), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is a normal state (S5101: Yes), A display command indicating a chance zone entry is set (S5102), then the special effect flag 223i is set to ON (S5103), and the effect mode is set based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 145). Is determined (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5105), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the normal state is not set (S5101: No), it is next determined whether or not the value of the counter 223n during time reduction is greater than 0 (S5106). When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the hourly counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5107), and a display command for indicating the value of the hourly counter 223n after the subtraction is set (S5107). S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5109.

  In the processing of S5109, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and it is determined whether or not the super chance mode is set (S5110). If it is determined that the mode is the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5112). If it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the effect mode (effect contents) is determined based on the stochastic effect effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), and the above-described S5105 is performed. Is performed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5110 that the current mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), a chance mode effect setting process is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to S5115. Details of the effect mode setting process (S5114 (S5012)) during the chance mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S5115, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S5115), the processing of S5105 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184). FIG.

  In the chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time reduction counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the read value of the time reduction counter 223n is 99 (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during the working hours is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is determined whether the read value of the time reduction counter 223n is 79 (S5204). When it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 79 (S5204: Yes), the first period is usually set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the value of the hourly counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), it is then determined whether the read value of the hourly counter 223n is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during the working hours is 49 (S5206: Yes), a normal second period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during the working hours is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5208.

  In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement execution flag 223q is on (S5208). When it is determined that the continuous announcement execution flag 223q is ON (S5208: Yes), the continuous effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process shifts to S5214. In the process of S5208, when it is determined that the continuous announcement running flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous announcement flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous advance flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special valid time timer (S5211), and the special continuous advance flag 223o is set off (S5212). ), And proceeds to the process of S5213. In the process of S5210, even when it is determined that the special consecutive announcement flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the process shifts to the process of S5213.

  In the process of S5213, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the flow shifts to the process of S5214. In the processing of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5214), and this processing ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is used to enhance the effect in the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to cause the player to execute an effect (operation effect) according to the operation of the player.

  In the present control example, the player is configured to be able to operate the frame button 22 by a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, a “normal push” in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds), It is configured to be able to determine whether the button 22 is “pressed and held” for a long time (2 seconds or more). Then, different operation effects can be executed according to the determined operation content. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 by various operation methods in order to execute various operation effects, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as identifiable operation methods. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type of operation method may be used, or three or more types of operation methods may be provided. Further, in the present control example, the operation means operable by the player is one type of the frame button 22. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of operation means operable by the player may be provided. Then, the identifiable operation method may be configured to be determined not only by the operation on the individual operation means but also by the combination of the operation contents executed on the plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operation units are provided (for example, the first operation unit and the second operation unit), a case where the first operation is performed on the first operation unit and a case where the second operation unit is It may be configured such that it is determined that the same operation has been performed (determined as the same operation method) when the second operation is performed. With this configuration, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation unit and the arrangement position of the second operation unit are separated from each other, the player selects the operation unit that is easy to operate and enjoys the operation. It can be carried out.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is greater than 0) ) Is determined (S5301). The SW effective time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when the effect of the variation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time has been set (S5301: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is subtracted by a value corresponding to the elapsed time (S5302), and the process shifts to S5303. On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5303.

  In the process of S5303, it is determined whether or not the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process shifts to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

  In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the in-operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that the current time is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), the value of the in-operation counter 223t is set to a value corresponding to 2 seconds (S5308), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5309. ). In the processing of S5306, when it is determined that the time is not within the valid time (S5306: No), and when it is determined in the processing of S5307 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5307: No), the processing of S5308 is performed. Skip to step S5309.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the in-operation counter 223t is subtracted (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted in-operation counter 223t is 0. (S5313). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the value of the subtracted in-operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operating counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5314.

  In the processing of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current mode is the chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the present time is in the chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process shifts to S5309.

  If it is determined in the process of S5314 that the current mode is not the chance mode (S5314: No), a button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the effect content being executed is set (S5316). Move on to processing. In the process of S5309, other button processes (such as background change) are executed.

  Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. 186, in the present control example, the SW valid time and the special valid time are left when the operation of the frame button 22 is received. The period is set to 0. That is, the number of operation effects performed during the period in which each effective time is set is one. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the operation effect from being excessively executed.

  The processing for the remaining period of the SW valid time and the special valid time is not limited to this. For example, when a valid time of 10 seconds is set, the processing is performed within a predetermined period (for example, 1 If the operation of the frame button 22 is received (within seconds) (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186), a new effective time may be set during the special symbol fluctuation period. . With this configuration, it is possible to vary the number of operation effects performed during one special symbol change period depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Control Process of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 187). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 187) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present control example, the case has been described where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main address at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 199 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 199 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 189 (b) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the special figure entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198.

  After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 155 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, reach out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 190, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present control example, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is actually set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (b). FIG. 191 (b) is a flowchart illustrating stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big hits A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. Set to ON (S6603), and return to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present control example, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the departure completely. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). FIG. 192 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a use fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (a). FIG. 194 (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 182) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the special symbol in the main control device 110. At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the variation pattern (timing at which the main control device 110 sets a stop command), the display stop command (output from the sound lamp control device 113) (Normal stop command).

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, a fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then, it is determined whether there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), a notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the notification command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194 (b). FIG. 194 (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

  In the notification command processing, first, a display (report) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (report) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read. 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In this control example, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other related commands such as a light emission command other than a display command, a voice output command, and a command for driving an accessory are also received once, and the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. A configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in the above is added.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If it is (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the error command processing (S6421) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 191 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 196, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. And various parameters required for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle so that it is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 196, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. In addition, various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 199 and FIG. 200, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S6305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 199 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 199 (b). FIG. 199 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is any untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 189 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the ON state rear image determination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When the indicated stop type information is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201, details of the above-described drawing processing (S6306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 189 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the first control example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured not to be performed in parallel (in parallel), The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. Further, it is configured such that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol is changed according to the set game state. More specifically, the case where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (time saving state, probable change state) is set than the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (normal state). In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance with an electric accessory 640a that is opened in a hit game (general symbol game) executed at the time of winning a normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), a lottery right for the second special symbol can be acquired. In other words, when playing a game in the normal state, which is the initial gaming state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more easily executed than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. At the same time, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol can be set, and when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Is configured. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed according to the set game state, so that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player is expected to be set. It is possible to make the player play the game while being eager.

  In addition, in a case where a winning is achieved in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a general symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is configured to be executable. I have. With this configuration, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily performed even in the normal state which is a disadvantageous gaming state to the player. For a player playing a game, a game aimed at winning a special symbol lottery win and a game aiming to win a regular symbol lottery can be executed, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present control example, the effect form of the special figure 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off-variation fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is off during the first half period of the fluctuation effect. In the second half period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo off-state fluctuation effect is restarted to execute a pseudo-hit fluctuation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit variation effect is configured to be variable in accordance with the number of special figure 2 reservations. With this configuration, the variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped a plurality of times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be assumed that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lotteries.

  With this, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the regular figure game, the player On the other hand, since a plurality of special figure 2 reservations were acquired during the per-figure game, it can be assumed that the big hit was won. Can be done.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 of the third special symbol lottery is executed when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the pseudo-hit variation effect described above. A fluctuation effect simulating the fluctuation effect displayed on the display surface (the effect mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is performed. It is composed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the special figure 2 fluctuation effect in a situation where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, so that the pseudo fluctuation effect is provided to the player. This can make it difficult to identify that the operation is being performed. In addition, after the pseudo variable effect imitating the special figure 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so that the game is performed. It is possible to execute a surprising fluctuating effect for the person.

  In the present control example, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as an effect mode of the notification effect, Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate. When it is flowing down, a notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

  Further, in the present control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the ending period longer than the normal jackpot is set for the variable jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Make up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probable change state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the fact is notified for a long period of time, the ending period is shortened because it only gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  As described above, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability jackpot game, the jackpot ending By simply performing the process of switching the production mode of the period to the production mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game, the length of the ending period is different, so that an uncomfortable notification production is performed during the ending period. There was a problem. In addition, if a special effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probability change jackpot game is facilitated in advance, image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It has to be stored in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

  In contrast, in the present control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. When the ball could not flow down to the specific gate, only the staging mode corresponding to the second half of the big hit ending period is switched to the staging mode set for the second half of the ending period of the normal hit game. Make up. As a result, a notification effect without providing a special effect mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probability change jackpot game and without giving a sense of incongruity to the player is executed. can do.

  In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the second half period is configured to have a common length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification production performed when it is not possible to flow down to the specific gate, but without being limited to this, for example, during the last round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification effect, the notification effect that is executed for a longer period than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the jackpot game may be terminated for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuing to execute the round effect performed during the round period, and then executing the notification effect, the actual jackpot ending period It may be configured to perform a notification effect of even a short period of time.

  Since the V winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the above-described eighth control example, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted. . Further, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right area are sent to the through gate 67, the general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the ratio of entering the ball is the same as the above-described left region, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the present control example, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether the jackpot game is executed or not, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game Is executed, the same privilege is provided. Therefore, the player can play a game by any game method according to his / her mood.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical. However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to comprise so that there may not be a big difference between the case where the left-handed game is played and the case where the right-handed game is played. The number of the entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to obtain the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery. May be configured. In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is thrown into the first entrance 64, the player can play the game by any game method. In a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 (a game in a time-saving state or a probable change state), a right-handed game is more advantageous to a player than a left-handed game. .

  In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the number is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above control examples, the winning in the first entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to one time. However, the maximum number of held balls is limited to this. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for displaying the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol and the display means for displaying the slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to the player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the control examples described above, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the left-handed game aiming at the area is configured to be executed, the aiming area of the different game board 13 may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the game board is A left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  Further, in each of the control examples described above, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of whether any game state is set or the jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state and during a jackpot game, and a left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With this configuration, the player can easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

  In each of the above-described control examples, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and can determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect form of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22 by, for example, displaying the frame button 22. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) may be performed, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when the advantageous game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, for a predetermined period (until the special symbol change is executed 20 times), A high-speed change period in which a short-time change time is selected is settable, and during the high-speed change period, the background mode transition effect is not executed (hardly performed) when the frame button 22 is operated. I have. As a result, during the period in which the short fluctuation time is easily selected, the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, and the player grasps the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that becomes difficult.

  In the first control example, the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the high-speed change period, that is, in the state where the normal state is set, the operation for executing the background mode transition effect (“normal pressing”). ), An operation effect in an effect mode different from the background mode transition effect is executed. This allows the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the second mode (“long press”) other than the above-described first operation (“normal press”) is executed to shift to the background mode. The effect is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a background mode transition effect to a player who intends to execute the background mode transition effect after knowing that the stop display mode of the third symbol is difficult to grasp. it can. In the first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been performed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been performed. This can reduce the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby preventing the stop display mode of the third symbol from being excessively difficult to grasp.

  When the predetermined condition is not satisfied as in the present embodiment, the first operation processing executed by performing the first operation on the operating means is changed to an operation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A technical idea of preventing (or hardly performing) even if the first operation is performed on the means may be used for other technologies, for example, the volume of sound (volume ), And when a liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81, the brightness adjustment process for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display is applied as the above-described first operation process, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is not performed (for example, if the special symbol change is not executed), the first operation process is enabled, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the special symbol change is executed). The case) may be configured to difficult perform a first operation processing.

  Further, as the above-mentioned predetermined condition, not only the presence or absence of the special symbol change but also a condition that is satisfied when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 or a condition that is satisfied during the big hit game may be set.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the above-described first operation is performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second operation process (for example, the first operation process) different from the first operation process is performed. (A process of notifying that the operation process is not performed) may be configured to be executed. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the first operation process is not executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and another operation effect not related to the first operation process may be executed.

  In addition, even when the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the first operation process described above is executed by executing the second operation different from the first operation similarly to the present control example. Good. In the first control example, the first operation and the second operation are configured to be executable by making the operation method for one operation unit (frame button 22) different, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of operating means are provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the first operation is enabled by operating the first operating means (for example, the frame button 22), and the second operating means (for example, provided other than the frame button 22). By operating the (frame button), the second operation may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the second operation is more difficult to execute than the first operation. For example, the first operation means is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 which can be always operated by the player, It is preferable to arrange the two operation means on the back side (see FIG. 121) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the player has difficulty operating.

  Further, when the first operation means and the second operation means described above are provided, a first operation validity determination period in which an operation on the first operation means is effectively determined, and an operation on the second operation means is enabled. The second operation validity determination period to be determined may be unified and set, or a different period may be set. When the operation validity determination periods are unified, the process of determining the validity period can be simplified. Also, when different periods are set, the period for determining that the operation is valid differs according to the type of the operating unit to be operated, so that the player is willing to play various operations at various timings. Can be done.

  In the first control example described above, the normal state and a plurality of advantageous game states (probable change state, time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state are configured to be setable. When any one of the game states is set, the player can be notified of the period (remaining period) until the next normal state is set, not the period until the set game state ends. Make up.

  Here, conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, a probable change state or a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of a period (the number of special symbol changes) in which the advantageous game state continues. There is something to do. Specifically, there is a display in which “100 times” is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating a period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. is there. Thereby, the player can easily know how many special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous gaming state.

  Further, in recent gaming machines, there are some gaming machines in which a plurality of state types can be set as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. The advantageous gaming states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) and a first advantageous state. In some cases, a most advantageous game state (eg, a probable change state) that is more advantageous than the advantageous game state can be set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the gaming state shifts from the most advantageous gaming state to the normal advantageous gaming state, the player displays a remaining period display mode for indicating a period during which the most advantageous gaming state continues. Then, when the normal advantageous gaming state is set, the normal informative gaming state is notified to the player using a remaining period display mode for indicating a period during which the ordinary advantageous gaming state continues.

  That is, in the state where the most advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible for the player to know the period (remaining period) in which the most advantageous gaming state continues, but it is set after the most advantageous gaming state ends. The player cannot know what kind of game state the game state is and how long the game state set after the most advantageous game state is continued is continued. .

  Therefore, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player is set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state, or a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state. (For example, the normal state) cannot be grasped, and there is a problem that it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the most advantageous game state.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, as described above, in the case where a plurality of types of advantageous game states are continuously set, a period until the plurality of types of advantageous game states end, that is, the next normal state Is configured to display the advantageous game state remaining period display mode for a period until the is set. With this configuration, when different types of advantageous game states are successively set, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the successively set advantageous game states. The player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous gaming state period that straddles a plurality of consecutively set advantageous gaming states (probable change state, time saving state) is notified, the current setting is made. It is configured such that the player can execute an effect in which it is difficult for the player to determine whether the playing state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the gaming state set during the advantageous gaming state period, and it is possible to play the game while expecting the player to set an advantageous gaming state.

  In the first control example, the current setting is made when the remaining period of one advantageous gaming state period that spans a plurality of consecutively set advantageous gaming states (probable change state, time saving state) is notified. It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that can indicate a game state or a game state set in the past. Thereby, the player can be interested in the contents of the suggestion effect executed during the game state period.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each effect mode is made different according to the set game state. ing. Therefore, the present game state can be predicted by the player based on the effect form of the operation effect executed during the advantageous game state period, so that the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since only the selection ratio of each effect mode is changed according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be increased as the number of operation effects performed during the advantageous game state period is increased. it can. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, the case where the frame button 22 is operated during the “chance mode” and the case where “reach suggestion” is selected as the operation mode of the operation effect is described. Is configured to execute a `` reach suggestion '' effect that indicates to the player whether or not the special symbol variation during execution is in the reach state, and when the special state change is in the reach state, the reach line or the reach symbol is suggested to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is determined whether the winning information relating to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information in the reach state, and based on the determination result, The configuration may be such that the player is notified that the second special symbol change to be in the reach state is executed before the second special symbol change is executed. As described above, the effect of the operation effect is expanded not only to the special symbol variation during execution but also to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation to be executed in the future) which is held and stored, thereby further enhancing the effect. Can be.

  Further, in the above-described first control example, an effect for displaying the result of the transition to the background mode or the special symbol lottery is executed by operating the frame button 22 by the player. The functions executable by operating the operation means include, for example, a sound volume adjusting function for adjusting the sound volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, and a third function formed by a liquid crystal display. A brightness adjustment function for adjusting the brightness on the display surface of the symbol display device 81 may be used. As for the volume adjustment function and the brightness adjustment function, similarly to the above-described background mode transition, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be difficult to see. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, specifically, when a period in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as a fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (a high-speed fluctuation period) is set, and other periods are set. It may be configured to be more difficult to execute.

  In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even during the high-speed fluctuation period is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background mode transition is not completely executed. Is also good. Further, in the above-described first control example, a first effect period in which a specific effect mode (transition to the background mode) is easily performed as an operation effect performed by operating the operation unit, and the operation effect is more difficult to execute than the first period. Although the second period is provided, three or more periods in which the ratio of executing the operation effect in the specific effect mode is different may be set to be three or more.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the control content are different. . The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first control example described above, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122 (b) is configured to be displayed on one image layer. I was On the other hand, the second control example is different in that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz constituting each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are displayed on different layers. Then, by synchronizing and controlling the display of the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz displayed on different layers, it is possible to variably display the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as in the above-described first control example. Is configured.

  Here, conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one that variably displays a third symbol. Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do.

  By the way, as a general gaming machine, a symbol variation display using a plurality of symbol columns (for example, three) formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol numbered 1 to 9). In some cases, when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed in other symbol columns except for one symbol column, an effect (for example, a reach effect) with a higher jackpot expectation is executed. However, in a conventional gaming machine, a variable display is performed in which only the variable speed of the variable display is changed without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect using the variable display of the symbol row.

  In addition, there has been proposed an arrangement in which the identification information (sub-symbol) other than the identification information (main symbol) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is arranged in one symbol row to increase the variation of the variable display. However, even if such a configuration is used, there is a problem that the effect of the variable effect cannot be enhanced only by changing the variable display speed of the symbol row formed by the main symbol and the sub symbol.

  Furthermore, a plurality of symbol columns in which the arrangement and type of the main symbol and the sub symbol are different are facilitated in advance, and when performing a specific variable effect, the effect of the variable effect is achieved by changing the symbol sequence itself. There is a problem that the display control is complicated, since it is necessary to execute control for variably displaying different symbol columns in accordance with the fluctuating effect to be performed.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the symbol row display is configured to be executed using a plurality of image layers (layers). Specifically, the main symbol and the sub symbol constituting the symbol row are configured to be displayed on different layers. In the normal state, the main symbol and the sub symbol are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, so that various symbols forming the symbol row are displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122 (b)) while being varied and displayed. By making the variable display contents different from the variable display contents of the sub-symbols, the symbol columns can be variably displayed in a mode other than the specific symbol arrangement.

  With this configuration, the variation display of the third symbol is easily performed in a mode other than the specific symbol array while using the image data of the third symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) forming the specific symbol row. This has the effect that the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 202. FIG. 202 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a display image layer formed on the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example and a display screen, and FIG. 202 (b) is a main design image layer sr. 202 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the sub-symbol image layer fr is set to on and the display of the sub-symbol image fr is set to on. FIG. 202 (c) shows the display effect of FIG. 202 (b). It is the figure which showed an example of the production result.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (a), in the second control example, the main symbol image layer sr on which the main symbol sz is displayed and the sub symbol image layer fr on which the sub symbol fz is displayed are formed in an overlapping manner. In this configuration, the main symbol image layer sr is arranged in front of the sub symbol image layer fr (on the near side in the player's eyes). In FIG. 202 (a), only the main symbol image layer sr and the sub symbol fz are marked, but in actuality, each image for displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is shown. Image layers are superimposed.

  Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, the back image, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), And the effect ( Effect 1, effect 2,...) And characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2,. An image layer is formed. Then, for a portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed on the image layer (layer) on the front side can be visually recognized with priority.

  In the second control example configured as described above, when both the main symbol sz displayed on the main symbol image layer sr and the sub symbol fz displayed on the sub symbol image layer fr are variably displayed. Since the main symbol sz is displayed prior to the sub symbol fz, the identification information (main symbol sz) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is the identification information (the sub symbol fz) not indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. ), It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player becomes difficult to visually recognize the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform variable display control so that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz do not overlap so as to make the result of the special symbol lottery easily visible to the player, the variable display control can be simplified and The variable display of the main symbol sz can be executed by making the most of the limited display area, that is, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202 (a), the main symbol image layer sr is arranged closer to (priority to) the sub symbol image layer fr, and the main symbol image sz has priority over the sub symbol fz. The sub-design image layer fr is displayed on the main design image layer sr so that the sub-design fz is displayed in preference to the main design sz. It may be configured to be arranged on the near side (priority). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the main symbol sz during the variable display of each symbol (the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery until the variation of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is stopped and displayed, so that the variation effect of the third symbol that has a sense of expectation until the end is obtained. Can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202 (b) and FIG. 202 (c), a description will be given of a fluctuating effect executed by display control for each symbol layer. As described above, in the present control example, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz constituting the symbol row can be displayed independently. Furthermore, it is configured that whether or not to display a display image set for each image layer can be set. In other words, internally, display control is performed for each layer, and the presence / absence of display (ON, OFF) can be set for the layer itself.

  FIG. 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen in a case where the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub symbol image layer fr is set to on. On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, only the sub symbol fz among the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed. Then, the sub-design area fs is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Ds before the main symbol sz is displayed, so that the reach line for notifying the player of the reach line effective in the current third symbol variation is given to the player. The character "reach line notice start" indicating that the notice effect has been executed is displayed. After that, an effect result corresponding to the stop position of the sub symbol fz is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (c), the sub-design fz is stopped and displayed in a “diamond shape”, and as an effect result indicating that the effective line L4 and the effective line L5 (see FIG. 122) are in the reach state, The character “Double Reach Confirmed” is displayed in the display area Ds. Then, when the reach line notice effect is completed, the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to ON, and what is the type of the main symbol sz that is in the reach state in the active line L4 and the active line L5 (see FIG. 122). A variable effect for indicating to the player whether the game is to be performed is executed, and then a double-reach effect (see FIG. 131) is executed.

  As described above, in the second control example, since the variable display of the main symbol sz and the variable display of the sub symbol fz can be executed differently, the variable symbol fz is displayed first. Accordingly, the position where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed is notified to the player, and thereafter, the main symbol sz is displayed in a variable manner, whereby the type of the main symbol sz to be in the reach state can be notified. Therefore, the effect of the third symbol fluctuation effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery can be gradually displayed to the player, and an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

  In the reach line announcement effect described with reference to FIGS. 202 (b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main symbol sz is notified to the player in advance based on the stop display position of the sub symbol fz. However, in addition to the above, the type of the main symbol sz to be stopped and displayed, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, may be configured by the arrangement of the stopped and displayed sub symbol fz. Specifically, for example, when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area forming the active line L2 (see FIG. 122 (a)) as the effect of the reach line announcement effect, It is preferable that a combination of specific main symbols sz (for example, a combination of “3.4.1” from the top) is stopped and displayed on the line L2 (see FIG. 122A).

  Here, when the specific combination of the main symbols sz is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is restarted, and a fluctuation effect (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation effect) in which the expectation of the jackpot winning is increased is performed. It is preferable that a winning game (a big hit game or a small hit game) is executed as it is. With such a configuration, when the reach-line announcement effect is executed, the player can be more interested in the effect of the effect.

  Furthermore, in the case where the reach-line announcement effect in which only the sub symbol fz is first displayed in a variable manner is executed, whether the current reach-line announcement effect is to notify only the stop display position of the main symbol sz in advance or is stopped and displayed. In order to make it easy for the player to determine whether the type of the main symbol sz is also notified in advance, for example, after the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202 (c)), each of the stopped and displayed sub symbols is displayed. It may be configured to notify the effect result of the present reach line announcement effect according to the type of the display mode formed by using the symbol fz (for example, a graphic display displayed by connecting each sub symbol fz with a line), For example, when a diamond-shaped figure is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 202 (c) (a state in which the sub-design fz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), the effect of the current reach-line announcement effect is The stop position of the symbol sz is indicated in advance, and when a heart-shaped figure connecting the four sub-designs fz is displayed, it indicates in advance that the specific main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. May be notified to the player.

  In this way, by performing the effect using the sub-design fz that has been stopped and displayed (preliminary notification of the production result) between the time when the sub-design fz is stopped and displayed and the time when the main symbol sz is displayed and stopped, Since the result of the variable effect (the variable effect using the third symbol) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player in a more step-by-step manner, the player is continuously interested in the variable effect performed. Can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of various symbols stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, a back image for the sea background and a back image for the mountain background can be set as the back images. Specifically, when the background mode transition is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the currently set back image (for example, the sea background) is replaced with the currently set back image. (For example, a mountain background).

  Further, the second control example is configured to vary the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) according to the type of the set (displayed) rear image. With such a configuration, the main symbol sz in the display mode according to the type of the rear image can be changed and displayed, so that the effect of rendering when the rear image is switched can be enhanced.

  Here, the contents of the image data of the main symbol sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b). FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main marine design used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and FIG. 203 (b) is a mountain image (mountain background). FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing image data of a mountain main image used when is set. Each of these image data is stored in advance in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the background mode shift is executed. The corresponding image data is read from the area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d or the third symbol row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The contents of the process of reading the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (a), image data corresponding to the main marine design sz includes nine types (octopus, harisenbon, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, and crab). Image data (D1 to D9) indicating main symbols with numbers “1 to 9” are stored. The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in the character storage area 234a2 in advance so as to correspond to the order in which they are actually variably displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is only necessary to sequentially read the image data from the image data D1 and store it in the third symbol area 235d.

  Further, in the second control example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol row stopped and displayed in the reach state, are divided into nine main symbols (images). While the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the reach state, is formed by ten main symbols, whereas the main symbol corresponding to the data D1 to D9 is formed. It is configured to be formed with a pattern. More specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the symbol row Z1 described above are changed main symbols (image data It is configured to form a symbol row Z2 with ten main symbols added with a main symbol corresponding to DA). Then, in the symbol row Z2, the main symbol sz with the number 4 passes after the main symbol sz with the number 9 passes, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 passes. It is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol indicated by the numeral 4 in this control example) can be passed through a plurality of times before the symbol column change display makes one round. When the reach state is established with respect to the main symbol sz of the game, it is determined that the possibility of winning the jackpot (the possibility that the main symbol sz serving as the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in the reach state) is high. Can be visually suggested to others. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to which type of main symbol sz is used to establish the reach state, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203 (b), nine types (elephants, lions, dugongs, rhinos, rhinoceros, bears, wild boars, rats, snakes) are included in the image data corresponding to the main mountain design sz. Stores image data (D1 to D9) indicating main symbols with numbers "1 to 9", respectively. The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in the character storage area 234a2 in advance so as to correspond to the order in which they are actually variably displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is only necessary to sequentially read the image data from the image data D1 and store it in the third symbol area 235d.

  Then, similarly to the case where the sea background is displayed, nine symbol columns Z1 and symbol columns Z3 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, nine symbol columns stopped and displayed in the reach state. Of the main symbol (the main symbol corresponding to the image data D1 to D9), the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol row variably displayed during the reach state. , And 10 main symbols. Specifically, nine main symbols (the main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the symbol row Z1 described above are changed main symbols (image data It is configured to form a symbol row Z2 with ten main symbols added with a main symbol (corresponding to DA). Then, in the symbol row Z2, the main symbol sz with the number 4 passes after the main symbol sz with the number 9 passes, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 passes. It is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol indicated by the numeral 4 in this control example) can be passed through a plurality of times before the symbol column change display makes one round. When the reach state is established with respect to the main symbol sz of the game, it is determined that the possibility of winning the jackpot (the possibility that the main symbol sz serving as the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on the active line in the reach state) is high. Can be visually suggested to others. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to which type of main symbol sz is used to establish the reach state, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Further, in the present second control example, image data corresponding to the above-described main symbol sz is read from the character storage area 234a2, and is stored in the third symbol array area 235g as symbol array data for displaying a symbol array. Make up. That is, among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbol row image data (image data in which each main symbol sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub symbol fz) corresponding to the main symbol is generated in symbol row units. Then, it is configured to be stored in the third symbol row area 235g. The main symbol sequence image data is used to variably display the main symbol sz on the main symbol layer sr. With this configuration, the number of image data used for display control can be reduced as compared with the case where the image data of each symbol is variably displayed, so that the processing load of display control can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in the second control example, among the symbols forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz can be independently and variably displayed. Therefore, even if a plurality of main symbols sz included in each symbol row are formed by one image data (main symbol row image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variations are made by changing the variable display mode of the sub symbol fz. A variable display can be performed. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect.

  Further, among the third symbols forming each symbol row, for the main symbol sz, which is identification information for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol, the variable display is performed in symbol row units using the main symbol row image data. For the sub-symbol fz which is the identification information that is executed and does not indicate the special symbol lottery result, the variable display is executed in symbol units, so that the main symbol sz indicating the special symbol lottery result is displayed. Various variation effects can be executed by changing the content of the variation display of the sub-design fz without changing the content of the variation display. That is, in diversifying the variation display effect of the third symbol, the main symbol sz in which the display mode of the stop display is determined in advance changes the content of the variation display of the sub symbol fz while executing the predetermined variation display. By making it variable, various fluctuation effects can be executed. Therefore, the variation display effect of the third symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol can be easily and reliably made to have a variety of contents.

  In the second control example, all the main symbols sz forming the symbol row are configured to be included in one image data (main symbol row image data). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Among the symbols sz (each of the main symbols sz with numbers 1 to 9), a normal main that generates only a symbol row of a part of the main symbols sz (for example, a normal main symbol sz with even numbers). In the third symbol row area 235g, the symbol row image data and the probable variable main symbol row image data for generating only the symbol row of the remaining main symbol sz (for example, the probable variable main symbol sz with an odd number) are stored. Then, the main symbol sz may be displayed on the main symbol image layer sr by using the stored image data.

  In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is a probability variation big hit, that is, when stopping and displaying a combination indicating a big hit using a main symbol sz to which an odd number is attached, It is possible to change the contents of the variable display using the normal main symbol sequence image data while executing the predetermined variable display only for the variable display using the probable variable main symbol column image data. Specifically, the variable display using the normal main symbol sequence image data is executed at a higher speed than the variable display using the probable variable main symbol sequence image data, and the probable variable main symbol sz to which the player has an odd number is given. It may be configured so that only the user can view it. As a result, the third symbol variation of this time is displayed with variation only in the probable-variable main symbol sz, and only the probable-variable main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal symbol (the main symbol with even-numbered numbers) is stopped and displayed. Without being played, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot cannot be won.

  When the image data forming the main symbol sz is generated by dividing the image data into the normal main symbol column image data and the probable variable main symbol column image data, the normal main symbol column image data is used to generate the normal main symbol column image data. The normal main design layer (layer) for displaying the design and the probable main design layer (layer) for displaying the probable main design using the probable main design sequence image data are configured to be different from each other. According to the result, it is determined whether or not to display the main symbol sz displayed on the normal main symbol layer or the probability-variable main symbol layer (whether the display of each layer is enabled (on) or not). May be configured. Further, as in the above-described first control example, the variable display control using the image data of each symbol may be executed without generating the symbol column image data forming the symbol column.

  Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-design fz will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 (c) is a diagram schematically showing image data of the sub-symbol fz stored in the character storage area 234a2 in advance. This image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, and is stored in the character storage area when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the background mode transition is executed. The corresponding image data is read from 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. The contents of the process of reading the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (c), the character storage area 234a2 according to the second control example stores a normal sub-design fz imitating a triangle as image data of the sub-design fz (see FIG. 122 (b)). , Image data SD2 of a sub-design fz for a notice effect that simulates a bubble, and image data SD3 of a special sub-design fz that simulates the numeral 16 are stored. Although omitted in FIG. 202 (c), the sub-design fz for the notice effect is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The sub-design fz for the announcement effect imitating the bubble shown is the sub-design fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, in the character storage area 234a2, image data (not shown) of a sub-design fz (not shown) for a notice effect that imitates a leaf as a sub-design fz used when the mountain background is set is also stored in advance. Is stored.

  Here, in the second control example, of the third symbols variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, only the sub symbol fz that does not indicate the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed on the sub symbol image layer fr. The third symbol display device displays the sub symbol fz independently of the main symbol sz which is variably displayed in a predetermined variation pattern (variation time, stop display position) on the main symbol image layer sr. It is configured to be able to perform variable display on the display surface 81. Therefore, various fluctuating effects using the sub symbol fz can be easily executed without changing the fluctuating display content of the main symbol sz. Further, when various variable effects using the sub-symbol fz are executed, even if a part thereof is displayed overlapping with the main symbol sz, the main symbol image sr is preferentially displayed over the sub-symbol image fr. With such an arrangement, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player has difficulty in visually recognizing the main symbol sz.

  In the second control example, as a variable effect using the sub-symbol fz, various variable effects are executed in addition to the reach-line announcement effect described with reference to FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c). For example, the sub-design fz is switched to a display mode for a notice effect using the image data SD2, and at the start of the variation display of the third symbol, the variation direction (for example, leftward) of the main symbol sz. In response to this, a change start notice effect in which the display is changed in the opposite direction (right direction) or a part of the sub-design fz is switched to a special display mode using the image data SD3, and the third design (main design sz, sub-design) is displayed. According to the number and arrangement of the sub-designs fz (the sub-designs fz imitating the numeral 16) in the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the design fz) stops, it is possible to execute a jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot type. Make up.

  As described above, the identification information (sub-symbol fz) different from the identification information (main symbol sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the identification information (main symbol sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery fluctuates. By making it possible to execute various fluctuation effects using the identification information (sub-design fz) that can be fluctuation-displayed during the displayed period, the player can pay close attention to the fluctuation-displayed sub-design fz. Can be.

  Further, in the second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main symbol sz, the variable display control of the sub symbol fz is configured to be executed for each symbol, so that it is formed in each symbol column Z1 to Z3. Of the plurality of sub-designs fz to be easily controlled to switch the display mode of only a part (for example, only the vicinity of the main design sz finally stopped and displayed) to the display mode for the variable effect. Can be. In addition, normally, it is possible to display the number of sub-designs fz displayed one between the main symbols sz to be two or more, or not to display only some of the sub-designs fz. Can be.

  Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the sub-design fz may be the start timing of the special design change, or the timing of stopping and displaying the special design indicating that the big hit has been won.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 203 (d), the content of each image data used for the main symbol for fluctuation in the second control example will be described. FIG. 203D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main symbol for fluctuation. The main symbol for change is the symbol row Z2, that is, the tenth main symbol provided in the symbol row that is variably displayed during the reach state, and is the main symbol stored in the character storage area 234a2. It is a main design using the image data DA among the display data.

  Conventionally, identification information (third symbol) for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery is variably displayed, and when specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. . In this case, a variable effect is performed to inspire whether or not the identification information stopped and displayed to the player is the specific identification information. Here, in general, a variable effect using a plurality of symbol rows in which a plurality of types of identification information are formed in a specific order is executed. Specifically, in a specific order, a variable effect using a plurality of symbol columns in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (for example, a main symbol sz) to which numbers 1 to 9 are attached is formed.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol change, a variable effect of changing the display mode of the third symbol during the variable display is executed. In the case where the third symbol is changed, if the numbers of 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, that is, the specific information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, are changed, for example, 1 to 9 Despite the execution of the variable display using the nine third symbols with the respective numbers, the third symbol with the number 5 during the change is replaced with the third symbol with the number 6 When switching to the three symbols, the third symbol with the number 6 disappears, so the player is distrusted that the result of the special symbol lottery has been changed during the variable display of the third symbol. There is a fear that the feeling may be given.

  In addition, for example, the variable display is executed using nine third symbols to which respective numbers 1 to 9 are added, and a third symbol to which a new number 6 is added is added on the way, and a total of ten symbols are added. When the display is switched to the variable display using the third symbol, it is necessary to execute display control to cope with an increase in the number of the third symbols displayed in a variable manner, and the control content is difficult. There was a possibility that it might become.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, each main symbol numbered 1 to 9 and the main symbol for change are configured to form a symbol row Z2 by ten main symbols. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the main symbols without changing the number of the main symbols forming the symbol row while leaving various symbols numbered 1 to 9 attached. Further, even if the display mode of the main symbol for change is changed to various display modes, since the number of the main symbols forming the symbol array Z2 does not change, the display control for the symbol array Z2 is easily executed. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (d), in the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, the image data DA1 of the normal main symbol sz to which the numeral 4 is added as the image data of the main symbol for change, The image data DA2 of the normal main symbol sz attached with 7, the image data DA3 of the V main symbol sz imitating the character of V, the image data DA4 of the special main symbol sz imitating the numeral 16, and the shame imitating the cross mark At least image data DA4 of the symbol sz is stored. Although omitted in FIG. 202 (d), the normal main symbol sz is normally displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and is shown in FIG. 202 (d). The normal main symbol sz imitating "shark" and the normal main symbol sz imitating "Dugong" are main symbols sz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, in the character storage area 234a2, image data (not shown) of a normal main symbol sz (not shown) that imitates “rhino” or “wild boar” is used as the normal main symbol sz used when the mountain background is set. (Not shown) are also stored in advance.

  Here, in the fluctuation display effect of the third symbol in the normal state, the main symbol for change using the image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in the symbol column Z2, and when the special symbol lottery is won. The main symbol for change using the image data DA2 is configured to be displayed in the symbol column Z2 in a part or only a part of the case where the winning is lost in the special symbol lottery. That is, in the normal state, the main symbol sz for changing which imitates the “shark” with the numeral 4 is displayed in a variable manner, so that the main symbol (main symbol with an even number) indicating the normal jackpot winning is 5 When the symbol row Z2 is formed by a total of 10 main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) indicating the number of odd-numbered jackpots, the symbol column Z2 is formed by a special symbol lottery. Or a small portion of the special symbol lottery when winning, the main symbol sz for change that imitates the "7 dugong" with the number 7 is displayed in a variable manner, and the normal jackpot winning Four main symbols (main symbols with even numbers) are suggested, and six main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) indicating probable jackpots are winning. The symbol row Z2 is made up of a total of 10 main symbols. Will be formed.

  As a result, did you win the jackpot (probably variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player in the special symbol lottery currently being executed? And the player can be expected. In addition, as a condition of using the main symbol sz for change imitating “Dugong” with the numeral 7, the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is more satisfied than the case where it is other (out). It may be configured so that it is not used when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, it is preferable that, when a special jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a case in which the jackpot is won in the probability variable jackpot is more easily used than a case in which the regular jackpot is won. As a result, it is possible to associate various apparent numbers (even and odd numbers) of the main symbols with the probability of winning the odds, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The V main symbol sz shown in the image data DA3 is a display mode that is not normally displayed, and is used as a main symbol for change when a special condition is satisfied during the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol). It is displayed. The V main symbol sz is used as a general-purpose main symbol which is a combination indicating a jackpot winning when stopped and displayed on an effective line in the reach state regardless of the type of the main symbol sz in the reach state. By using the general-purpose main symbol in this manner, for example, even when the main symbol to be a winning combination passes on the active line in the reach state, the symbol row Z2 does not wait for another round. It can be expected that the third symbol (main symbol) is stopped and displayed with the combination indicating the jackpot winning.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the variation display effect of the third symbol, a normal main symbol (a main symbol sz with an even number) and a positive-variation main symbol (a main symbol sz with an odd number) are used. In the case of the double reach state, when the V main symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line of each overlapping reach state, it is shown that a big hit has been won in the main symbol on the side which is advantageous to the player. It is good to configure. Thereby, even when the V main symbol is variably displayed in the double reach state, it is possible to suppress the player from having a distrust. Further, in the present control example, the V main symbol is used as the general-purpose main symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed this time when the combination indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed using the V main symbol. In addition to the jackpot game, a duplicate jackpot suggestion that at least the right to execute the jackpot game at least once has already been acquired (the winning map information indicating the jackpot winning is in the special map hold stored in the hold). It may be used as a symbol, or may be configured so as to indicate that a plurality of jackpot game execution rights have been acquired by merely displaying the V main symbol in a variable manner. With this configuration, when the V main symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while giving the player a sense of expectation.

  Next, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 and the disappointing main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third symbol, and the main symbol sz is a combination indicating a jackpot winning. It is a main symbol for change used in the promotion effect that can be executed after the stop display. Here, in the present control example, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, an advantageous jackpot game (probably variable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantage jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game ( Normal jackpot game) and, for example, in the case of winning the probability change jackpot, the normal main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an even number) suggesting that the normal jackpot game is executed ), The type of the main symbol sz stopped and displayed is changed in some (or all) when the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed in the combination using the main symbol sz (the main symbol sz with an odd number). It is configured to be able to execute a promotion effect for changing to.

  During this promotion effect, it is not a period that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery (big hit or miss) using the main symbol sz, but a time period that suggests whether the jackpot won this time is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, a special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating a probable variable jackpot or a disappointing main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating a normal jackpot is set as the main symbol for change. You. As described above, by changing the display mode of the changing main symbol in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player is changed using the main symbol sz, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. .

  In the second control example, an effect is performed in which the type of the main symbol sz stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning by the promotion effect is promoted from the normal main symbol sz to the surely changing main symbol sz. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of round games executed during the jackpot game (the number of rounds) is changed from a main symbol indicating a small number of rounds to a main symbol indicating a number of rounds larger than the number of rounds. It may be configured to execute an effect of being promoted to. In this case, a plurality of image data are prepared as a main symbol for change in a display mode indicating the number of rounds that can be executed, and the main symbol for change is used by using the image data corresponding to the type of jackpot actually won. May be configured to determine the display mode.

  Further, in the present control example, the main symbol row image data of the symbol row Z2 is generated using the nine main symbols sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned main symbol sz for change, and the third symbol row is generated. It is configured to be stored in the area 235g. However, without being limited to this, the main symbol sz for change is not included in the main symbol row image data, but is stored in the third symbol area 235d, and the sub symbol fz is stored. Similarly, the variable display control may be executed in symbol units. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the display mode of the main symbol sz for change in the symbol row Z2 once set.

  In addition, separately from the main symbol picture layer sr on which the main symbol sz is displayed, a changing main symbol picture layer sr1 on which the main symbol sz for change is displayed is arranged, and the change is made using the main symbol picture layer sr1 for alteration. You may comprise so that the main design sz may be displayed. In this case, since the change main symbol sz is displayed only in the symbol row Z2, the display area of the change main symbol picture layer sr1 is limited to the display area of the symbol row Z2, and the change main symbol picture layer sr1 is displayed. May be arranged at a position that is displayed with a lower priority than the main symbol image layer sr and with a higher priority than the sub symbol image layer fr. This makes it possible to suppress the change main symbol sz from being hidden by the sub symbol fz, and to display the change main symbol sz without disturbing the display of the main symbol sz.

  Each of the image data described above with reference to FIGS. 203 (a) to (d) is a part of the image data indicating the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) stored in the character storage area 234a2. However, other image data is actually stored. For example, each of the image data stored as the main symbol display data includes an image corresponding to a display mode indicating a different action (for example, a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or a display mode in which the target creature is delighted). When data is stored and the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) stopped and displayed by replacing the image data. Can be variable.

  Specifically, when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed (when “Dugong” with the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the normal display mode), the number 7 is added. "Dugong" is configured to be switched and displayed in a special display mode that gives a surprised expression. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won by the display mode of the third symbol. Further, the image data corresponding to the special display mode is configured to be used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol change starts, and immediately after the third symbol change is started, It may be configured to execute an effect that indicates to the player that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204, a description will be given of the flow of the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) in the second control example. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically illustrating the relationship between the variable display effect of the third symbol and the display content of the symbol row displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 204, as an example of the third symbol variation effect, a variation pattern of a variation time of 60 seconds indicating a jackpot winning is used.

  As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation display mode of the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz based on the fluctuation pattern (command) received this time. To determine. Specifically, in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, the presence / absence of a notice effect, the presence / absence of a reach effect, and a stop symbol are determined. Then, a corresponding display command is set. Thereafter, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113, the set display command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the variation pattern command executed in the command determination process of the display control device 114 (see S6302 in FIG. 190). In process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209), the received display command (fluctuation pattern command) is analyzed, a fluctuation display table is determined based on the analysis result, and the main symbol corresponding to the currently set background mode is set. The image data of the main symbol row (main symbol row image data) using sz is read from the third symbol row area 235g, and the image data corresponding to the sub symbol fz corresponding to the currently set background mode is read in the third symbol row. The display image is read from the area 235g, a display image is generated, and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, a normal fluctuation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol fluctuation effect is executed. The normal fluctuation period is a period in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and is set as a period in which the player can operate the frame button 22 to execute the background mode transition. When the background mode transition is executed during the normal fluctuation period, each of the symbols displayed in the display mode corresponding to the background mode among the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz is the background after the transition. Control for switching to a display mode corresponding to the mode is executed.

  After that, when the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed to be in the reach state, a reach fluctuation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach effect that suggests (incites) whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot. Is executed. During the reach fluctuation period, the background mode is not changed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the decoration mode in which the various light emitting modes of the decoration LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 are changed. An effect is performed. Further, in a part of the reach effect, an operation effect in which an effective period (SW effective period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set is executed, and the frame is set within the set effective period. By operating the button 22, an effect that is not executed when the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a fixed notification for notifying that the special symbol lottery of this time has been won, and a suggestion notification indicating that there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won are executed. It is configured to be possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol as soon as possible to operate the frame button 22. In addition, since an effect that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect is provided, a player who wants to view various effects can also operate the frame button 22 eagerly. .

  As described above, during the reach fluctuation period, the background mode transition is not executed. Therefore, the background mode is executed during the execution of the reach effect that suggests (fans) whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Is switched, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, so that it is possible to suppress a reach effect that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the operation effect is configured to be executed during the reach fluctuation period in which the background mode transition is not executed, for example, a fluctuation effect that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect (a so-called hidden effect). Even if it is possible to set the operation effect), it is possible to make the player actively operate the frame button 22.

  In this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a notification mode for notifying a player that the background mode transition is not executed (for example, “When the button is pressed during the reach mode, the background A notification mode (for example, if a button is pressed at any time during the reach mode) to set a comment display indicating that the mode does not change, or to notify the player that the hidden operation effect is being performed. Or a special effect will be performed.). As a result, it is possible for the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

  Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, among the combinations of the main symbols sz indicating the jackpot winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the normal main symbol sz (the main symbol sz with an even number). Then, a promotion effect for promoting the jackpot-winning normal main symbol sz to a probable variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number) is executed. When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot win is a probable change jackpot, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the main symbol sz for changing The display mode of the symbol sz is determined. Then, the promotion effect using the symbol sequence for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion change period (10 seconds).

  Here, as the symbol sequence for the promotion effect, for example, the display mode of the main symbol sz for change becomes the display mode using the image data DA4 (see FIG. 203 (d)), and the display mode of the sub symbol fz is the image mode SD3. Is displayed (see FIG. 203 (c)), in addition to the normal probability-variable main symbol sz (the main symbol sz to which the odd number is attached), the player has an advantageous big hit that is advantageous to the player. Since a large number of symbols indicating the winning can be displayed, it is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility that the player will be promoted to a probability changing jackpot in this promotion effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the variable effect executed in the second control example will be described. FIG. 205 shows an example of the effect of the variation effect of the third symbol executed for the same variation pattern command, and FIG. 202 (a) schematically shows the flow of the variation pattern used in the example of the effect. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram schematically showing a flow of a normal effect, and FIG. 202 (c) is a flow of a reach line announcement effect (see FIG. 202 (b)). FIG. 202 (d) is a diagram schematically illustrating a flow of a notice effect in which the fluctuation direction of the sub-symbol fz is made different from normal.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set is set in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 reaches a reach effect. Is executed, a display variation pattern command is set. Furthermore, various announcement effects using the sub-symbol fz are executed using the period until the reach effect is executed. In the second control example, as described above, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz, which form each symbol row, are configured to be capable of variable display independently. Various fluctuation effects (preliminary effects) can be executed by changing only the fluctuation pattern of the sub symbol fz while changing and displaying the main symbol sz in a specific fluctuation pattern according to the command.

  Specifically, in the effect A shown in FIG. 205 (b), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, the third symbol variation display in which the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are synchronized (FIG. 202) (A)) is executed, and the normal pattern that reaches the reach state is shown. In this way, by controlling the display so that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz, which are independently and variably displayed, are synchronized, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz apparently change as one symbol row. You can make it look like it is displayed.

  Next, in the effect B shown in FIG. 205 (c), the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to off (set to non-display) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the change of the third symbol. In the meantime, there is shown an effect pattern in which a reach line announcement effect for stopping and displaying the fluctuation display of the sub-symbol fz is executed. In other words, the same display control as in the above-described 205 (a) is executed for the main symbol sz, but the main symbol image layer sr is set to non-display in the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. Therefore, it is configured such that the player cannot visually recognize the variable display of the main symbol sz.

  Then, the sub symbol fz is variably displayed using the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period (see FIG. 202 (b)), and at the end timing of the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. By stopping and displaying the symbol fz, the position at which the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed in the third symbol variation display is displayed (see FIG. 202 (c)). Thereafter, in the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to ON (set to display), and the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period is used. The variation display of sz is executed, and the reach state is set 30 seconds after the start of the variation, as in FIG. 205 (b).

  That is, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205 (c) is executed, that is, when the reach line announcement effect is executed, the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed before the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. Can be notified to the player, and the third symbol variation display in this time determines in advance whether double reach, single reach, or no reach (from the start of variation of the third symbol). (After 15 seconds). Thus, when the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz cannot be in the reach state with respect to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205 (b)) which requires 30 seconds to determine whether or not reach is reached. In this case, the period in which the player has an excessive sense of expectation can be shortened.

  When the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in the reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining fluctuation time while expecting the main symbol sz to be in the reach state with the main symbol sz. I can do it. In the second control example, when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in the reach state, the sub-symbol fz is always stopped. At the display timing, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the current third symbol change is in the reach state.

  Finally, in the effect C shown in FIG. 205 (d), the normal display is executed for the main symbol sz as in the effect A described above, and for the sub symbol fz, a predetermined period (3 2) shows an effect pattern in which an effect different from effect A is executed. Specifically, the display mode using the image data SD2 (see FIG. 203 (c)) is set as the display mode of the sub-design fz displayed at the start of the change, and the change display direction (left direction) of the main design is A sub-symbol reverse fluctuation display for variably displaying the sub-symbol fz in the reverse direction (rightward) is executed, and thereafter, the fluctuation display using the normal sub-symbol fz is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the main symbol sz. This is a production pattern.

  As in the effect pattern shown in this effect C, at the timing when the third symbol variation display is started, the variation display direction of the main symbol sz and the variation display direction of the sub symbol fz are made different, so that the player A surprising effect on the player, that is, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are formed in the same symbol row, and the player who recognizes that the variable display is performed only in the same direction is recognized. The surprising effect can be provided because the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed in a mode that is not performed.

  As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are configured so as to be capable of variable display independently and correspond to the variable pattern command set based on the special symbol lottery result. The variable display mode of the main symbol sz is set, and various variable effects can be executed by changing only the variable display mode of the sub symbol fz without changing the variable display mode of the main symbol sz. I have. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fluctuation display result of the main symbol sz is different from the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In the case where the sub-design fz is variably displayed first, for example, the sub-design fz is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the sub-design fz is subjected to the variability display such that the main design area Dm of the third design display device 81 is covered by the sub-design fz. Alternatively, the main symbol sz may be configured to change the variable display position or the symbol type.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 206 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the contents of the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. The difference is that a third symbol row area 235g is added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 203, each image data D1 to D9 of the main symbol display data and each image data SD1 of the sub symbol display data corresponding to each background mode. The difference from the character storage area 234a2 of the above-described first control example is that the image data DA1 to DA5 of the main design display data for change, such as .about.SD3, are stored. Are identical. Note that the details of the image data newly stored in the second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  The third symbol row area 235g reads out a plurality of image data of the main symbol sz stored in the character storage area 234a2, generates one image data as a symbol row in advance (main symbol row image data), and generates the generated main symbol row. This is a storage area for storing column image data. When the main symbol sz is to be variably displayed on the main symbol layer sr, the main symbol row image data stored in the third symbol row area 235g is read out and displayed based on the drawing contents defined in the display data table. The main symbol sz is variably displayed by variably setting the position coordinates. With this configuration, the number of image data used when the main symbol sz is variably displayed can be reduced as compared with the case where image data generated in the main symbol sz is used. The processing load can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the drawing contents relating to the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) are displayed on the display data table (see FIG. 153) in the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. They differ in that they differ, and are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 207, the drawing content of the display data table defines the type of the sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and displays the display according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display either back A or B corresponding to the background mode (one of “sea mode” or “mountain mode”) selected by the player, or is different from back A and B. Information for specifying whether to display the back image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  Next, the type of sprite for displaying the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. First, for the sub-designs (sub-design 1, sub-design 2,...), Display position coordinates indicating the stop positions of the sub-designs fz stopped and displayed in the preceding variable effect are set. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop position of the sub symbol fz in the immediately preceding variable effect. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub symbol fz is not provided with a unique number, and all the sub symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, only by setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-design fz stopped and displayed in the preceding variation production, the variation production is easily started from the stop position of the sub-design fz in the immediately preceding variation production. can do.

  Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 208, in the second control example, a plurality of display modes can be set as the display mode of the sub symbol fz. According to the display mode of each sub-design fz to be displayed, the storage location of the image data used for the display is designated in the drawing list so that each sub-design fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode. Here, when the display mode of each sub-design fz which is stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding variable production is different from the display mode of the sub-design fz used in the current fluctuation production, the start timing of the fluctuation production, that is, The display mode of the sub-design fz may be made different from the drawing information corresponding to the address “0001H” of the display data table, or may be changed using the display configuration of the sub-design fz in the immediately preceding variation effect. The effect may be started, and the display mode of the sub-design fz may be changed during the high-speed change that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sub-design fz.

  In the former case, the sub-design fz is displayed in the display mode used in the current variation production before the fluctuation effect is started, that is, at the timing when the sub-design fz is stopped. The effect contents of the effect can be grasped in advance by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-design fz can be changed at a timing at which the player is unlikely to notice, so that the display mode of the sub-design fz can be smoothly changed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling. it can.

  Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third symbol (the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, a sprite for displaying the main symbol sz will be described. Main symbol columns (main symbol column 1, main symbol column 2,...) Store symbol column type offset information as symbol column type information for specifying the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed. I have. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to each main symbol sz. Instead of directly specifying the type of the main symbol sz, the offset information is specified because the display of the main symbol sz in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each main symbol sz is given a unique number, a variable symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are displayed in the main symbol sz. The main symbol sz to be displayed easily can be specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective main symbols sz.

  In the symbol offset information, the main symbol sz fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stop symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stop symbol performed this time. It is set to be the time displayed. While the main symbol sz is being displayed at a high speed, the main symbol sz is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the main symbol sz is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  Further, in the second control example, the image data of each main symbol sz displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main symbol column image data) in symbol column units. I have. For example, for each of the main symbols sz with numbers 1 to 9 variably displayed in the symbol column Z1, the main symbol sz with the number 3 is the head of the image data, and then the main symbol sz The main symbols at predetermined intervals (intervals at which sub-designs fz are displayed) such that the numbers attached to are in the order of “3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4” Column image data is generated and stored in the third symbol column area 235g. Then, by changing the display position coordinates of the main symbol sequence image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main symbol sz forming the symbol array Z1 is variably displayed is displayed on the main symbol image layer sr. Make up. Note that the size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main symbol image layer sr is set to a size that cannot display all the images included in the main symbol row image data. ), The maximum size of three main symbols sz is set to be displayable.

  Therefore, based on the offset information included in the symbol row type offset information, the type of the main symbol sz to be displayed on the main symbol image layer sr is specified, and the main symbol sz is associated with the position where the specified main symbol sz is to be displayed. The display range of the symbol sequence image data is determined, and the display of each main symbol sz is executed in the display range. As described above, when performing the variable display without changing the arrangement relationship of the main symbols sz, as in the first control example described above, the image data is provided in units of the individual main symbols sz, and the immediately preceding image data is provided. Based on the offset information of the stop symbol of the main symbol sz in the variable effect, the symbol type of each main symbol sz displayed at the time of starting the current variable effect is specified. Accordingly, rather than variably setting the display positions (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main symbol sz in synchronization with each other, a symbol sequence in which a plurality of main symbols sz are defined in a predetermined order and at predetermined intervals. The configuration of generating the image data and executing the variable effect using the symbol sequence image data can reduce the load of the display control process.

  In addition, when the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main symbols sz or to change the arrangement interval of the main symbols sz. As in the first control example described above, it is preferable to execute display control for variably displaying each main symbol sz using image data corresponding to each main symbol sz. In addition, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example are combined, and only the specific main symbol sz uses the image data in symbol units, and is applied to a plurality of main symbols other than the specific main symbol. On the other hand, it may be configured to use the main symbol sequence image data. In this case, for a specific main symbol, control for changing the image data to be used or changing the degree of change of the display position (variable display speed) can be easily executed, and special display control can be performed. Can be reduced for a plurality of main symbols sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display contents, without executing the control process.

  In the second control example in which one image data (main symbol row image data) is generated for each symbol row, the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z2, and the symbol row Z3 (for each symbol row, It is configured so that different drawing contents are set. For the symbol row Z2, the numeral 4 is attached to each main symbol sz to which the numerals 1 to 9 are variably displayed. The main symbol sz becomes the top of the image data, and then the predetermined number is added to the main symbol sz in the order of “4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3”. Main symbol row image data with an interval (interval at which the sub symbol fz is displayed) is generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. Also, for the symbol row Z3, for each of the main symbols sz with the numbers 1 to 9 variably displayed, the main symbol sz with the number 1 is the head of the image data, A predetermined interval (interval at which the sub symbol fz is displayed) is provided so that the numbers attached to the main symbol sz are in the order of “1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9”. The main symbol row image data is generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235g.

  By using the main symbol row image data corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 configured as described above, display control is performed such that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in the left direction, so that the main symbol layer is formed. In sr, only the main symbols sz displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. As described above, the type of the main symbol sz positioned at the head of the main symbol column image data is different for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Thus, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the center position of the third symbol display device 81, that is, on the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), is “3” in order from the top. The main symbol sz to which the number “.4.1” is attached is stopped and displayed. That is, by configuring the numbers attached to the main symbols sz, which are the head positions of the respective main symbol row image data, to be different, in the initial state in which the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, Only the initial display setting is performed so that the head position of the main symbol row image data forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is on the effective line L2, and the combination of the main symbol sz different from the winning combination is stopped and displayed. And the display control in the initial state can be simplified.

  Next, the contents of the drawing list in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the above-described drawing list of the first control example (see FIG. 155) in that the type of pride for displaying the third symbol is changed, and is otherwise the same. is there. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 208, the back image used for the one-frame image and the sub-patterns (sub-patterns 1, Sub-patterns 2, ...), main symbol row (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, ...) effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...) .., And the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls, 2,. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address.

  That is, the drawing instruction content for the image of the sub-design fz includes information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored, and a plurality of information corresponding to the sub-design fz stored in the third design area 235d. Of the image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203 (c)), the address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction is described. The drawing instruction content for the image of the main symbol sz corresponds to the information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored and the main symbol row stored in the third symbol row area 235g. The address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction is described from among the plurality of image data (main design sequence image data).

<About the control processing content in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 209 and FIG. 210, control processing contents in the second control example will be described. The second control example is at least different from the first control example described above in that the content of control processing executed by the display control device 114 is different. In addition, the type contents of the effect mode of the variable effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 are also different. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second control example, the content of the variation effect mode of the third symbol set by the audio lamp control device 113 is different. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. Of the three symbols, a display command for executing various fluctuation effects only on the sub symbol fz can be set. However, the setting method of the display command corresponding to the variable effect is the same as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the above-described first control example, and only the specific setting contents are different. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, since the details of the various fluctuation effects executed on the sub-symbol fz executed in the second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 205, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  First, control processing contents executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455). This fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S6455) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. In response to the variation pattern command processing executed at 114 (see S6405 in FIG. 191), the types of the main symbol sz for change and the sub symbol fz used during the current variation effect are determined, and the resident video RAM 235 The difference is that processing for storing in various storage areas is added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455), first, the shaded variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) is analyzed (S6501), and the variation pattern command this time indicates a jackpot winning (the main control device). It is determined whether the special pattern lottery executed at 110 is a fluctuation pattern command selected when a big hit is won (S6551). If it is determined that the change is a jackpot change (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current display variation pattern command includes information indicating the production mode of the promotion effect (S6552). When it is determined that the information indicating the effect mode is included (S6552: Yes), the main symbol for change corresponding to the command is determined as the main symbol for change of the symbol column dedicated for promotion, and the main symbol for change is determined in the third symbol column area. Then, the process proceeds to S6554. If the current fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation in the processing of S6551 or if it is determined that the promotion effect is not to be executed in the processing of S6552, the process proceeds to S6554, where the analysis is performed in the processing of S6501. Based on the obtained information, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time includes information for executing a notice effect using the sub-design fz (see FIG. 205), and the notice effect of the sub-design fz is determined. If it is determined to be executed (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current sub-symbol preview effect is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined display mode is stored in the character ROM 234. Is read out from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

  Thereafter, a fluctuation display data table corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is determined, a display fluctuation pattern for 0 is set for display, and the fluctuation pattern command executed by the display control device 114 of the first control example described above. The same processing from S6502 to S6505 as the processing (see S6405 in FIG. 191) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the back image change command processing 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back image change command processing 2. The rear image change command process 2 (S6469) is a process for changing the rear image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195 (a)) when the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON. The difference is that the type of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) corresponding to the back image (background mode) is determined and stored in the third symbol area 235d and the third symbol row area 235g. ing. Since the other processes are the same, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rear image change command processing 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), and the third symbol (main symbol sz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) is set. , The sub-design fz) is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third design area 235d and the third design row area 235g (S7002). After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the rear image type after the change is set to ON (S7051), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Modification of Second Control Example>
Next, a modified example of the above-described second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example described above, the main symbol sz constituting the third symbol is displayed (drawn) on the main symbol image layer sr, and the sub symbol fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub symbol image layer fr. The display content of the main symbol image layer sr and the display content of the sub symbol image layer fr are controlled in synchronization with each other, so that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are regularly changed in a specific permutation. By changing the display control content only for the sub symbol fz variably, various variable effects can be performed without changing the variable display content for the main symbol sz for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It was configured to be executable.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the third symbol (the main symbol sz, the sub symbol fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer as in the first control example described above, Further, this embodiment is different in that a plurality of (two) image layers for displaying (drawing) the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) are provided. Then, by changing the display control content of the third symbol displayed for the two layers (the third symbol image A and the third symbol image B), a special variable effect can be executed. Are different. Other contents are the same as those in the above-described second control example, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  FIG. 211A is a schematic diagram illustrating a relationship between a display image layer formed on the pachinko machine 10 according to a modified example of the second control example and a display screen, and FIG. 211B is a triple reach diagram. FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed during an effect, and FIG. 202C is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in a case where a triple-reach effect has entered a triple-reach state.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), in the modified example of the second control example, the third symbol image layer A and the third symbol image layer B are overlapped as the image layer on which the third symbol is displayed. It is configured such that the third symbol image layer A is disposed on the front side (the front side in the player's eyes) of the third symbol image layer B. In FIG. 211 (a), only the third symbol image layer A and the third symbol image layer B are shown, but actually, various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are shown. Are superimposed on each other.

  Then, the third symbol image layer A and the third symbol image layer B are displayed in a synchronized manner to perform the variable display of the third symbol, thereby apparently having the above-described first control example shown in FIG. 125 ( The same variable display as the variable display of the third symbol shown with reference to b) can be executed.

  In this modified example configured in this manner, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A and the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B are similar to the second control example described above. , Can be independently subjected to variable display control. For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), a single reach of “9” is obtained in the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B. In this state, the third symbol variation of the third symbol image layer A can be continued. In this state, depending on the result of the third symbol change of the third symbol image layer A, the number of the third symbols in the reach state increases, so that the character “REACH! CHANGE PROMOTION CHANCE” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when a double reach of “1” and “9” is established in the third symbol displayed on the third symbol image layer A, three third symbols are apparently obtained. Becomes "reach state". In this way, when the third symbol is variably displayed using a plurality of layers so as to be variably displayed, the order of the symbol row of each third symbol is changed. A fluctuating effect that requires variable display control can be easily executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the case where the variable display of the third symbol is made different for a plurality of the third symbol layers, for example, the layer (the third symbol layer A) on the side that is preferentially displayed is used, for example. The third symbol displayed as a true third symbol to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, and the third symbol displayed on the non-priority side layer (third symbol layer B) is decorated. The third pattern of the third symbol layer A is based on a variation pattern (variation pattern set by the main control device 110) set based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Is determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the determined fluctuation pattern of the third symbol of the third symbol layer A (based on the presence or absence of a big hit and the type of reach). It is good to be constituted so that the fluctuation effect contents of the third symbol displayed on the layer B may be determined.Then, it is preferable that the variable display control is performed differently in the third symbol image layer A and the third symbol image layer B in the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery than in the case where the jackpot is not won. .

  Further, in the present modification, a description has been given of the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol image layer A and the fluctuation display of the third symbol image layer B are completely different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The start timing may be shifted by 0.2 seconds, and thereafter, a fluctuation effect for synchronizing the fluctuation display contents may be executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol fluctuation. As described above, by changing the variable display of the third symbol image layer A and the variable display of the third symbol image layer B only during a partial period of the variable effect, it is possible to give the player some sense of discomfort, It is possible to cause the player to more randomly select the variable display.

  As described above, in the above-described second control example and the modified example of the second control example, a symbol sequence including a main symbol sz having identification information for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol lottery. Although various display controls are performed on the third symbols Z1 to Z3 (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz), the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As long as the symbol is dynamically displayed as described above, a symbol other than the symbol (third symbol) included in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided.

  For example, during the execution of the third symbol change, a special symbol not having the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping the display area of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. . In addition, the special symbol described above may be anything that is dynamically displayed during the period in which the third symbol change is being executed, such as starting the dynamic display of the special symbol during the execution of the third symbol change, The special symbol may be stopped or displayed during the execution of the third symbol change.

  Even in the case of such a configuration, the variation display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz may be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Similarly, it is possible to set a variation pattern for the effect. Also, since the special symbol described above is not the symbol included in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 unlike the sub symbol fz, it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing and the stop timing of the third symbol change. Even without it, the player will not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of the change patterns that can be set than the sub-design fz, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Also, the dynamic display mode of the special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third symbol described above. For example, the dynamic display direction of the third symbol is set to the left (FIG. 202 (a)). (The left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 202), the dynamic display direction of the special symbol is different from the dynamic display direction of the third symbol (for example, rightward from the viewpoint of FIG. 202 (a)). It is good to configure. Thereby, even if the special symbol is dynamically displayed in the display area overlapping with the display area of the third symbol variation display during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the player can dynamically display the special symbol. It is possible to easily notify that the display has been executed.

  In the example described above, the dynamic display direction of the special symbol is set to a direction that is completely opposite to the dynamic display direction of the third symbol. However, the dynamic display direction may be different. Not in the horizontal direction, but in the vertical direction (the direction of moving up and down from the viewpoint in FIG. 202 (a)), and in the front and rear direction (from the back to the front in the viewpoint in FIG. 202 (a), or from the front to the back. Side) or an oblique direction (a direction in which a moving line indicating the moving direction is shifted to an oblique side shifted by less than 90 degrees). Furthermore, in the above-described example, in order to easily understand that the special symbol change display has been performed during the third symbol change, the dynamic display direction of the third symbol, the dynamic display direction of the special symbol, The pattern in which the pattern is changed is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. By changing the size of the third symbol dynamically displayed and the size of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol during the variation of the third symbol can be performed. You may be comprised so that the execution may be informed clearly. Further, before the third symbol change is executed, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, or the third symbol change is stopped (including a display state in which the player swings to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), The dynamic display of the special symbol may be executed.

  On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above-described example, in order to inform the fact that the display of the change of the special symbol has been executed during the change of the third symbol, the dynamics of each symbol (the third symbol and the special symbol) are changed. The display directions and sizes may be the same. With such a configuration, it is not possible to grasp that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed unless the variable display executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is watched. The player who wants to know that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed can be continuously interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, since the special symbol does not need to be constantly displayed unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol according to the display mode when the display is stopped as in the third symbol. Alternatively, for example, the dynamic display of a special symbol may be started to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot. As described above, the timing (dynamic display start timing, stop display timing) at which the information for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol is provided is changed according to the type of the symbol dynamically displayed. The timing at which the player should pay attention can be made different according to the various symbols displayed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Also, by starting the dynamic display in this way, when using a special symbol indicating that there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery, it is suggested that the dynamic display is executed. As a standby display mode, at least a part of the special symbol may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a special symbol of a display mode in which a plurality of fish are in a school is used as the special symbol, it is configured to display only the fish displayed near the head of the variation direction side of the special symbol. good. With this configuration, the player can play a game while expecting the dynamic display of the special symbol to start. In this case, it is preferable that a part of the display mode showing the special symbol is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 instead of the whole. Thereby, when the special symbol is displayed as the standby display mode, it is possible to suppress that the special symbol is mistaken for being already dynamically displayed.

  Further, in the above-described second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz forming the third symbol are configured to be displayed on different layers, and the display control content executed for each layer is determined. By making them different, the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and the variable display mode of the sub symbol fz are configured to be different, but in addition to this, for example, as an image layer capable of displaying the sub symbol fz A first sub-pattern layer and a second sub-pattern layer are provided, and a sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern layer and a sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern layer overlap. May be displayed, or only one of them may be displayed. In addition, after performing display control so that the stop display positions of the sub-designs fz displayed on the plurality of display layers are different, by executing the reach-line announcement effect shown in FIG. 202 (b), the main design sz May be configured so as to further limit the position where is stopped and displayed.

  In the second control example described above, the display layer for displaying one symbol (main symbol sz) and another symbol (sub symbol fz) constituting each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is different, Various variable effects can be executed by configuring the display control to be executable for each display layer unit. However, the symbol of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured. As long as different display controls can be executed for the types of the symbols forming the columns (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz), the configuration may be such that they are displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, when the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, which display object needs to be specified in advance, the display control process becomes complicated, but the second The same effect as each effect described in the control example can be obtained.

  Further, even in the case of using a configuration for displaying a plurality of display control results on the same display image layer, other than the plurality of symbol types (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) constituting the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3. , That is, a symbol other than the third symbol that is dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the change display of the special symbol (for example, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (big hit) The various displays described in the above-described second control example for various symbols including a decorative symbol which is dynamically displayed during a predetermined period during a special symbol change, in order to indicate that it is highly likely that the symbol has been won. Control processing may be performed.

  In the second control example described above, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the display mode of the main symbol sz is switched to the display mode corresponding to the background mode after the switching. Alternatively, when the background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main symbol sz but also the display mode of the sub symbol fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as image data of the sub-design fz stored in the character storage area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the switched background mode is switched. May be read and stored in the third symbol area 235d.

  In addition, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is determined, and the type of the sub symbol fz displayed after switching the background mode is determined based on the determination result. May be. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery being executed has won a jackpot, a display imitating “numerical 16” as the type of the sub symbol fz that is more easily determined than when the jackpot has not been won It is preferable to provide a mode or a display mode imitating “V”. With this configuration, by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode, it is possible to easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively perform the operation effect.

  Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery may be a jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the background mode to be set and the type of the sub symbol fz to be displayed. If the type of the sub-design fz (display mode for the sea mode) is used in the second effect mode (mountain mode), the special symbol lottery being executed wins the jackpot. It may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility of being present. As described above, by executing an effect in which the background mode and the type of the sub symbol fz are combined, various effects can be executed without increasing the type of the sub symbol fz.

  Further, in the present control example, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the processing for changing the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is executed. In addition, the number and positions of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122A) formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

  Further, the reach line announcement effect shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and (b) is executed, and the background mode transition effect is executed in a state where the sub-design fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202 (b)). In such a case, the stop display position of the main symbol sz notified in the reach line announcement effect may be configured to be variable. In this case, the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is a jackpot win. The stop display position of the main symbol sz may be configured to be more easily changed than in the case other than the jackpot winning, and conversely, the main symbol sz may be different from the jackpot winning than the jackpot winning. You may comprise so that a stop display position may become easy to change.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 222. In the above-described first control example, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during the big hit game. , It is configured to set a probable change state after the end of the jackpot game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120, the balls that have won the wide winning opening 65a (the opening width is 50 mm) are collected at one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and the second flow path 65e2 was made to flow down to reach the V gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above, the ball that has won from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream of the first flow path 65e1), that is, the ball fired by the left-handed game, is on the left side. When the player wins the variable prize device 65 after flowing down the region, the ball won from the right side of the variable prize device 65 (the upstream side of the fifth flow path 65e5), that is, the ball fired by the right-handed game is the right region. Since the timing at which the variable prize device 65 is won after flowing down and the timing at which the variable prize device 65 is won is different from the timing at which the variable prize device 65 can be reached at the V-gate 65, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, The ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has won the variable prize device 65 can reach the V gate 65v regardless of whether the player plays the left-handed game or the right-handed game. It was necessary to long-term position of the switching valve 65y to the state. In addition, by setting a longer period during which the ball winning the variable prize device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v, a longer period (V effective period) for effectively determining whether the ball passes through the V gate 65v (specific area). There is also a problem that it is difficult to find an illegal action during a jackpot game, that is, an action of passing a ball to a V gate 65V (specific area) due to an illegal game, because it needs to be set long.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, the ball shot by the left-handed game flows down the left area and then wins the variable winning device 65, and the ball shot by the right-handed game is The configuration is such that the period until the ball that has won the variable prize device 65 passes through the specific region is substantially the same as the case where the variable prize device 65 wins after flowing down the right region. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) in which the passage of the ball to the specific area is effectively determined, and the illegal action during the jackpot game, that is, the illegal game, Through the V gate 65V (specific area) can be easily found.

  As described above, in the third control example, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 is changed, and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided in the variable winning device 65 is changed. This is different from the first control example, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 119) in terms of an electric accessory. The difference is that the arrangement of the nail members implanted in the lower region of 640 is different. Specifically, in the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example, the ball that has flowed down the left area or the ball that has flowed down the right area has the opening of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, the ball that has flowed down the left side region of the variable winning device 65 A plurality of spheres flowing down the right side area on the left end side of the specific winning opening 65a and a plurality of U-shaped characters below the electric auditors 640 so as to easily win the right end side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. A nail member is implanted.

  That is, in the third control example, the variable winning device having the specific winning opening 65a having a wide opening width so that the ball that has flowed down the left region by the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down the right region by the right-handed game can win. In order to suppress the winning of the ball in the vicinity of the central portion of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction after providing the 65, an electric accessory 640 as a winning inhibiting member is provided above the central portion of the variable winning device 65, Further, a plurality of nail members planted in a C-shape are provided as guiding members for guiding the winning of the ball near both ends in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a.

  With such a configuration, even when a right-handed game is performed during a jackpot game or when a left-handed game is performed, the ball near the both ends in the opening width direction at the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is obtained. Winning can be promoted. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is left-right symmetric (the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a is left-right symmetric when viewed in the left-right direction). ), And by setting the winning position of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a to a symmetrical position, the ball winning to the specific winning opening 65a can be adjusted in each area (for example, in the variable winning device 65). An error can hardly occur in a period until the light passes through the (specific region).

  Next, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a structure near the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 213 (b) is a flow down path of a ball winning the specific winning opening 65a. FIG.

  The variable winning device 65 of the third control example also has the ball received by the opening / closing door 65b that is opened during the big hit game state, similarly to the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example (see FIG. 120). Are guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided at both ends of the specific winning opening 65a. Then, the ball that has flowed down the first opening 65a1 passes through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and a payout control in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls is executed. Similarly, the ball that has flowed down the second opening 65a2 passes through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and the payout control for paying out 15 balls as prize balls is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in the third control example, since the ball is configured to be hard to win from near the center of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball received by the open / close door 65b in the open state. Can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. Therefore, the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 increases, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, and to win the specific winning opening 65a. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a prize ball is not paid out (a ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2).

  As shown in FIG. 213 (b), the variable prize device 65 of the third control example is different from the variable prize device 65 (see FIG. 120 (b)) used in the first embodiment described above. The ball that has won the winning opening 65a (the ball that has passed through the ball detecting sensor 65s1 or the ball detecting sensor 65s2) is largely different in that the path guided to the outlet 65 is symmetrical.

  First, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the switching valve 65y is closed (the V gate 65V is provided). (A state in which the flow path protrudes so as to close the flow path), and flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y, and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. The time (ta) required for the sphere to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the sphere that has passed the sphere detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the switching valve 65y is in the closed state (the V gate 65V is connected). (The state in which it protrudes so as to close the provided flow path), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y, and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the sphere to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be about 2 seconds, similarly to the time ta described above.

  That is, in the third control example, the ball that has won near the left end of the specific winning opening 65a by the left-handed game and the ball that has passed through the first opening 65a1 is also near the right end of the specific winning opening 65a by the right-handed game. , And the ball that has passed through the second opening 65a2 is also configured to reach the switching valve 65y after a flow time at the same position.

  Then, when the switching valve 65y is in the closed state (the state in which the ball is buried in the flow path in which the V gate 65V is disposed) so that the ball can pass through, the first flow path 65r1 is closed as shown in FIG. The ball that has flowed down passes through the switch valve 65y in the buried state (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V gate 65v1, and flows into the third discharge port 65h3. Further, the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65r2 is configured to pass through the switch valve 65y in the buried state, pass through the second V gate 65V2, and flow into the fourth discharge port 65h4.

  In the third control example, the switching valve 65y is closed (FIG. 213) when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number. (See (b)) to the open state (see FIG. 214), and the predetermined number of balls reach the switching valve 65y after passing through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2. The time (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the number of balls that have won the variable prize device 65 to reach the predetermined number and the switching valve 65y to open is shorter than the time (approximately 2 seconds). It is configured to be. Therefore, the above-described predetermined number of balls can pass through the V gate 65V as they are. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is in the open state, the ball can be reliably caused to flow down to the specific area (the V gate 65V).

  Note that the structure of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example is the same as the structure of the distribution device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the above-described first embodiment, but for convenience of description, FIGS. This is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in FIG. Therefore, as for the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example, the content of the above-described first embodiment is applied, of course, and the description is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. The third control example differs from the first control example in that the content of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game is different, and various processing contents based on the differences are different. The differences are in the points, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 are partially changed. Are the same.

  Here, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the above-described configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example (see FIG. 139 (b)) in that a V period timer 203ca is added. Otherwise, it is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The V period timer 203ca is for measuring a period in which the switching valve 65y is positioned in the open state so that the ball can pass through the specific region (V gate 65v). A predetermined time (5 seconds) is set when a condition that allows the ball to pass to the gate 65v) is satisfied. Then, in the big hit middle update process (see S1954 in FIG. 217) executed in the big hit control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110, the value of the V period timer 203ca is set. Is updated, and when the V period elapses (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y switches to the closed state.

  In the third control example, in the round game of the specific number of rounds (the first round game) during the probability change jackpot game, the number of balls won to the specific winning opening 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) ) Is a predetermined number (two), the V condition that allows the ball to pass to the specific area (V gate 65v) is satisfied, and the switching valve 65y is set to the predetermined period (5 seconds). It is configured to switch to the open state.

  In other words, instead of controlling the switching valve 65y based on the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot game, the switching valve 65y is switched based on the number of balls that have won the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game. It is configured to With such a configuration, the open state period of the switching valve 65y is changed during a period in which the ball cannot be made to enter the variable prize device 65 despite a normal game being played during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball ends and the ball cannot pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v).

  Further, in the third control example, the ball satisfying the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, that is, the ball that has passed the predetermined number (two) of the ball detection sensors 65s1 or 65s2 is the switching valve. The time required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is satisfied (about 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time required for reaching the temperature 65y (about 2 seconds). The sphere that satisfies at least the V condition is configured to be able to pass through the specific region (V gate 65v). With this configuration, when the V condition is satisfied, the sphere can be reliably passed to the specific area (V gate 65v).

  In this control example, the V condition is satisfied, and the state in which the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state is configured to be continued for a predetermined period (5 seconds). In other words, the terminating condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the terminating end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 65v), a V-pass ending condition that is satisfied when passing the vehicle, a V-round game (first round game) ending condition, or a V-round game ending condition may be satisfied. For example, a round end condition that is established when a predetermined period (e.g., 4 seconds required for a ball winning the variable winning device 65 during the V round to reach any one of the outlets 65h) has elapsed may be provided. . As described above, various end conditions may be set, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when any of the end conditions is satisfied first. Thereby, the period during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to suppress the ball from passing through the specific area (V gate 65v) unnecessarily. Therefore, the possibility that the ball collides with the ball detection sensor provided in the V gate 65v and the ball detection sensor is physically destroyed can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 of the third control example is different from the above-described configuration of the RAM 223 of the first control example (see FIG. 144 (b)) in that a V timer 223ca is added. Otherwise, they are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring an elapsed time since a period in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V gate 65v) (a period during which a V can be won) is set. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V period command set by the main control device 110 when the possible period is reached, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. Then, the value of the V timer 223ca is continuously updated (subtracted) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when a predetermined period has elapsed), guidance for giving a V winning is provided. The emphasized guide notification with emphasis is executed.

  In other words, the maximum winning time period is set to 5 seconds, whereas the highlight guidance notification is executed when 3 seconds have elapsed since the V winning time period was set. . Here, as described above, normally, the ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to win V as it is, and the time required for the ball that satisfies the V condition to win V is about 2 seconds. It is configured so that That is, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is conceivable that the ball satisfying the V condition did not win V. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for a V prize using an additional ball, the emphasis guidance notification is configured to be executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a V prize cannot be made due to the game content of the player, even though the V prize possible period is set.

  In the present control example, the emphasis guidance notification is configured to be executed based on the elapsed time after the V condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration is such that, when it is detected that the vehicle has passed through a region having no specific region (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having a discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 213 (b))), the emphasis guidance standby notification is executed. You may. Further, in the present control example, when it is detected that the ball that has triggered the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state has not passed through the specific area (the V gate 65v), the above-described enhanced guidance notification is executed. However, instead of this, an abnormality notification for notifying the outside that an abnormality (for example, ball clogging) has occurred in the flow path in the variable winning device 65 may be executed. good.

  Further, in the present control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the winning of a predetermined number (second) of balls, the switching control for immediately switching the switching valve 65y to the open state is executed. In this case, the ball (first winning ball) that has won the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number (second) is guided to the switching valve 65y in the open state. May pass through a specific region (V gate 65V). Therefore, when a predetermined number (second) of winnings is detected, the standby time (about 1.5 seconds) taking into account the time (about 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y. Second), and after the elapse of the standby time, the switching control of the switching valve 65y to the open state may be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to easily pass only the ball that triggered the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state to the specific region (the V gate 65V).

  Further, in the present control example, the ball passes through the specific area (V-gate 65v) during one big hit game, so that the special symbol high probability state is set after the big hit game ends. Even if a plurality of balls pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a single jackpot game, the privilege (providing a high probability state of a special symbol) given to the player is not changed. In addition, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, By setting the waiting time, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing excessively through the specific area (V gate 65V).

  In addition, in the case of using the pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, for example, The number of winnings (V winning condition) that triggers the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state or the ball of the winning number that triggers the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state varies according to the type of the winning device. It is preferable to change the standby time from when the prize 65 is won to when the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state, or to change the condition (V termination condition) for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state.

  Specifically, as a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, a small number of balls is set as a V prize condition so that a plurality of balls easily pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game. Good. This makes it possible to shorten the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the establishment of the V prize condition, so that the long jackpot game can be executed while the V prize condition is satisfied. Can easily pass through the specific area (the V gate 65V). Further, the waiting time may be shortened. As a result, the balls (balls flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) that have won the variable winning device 65 before the ball that has satisfied the V winning condition are also in the specific area (V gate 65V). Can be passed through. Further, the V end condition may be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). With this configuration, when a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to pass a large number of balls to the specific area (the V gate 65V). .

  On the other hand, for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, a plurality of balls are unlikely to pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a single jackpot game, as opposed to the above-described advantageous jackpot game. In addition, a large number of balls can be set as a V winning condition, a long standby time can be set, a V end condition can be a condition that is satisfied when one ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V), May be satisfied after a lapse of time (for example, a lapse of 0.1 second) to the extent that it is difficult to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V).

  With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the ball passes through the specific area (the V gate 65V) during the jackpot game can be made significantly different depending on the type of the jackpot game to be executed. Further, as the ball flow path in the variable winning device 65, a normal flow path and a special flow path that allows the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period than the normal flow path are provided. And good. Specifically, the special flow path is provided with a delay means (for example, a croon) for holding down the flow of the sphere, and the sphere discharged from the special flow path is connected with a rosary rather than the sphere discharged from the normal flow path. It is good to make it easy to discharge.

  In this case, when the timing at which the switching valve 65y is opened and the timing at which the balls are discharged from the special flow path coincide with each other, it is possible to easily pass many balls to the specific area (V gate 65V). it can. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the player can select whether the ball winning in the variable prize device 65 can easily flow down the normal flow path or the special flow path. For example, When the left-handed game is executed, the ball winning the variable prize device 65 is more likely to flow down the normal channel than the special channel, and when the right-handed game is executed, the special channel is more than the normal channel. It is good to constitute so that it may flow down easily. Also, in this case, using the display surface of the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, the left-handed game is a stable game that easily allows one ball to pass to the specific area (V gate 65V), It is difficult for the right-handed game to pass the ball to the specific area (V-gate 65V), but if the timing is right, it is a challenge game in which a large number of balls can be passed to the specific area (V-gate 65V). A guidance display may be executed. In addition, in the past jackpot game, whether the left hit game or the right hit game is executed is stored. Specifically, which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 has a larger number of ball detections during the jackpot game? Storage means for determining the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and storing the result, and the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (specific area It is preferable to execute a history display that displays (the number of passing balls to the V gate 65V) as a past history.

  Thereby, it is possible to provide a pleasure for the player to select a game method to be executed during the big hit game. In the above-described control example, the privilege given when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is set to the high probability state of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is advantageous to the player, for example. A lottery right that is likely to be a lottery result may be given, or a second jackpot game different from the jackpot game may be given. In this case, it is preferable to provide a grant right storage unit capable of storing the right to which the above-mentioned privilege is granted up to a predetermined number. Thereby, even if a plurality of grant rights are acquired in a short period of time, the privilege can be reliably granted on the condition of a predetermined number. In the present control example, the ball that has won in the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the above, the small hitting winning to open the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is set, and the above-described configuration is applied to the ball that has won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hitting game executed when the small hitting is won. May be used. In addition, the above-described configuration may be used for a variable ball entry means (for example, an electric accessory 640) in which a ball can be won in a hit game executed when a normal symbol lottery is won.

  Further, in the present control example, all the balls that have passed through the open switching valve 65y are configured to be able to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the open switching valve is not limited to this. A distributing member may be provided so that a part of the sphere that has passed through 65y can pass through a specific region (V gate 65V). Further, in the present control example, as a variable means that can be changed between a first state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which the ball is difficult to pass, the ball among a plurality of flow paths is used. Although the switching valve 65y for switching the flowing channel is used, the configuration of the variable means is not limited to this. For example, the configuration can be changed between a retention position where the ball is retained for a predetermined period and an open position where the ball is not retained. Variable to facilitate the passage of the sphere to the specific area (V-gate 65V) during the period for effectively determining the passage of the sphere to the specific area (V-gate 65V) by retaining the sphere for a predetermined period. Means may be provided. Further, a plurality of variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65.

<About the control processing contents of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, control processing contents of the main control device in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third control example, a jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) is replaced with a winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) in place of the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168). Prize processing 4 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) in place of the prize processing, and is otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the content of the jackpot control process 4 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 4 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 4 (S1854), in contrast to the above-described jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), the control content executed at the start of the jackpot and the case where the ball wins the variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game. And the control content for updating the value of the V-period timer 203ca during the jackpot game is added. Other contents are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 4 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901: Yes), Next, an opening command is set (S1902), the big hit start flag 203j is turned off, and the big hit flag 203k is turned on (S1903), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that the big hit start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then whether a big hit is currently being played (the big hit flag 203k is set to ON) Is determined (S1904), and when it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1904: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S1904, when it is determined that a big hit game is being played (the big hit flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), it is next determined whether it is a start timing of a new round ( If it is determined that it is the start timing (S1905: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1951), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1952). The processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1905, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), the process of S1907 to S1910 is the same as the big hit control process of the first control example (see S1804 of FIG. 168). The process is executed, and the process ends. Also, in the processing of S1909, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), the winning processing 4 is executed (S1953), thereafter, the abnormal processing is executed (S1912), and then the updating processing during the jackpot is performed. Is executed (S1954), and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the winning processing 4 (S1953) executed in the big hit control processing 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process 4 (S1953). The winning process 4 (S1953) differs from the winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the first control example in the content of the control process during the V round (one round) in which the switching valve 65y can be opened. And the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the winning processing 4 (S1953) is executed, first, the same processing as S2201 to S2204 as the winning processing (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the above-described first control example is executed, and when the processing of S2204 is completed, or If it is determined in the processing of S2202 that the ball has not won the specific winning opening 65a (S2202: No), the V round processing is executed (S2251). The details of the V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but a process for controlling the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y when the first round game (V round game) is executed. Is to be executed.

  After the V round processing (S2251) is completed, the same processing as S2205 to S2208 and the processing of S2211 to S2221, which are the same as the above-described winning processing (see S1911 in FIG. 171), are executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the V round process (S2251) executed in the winning process 4 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round processing (S2251).

  When the V round processing (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current round is in one round (V round) (S2401). If it is determined that the current round is not in one round (S2401: No), This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round is in one round (S2401: Yes), then, the value of the winning number counter 203o is “2”, that is, the variable winning device during the first round game. It is determined whether or not the winning number of the ball to the ball 65 is "2" (S2402). If it is determined that the winning number is "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned on (S2403). A V period command indicating a period during which a prize can be won (a period during which the ball can be guided to the specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the V period timer 203ca. (S2405), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not “2” (S2402: No), the process ends as it is.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the specific round game executed during the jackpot game, when the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of winnings is two). ), The control process is performed to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state so that the ball easily passes through the specific area (the V gate 65v). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being switched to the open state in a state where the variable winning device 65 does not win a ball during the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, the switching valve 65y is configured to be in the V-round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state only in the specific round (first round) during the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The round may be set as a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of the newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined round number is the V round.

  Then, when it is determined that the round is the V round, the state of the switching valve 65y may be switched and controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during the V round. In this case, the condition for turning on the V solenoid 209a (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) may be changed for each of a plurality of V rounds.

  Further, in the case where the V round game is being executed, a notifying means for notifying the game contents until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to be turned on is established may be provided on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, For example, when the V round is started, a V round notification indicating that the current round game is a V round, and the number of winnings required until the condition that the V solenoid 209a is set to ON need to be indicated. It is preferable to execute the notification of the winning number. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to pass the ball through the specific area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content of the update process during the big hit (S1954) will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart schematically illustrating the content of the update process during a big hit (S1954). In the big hit update process (S1954), a process for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca set during the big hit game is executed.

  When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, that is, whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). . If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1961: No), this processing is ended as it is. In the process of S1961, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is larger than 0 (S1961: Yes), the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and the updated V period timer 203ca is updated. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the timing to turn off the solenoid 209a, and thus the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1963, when it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned off (S1964), and a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1964). (S1965), this process ends.

<About the control processing contents of the sound lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 221 and FIG. 222, control processing contents of the audio lamp control device in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, the jackpot-related processing 4 (see S4258 in FIG. 221) is replaced by the effect update processing (see FIG. 174) in place of the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180). The effect is that the effect update process 4 (see S4151 in FIG. 222) is executed instead of the effect update process (see S4111), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the content of the jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) is different from the jackpot-related process (S4218) in the first control example in that the control process executed when a V period command is received from the main controller 110 is added. And the others are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as the above-described jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751), and the V period command has been received. If it is determined (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V timer 223ca, and this processing ends.

  If it is determined that the V period command has not been received in the process of S4751 (S4751: No), then the same processes of S4714 to S1715 as the above described jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, the present process ends.

  Next, the contents of the effect update processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 4. In the effect update process 4, a process of updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during the jackpot game and a process of setting an effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0 are executed. It is configured to be possible.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when the effect update process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401). (S5401: Yes) Then, the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

  If it is determined in step S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), then it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). If the V notification effect is being executed during the currently executed jackpot game, a display command for emphasizing the guidance for the V winning is set (S5405), and the number of updates of the various counters and various timers is executed. This processing ends.

  As described above, in the third control example, the variable prize winning device 65 is arranged at a place where a prize can be won regardless of whether a right-handed game or a left-handed game is performed. Even when the ball is fired, it is configured such that there is no large difference in the period from when the ball wins to when the ball reaches the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed without setting the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed the specific region (V gate 65v) unnecessarily long. . In addition, by shortening the V validity period, it is possible to easily monitor the act of passing a ball to a specific area due to an illegal game.

  In addition, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is executed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 due to a ball clogging or the like occurring during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state where the switching cannot be performed. In the present control example, the number of winning balls is measured in round game units, and when the measurement result is a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is in the open state for a predetermined period in the round game period. However, without being limited to this, the cumulative value of the number of winnings since the jackpot game was started, or the cumulative value of the number of winnings after the predetermined measurement condition was satisfied during the jackpot game, Alternatively, the control for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state may be executed when the total value of the winning numbers in the plurality of jackpot games becomes a predetermined measurement result.

  Further, the maximum length of the period during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state is not limited to the period until the round game ends, and for example, the switching valve 65y extends over the next round game to be executed. 65y may be configured to continue the open state.

  Further, in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), one switching valve 65y is configured to close both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but this is not restrictive. Without switching, two switching valves 65y are provided so as to close each V gate. For example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winnings, only the switching valve on the side covering the first V gate 65V1 is provided. When the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winnings in the open state, only the switching valve that covers the second V gate 65V2 may be configured to be in the open state. Thus, the range of the switching valve that is in the open state can be reduced, so that the useless passage of the ball through the V gate 65V can be suppressed.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 231. The fourth control example is different from the first control example in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes: And the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed. Further, the present embodiment is different from the control executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 in that a part of the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the above-described first control example, after the jackpot game is over, as the advantageous game state advantageous to the player, a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) or a time reduction state (a low probability of a special symbol) State, high probability state of normal symbol). Then, if the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probable change state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and thereafter, until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, the jackpot game. The time saving state is configured to be set until the number of special symbol lotteries after the end reaches 100 times. On the other hand, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the big hit game, the time reduction state is configured to continue until the special symbol is executed 100 times.

  That is, in the first control example described above, no matter which advantageous gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery is performed unless the special jackpot is won. Until the game is executed 100 times, the advantageous game state is configured to continue. Then, when the advantageous game state (probable change state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, a period until the advantageous game state ends, that is, a period until the normal state disadvantageous to the player is set. The period was configured to be notified to the player (see FIG. 128 (a)).

  With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a period until the currently set advantageous game state (probable change state or time saving state) ends. Instead, the player can be made aware of a period until a disadvantageous game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the period until the currently set advantageous gaming state (for example, the probable change state) ends, that is, the period until the probable change state ends and the time saving state ends is compared to the case where the player is notified of the period. Since the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues can be grasped in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the first control example described above, a period in which the more advantageous probable change state continues from among the plurality of advantageous game states (probable change state, time saving state) is a period in which the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. In the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the 50 special symbol lotteries, the player determines whether the currently set game state is the probable change state or the time saving state (See FIG. 128 (b)). Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 that notifies the period until the next disadvantageous game state is set in the state where the advantageous game state is set, the currently set game state is changed from the plurality of advantageous game states. It was possible to provide a pleasure for the player to predict which one was.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, when the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed. A lottery (a so-called fall lottery) for shifting to the low probability state is configured to be executable, and when the fall lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted from the probable change state to the time saving state. That is, in the above-described first control example, when the probable change state is set, the probable change state is configured to be continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. If the lottery is won before the symbol lottery is executed 50 times, the probable change state ends at that point.

  With this configuration, even when it is determined that the probable change state is set by the suggestive effect performed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set, the player can determine how long the probable change state continues. Can be more difficult to understand, so that the contents of the suggested effect to be executed can be more closely watched.

  In the fourth control example, as a suggestion effect performed during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, not only the suggestion of the currently set gaming state but also the probable change state is ended by winning in the drop lottery. It is configured to suggest the timing that was done.

<Electrical Configuration of Fourth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executable. The difference is that a configuration for executing a fall lottery is added.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 of the fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the first control example (see FIG. 139 (a)) in that a part of the content of the jackpot type selection table 202d is changed. And that the fall lottery table 202da is newly added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the content of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described mainly with respect to differences from the first control example. In the fourth control example, the content of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different from the first control example described above. 224 will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 (a). However, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and the value set in the time reduction counter 203h according to the selected jackpot type, that is, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol Is set to be different from each other. Thereby, the length of the period in which the advantageous game state (probable change state or the time saving state) set after the end of the big hit game can be varied. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period in which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, the player can be interested in a notification effect for notifying the player of a period in which the advantageous gaming state continues (the remaining period until the disadvantageous gaming state is set).

  Here, referring to FIG. 224 (a), in the present control example, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery), a special figure 2 big hit is used for selecting a big hit type. The contents of the two tables 202dd will be described. FIG. 224 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hits 2 table 202dd2.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (a), in the special figure 2 big hit 2 table 202dd2, the value is set after the big hit game ends according to the acquired value of the first hit type counter c2 and the game state at the time of winning. A jackpot type in which the time-saving counter 203h has a different value is defined. That is, the length of the period in which the advantageous game state (probable change state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game is varied according to the jackpot type selected at the time of the jackpot winning.

  Specifically, if the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29” as the big hit type, “50” if the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state However, in the case of the probability change state, “100” is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the “big hit C” that can set “50” as the value of the probability change counter 203i is the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. In the range of “30 to 69”, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is “100” when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time reduction state, and “90” when the gaming state is the probable change state. The "big hit D" that can be set as "50" as the value of the probability change counter 203i, and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99", the gaming state at the time of winning is "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h in the normal state or the time saving state, and "100" is set in the case of the probable change state, and "50" can be set as the value of the probable change counter 203i. Jackpot D "is defined.

  The contents of the round game executed in correspondence with each jackpot type, the explanation of the value set in the probability change counter 203i defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are described below. Since it is the same as the special figure 2 big hit table 202d2 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the period in which the time reduction state is continued is made different depending on the jackpot type selected at the time of jackpot winning and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. When the jackpot D is selected as the type, "100" is set in the time-saving counter 203h if the jackpot winning time is in the time saving state, and "90" is set in the probability changing state. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot D is selected, according to the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to make the player know whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is in the probable state or the time saving state.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), In the pachinko machine 10 in which a notification effect capable of notifying only that the advantageous gaming state is set without specifically notifying the gaming state that is being executed is executed, when a jackpot is won during the advantageous gaming state, It is possible for the player to know later whether the jackpot has been won in the state where the gaming state is set. Therefore, a future game can be predicted based on a past game result, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is changed according to the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning, and the value is displayed after the end of the jackpot game. Although the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning is configured to be predicted by the player based on the display content of the remaining period notification mode (a mode of notifying the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when a different value is set for the time saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed after the end of the big hit game is shared (for example, “70” is displayed), which is advantageous. When the number of executions of the special symbol lottery during the gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining period notification mode is changed to the actual time saving counter 2 To correspond to the value of 3h it may be configured to variably display.

  With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the game state set at the time of the previous big hit winning after a predetermined period has elapsed since the big hit game was finished. Therefore, in the advantageous game state, the game aiming to win the jackpot and the game that grasps the game state set in the past can be performed in an overlapping manner, so that the player It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game in the advantageous game state at an early stage.

  Further, in the present control example, the remaining period notification mode (after the advantageous game state ends), which is displayed after the jackpot game is ended, by making the value set in the time saving counter 203h different according to the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning. The game state set at the time of the jackpot win is configured to be predicted by the player according to the display content of the mode of notifying the remaining period until the player wins, but the game state set at the time of the jackpot win is determined by the player. If it is a timing that can be grasped after the fact, it may be configured to be able to suggest at another timing, for example, a game set at the time of the jackpot winning by a jackpot game effect performed during the jackpot game The state may be notified to the player. In this case, an effect of directly informing the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot winning may be executed, or an effect indicating the duration of the advantageous gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game may be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 223, the description will be continued. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which a determination value of a fall lottery counter Cd1 described later is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the fall lottery table 202da. Is set so as to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall down) when the judgment value matches.

  Here, the contents of the falling lottery table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 224 (b). FIG. 224 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), two determination values “0, 1” are defined in the drop lottery table 202da as the determination values for determining a fall in the special symbol probable change state. Here, the falling lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 999”. Of the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter Cd1, there are two judging values determined to be falling, so that the probability of falling (transition to the special symbol low-probability state) in the special symbol stable state. Becomes 1/500.

  It should be noted that only the judgment value (judgment value for the probable change state of the special symbol) for judging whether or not a fall has occurred in the probable change state of the special symbol is defined in the fall lottery table 202da in this control example. Is not specified for the low probability state. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

  In the present control example, the falling lottery table 202da is compared with a periodically updated falling lottery counter Cd1 to determine whether to shift (fall) from the special symbol state to the special symbol low probability state. Is determined. That is, from the probable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol), which is the most advantageous state of the player among the advantageous game states, it is one of the advantageous game states, but is more than the probable state. Can randomize the timing of transition to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the probable change state to last as long as possible.

  In this control example, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is defined by the value of the probability change counter 203i after the end of the jackpot game, and is longer than the maximum duration (50 times). During the period, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to continue. In other words, based on the lottery result of the drop lottery, even if the special symbol high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state at any time (fall), the normal symbol high-probability state is set. Make up. Therefore, the game state shifts from the probable state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) to the time reduction state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol). Therefore, the player does not know the timing of winning the falling lottery based on the frequency of execution of the game per ordinary map.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current gaming state is the probable state or the time saving state during the advantageous gaming state (during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol). In addition, the player can be interested in the contents of the suggested effect that indicates the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning afterwards.

  In the present control example, whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol is determined by lottery (determination), it is determined that the transition to another state is determined by lottery (determination). ). For example, whether to shift from the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. This makes it possible to randomize how long the advantageous gaming state lasts, so that a game can be played in the hope that the advantageous gaming state will continue for each change. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to randomly select whether to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, the above-described fall lottery is configured to be executed each time a special symbol lottery is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Accordingly, the easiness of executing the drop lottery may be made different. For example, the first special symbol lottery is mainly performed when the second special symbol lottery mainly performed during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is performed. You may be comprised so that a fall lottery may be performed more easily than when it is performed. With such a configuration, the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state by the falling lottery executed based on the fact that the first special symbol lottery is performed, and a game advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to suppress the difficulty in performing the operation.

  Further, at the timing of the execution of the drop lottery, a number determining means for determining the number of executions of the drop lottery may be provided so that the number of the roll lottery executed when the execution opportunity of the fall lottery is established is made different. good. In this case, the range of the number of times determined by the number-of-times determining means is preferably set to “0 to 5”, and the average value is preferably designed to be one. With such a configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the fall lottery is executed can be deviated, so that at which timing the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state Can be made more difficult to understand. In this case, a suggestion means capable of indicating the number of times determined by the number-of-times determining means (the number of executions of the drop lottery) is provided, and a period during which the player easily falls (a plurality of times is determined by the number-of-times determining means) is provided to the player. It is preferable to be able to suggest a period during which the vehicle is hard to fall (a period during which the number of times has been determined by the number-of-times determining means). Thereby, it is possible to play a game while predicting the presence or absence of a fall on the basis of the suggestion content of the suggestion means.

  Further, in the present control example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is the timing of executing the falling lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the falling lottery is executed when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, when a ball enters a specific winning opening (for example, a general entrance 63) provided in the game board 13, a falling lottery may be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the fourth control example is different from the first control example in that the fourth control example has a function of a lottery. Also, various effect contents set by the sound lamp control device 113 are different in that an effect based on the result of the drop lottery is configured to be executable. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. FIG.

  First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 2254 (a), the fourth control example is different from the first control example in that the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) is replaced with the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. Are provided, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 226 (a), the contents of the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df will be described. FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the fourth control example, the data table referred to when the probable change state is set after the end of the big hit game is different from the first control example described above, in the probable change state selection table. 223f2 (see FIG. 149) is changed to the probable change state selection 2 table 222df2, and the rest is the same.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 226 (b), the contents defined in the probable change state selection 2 table 222df2 will be described. FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2. Like the above-described probable change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the probable change state selection 2 table 222df2 is used to select an effect mode to be executed as an operation effect when the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game. In the data table referred to in the above, the fact that the lottery result of the drop lottery is added to the factor for selecting the production mode of the operation effect is added to the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), and the lottery of the fall lottery The present embodiment is different in that it is possible to select an effect mode that can suggest information based on a result, and that the selection ratio of each effect mode is partially changed. The other contents are the same, and a detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, similarly to the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the timing at which the player operated the frame button 22 (operation means), the operation method, and the acquired effect counter 223f are displayed. In addition to the value, an effect mode to be executed as an operation effect is defined in accordance with the setting state of the short fall flag 223da set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery. Although the details of the short fall flag 223da will be described later, a flag for indicating that the continuation period of the certainty change state is within a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol lotteries is within 20 times) by winning the fall lottery. Is set to ON when the probability change state ends in a short period of time.

  In the probable change state selection 2 table 222df2, the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF has the same contents as the above-described probable change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149). Therefore, detailed description is omitted. Here, the specific contents of the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to ON will be specifically described.

  When the short fall flag 223da is set to ON, the operation method is “normally pressed” during the first period in which the operation timing is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the number of times of the special figure fluctuation is 1 to 20). When the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 149”, “none” indicating that the operation effect is not executed is displayed, and in the range of “150 to 189”, the variable effect being executed is displayed. In the range of “140 to 189”, an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state is indicated by “reach suggestion” indicating an effect suggesting whether or not to be in the reach state during the third symbol change. In the range of “state suggestion” and “190 to 198”, “state suggestion” indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is defined. When the operation method is “long press”, “transition to background mode” indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is set such that the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”. .

  Further, the background mode is shifted to a state in which the operation timing is during the normal working hours fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 189”. In the “background mode transition” indicating that the game is to be performed, “state suggestion” indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state is defined in the range of “190 to 198”. When the operation method is “long press”, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 198”, and “state suggestion” indicating an effect for indicating the currently set game state. Is stipulated.

  When the operation timing is a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is during the normal working hours fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is “normal pressing”, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 189”, the background mode is set. In the range of “190 to 198”, the “change to background mode” indicating the shift is set to the probable change state after the end of the previous jackpot game. "Early fall notification" indicating an effect for notifying that the vehicle has shifted is specified. When the operation method is “long press”, the acquired value of the effect counter 223f falls within the range of “0 to 198” in the past (when the “chance mode” is set (after the end of the big hit game)). "Past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set gaming state is defined.

  In addition, as with the first control example described above, not only the lottery result for the special symbol change executed this time but also the prize stored in the prize information storage area 223b for various operation effects in the fourth control example. An operation effect based on the information may be executed. For example, using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of winning the drop lottery is determined in advance, and the operation based on the determination result is performed. The effect may be configured to be executable. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out in the execution order of the special symbol lottery, and the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information wins the falling lottery. Determine if it indicates a value. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the falling lottery counter cd1 for winning the falling lottery is stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, and the stored information and the winning information are included. The determination may be performed based on the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter cd1.

  Then, among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the winning information in which the execution order of the special symbol lottery is determined, that is, the second special symbol lottery has priority over the first special symbol lottery. In the present control example to be executed, if the winning information for the second special symbol lottery does not include the winning information to win the falling lottery, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol variation currently being executed and the winning information A process of calculating a change time of a special symbol change corresponding to each of the prize information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the storage area 223b, and a period during which it is not possible to win the falling lottery, that is, a probable change state Is determined (the most advantageous period). Then, a production mode indicating the most advantageous period for notifying the player of the determined most advantageous period may be executed as an operation effect.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player a period during which the player cannot win the falling lottery, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, as a display mode of the most advantageous period suggestion, it is preferable to display at least a part of the total time of the respective variable times obtained as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to know the time at which the most advantageous period lasts at least. Also, by displaying the most advantageous period by time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that the variation pattern of the long variation time is changed. Even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the possibility of winning a jackpot is set higher, the novel gaming ability that makes the player expect the short variation time to be set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is provided. Can be provided.

  As described above, when the operation effect is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation effect is executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means). Or the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) to execute the operation effect at a timing at which a new special symbol change is started in a state where the effect mode of the operation effect is determined. May be configured. In this case, notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been received, and notification means for notifying that the operation is in a standby period until the execution of the operation effect. And should be provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of not performing the operation effect despite operating the frame button 22. In the effect of notifying the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may not be displayed by time as described above, but may be displayed by the number of executions of the special symbol change. If it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information having information indicating that the winning lottery is won, the winning lottery is won and the special symbol is won. Calculate the period until the high-probability state transitions to the low-probability state, and perform an effect that suggests that you will win the falling lottery or an effect that indicates the remaining period until the special symbol high-probability state ends. It may be configured as follows.

<Regarding control processing content in fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 227 to FIG. 229, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth control example, points different from the above-described first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has the first control described above in that it has the function of the drop lottery as described above and that the duration of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the example, and the control contents regarding this difference are different. Specifically, the control content of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), and the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (FIG. 227). (See S258 in FIG. 162) instead of the prefetching process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and the jackpot ending process 5 (see FIG. 229 in FIG. 229) instead of the jackpot ending process (see S1910 in FIG. 170). (See S1960) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the content of the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258). When the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258) is executed, the same process as the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) described above is executed, and thereafter, the value of the probability change counter 203i is changed from 0 to 0. Is determined to be larger (S351). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, it is not in the special symbol high probability state (S351: No), the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158). The same processing as S302 to S307 is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S351, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203i is larger than 0, that is, it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S351: Yes), the value of the obtained falling lottery counter Cd1 is Then, it is compared with the value specified in the falling lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the falling lottery is won (S353).

  If it is determined that the lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), and the special symbol falls to indicate that the high probability state has shifted to the low probability state. The command is set (S355), and the same processing as S302 to S307 as the special symbol big hit determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the special symbol low probability state set. On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the falling lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the above-described special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 of FIG. 158). The same processing of S302 to S307 is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in a normal state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, in the state where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied (the state in which the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see S258 of FIG. 227) is executed), the special symbol is actually executed. Before executing the lottery, a fall lottery is executed. With this configuration, a special symbol lottery according to the lottery result of the fall lottery can be executed immediately, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, the execution timing of the falling lottery and the execution timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from the present control example.For example, after executing the special symbol lottery, the falling lottery may be executed. You may comprise. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special symbol high probability state is set, and the falling lottery is executed immediately after that, so the special symbol lottery executed in the special symbol high probability state By the time the lottery result is stopped and displayed (until the special symbol change is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the falling lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation currently being executed is the last variation in which the special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state, It is preferable to execute a fall notification effect to indicate that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to more closely watch the result of the special symbol change being executed.

  Further, in the present control example, when winning in the drop lottery, a process of shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is executed before the next special symbol lottery is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery is won, the number of times the special symbol high probability state continues is subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the special symbol height is reduced. The remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the probability state may be set to a predetermined number (for example, two). Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the gaming state (probable change state) that is most advantageous to the player will continue by winning the falling lottery. A game with a sense can be performed.

  In the present control example, when the winning is not achieved in the drop lottery, that is, when the high probability state of the special symbol continues, by not performing the effect to suggest or inform the player to that effect, The period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues (the period during which it continues) is configured to be difficult for the player to understand, but is not limited to this. It may be configured to notify the player to the effect. In this case, for example, in the falling lottery table 202da, not only the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 determined to be won (fall) but also the value determined to be out of the specified range (eg, 998, 999) is defined. If determined to be a value, by setting a command indicating a specific deviation, it may be configured to execute an effect for the player to indicate that the result of the drop lottery is a specific deviation, When a command for indicating that the lottery result of the falling lottery is out of order is set, and a command for indicating that the lottery result of the falling lottery is out of order is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to perform an effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order, and the outlying effect may be executed when it is determined that the effect is to be executed in the lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the content of the prefetching process 5 (S653) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the content of the prefetching process 5 (S653). This pre-reading process 5 (S653) is different from the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the above-described first control example in that the special symbol reserved ball storage area (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, The process of reading the various counters stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is different in that the types of the various counters to be read are different, and the other processes are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the pre-reading process 5 (S653) is executed, the first random number counter newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b). C1, the first hit type counter C2, the falling lottery counter Cd1, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (S751), and thereafter, the same S702 as the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the above-described first control example.処理 S705 are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when a special symbol lottery right (special symbol reservation) is newly acquired (special symbol reserved ball storage area). In the pre-reading process 5 (S653) executed when new winning information is stored (S653), the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is also read, and a winning command including the obtained value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is set. , And can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 that wins the falling lottery is included in the special figure holding ball that has been acquired on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating a period until the winning in the falling lottery.

  Next, the content of the jackpot end process 5 (S1960) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end process 5 (S1960). The big hit end processing 5 (S1960) is different from the big hit end processing (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the first control example in that the content of the processing for setting the value of the time reduction counter 203h is different. It is different and the other contents are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot ending process 5 (S1960) is executed, first, the same processes of S2101 and S2102 as the jackpot ending process (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the above-described first control example are executed. The value corresponding to the gaming state and the jackpot type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), and a state command is set based on the value of the probable variable counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h set this time (S2104). The middle flag 203k and the probable change setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and the process ends.

  Here, the processing content of S2153 will be described in detail. In the present control example, the current gaming state, the gaming state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning, and the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won can be temporarily stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. Make up. Then, when the process of S2153 is executed, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning and the jackpot type stored in the gaming state storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is read by the time reduction counter. Set to 203h.

  In the present control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined at the time when the big hit end processing 5 is executed, that is, at the time when all round games in the big hit game are ended. With this configuration, a setting condition that can be satisfied during a round game of a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is satisfied when a specific region (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game) is satisfied. The value set in the time reduction counter 203h can be made different depending on the presence or absence of the data.

  Regardless of the configuration used in the present control example, for example, at the time of starting the jackpot game or at the time of selecting the winning jackpot type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is determined. , A value according to the content of the determination may be set in the jackpot end processing 5 (see S1960). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to hold the information indicating the gaming state at the time of the jackpot during the jackpot game, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231, among the control processing contents executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example, MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example Will be described below. The fourth control example is largely different from the above-described first control example in that a fall lottery is executed. The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 also includes a fall lottery. The difference is that the process related to this is executed.

  Specifically, the difference is that a command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description is omitted.

  First, the content of the command determination process 5 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the content of the command determination process 5 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in this command determination process 5 (S4162), when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received in the command determination process of the first control example (see S4112 of FIG. 175). (S4217: No), then, it is determined whether a fall command has been received from main controller 110 (S4251), and if it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), fall-related processing (S4252) is executed. Is different. If it is determined in the processing of S4251 that a fall command has not been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related processing (S4252) has been executed, the command determination processing of the above-described first control example (FIG. 175) The same processing in S4219 as in S4112) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in the command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related process (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a fall command (FIG. 227) that is set when it is determined in the fall lottery (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227) executed by the main controller 110 that the win in the fall lottery is determined. (See S355) is executed to determine the timing at which the falling command was received (the timing when the high probability state of the special symbol ends).

  When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time reductions (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) set after the end of the big hit game, and every time the special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time savings is set to 100 after the end of the jackpot game, if the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20 times, It is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the special symbol high-probability state has been set, but the state is a state where the player has won the falling lottery early.

  In the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), and the time reduction state is set in the slave state setting area 223g. (S5504), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

  By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the processing of S5503, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), and the probable change state is selected. When selecting an effect mode with reference to the second table 222df2 (FIG. 226 (b)), the effect mode is selected with reference to a data table different from the case where the short fall flag 223da is set to off. . Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to know the result of the drop lottery a posteriori according to the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

<Example of effect in second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 232, in the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the above-described second control example, the variation direction of the sub symbol fz is executed differently from the variation direction of the main symbol sz. The contents of the reverse fluctuation display effect (see FIG. 205 (d)), which is the effect, will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed during the reverse fluctuation display effect.

  As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz including the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the sub symbol fz different from the main symbol sz are configured to be independently display-controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), the sub symbol fz is variably displayed prior to the variable display of the main symbol sz, and thereafter, the sub symbol fs is displayed before the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. The stop line fz is displayed so that a reach line announcement effect for notifying the player of only the stop display position of the main symbol sz can be executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205 (d), the sub-design fz is variably displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the fluctuation display direction of the main design sz in accordance with the start timing of the special design change. The reverse fluctuation display effect is configured to be executable.

  The content of the reverse fluctuation display effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, a fluctuation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is transmitted from main controller 110. Then, when the variation pattern command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining the effect mode of the variation effect performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display setting process (FIG. 182) In S4113)), a process of determining an effect mode (fluctuation pattern) for the main symbol sz is executed. Thereby, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, the effect of the main symbol sz, which is the identification information (identification symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery result, is reliably set. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main symbol sz for indicating the lottery result different from the result of the actually executed special symbol lottery from being stopped and displayed.

  After that, based on the effect of the main symbol sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113, a process for setting the effect of the sub symbol fz is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an effect mode of a reach state has been set as an effect mode for the main symbol sz, and when it is determined that an effect mode of a reach state has been set, an effect mode of the sub-design fz is determined. Is performed. In addition, when the effect mode to be the reach state is not set as the effect mode for the main symbol sz, the variation pattern corresponding to the effect mode set for the main symbol sz is set for the sub symbol fz. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the sub-design fz can be variably displayed in synchronization with the main design sz variably displayed in the effect mode (variation pattern) set based on the special symbol lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are variably displayed as a symbol row arranged in a specific order.

  In the above-described example, when the effect mode for the main symbol sz is in the reach state, the processing for selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an effect mode that sets a specific reach condition (for example, a super reach condition) among the reach conditions is set, a process for selecting an effect mode of the sub-symbol fz may be executed. Alternatively, even in a case where the effect mode set for the main symbol sz is in the non-reach state, the process for selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz may be configured to be executable. In other words, when the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set in the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit, the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is easily performed. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the effect is set (executed) different from the normal effect mode (the effect mode synchronized with the effect mode of the main symbol sz) as the sub-symbol fz, and a big hit to the player is achieved. It is possible to have the expectation of winning.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is not executed, the effect mode (synchronous effect mode) corresponding to the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set for the sub-symbol fz. The variation display of the sub symbol fz is configured to execute a variation effect synchronized with the variation display of the main symbol sz. Thus, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub symbol fz is variably displayed so as to follow the variable display of the main symbol sz. The same variable display as in FIG. 122 (b) is executed. Therefore, for the player, a plurality of main symbols sz and a plurality of sub symbols fz are arranged in a predetermined order (1 (main symbol sz) → triangle mark (secondary symbol) as shown in FIG. It can be assumed that the variable display control is performed as a symbol row that performs symbol fz) → 2 (main symbol sz) →.

  Therefore, when the effect of the main symbol sz and the effect of the sub symbol fz are set differently, an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the process of setting the effect mode for the main symbol sz and the process of setting the effect mode for the sub symbol fz are different, the process of variably displaying the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz in a pattern that is not synchronized. Can be easily executed. That is, as in the first control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the effect mode (variation pattern) for all the third symbols (the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz), for example, When setting an effect mode (variation pattern) in which only the variation display mode of the sub-design fz is changed, only the variation display mode of the sub-design fz is applied to all the third symbols (the main symbol sz and the sub-design fz). It is necessary to set an effect mode (fluctuation pattern) in which is different from the above, but as in the second control example, an effect mode for the main symbol sz and an effect mode for the sub symbol fz can be set independently. Thus, it is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the processing for setting the presentation mode for the third symbol can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 232, the description will be continued. When the process of selecting the effect form of the sub-symbol fz is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. The effect of the sub-design fz is selected. Here, in the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown), the effect of the sub-symbol fz at a predetermined ratio corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the effect mode set for the main symbol sz. Is stipulated. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result is “big hit” and “double reach” is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, “reach line announcement effect” is selected at a rate of 60%. It is defined that “reverse fluctuation display effect” is selected at a rate of 20% and “no sub-symbol effect” is selected at a rate of 20%.

  Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” and “single reach” is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, “reach line announcement effect” is selected at a rate of 20%, It is defined that "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of% and "no sub-symbol effect" is selected at a rate of 60%.

  Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “missing” and “double reach” is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, “reverse fluctuation display effect” is selected at a rate of 40%, and 60% is selected. It is stipulated that "no sub-design effect" is selected at a rate of%, and when "single reach" is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line announcement effect at a rate of 5%" "Is selected," reverse fluctuation display effect "is selected at a rate of 5%, and" no sub-symbol effect "is selected at a rate of 90%.

  When “inverse fluctuation display effect” is selected using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) defined in this way, a display mode for selecting a display mode of the sub-symbol fz is next selected. A selection process is performed. In this display mode selection process, a process for selecting the display mode of the sub-design fz used for the third symbol variation effect (the production mode of the sub-design fz) is executed. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub symbol fz that can be selected here is stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 described with reference to FIG. 203C in the second control example. The display mode is stored.

  In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the audio lamp control device 113, a display sub pattern mode command (display command) for specifying the presentation mode of the sub symbol fz is set, and the set display sub mode command is set. When the display control device 114 receives the symbol mode command (display command), a process of reading the corresponding image data from the character storage area 234a2 is executed.

  In the display mode selection process, for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (c), a display mode SD1 of a “triangle mark” which is a normal display mode of the sub-design fz and a “bubble” indicating a high jackpot expectation degree are simulated. Out of the display mode SD2 that has been performed, and the display mode SD3 that imitates the “numeral 16” indicating that the advantageous jackpot game (16 round game) advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot is won. The display mode is configured to be selected so that the display mode SD2 is easier to select when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the result is other than the big hit (in the case of a miss). In the case where the advantageous jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed this time, the advantageous jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot is not won) Although hit the jackpot winning than if) the bonus game except advantageous jackpot game is executed, and configured to easily select the display mode SD3.

  With this configuration, the player can be interested in both the effect mode set for the sub symbol fz and the display mode set for the sub symbol fz. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 232 shows a state in which “reverse fluctuation display effect” is executed as the effect mode of the sub-design fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating “bubble” is set as the display mode of the sub-design fz. 232, the main symbol sz is variably displayed leftward at the viewpoint of FIG. 232, and the sub symbol fz is variably displayed rightward at the viewpoint of FIG. As described above, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are variably displayed in the opposite directions as the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to provide a surprising variable effect to the player. Further, as an effect using the sub-design fz, the sub-design fz is variably displayed in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main symbol sz. Can be informed to the player in a clearly understandable manner.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all the sub-designs fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 imitating the “bubble” selected by the above-described display mode selection process. However, without being limited to this, only the display mode of any one of the sub-designs fz among the plurality of sub-designs fz may be changed. In this case, it is configured such that only the display mode of the sub-design fz arranged near the main design sz finally stopped and displayed is easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-described display mode selection processing. Is also good. Accordingly, it is possible to easily predict the stop display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub symbol fz.

  In addition, on the display screen shown in FIG. 232, an example in which the size of all sub-designs fz displayed on the display surface is the same is displayed. , Rotation angle, translucent value, etc., may be set differently. In this case, the value specified in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-design fz may be changed.

  In FIG. 232, at the timing when the third symbol change is started, the display mode of the sub-design fz is switched from the normal “triangle” display mode SD1 to the display mode SD2 imitating “bubbles”, and the reverse fluctuation is performed. The example in which the display effect is executed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timing before the third symbol change is started, the third symbol change is stopped and displayed this time. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is switched during the period until the three-symbol change is started, or the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is changed during the period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop. May be.

  In the case where the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is performed during a period from when the last third symbol change is stopped and displayed to when the third symbol change is started, for example, a pre-read process is performed. Is analyzed to see if it is included in the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b. When the special symbol lottery (variation) to be executed next is a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning), the stop is displayed. The sub-design fz may be configured to change the display mode. In this case, the display used for the fluctuating production of the sub-symbol fz to be executed next is set before setting the production mode of the main symbol sz for indicating the lottery result of the next special symbol lottery (fluctuation). The mode will be determined. As described above, by using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the effect mode of the third symbol change for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the third symbol variation effect to be executed.

  Further, when the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is performed during the period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop thereof, the sub-design fz is displayed at the time when the third symbol change is started. The display may be performed in the display mode before the switching, or the sub-design fz may be configured to be displayed after the process of switching the display mode is executed.

<About switching control of switching valve executed during big hit game>
In each control example described above, as described using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), a specific round game (V round game) is started. When it is determined that the switching has occurred, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120 (b) or FIG. 213 (b)) is executed. In other words, the specific round game (V round game) is configured to be executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is the probability change jackpot game, and the specific round (V round (Game) was not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning a V (passing to the specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game. Accordingly, it is necessary to change the content of the control processing for the switching valve 65y, so that there is a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game is increased.

  Therefore, a control process other than the control process for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above-described control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game. The condition for terminating the game may be different from the probability changing jackpot game, so that the ball cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V round game. Further, as in the fourth control example in which the above-described V round processing (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, the switching control of the switching valve 65y is performed based on the winning number of the ball after the V round game is executed. In the normal jackpot game, switching is performed by setting the winning number of balls for switching control of the switching valve 65y to a number larger than the winning number (for example, 10) for ending the V round game. The configuration may be such that the switching control of the valve 65y is not executed.

  Further, even if the control content (switching condition) of the switching valve 65y is set to be the same for the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the execution of the normal jackpot game. , May not be processed effectively. That is, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, irrespective of the type of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set), when a predetermined period has elapsed, the switching valve 65y is opened for the predetermined period. By executing the switching control in such a manner that the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65b in the big hit game is made different according to the type of the big hit game, the V winning probability for each big hit game type may be made different. good.

  In the above-described second control example and the modified example of the second control example, both the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) of the main symbol sz and the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) of the sub symbol fz are set by the audio lamp control device 113 ( However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may be configured to set an effect mode (variation pattern). In this case, the result of the special symbol lottery is shown. It is preferable that only the effect form of the main symbol sz be set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the effect form of the sub symbol fz be set by the display control device 114.

  In the above, the second control example and the modified example of the second control example have been described, but the effect form of the variable effect for dynamically displaying various symbols executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In such a case, any configuration may be used as long as it is configured such that the effect mode is set independently for the type of the dynamically displayed symbol and display control is executed independently. Other configurations may be used.

  For example, a plurality of display image layers for displaying the sub-designs fz are provided, and the sub-designs fz are configured to be able to be changed and displayed in a overlapping manner as in the modification of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. Is also good.

  Further, a plurality of display layers are provided, display priorities are set for the respective layers, and when the display modes displayed on the respective display layers on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 overlap, The display was controlled so that the display mode displayed on the high priority layer is visible to the player, but is not limited thereto, for example, by providing a display layer in which the priority is not set, The display mode displayed on the plurality of display layers on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be overlapped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the case of performing the “inverse fluctuation display effect” with reference to FIG. 232, the sub-design fz imitating “bubble” is displayed in the sub-design fz of the “triangle”. Is displayed (the translucent value and the enlargement ratio of each sub-design are set) so that it can be suggested in advance that the display mode of the sub-design fz is changed from “triangle mark” to “bubble”. You may comprise so that it may display in a display form.

  As described above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state, and the player is set to be more than the normal state. There are two types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to the game: a probable state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol) and a time reduction state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of a normal symbol). It is configured to be able to set the advantageous game state of. Further, the time saving state is set after the probable change state ends.

  Then, when the advantageous game state is set, the period until the normal state is set next, for example, when the probable change state is set, the time saving state set after the end of the probable change state ends. Then, a period until the normal state is set can be notified to the player as a duration of the advantageous gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period up to the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, not the period until the currently set gaming state ends, The player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, in the case where a period in which a plurality of advantageous game states are continuously continued is notified as a duration of one advantageous game state, depending on the content and execution frequency of various effects executed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured such that the player can grasp the currently set detailed game state. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while predicting the current game state while grasping the period until the normal state is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the first control example and the fourth control example described above, among the plurality of advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (probable change state) which is more advantageous to the player is set first, and thereafter, the most advantageous game state is set. Although the normal advantageous game state (time saving state), which is more disadvantageous than the (probable change state), is configured to be set, any configuration may be used as long as a plurality of advantageous game states can be continuously set. As the state, in addition to the normal state, the probable state, and the time saving state, a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is also set, and the latent state is more probable than the probable state. In the pachinko machine 10 configured so as to be more advantageous to the player, a special symbol or a gaming state in which the symbol is normally in a high probability state (probable change state, time saving state, and latent state) is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The value of the probability change counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues is set to be larger than the value of the time reduction counter 203h indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. .

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, for example, it is possible to set “100” as the value of the probability change counter 203i and “50” as the value of the time-saving counter 203h as the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game. After the jackpot game, the probable change state is set as the advantageous game state, and then the latent state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, a period in which a plurality of advantageous game states are continuously continued, that is, a latent state set after the probability change state. May be notified as the duration of one advantageous gaming state. Also, in this case, during the continuation period of the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a transition suggestion effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the currently set gaming state may transition to another gaming state. It is good to configure. Thereby, since it is possible to make the player know only that there is a possibility of shifting to another game state during the advantageous game state, the fun of predicting the content of the game executed during the advantageous game state can be enjoyed. Can be provided. Furthermore, in the case where the currently set gaming state may shift to another gaming state during the continuation period of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after shifting is a gaming state in which the player is more advantageous. An advantageous transition suggestion effect that can indicate whether or not it is possible may be configured to be executable. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion effect indicating a timing at which the gaming state shifts during the advantageous gaming state is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to entertain a game during that period while grasping the period until the normal state is set.

  Further, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, when a jackpot is won during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is configured to end. The most advantageous game state (probable change state) which is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time saving state) which is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous game state (probable change state) is set. Therefore, it is not disadvantageous for the player to win a jackpot during the advantageous game state, but, for example, among a plurality of advantageous game states, a normal advantageous game state (probable change state) which is more advantageous to the player is first. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the most advantageous gaming state (latency state state), which is more advantageous to the player than the ordinary advantageous gaming state (probable change state), then, during the normal advantageous gaming state, Great hit Than to win, without having to hit the jackpot winner, more in the case of the most advantageous gaming state is set, there is a case that can be advantageous to the player.

  Therefore, it is configured to perform a period effect in which the player can identify a period in which it is advantageous for the player to win the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state and a period in which the player is disadvantaged. Good. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery can be closely watched based on the content identified by the period effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as a jackpot type set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during the normal advantageous game state, and a game even if set during the normal advantageous game state If the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player, based on the production contents of the above-described period effect and the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning, whether the jackpot is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to execute an effect indicating whether or not it is not. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game in which the special symbol lottery is aimed at the jackpot winning but also in the timing of the jackpot winning and the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot winning.

  In the above-described first control example, any one of a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous game states (probable change state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a normal state can be set after a big hit game ends. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the advantageous game state to be set after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the first control example described above, an effect mode (super chance mode) for notifying that the probable change state has been set after the end of the jackpot game, according to the effect of the jackpot game effect performed during the jackpot game, An effect mode (chance mode) for notifying that the advantageous game state (probable change state or time saving state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the jackpot game is set is set. . Thereby, in the jackpot game production performed during the jackpot game, a meaningless effect that the chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game despite the fact that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game is notified. Execution can be suppressed.

  For the technology of the first control example configured as described above, for example, an effect mode selecting means that allows the player to arbitrarily select an effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is provided. By allowing any effect mode to be selectable, the effect mode of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, and the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game are changed to the contents selected by the effect mode selection means. You may comprise so that it may correspond and set. Specifically, the effect mode selection means, as the effect mode set after the end of the big hit game, only the "complete notification mode" that notifies the game state actually set, and the fact that the advantageous game state is set The "chance notification mode" to be notified is selectable, and during a period in which the special symbol lottery is not executed in the pachinko machine 10, the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) to operate any one of them. The effect mode is configured to be selectable.

  There is provided storage means for temporarily storing the effect mode selected by the player, and information for identifying the effect mode stored in the storage means is stored in a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g. The display mode is displayed in the display area Ds) so that the currently set effect mode can always be identified by the player. Then, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the effect mode stored in the storage means is read. For example, when "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, as a jackpot game effect, an effect that guides a ball to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game. When the V notification effect is executed and the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game (FIG. 127 ( b) and (d)), if the car does not pass, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 127 (a) and (c)). Then, when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game, a “super chance mode” (see FIG. 131 (a)) indicating that the current game state is the probability change state is set. If after jackpot game end is time reduction state is set, indicating that the current gaming state is the time reduction state "chance mode" (see Fig. 128 (a)) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V winning as a trigger for determining the game state.

  On the other hand, when the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as the jackpot game effect, and after the jackpot game ends, "chance notification mode" is performed regardless of the set game state. Mode "is set. With this configuration, the player can play the game without notifying the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V winning as an opportunity for determining the game state. When the production mode is not selected by the production mode selection unit, the “initial mode” is stored in the storage unit, similarly to the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and is similar to the first control example described above. In addition, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game, a jackpot game effect is executed based on the lottery result, and based on the effect result of the jackpot game effect, after the jackpot game ends. The production mode is set.

  With such a configuration, any effect mode desired by the player can be provided without a sense of incongruity, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, as means for selecting various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, a selection ratio of various effect modes (see FIG. 148) selected for an operation effect executed when the chance mode is selected. May be provided with an effect frequency selecting means that allows the player to arbitrarily select Specifically, the selection ratios of the various effect modes to be selected are greatly deviated or the difference between the selection ratios is reduced depending on whether the probable change state is set or the time saving state is set. It is preferable to provide effect frequency selection means for allowing the player to select the selection ratio so that the player can perform the selection. Even in the case where such a configuration is used, any effect mode desired by the player can be provided without discomfort, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  As described above, in the first control example to the fourth control example, the specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery Has passed, the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the high probability state (probable change state) of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game has been described. In this manner, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player Is configured to be able to provide the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific area in a state where is executed, for example, a special symbol lottery with a different lottery result than the jackpot winning When a small hit is won, a second privilege game (small hit game) different from the privilege game (big hit game) can be executed, and the variable ball-in means (opening operation) performed during the second privilege game is performed. The special prize device 65 may be provided, or another prize device may be separately provided.) In the case where the ball passes through the specific region during the second privilege game, A configuration in which a bonus game (big hit game) can be executed after the end of the second privilege game (small hit game) may be used.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described from main controller 110 to audio ramp controller 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Thereby, the number of times that main control device 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to one time, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to this. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls to be changed in the variable display based on the winning in the special figure entrance 64 can be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of the reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to identify the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data of the display control device 114.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display units may be provided for a display unit for displaying a main symbol displayed to be emphasized to a player and a display unit for displaying a sub symbol. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is in a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and in a gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the left-handed game aiming at the area is configured to be executed, the aiming area of the game board 13 which is different according to the game state may be configured to be different. A left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set and whether the big hit game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state and during a jackpot game, and a left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With this configuration, the player can easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use, it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching the lever A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. For example, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect form of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player on the frame button 22 by, for example, displaying the frame button 22. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or input of an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) may be performed, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of effect operation means can be centrally managed. The effect mode for the player's operation on the means can be set smoothly.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, a switch button group 22z (a switch button 22za, a first selection button 22zb, a second selection button 22zc) for selecting the termination condition of the game per accessory is provided, and the movable valve 750 Part of or a part of operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c The whole may be configured to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, a combination of probabilities relating to the jackpot lottery (commonly referred to as setting) may be provided in a plurality of stages, and may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that the setting can be changed at the game store. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  As a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of settings, a combination of the jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the probable change state) may be set in any of a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). Can be set as a typical example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of the jackpot probability, for example, implemented as a pachinko machine that can change the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot according to the setting You may. That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be changed according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined. By changing the ratio according to the setting, the degree of advantage for each setting may be changed. In addition, for example, the rate at which a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the big hit is determined according to the setting, or a large number of time savings (for example, 0 times) is given. May be changed according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or easily shifts to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) ) May be changed according to the setting at which the jackpot determined to be (or easily shifted) is determined. In addition, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which the ratio determined only by a specific setting is significantly higher (almost not determined by other settings) may be provided. Specifically, for example, the setting can be set in six steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. In the setting 6, when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, the jackpot of the six rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 becomes extremely high, so that the player pays attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot and plays the game. be able to. Alternatively, or additionally, for example, in setting 6, a configuration may be such that the ratio of the jackpot type to which 66 time savings are given after the end of the jackpot is higher than other settings. With this configuration, a game can be played while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the inside of the jackpot) of the jackpot operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types. The jackpot type may be provided so as to be easily determined by a specific setting (the determination ratio is increased). In addition, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probabilities according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the positive change state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a big hit probability high. This configuration is particularly of a type in which the number of special symbol lotteries increases, and the number of balls held tends to increase (the number of award balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired), particularly in the probable change state. It is effective for gaming machines. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next big win is won, and in a probable change state, it is applied to a gaming machine of a type that has a small probability with a high probability, thereby achieving an advantage of high setting. Sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lotteries until the next big hit is likely to increase, so that the chances of winning a small hit and obtaining a prize ball also increase. Therefore, in the probability change state, it becomes easier for the player to acquire more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a plurality of levels of settings, the variation pattern selection table 202b (FIG. 142) referred to when the variation pattern is selected by the main controller 110 based on the set values. Of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when the variation pattern (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol is selected by the voice lamp control device 113, or executed as a variation effect. It is preferable that the types of the various selection tables referred to when selecting the detailed presentation mode to be performed are made different. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with the content of the fluctuating effect to be executed, so that the fluctuating effect that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

  In the case where the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect described above with reference to FIG. 148 or FIG. 226 is changed based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10. Stipulates, as an effect mode of the operation effect, an effect mode of “setting suggestion” for indicating the set value set so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each set value. In addition, the effect contents of the operation effect executed in the effect mode of “setting suggestion” are configured to be different according to each set value, and the selection ratio of other effect modes is varied according to the set value. It is good to configure as follows. With this configuration, when an operation effect of “setting suggestion” that directly suggests a set value is executed, the effect content is displayed, and when other operation effects are executed, each effect mode is displayed. It is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 by grasping the selection ratio in a composite manner, so that the player is interested in various operation effects performed. be able to.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different depending on the set game state, for example, from the setting “1” disadvantageous to the player In the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in six steps up to the setting “6” that is advantageous to the player, the settings “1” to “3” are set, and the first game that is advantageous to the player The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (probable change state) is set and the settings “4” to “6” are set, and the second ratio is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state. By setting the same selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the two game states (time saving state) are set, the player can play the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value disadvantageous to the player is set. Set value that is advantageous to the player Than is set can it is convincing.

  In addition, as in the first control example described above, the same effect mode is used when the first game state (probable change state) is set and when the second game state (time saving state) is set. In the case where a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set game state by using the “chance mode” is set, the above-described effect can be more remarkable. . Further, as in the above-described first control example, the pachinko machine 10 in which the second gaming state is set after the first gaming state is completed, and whether or not the first gaming state is actually set is determined. By making it difficult, the effect can be more remarkably exhibited.

  In this way, based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (the jackpot lottery result, the set game state, and the selected variation pattern (variation time)), the effect mode of the production mode is determined. By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 by the player.

  In addition, the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where a sphere passing through the route construction means becomes a blindfold for the passed means>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuration means, when viewed in a predetermined direction, Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the route forming means and at least partially overlapping the first game ball. Gaming machine A1.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a large winning part 300 that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the ball detecting hole 431 is not always easily recognized by the decorative plate 302, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detecting hole 431 to continue or stop the launch of the game ball. It was not possible to cope with the game mode of performing, and the player might feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in a portion related to the launch operation of the game ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for lowering the visibility of the first gaming ball in the route forming means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible. Is done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the game ball by confirming the downward flow of the first game ball. Improvements can be made in relevant areas.

  It should be noted that the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decoration member configured to be displaceable between a flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passed-through means, so that the displaceable means is provided. As compared with the case where other decorative members are prepared, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2, the path forming means includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width in which a second gaming ball can be arranged in front of the first gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the front-rear path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball. Can cover at least a part of the first game ball.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the route forming means at a firing interval set in a firing device, the front-rear direction route is the second game ball. A gaming machine A4, wherein a gaming ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the route forming means with the firing interval kept, it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball by the second gaming ball. Can be achieved. As a result, a situation that is difficult to recognize can be generated from normal times.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear path is such that the front-side component is located closer to the center of the game area than the rear-side component.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed-through means. Is easily hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfold can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the front-side component is disposed on a line of sight of a player who looks at the passed-through means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a similar blindfold effect is produced irrespective of the length of the interval between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

  That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. However, the first game ball and the second game ball appear on the line of sight. When the game balls are arranged, the effect of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path forming unit includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width that allows a second game ball to be disposed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction thereof. A gaming machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow in a left-right direction on an upstream side of the path.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the line of sight of the player can be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left-right direction path. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only in the case where the passing-through means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also in the case of a line of sight with a horizontal shift. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner of entering the passed-through means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (it is possible to produce a blindfold effect in all directions).

  This effect is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with the walls. In other words, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by the wall, the wall is blindfolded on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the field of view to the passing-through means cannot pass.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path forming means includes a first flow path in which a game ball passes through the passed means in a first mode, and a second flow path in which a game ball passes in a second mode. And the first game ball can be visually recognized by being covered at least in part by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which of the flow paths of the path constituting means flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow-down state of the game ball flowing down the route forming means regardless of the presence or absence of the passed means. In addition, it is possible to improve the attention of the game ball flowing down the route forming means.

  Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, the flow direction of the ball may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means for dividing a flowing direction of a game ball on an upstream side of the passed means is provided, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching a flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine A9, wherein the path forming means is a game ball whose flow-down path is divided by the branching means, and wherein the game ball reaching the switching means flows down the same path in a predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, since the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same path in the predetermined section, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the downflow of the game ball as compared with the case where the downflow mode corresponds to the downflow path. Thereby, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a projecting portion projecting from a flowing game ball, and the projecting portion acts on a branch of the game ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the projecting portion can act on the branch of the game ball. Can be improved in durability.

  In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction, and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the projecting amount of the second projecting portion is different from the projecting amount of the second projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the effect of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the effect of the second projecting portion on the game ball in accordance with the flow-down mode of the game ball. Can be different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, an action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball can be generated.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route construction means appeals to the passing means>
A route configuration unit configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed unit configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuration unit to pass therethrough, wherein the route configuration unit is more than the passed unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passed means, and is configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a large winning prize part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the difference in the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which a game ball flows down from a position deviating from the decorative plate 302 or a game ball flows down as it is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game balls with good visibility that fall off the decorative board 302 are rather configured to flow off the ball detection holes 431 and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the flowing game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the profit obtained by the player, and the player pays attention to the game ball. The player was likely to be dissatisfied because things were easily wasted. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the manner in which the game balls flow down after the attention has been made is significant.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the game balls flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side are configured to be able to be guided to the passed means, the degree of improvement in the attention to the game balls, It can be associated with a game ball passing through the passed means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion passes through the passed-through means, and thus it is possible to improve the game ball after the attention has been paid.

  In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and to reduce the possibility that the player misses that the game ball is going to the passed means. be able to.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  In addition, the aspect on the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be a display device side that is easy to catch the eyes of the player, a winning port side or a starting port side, a front side (front side) that is easy for the player to see, or a specific entrance port. The stage where the line-of-sight is likely to converge as a place where the probability of entering the ball becomes remarkably high (mainly at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball temporarily stays) or directly connected to the jackpot acquisition The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as an operation target, the staging operation button side, the range where the game ball escaping from the entrance port flows down (the range where the player frustratedly follows the ball with eyes) and Alternatively, the light side may be switched between light and dark on the bright side or on the other side. Alternatively, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the route configuration unit includes a second predetermined unit that makes the game ball entering the route configuration unit less noticeable than when the ball is entered, and the predetermined unit is more than the second predetermined unit. A gaming machine B2 which is arranged on a prominent side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, before the game ball entering the route forming means flows down the predetermined portion, the attention power is reduced in the second predetermined portion, so that the predetermined portion flows down. The attention power of the game ball at the time of playing can be emphasized.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion includes a section in which a flowing speed of a game ball is different.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of collecting the player's line of sight can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flowing speed of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second falling speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is configured to be higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the section in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flowing speed of the gaming ball is different. Since it can be configured, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at any predetermined position, the player's line of sight can be easily collected at a predetermined position, and the eyes can be turned away from other parts .

  The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, when displacing on a straight line arranged on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction in front view, and when displacing on a straight line having a front-rear component, or when displacing on a straight line, It may be different from the case of displacing in a curved or meandering manner, or may be other differences.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine may further include an introduction unit configured to be capable of introducing a game ball into the path configuration unit, and the predetermined unit may be disposed outside the introduction unit in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine B6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introduction means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the securing of the visibility of the introduction unit and the improvement of the attention of the game ball that is likely to pass through the passed unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, an avoiding means is provided which is configured so that a game ball on the front side of the route forming means flows down to avoid the line of sight toward the passed means or the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the game sphere is configured to be able to flow on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game sphere is directed toward the passed means. Since avoidance means is provided for avoiding the problem, it is possible to ensure both the securing of the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the passed means.

  In addition, the flow-down mode of the game ball affected by the avoiding means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the passed-through means, may flow down a straight line connecting the passed-through means and the position of the eyes of the player, or may play a game ball heading to the passed-through means. With reference to the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or may flow down the straight line connecting the last position and the eye position of the player. Good and others.

  In the gaming machine B7, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, and the accepting state changing unit includes: A game machine B8 configured to be able to guide a game ball, which has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state, to the route forming means side in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state. .

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B7, it is also possible to prevent a gaming ball flowing down so as to be bridged after arriving at the receiving state changing means to block the line of sight toward the passed means. Can be.

  In the gaming machine B7 or B8, the game machine B7 or B8 is provided above the passed means in a front view, and includes a partitioning means for partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured so that a game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the situation in which the game ball flows down the front position of the passed-through means can be avoided by the partitioning means. It can be easily secured.

  It should be noted that the mode of the partition means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that forms the lower surface of a game ball, or a ball-opening-portion-forming unit that allows a game ball to enter. The partitioning means may be a means for fixing the shape (appearance) or a means for changing the shape (appearance).

  In the gaming machine B9, the route forming means includes receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing a state between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down can be received and a non-receiving state in which the ball cannot be received. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide a game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball being received by the receiving state changing means is received by the partitioning means by being pushed into the receiving state changing means. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the game ball that has slid in the middle of being accepted is deviated from the acceptance state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

  For example, a special winning device having an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the horizontal direction is assumed as the receiving state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the dividing means. . A game ball that has reached the special winning opening just before the closing of the opening / closing plate is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening covered with the opening / closing plate, and the direction of forming the edge ( (Slides in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate).

  Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the range of formation of the pivotal tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is arranged above the passed means, it slides. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passed means after dropping to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

  If it is not possible to avoid the falling of the game ball to the front side after skidding, it will be necessary to dispose the open / close plate so as to avoid the position of the passed means in front view, which reduces the design freedom of the open / close plate become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball after the skidding from falling to the front side of the opening and closing plate, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the opening and closing plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball flowing down the route forming means and a game ball flowing down the front side of the route forming means flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball which may flow down the route forming means and pass through the passed means, and flows down the front side of the route forming means. By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passed means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route forming means.

  In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a case where the game ball easily enters the route forming unit and a case where the game ball does not easily enter from the game ball flowing down near the route forming unit.

  A gaming machine B12, comprising: any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, provided with a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to save the route length to the V entrance with space saving>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed-through means. State switching means configured to be switchable between a first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means includes a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A gaming machine C1 configured to allow a game ball to flow down to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, an allocating unit 75 configured to be movable left and right in a flow path of the gaming ball entering the second big winning opening 12 is provided. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the game machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is essential to operate the distribution unit 75 for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and biting of the ball by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the player felt that the behavior of the division 75 was distrustful and could not continue the game with peace of mind.

  As an example of a means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big winning opening 12 to the distribution unit 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 from a position directly below the second special winning opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the game area (near the first special winning opening 10), the position from the second special winning opening 12 is changed. A long flow path length to the distribution unit 75 can be ensured. Thus, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when this means is executed, it is necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second special winning opening 12 to the first special winning opening 10, and in this range, the design of the game area can be freely performed. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

  In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route forming unit includes the predetermined delay unit, even if the vertical length of the route forming unit in a front view is reduced to save space, the route forming unit enters the route forming unit. It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the ball that has been hit passes through the passed means.

  Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not a game ball can enter the passed-through means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route forming means, so that the route An erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening / closing device for switching whether or not to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating in a hurry. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path through which a game ball flows down in a flow-down path having a longitudinal component, may be used.

  In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path toward the rear side, and the game balls flow down. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the acceleration of the game machine is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a long period of time in which a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path that flows while maintaining the front-rear position. The gaming machine C3, wherein the acceleration of the flowing game balls is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down path is such that a game ball is positioned in front of the passed means in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 configured to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the near position, the visibility near the passed means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range near the passed means.

  A gaming machine C5, wherein a plurality of the near positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C5, at least a part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the near side by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions. Since the passed-through means is disposed on the back side of the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the passed-through means can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the passed-through means can be reduced. .

  In this case, when the pitch of the game balls entering the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game balls are always arranged at any of the near positions, so that the passed means cannot be visually recognized. It becomes possible.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for disposing the route forming means having the same length can be shortened.

  Further, compared with the case where the folded path is formed, it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall, so that the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared with the folded path that is folded at 180 degrees, The possibility of clogging of the ball or the like can be reduced.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the path forming unit includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since the left and right widths of the route forming means can be suppressed, the pair of route forming means can be symmetrically configured with the suppressed left and right widths. Can be.

  The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the passed means is disposed obliquely downward and rearward with respect to a ball receiving portion of the route forming means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passed-through means and the ball receiving portion of the route forming means in the field of view of the player visually recognized from the front side. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the route forming unit is configured to be a first receiving unit configured to receive a game ball, and to be a unit different from the first receiving unit and configured to receive a game ball. And a second receiving means to be performed, wherein a profit obtained by the player is changed depending on a mode of receiving the game ball by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to always receive game balls, and further, the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of receiving the game ball by the second receiving means, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

  It should be noted that the mode of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which game balls are received only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are received only by the second receiving means, or a mode in which a predetermined number of game balls are received by the first receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number is accepted by the means may be adopted. Further, the mode of entering the ball with respect to each receiving means may be different, or the mode of entering the ball may be different.

  In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player is limited to one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means and the game ball is received, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means are changed. A game machine C10, which is generated depending on whether or not a game ball is accepted by both.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the gaming ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player. .

  It should be noted that the profit obtained by the player is not limited at all. For example, it may be easy to recognize the flowing game balls, or profits related to the game obtained by the flowing game balls (payout of prize balls, acquisition of jackpots, that the game state after the end of the jackpot becomes a stable state, The game state may be a normal state (falling down).

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the route forming unit is configured such that the portion from the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit to the passed unit is symmetrical.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9 or C10, the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage can be reduced even if the game ball is fired mainly on the left or right.

  In any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, The gaming machine C12, wherein the receiving mode changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of the status change.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state of the state change. The effect of the skill level on the profits obtained for the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C12, the mode of the state change of the receiving state changing means is constituted by a plurality of types.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C12, even when the game ball is fired in a fixed firing mode, the mode of receiving the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the state of the state change of the receiving state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening / closing member that moves parallel to the downward flow of the ball>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the path forming means, State switching means configured to be able to change state between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, and the direction of displacement generated in the state change is caused by a downflow of the game ball. A gaming machine XA1 characterized by being arranged along a direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the flowing direction of the gaming ball and the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing plate of the special winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the opening / closing operation is completed without involving the opening / closing of the rolling of the gaming ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downflow direction of the game ball, so that the state in which the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By generating the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to change the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

  For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the right while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball moves in the forward direction of rolling rotation with respect to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

  Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the rolling rotation of the game ball is performed. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

  Further, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in a direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Because of this, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the manner in which the game balls flow down.

  Due to these effects on the flow-down state of the game ball, the flow-down state of the ball riding on the state switching means at the time of the opening / closing operation of the state switching means can be changed in various ways, so that the player visually recognizing the game ball gets bored. Without having to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the positional relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship may be such that the ball rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or the ball may collide against the game ball in the downflow direction.

  In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, and the game ball may be configured to be able to bounce off, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. May be configured to be regulated with low resistance.

  In the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine XA1, rotation of the gaming ball can be caused by a state change of the state switching means.

  The gaming machine XA3 of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, wherein the state switching unit includes a changing unit that changes a direction of a load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

  According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the load given to the game ball during displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load given to the state switching means can be reduced. .

<Points for the opening / closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the passed means, State switching means configured to be changeable between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when protruding forward, but does not contact the game ball when retracted to the rear side and freely falls without contacting the game ball. No guidance is given. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (a frame portion or the like) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and for guiding the flow of the game ball. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of components (members).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions between the introduced state and the non-introduced state, a special purpose for guiding the flow path of the game ball is provided. Since members can be eliminated, the number of necessary components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the flowing direction of the game ball in a limited space.

  Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to a game ball flowing down in the front-back direction. In this case, in front view, while the game ball is slightly displaced before being guided by the state switching unit, the difference (difference) in the direction after the guidance by the state switching unit is started is maximized. Can be achieved.

  The arrangement of the guide section that causes the operation of the state switching means to be guided is not limited at all. For example, a guide portion may be provided on a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be provided on a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball may be provided on the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. You may comprise so that it can be switched to the state which is close or easy to contact.

  When the guide portion is provided on the movable member, the design is not limited to the guide after the completion of the state switching between the introductory state and the non-introduced state, but also takes into account the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. Is preferred.

  For example, when the state switching unit includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposing the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface (plane, curved surface, or the like) inclined with respect to the flowing direction is provided, rather than providing a planar wall perpendicular to the flowing direction. Providing a wall having a shape can make it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. .

  According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state switching unit malfunctions due to the load applied from the guided gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the route configuration unit includes a pair of left and right routes, and the state switching unit includes a pair of guide units that can receive game balls from the pair of left and right routes, respectively. The gaming machine XB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are symmetrical with each other.

  According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path along which the gaming ball flows can be complicated. In the pair of guides, the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically to each other, so that the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load applied to the pair of guides from the game ball is symmetrical in the left and right. be able to.

  Accordingly, for example, when a game ball is entered into a pair of left and right paths by a substantially equal number, the arrangement of the state switching means can be easily made uniform by the load received by the guide unit from the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XB3, the gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that the state switching means includes an overhang formed so as to overhang in a direction intersecting the third direction.

  According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with another member can be reduced by the overhang, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, a contact means configured to be able to contact in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means is provided. A gaming machine XB5 characterized in that the displacement can be corrected.

  According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or right direction. It can be returned orderly by the action of the means.

<Separation, inversion, union, and rotation are a series of operations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a surface to be viewed is changed, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a displacement in a predetermined mode, the first displacement member A gaming machine D1 wherein a member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a rotation base 214 provided at a distal end portion of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (for example, see JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means because the surface seen by the player is the same.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the surface on which the displacement means is visually perceived can be changed in accordance with the displacement, so that attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

  In addition, since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed, so that attention to the displacement means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement that approaches and separates from a gathering portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are gathered and arranged, and the first displacement member and the first displacement member. A gaming machine D2 comprising: at least a second displacement member and a second displacement that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily generated dynamically. That is, as the displacement based on the gathering portion, only the first displacement can easily reduce the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the terminal end where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest. Although the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member seem to be stopped and there is a possibility that the production effect may be reduced, by mixing the second displacement, it is possible to generate a displacement in the rotation direction even at the end portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which a visible surface of the displacement means is reversed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. Can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and a load related to the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 that operates in a direction that limits the displacement of a member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixation acts in the direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to the fixation. In consideration of the above, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

  For example, in the case of transmitting a driving force to a gear, when a deformation is caused mechanically without considering deformation of a shape, when a load related to fixing is added, a change in elasticity of a member due to the load becomes apparent. This can cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

  Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to be different depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

  In this case, the effect of the fixation differs according to the surface to be visually recognized, so that the degree of fixation on the side to be visually recognized by the player can be increased or decreased.

  Thus, for example, with respect to the inverted surface of the same displacement means, one surface is firmly united and easily visible together, and the other surface is loosely united and easily visible in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be.

  Also, for example, by configuring the degree of suction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different for each fixing position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. it can.

  It should be noted that the mode in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, an adhesive tape may be used, or an attractive force between a magnet and a metal part may be used. Further, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so that, for example, a fixing screw, a screw, or the like is used as the metal part to be attracted to the magnet.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, is displaced in the forward direction in the first displacement mode, and in the reverse direction, the first displacement is performed. The gaming machine D5 is configured to be displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is provided before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is configured as a displacement mode, the amount of displacement required for the displacement unit when the displacement unit is retracted can be reduced. Thereby, the attention power to the displacement means at the time of evacuation can be reduced, so that the attention power of the displacement means displaced at the production position can be relatively improved.

  In the conventional machine, since the rotation mode is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after extending to the effecting position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) and effecting, before retreating to the retreat position (the position outside the liquid crystal display area). It was necessary to rotate again several times in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the problem that the line of sight easily gathers on the member retracted from the effect position.

  Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, the displacement may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may be over a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

  The gaming machine D6, wherein the displacing means includes releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operation resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D5, a change in the displacement mode of the displacement means can be caused by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the displacement unit is provided, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The gaming machine D7, wherein the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting unit depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is on one side or the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

  For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light integrally. Can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the game machine further includes a detection unit that detects an arrangement of the displacement unit, and the detection unit is configured to be capable of detecting whether or not the displacement of the displacement unit is in an allowable state. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means can be allowed can be detected by the detection means, so that the displacement means collides with the surrounding structure during the displacement. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, to a certain extent, the displacement mode including the enlargement / reduction after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling so as to be displaced, it is possible to suppress an increase in attentional power to the displacement means when displacing from the production position to the retreat position in comparison with a case where displacement is performed in a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of displacement. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detection unit for detecting a state of the displacement unit is provided, and the detection unit is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement unit. Gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detectors provided can be reduced. In addition, various modes are illustrated as the kind of numerical value about the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value for the arrangement and posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to a change in the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the arrangement of the detecting means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one surface facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first and second displacement members are configured so as to be able to perform a reversing operation. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member Is a game machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. The player's expectation that the game will occur can be kept high.

<Points that change the easy-to-view surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of surfaces to be viewed>
Displacement means comprising a first viewable surface and a second viewable surface configured to be viewable, the displacement means depending on the arrangement, a first state in which the first viewable surface is easily viewable, A gaming machine E1 configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second viewable surface is easily visible.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a reversing operation unit 71 configured to be reversible and configured to be able to change the appearance visually recognized by a player by changing a surface to be viewed (for example, And JP-A-2006-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation section 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, so that the line of sight of the player cannot be changed due to a change in the surface to be viewed. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visually recognizable surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visually recognizable surface is easily visible according to the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine E1 is provided with an opening for opening the displacing means so as to be visible, and the displacing means is configured such that the opening side is easily visible.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is disposed closer to the back side when the displacing means is disposed on the edge side of the opening than when it is disposed on the center side of the opening. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is disposed at the center side of the opening, the displacing means can be largely visually recognized on the near side, while the displacing means is located on the edge of the opening. When placed, the movement of the line of sight when viewing the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his or her eyes.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement unit includes a plurality of sets of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and one set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize another set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface when the surface is visible.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface for each set, so that the displacement means is provided. To allow a player who visually recognizes a different character or figure to be visually recognized, and that it is difficult to visually recognize a first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set not intended to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

  For example, in the first set, a character or a graphic indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and a low expectation is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and the second set includes the lottery result. Is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface when a character or a graphic indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is displayed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained, so that the player who has taken his eyes off the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue to display the display of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, the aspect which is hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.) on the side different from the player side, or may be configured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

  In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are hardly recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first viewable surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface to be viewed (before confirmation). In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the prediction of the set of the second visually recognizable surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the displacement means.

  Note that there is no limitation on the mode in which the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface are hardly recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to be recognized, or a part of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and another part may be configured to be connectable and separable. The recognition may be made difficult by operating the part and the other parts in a separated state, or a part that is made relatively dark by setting the brightness of the light emitting means may be made difficult to be recognized.

  In this case, the state of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and the other portion is visually recognized, and the other side faces the back side so as not to be visually recognized. Such a configuration may be employed, or a configuration may be employed in which a part thereof and the other part can be visually recognized at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted and visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine E5, an opening is provided to open the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the switching operation is performed in a state where the displacement means is arranged at the center side of the opening. Gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E5, the switching operation can be easily made visible to the player, and the attention to the switching operation can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first viewable surface and the other part faces a front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visually recognizable surface can be visually recognized during the operation, and the entire surface cannot be visually recognized. Possible surfaces can be made harder to recognize.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the game machine further includes a second displacement unit configured to be able to shield at least a part of a line of sight to the second viewable surface, and the displacement unit includes the second displacement unit together with the second displacement unit. (1) A gaming machine E8 configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing a viewable surface.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, at least a part of the second viewable surface is hardly visually recognized by the second displacement means, so that the effect position of the displacement means can be determined. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement unit is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface according to the displacement. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface viewed in the predetermined direction changes between the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change a surface that is easily visible without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the user.

  The gaming machine E10, wherein the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. it can.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means is provided so as to be able to be disposed close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is disposed. Is a gaming machine E11 characterized by being located away from said auxiliary means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the auxiliary means is disposed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means.

  The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

  In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means can be visually recognized integrally or separately and visually recognized. Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the disposition means at the same point differs in the section>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, disposition means having a first portion disposed on the displacement means, and support means for supporting a second portion of the disposition means, the support means being provided. Is a game machine F1 characterized in that the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a tiltable and displaceable base arm 220, a pivoting member 211 rotatably attached to a tip end side of the base arm 220, and the pivoting member 211 are rotated. And a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating role 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2006-116782). Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the rotating role 211 is likely to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating role 211 is rotated during the tilting displacement of the base arm 220, a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since the rotational displacement of the rotating role 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of the displacement is low.

  That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the arranging means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion can be controlled by the support means, the disposing means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacing means while the disposing means is stably supported. Can be. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (the displaceable portion) can be increased.

  In addition, the aspect of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means in a mode in which the displacement is limited, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to the electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be capable of displacing a first section and a second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. And a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2, wherein a direction is different from a direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arranging means can be made different. Since it is configured to allow the change in the displacement direction of the portion, even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be made smooth.

  The gaming machine F3, wherein in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means includes a limiter for limiting displacement of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When the portion is displaced from the larger displacement side to the smaller displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

  The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or the second portion may be pushed.

  Note that the mode of the restriction unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be set in which the displacement resistance of the second portion is increased or decreased, or a mode in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is disposed closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the relative displacement amount is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arranging means based on the displacement means in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section where the relative displacement amount of the arranging means with respect to the displacing means is small at the position of the displacement means. Since it is possible, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the disposing means can be easily visually recognized integrally. As a result, the displacement means and the disposing means can be visually visually recognized integrally. Easy positions can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the gaming machine F5 is configured to be capable of changing (the ratio of) the displacement speed of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arranging means on the support means side Can be changed, so that an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the arranging means is made variable by simple driving control (constant speed driving) of the driving means can be configured.

  The gaming machine F6 according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the support means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and to easily stop the arrangement means at the end of displacement.

  Note that there is no limitation on the technique for preventing the second portion from jumping back. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the displacement end (for example, the displacement amount of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. A method may be used in which the displacement of the second portion is regulated by a geometrical measure such as raising a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

  Further, the invention is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the end of displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by the urging force of a coil spring or the like. good.

  In the gaming machine F6, the support unit may include a displacement trajectory of a displacement of the second portion accompanying a displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at a displacement end. A gaming machine F7, wherein the displacement trajectory of the displacement intersects.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F6, the support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion causes the third portion when the first portion stops. The return displacement (bound) of the portion 2 can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the game machine further includes a supported unit that is displaceably supported by the arrangement unit, and the supported unit has a relative displacement amount of the arrangement unit with respect to the displacement unit. A gaming machine F8 configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated effect can be executed by the supported means that is displaced jointly with the arranging means.

  The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the disposition means may be displaced so as to run in parallel with the disposition means on a predetermined plane on which the disposition means is displaced, or the disposition means of the disposition means may be displaced from the predetermined plane on which the disposition means is displaced (for example, , A slide displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis) may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means with respect to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be performed while maintaining the posture.

  In the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion is provided with a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting a displacement trajectory of the first portion. Gaming machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the relative displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion changes while the first portion is being displaced (for example, after the increase). Since the position of the second portion is maintained, the displacement amount of the supported means can be increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

  In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported device can be made equivalent to the displacement device with the arrangement device interposed therebetween. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the supported means is being displaced by the unique driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arranging means includes a posture changing means for changing a posture so as to switch a surface facing a player side between a first surface and a second surface according to its own displacement, The attitude changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward a player when the second portion is disposed at a displacement end. Machine F11.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion is at the displacement end. Since the player can grasp the arrival, the end of the effect operation by the displacement means can be easily understood.

  In one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, the electric wiring is configured to be inserted through the second part to the arranging means, and the electric wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part. Arranging means, wherein the arranging means has an opening through which the electric wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electric wiring with a peripheral portion formed around the electric wiring. A gaming machine F12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with the surrounding portion.

  The arranging unit may be configured as a unit for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is formed of a plurality of members, or may be configured when a separate member is provided in the second portion. It may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Characteristic AA group>
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display unit. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AA1, characterized in that and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the effect mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed depending on the number of the stored second information, so that it can be executed thereafter. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information, and even if the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, continue the subsequent game. By making the player interested, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by executing the above-mentioned effect mode when the target display mode is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the storage of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. .

  In the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is continuously executed after the period of the executed second dynamic display mode corresponding to the number of pieces of the second information stored is ended. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by being set in a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the effect form is configured to be executable over a dynamic display period of the second identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of second dynamic display modes can be made to look like the one dynamic display mode, and the interest can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AA4, wherein the effect mode selecting means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least a result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of determining in advance that a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristics AB group> (The effect is variable depending on the number of special figure 2 reservations during the execution of the fluctuation pattern)
A first information acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information based on establishment of a first information acquisition condition, and a first information acquisition unit capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition unit. (1) first determination means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means on the display means, and the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display mode determining unit that can determine a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed by the CPU, and obtains second information based on establishment of a second information obtaining condition. Possible second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and information based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means A second determining means capable of executing the second determination; Means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the means on the display means, and the second dynamic display means dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. (2) second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the identification information, and first identification information or the specific second determination result for indicating the specific first determination result A bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the second identification information for indicating the second identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means. And the effect mode selecting means capable of selecting an effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means, and the effect mode selecting means. Stored in the second information storage means. Gaming machine AB1, wherein and selects the representation embodiment based on at least the number of the second information that.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a lottery based on a lottery result based on a lottery result as an effect for indicating a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port. There is a technique that determines an effect mode and executes the determined effect mode to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is stored as the second information. Since the determination is made based on the number, not only the result of the first determination but also the information on the possibility that the second determination can be performed can be determined from the presentation mode, and the player can quickly enter the game. There is an effect that a tired trouble can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed. A gaming machine AB2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of the second information stored during the execution, so that various effects can be obtained. There is an effect that various production modes can be executed.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be performed prior to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is performed thereafter. A gaming machine AB3, wherein an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, if the second information is stored, after the executed first identification information ends, the second identification information is changed. Since the dynamic display is started and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, the second mode executed preferentially is executed. There is an effect that the player can recognize early that the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the second ball entry means. A variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition for the variable member A variable control means for varying from the first state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and prior determination means capable of determining in advance the establishment of the specific condition before the specific condition is satisfied, The gaming machine AB4, wherein the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific effect mode is selected based on a result of previously determining whether a specific condition that triggers easy acquisition of the second information is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectation can be given to the acquisition of the second information.

<Characteristic AC group> (Use the special figure 1 fluctuation effect as a pseudo effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation)
First determining means for performing a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition, and second determination performing a second determination based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition Means, a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the first discriminating means being a predetermined first discrimination result; A second privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the second determining means being a predetermined second determination result; and the first determination is performed. A first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating a result of the first determination based on the result of the determination, and a result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination. Executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating A second effect execution means, wherein the second effect execution means sets at least a specific effect mode that is easily executed in the effect period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AC1 configured to be able to execute the second effect of the effect mode including the gaming device.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode including at least a display mode indicating a result of the first determination, as the effect mode of the first effect. A gaming machine AC2.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, the second effect using the display mode showing the determination result of the first determination can be executed, so that the interest in the gaming can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect execution means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode in one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group>
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination, and a first determination result by the first determination unit after dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification symbols on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A first dynamic display unit capable of stopping and displaying a combination of the above, a second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, and a plurality of second identification symbols dynamically displayed on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A second dynamic display unit that can be stopped and displayed in a combination for indicating a second determination result by the second determination unit after the display, and a first determination result specific to the display unit. When the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination of the above, or when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, Special benefits that can be And a granting means, wherein the privilege granting means grants a first privilege as the privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a first specific combination among the specific combinations. It is possible to provide a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege when stopped and displayed in a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination. , The gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege provided by the privilege providing means, the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, one of the In the state where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped at a combination that can be any one of the first specific combination and the second specific combination. Gaming machine AD1, characterized in that after displaying the plurality reach display mode that presents is the first identification symbols which are displayed in the specific combination.

  In the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize port is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, the result is given thereafter according to the type of the displayed symbol. There is a configuration in which amusement of a game is improved by configuring the benefits to be different (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, some symbols constituting a combination in which a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player is not provided are stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced before the result is notified. However, there is a problem that the temperature decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, when the identification symbol is displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, a specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes, so that the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. There is an effect that the expectation that both of the combinations are displayed can be long, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AD2 according to the gaming machine AD1, wherein the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, even in the specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, a specific combination is displayed via a plurality of reach display modes. In addition, there is an effect that it is easy to have a sense of expectation that the second privilege is provided even when the first determination is performed.

  In the gaming machine AD2, the determining means determines the second privilege when the result of the determination is the specific second determination in the specific time period, and the second dynamic display means sets a specific time period. In the case where the first identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of the two or more different second specific combinations in a state where the second identification symbol is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AD3, wherein the second identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after a special plural reach display mode to be displayed is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2, it is possible to promptly recognize that the second benefit advantageous to the player is always given when the second benefit is a specific second determination result in the specific period. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AE group> (Puncture ED control when probability changes)
Determination means capable of performing the determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and execution by the bonus game execution means A bonus game type determining means capable of determining the type of the bonus game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a game ball in the specific area. Setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state to be set after execution of the privileged game until the end condition is satisfied, and When the game is terminated, the suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the gaming state set after the execution of the privilege game is provided. An aspect and a second suggestion mode are configured in combination, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the advantageous game state are configured in the same period. A gaming machine AE1 configured in the suggested manner.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a result of a lottery performed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning prize hole is a hit, and a different hit game is executed depending on the hit type, and during a specific type of hit game, Is changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a variable state is changed to a state in which the game ball can enter the ball. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if a specific type of hit game is executed, a case may occur in which a game ball does not enter the variable entry area, thereby increasing the control load in the notification control in that case. There was a problem.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to be the same period, it is possible to set a mode that suggests based on the state of entering a specific area while suppressing a change in the period in which the suggestion mode is displayed. This has the effect of facilitating the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

  In the gaming machine AE1, when the privilege game is executed, a suggestion mode setting unit configured to set the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution unit in accordance with a type of the bonus game to be executed; Switching the second suggestion mode to the second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game among the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the bonus game. A gaming machine AE2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, the suggesting mode is displayed even when the suggesting mode is set at the start to suppress the control load from being concentrated at the end of the privilege game. Since the suggestion can be switched to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for performing the suggestion, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic AF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the jackpot type)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game executing means. A privilege game type determining means capable of determining a type of the privilege game to be executed from a plurality of types; and terminating the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine AF1 comprising: a period setting means for setting a period corresponding to the type of the privilege game being executed as a period for indicating.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set in accordance with the type of privilege game, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AF2, further comprising a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AF1, the specific effect can be executed in different periods set according to the type of the bonus game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the privilege game, the gaming machine AF1 or AF2 includes a period switching unit that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting unit to a different length. Gaming machine AF3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be made different even when the variable condition is satisfied during execution of the bonus game, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AG group> (variable ED period depending on presence or absence of V prize)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and during execution of the privilege game A game in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player can be set based on a specific area in which a game ball can pass through and a game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. State setting means, and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on a predetermined end condition being satisfied during execution of the privilege game, The specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period having a different length depending on whether a game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game or not. Gaming machine AG .

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode for notifying the lottery result in the lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. There is one that determines a game and executes the determined effect to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage in the contents of the effect form.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting tired of playing a game early.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, the specific period of a different length can be set depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game or not, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

  The gaming machine AG2, wherein the gaming machine AG1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AG3 in the gaming machine AG2, wherein the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying a passing state of a game ball to the specific area during the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, since the specific effect includes the notification mode, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Characteristic AH group> (Restriction control of button operation)
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a determination result specific to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, an operation means operable by the player, A setting execution unit capable of executing a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation, and the operation unit being operated when a specific condition is satisfied in a dynamic display period of the identification information. A gaming machine AH1 comprising: a regulation unit that regulates the execution of the setting based on the setting.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of effect modes are facilitated in advance, and the mode of the variable effect executed during the special symbol changing period is different for each effect mode.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, since the different fluctuating effects can be provided to the player by switching the staging mode, the player can get tired of the game early because only the same fluctuating effects are provided. Can be suppressed. Further, there is a gaming machine that can switch the effect mode arbitrarily by operating an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877). In such a gaming machine, the player himself / herself can select the most interesting production mode from among a plurality of production modes, so that a low-interest variable production is executed, and the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed. Further, since the player himself has to operate the operation means in order to switch the effect mode, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, as described above, if the effect mode can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, or the special symbol lottery is stopped. In the case where a short fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the effect of switching the effect mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. There was a problem that would.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine AH1, the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation unit can be restricted when the specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information. Thus, it is possible to suppress a problem from occurring.

  In the gaming machine AH1, a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit determines until a termination condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as a dynamic display period to be performed; and the specific condition is that at least one of the conditions that the short game state is set is satisfied. A gaming machine AH2 characterized by being set as one.

  According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH1, the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means can be restricted during the short gaming state, so that the setting executing means is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in determining the determination result of the determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, based on the setting executed by the setting executing means, an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. A gaming machine AH3, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, a different effect mode can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3 has a specific setting unit capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating unit is configured to execute the setting executing unit based on an operation of the operating unit when the specific condition is set. AH4, wherein the specific setting by the specific setting means can be executed without executing the setting by AH4.

  According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the specific setting is performed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during a period in which the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed, and by providing the player who has operated the operation means with an operation by operating the operation means, the operation of the operation means can be made a meaningful act.

  In the gaming machine AH4, based on the specific setting, having a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting information of the identification information stopped and displayed before the identification information is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine AH5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the information of the identification information to be stopped and displayed can be identified by the suggested effect before the stop and the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that a variety of effects can be executed by operating when it is established, and the problem that the player gets tired early can be suppressed.

<Characteristic AI group> (Notifies the advantageous period across multiple game states)
Discriminating means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result, and a first gaming state as a gaming state; At least a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and different from the second gaming state can be set. Game state setting means, the game state setting means can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, The third game state can be set when the first setting condition is satisfied in a state where the two game states are set, and is different from the first setting condition in a state where the third game state is set. Second The first game state can be set when the fixed condition is satisfied, and based on a period until the second setting condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine AI1 comprising: an advantageous period determining means for determining an advantageous period by means of the information processing apparatus; and a notifying means capable of notifying the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determining means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, a time saving state) that is advantageous to a player is set, a period in which the advantageous game state is continued (special symbol change frequency) is notified to the player. Specifically, there is a display in which “100 times” is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating a period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. is there. Thereby, the player can easily know how many special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous gaming state.

  In recent gaming machines, there are some gaming machines in which a plurality of state types can be set as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to a player. As the advantageous gaming states, a first advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) In some cases, a second advantageous game state (eg, a probable change state) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state can be set.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, for example, when the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the time reduction state) is set, the player is notified of a period (remaining period) in which the first advantageous gaming state is continued. Is possible, but there is a problem that it is not possible to notify which gaming state is set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. That is, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player is set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state, or is the disadvantage to the player more than the first advantageous gaming state? There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp which game state is set, and it is difficult to understand what purpose the game should be played in during the first advantageous game state, and the willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by improving a player's willingness to play. .

  According to the gaming machine AI1, when the second gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, an advantageous period determined by the notification means based on the period until the first gaming state is set again. Is notified, even if the gaming machine has a plurality of gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, it is possible to grasp the period in which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AI1, a suggestion effect execution capable of executing a suggestion effect for indicating the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in a state where the notification period is informed of the advantageous period. A gaming machine AI2 having means.

  According to the gaming machine AI2, it is possible to suggest the currently set gaming state while notifying the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AI2, the suggestion effect executing means includes a past suggestion for suggesting the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in a state in which the informing means informs of the advantageous period. A gaming machine AI3 characterized in that effects can also be executed.

  According to the gaming machine AI3, the suggestion effect executing means can suggest a game state set in the past to the player. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the current game state based on the contents of the suggestion effect in the past or to analyze the past game contents during the advantageous period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine AI2 or AI3, the notification unit can display a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period on the display unit, and the suggestion effect execution unit changes the remaining period display mode. The gaming machine AI4 is capable of indicating a currently set gaming state or a previously set gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine AI4, by changing the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, a suggestion effect regarding the gaming state is executed. There is an effect that the suggested effect can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, a second suggestion effect means capable of suggesting a timing at which the first setting condition can be satisfied in a state where the notification means informs of the advantageous period. A gaming machine AI5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AI5, the timing at which the gaming state is switched during the advantageous period can be made to be predicted by the player, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game during the advantageous period early. There is.

  In any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI5, among the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the gaming machine has advantageous notification means capable of informing the player of a gaming state advantageous to the player. Gaming machine AI6, which is a feature.

  According to the gaming machine AI6, since the player can grasp the superiority or demerit of a plurality of gaming states set during the advantageous period, the player is more interested in predicting which gaming state the currently set gaming state is. Can be provided.

<Characteristic AJ group> (variable display of one symbol row by multiple symbol display control)
Display means for displaying suggestion information capable of suggesting a determination result, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestion information displayed on the display means, and a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege providing means capable of providing a benefit advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for displaying is displayed, the suggestion information is configured by a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols. At least a first symbol row and a second symbol row composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols different from the first symbol row, and the dynamic display means comprises: It is configured that the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in a second direction different from the first direction while the symbol row is dynamically displayed in the first direction. Gaming machine AJ1 characterized by the following.

  Conventionally, as identification information for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery, there has been a type in which a third symbol is variably displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and the symbol row is plural (for example, three). An effect in which the used symbol variation display is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol column except for one symbol column, an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot winning (for example, Reach production). As described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the plurality of symbol columns, and the variable design for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is executed. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol is only displayed in a variable manner in symbol row units without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row, for example, the speed of the variable display of each symbol row is reduced. There are only variations such as changing the direction of change of each symbol row, and changing the size of each symbol row displayed, and the effect of the fluctuating effect using the variable display of the symbol row is improved. There was a problem that the interest in the game was further improved by increasing the height.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine AJ1, the first symbol row and the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in directions different from each other, so that the first symbol row and the second symbol row are easily distinguished, and the determination result is determined based on the suggestion information. This has the effect of making it easier.

  The gaming machine AJ1 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestion information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol row is provided at a start of the dynamic display period. The second symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first symbol row based on the satisfaction of a specific condition. A gaming machine AJ2 which is dynamically displayed in the second direction at a position where at least a part of the symbols constituting the second symbol row overlaps.

  According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ1, the dynamic display is performed at the position where the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, so that it is possible to execute the effect that effectively utilizes the display area. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine AJ2 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestion information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol row and the second symbol row are A gaming machine AJ3 characterized by being dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction based on the start of a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ2, the first symbol row and the second symbol row are respectively dynamically moved in the first direction and the second direction based on the start of the dynamic display period. Since it is displayed, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the game machine has display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means displays the determination result in a display mode of the first symbol row. A gaming machine AJ4 characterized in that one symbol row can be displayed and controlled.

  According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ3, the discrimination result is displayed using the display mode of the first symbol row, so that the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row is determined based on the discrimination result. And the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row can be freely set. Therefore, the effect of the dynamic display of the suggestion information can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AJ4, a first display layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row are provided, and the gaming machine includes: The first display area in the first display layer and the second display area in the second display layer are configured so that at least a part thereof overlaps with each other. A gaming machine AJ5, characterized in that at a place where two display areas overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so as to be visually recognizable to a player with priority over the second symbol row.

  According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be more visible to the player. You. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for indicating the determination result can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand, while performing an effect that effectively uses the display area.

  In the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the display control means may add a plurality of symbols constituting the first symbol row and the plurality of symbols constituting the second symbol row in a predetermined order. A gaming machine AJ6, wherein the display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be controlled so as to be constituted by a symbol row.

  According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed as a total symbol row, so that the total symbol is displayed to the player. You can make the columns appear to be organized. Among them, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in opposite directions, so that a surprising effect can be provided to the player, and the effect can be enhanced. effective.

  In the gaming machine AJ6, the display control means determines that the first symbol row and the first symbol row are the combined symbol rows when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine AJ7 characterized by being display-controllable to facilitate dynamic display of the second symbol row.

  According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ6, when the determination result is a specific determination result, the first symbol row and the second symbol row are less likely to be dynamically displayed as a total symbol row. be able to. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first symbol row and the dynamic display of the second symbol row are different from each other, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for a specific determination result, and to enhance a staging effect. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic AK group> (Velocity control of the V-like machine is executed based on the number of incoming balls)
Privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball is changed from the first state to the first state. A first specific area in which a game ball having entered the variable ball-in means can pass, and a first specific area thereof, in a game machine having variable ball-in means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. First detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the area, a second specific area capable of passing a game ball having passed through the first specific area, and having a game ball passing through the second specific area Detecting means, a guiding path capable of guiding game balls passing through the first specific area to the second specific area, and an allowable state in which game balls can pass through the second specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a restricted state that is difficult to pass, The variable state is changed from the restricted state to the allowable state based on detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detecting means until a variable condition is satisfied. Gaming machine AK1.

  Conventionally, a specific area is provided in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot game, a gaming machine (a so-called V accurate machine) that sets a probable change state after the jackpot game ends. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2015-119807). In such a gaming machine, by setting a first state in which a game ball is easy to pass through a specific area for a predetermined period based on an elapsed time from the start of a jackpot game, a rate at which a probable change state is set is defined in advance. It was configured to be possible.

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, the first state is set based on the elapsed time from the execution of the jackpot game, so that, for example, a game ball is won by an attacker due to a trouble of the gaming machine during the jackpot game. There is a problem that the predetermined period in which the first state is set elapses while the situation in which the game cannot be performed occurs, and the player's willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by improving a player's willingness to play. .

  According to the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement result of the game balls entered into the variable ball entry means, so that the second specific area is determined by the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means. It is possible to pass the game ball to the player, and the player can be interested in the number of balls entered by the variable ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AK1, the variable means changes the first specific area to the allowable state in a period in which the predetermined number of game balls can reach the variable means in the state changed to the allowable state. A gaming machine AK2 characterized by being executed.

  According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AK1, a predetermined number of game balls that have passed through the first specific area can enter the second specific area, and pass through the second specific area. There is an effect that the number of balls entering the second specific area can be limited by controlling the game balls.

  In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, after the predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area, the second detection means can determine a period until a game ball is detected, and A gaming machine AK3, comprising: an abnormality processing unit capable of executing an abnormality process based on a determination result of the period determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, problems such as the case where the game machine AK1 or AK2 stays on the taxiway despite passing through a predetermined number of game balls in the first specific area can be early. There is an effect that it can be found.

  In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the termination condition is that a period shorter than a period during which the next game ball reaches the variable device after the predetermined number of game balls is detected by the second detection device. A gaming machine AK4 characterized in that it is set to be established when the time has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, there is an effect that a predetermined number of gaming balls can be surely made to enter the second specific area.

  In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, the game machine further includes a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection unit. Gaming machine AK5.

  According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, even when the bonus game is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the game ball into the second specific area. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the bonus game becomes boring.

<Characteristic AL group> (Switching some symbols in the symbol row by changing the symbol row)
Determining means capable of performing the determination, display means for displaying an identification symbol for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbol on the display means; A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification symbol for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification symbol is dynamically displayed; And a privilege type determining means capable of determining a privilege type given by the means, wherein a dynamic display period which includes at least a period in which the identification symbol is dynamically displayed can be determined. A display period determining means, and a first identification symbol is displayed as the identification symbol for indicating the first result in the first period among the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means; The period is the first Setting means for indicating a second result different from the result, the setting means being capable of setting at least a second identification symbol different from the first identification symbol to be displayed. Gaming machine AL1 that features.

  Conventionally, there is a type in which a third symbol is variably displayed as identification information for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and the symbol row is plural (for example, three). An effect in which the used symbol variation display is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol column except for one symbol column, an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot winning (for example, Reach production). As described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the plurality of symbol columns, and the variable design for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is executed. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol fluctuation to the stop display, so that the third symbol is changed. During the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by suppressing a decrease in a willingness to play during a period of a third symbol change. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result with the identification symbol, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AL1, the dynamic display means can stop and display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period after at least the first period has elapsed. A gaming machine AL2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL1, the fact that the first period ends and the second period starts can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect can be enhanced. effective.

  In the gaming machine AL2, the dynamic display means can display, as the first result, the first identification symbol for indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine AL3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL2, the determination result of the determination unit is notified to the player before the elapse of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to quickly grasp the determination result of the determination means to watch the dynamic display of the identification symbol executed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AL3, the dynamic display means can display, as the second result, the second identification symbol for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means. Gaming machine AL4.

  According to the gaming machine AL4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AL3. That is, an identification symbol for indicating the privilege type can be displayed after the end of the second period. That is, after displaying the determination result of the determination unit, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination unit can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the player can be notified of the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means, so that at least the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the second period can be executed in a state in which a sense of security is given.

  In the gaming machine AL4, the privilege type determining means may include at least one of a plurality of privilege types including a first privilege type and a second privilege type which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The privilege type is determined, and the second identification symbol is displayed in a display mode including at least information for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means. Gaming machine AL5 that features.

  According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL4, since the display mode of the second identification symbol indicates the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means, the second identification symbol is dynamically displayed. Even during the period, the determined privilege means can be predicted by the player, and the effect of producing the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AL5, a plurality of the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means has a symbol row setting means capable of setting a symbol row displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means, The identification symbol can be dynamically displayed based on the symbol row set by the symbol row setting means, and the symbol row setting means sets at least a part of the first symbol row set during the first period. The gaming machine AL6, wherein a second symbol row in which the first identification symbol to be formed is switched to the second identification symbol can be set.

  According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL5, the second symbol row in which the first identification symbol forming at least a part of the first symbol row is switched to the second identification symbol is set. The number of identification symbols in the first symbol row can be equal to the number of identification symbols in the second symbol row. Therefore, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol executed by the dynamic display means does not need to be changed according to the type of the symbol row to be set, so that the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine AL6, the symbol row setting means can form the first symbol row in which first identification symbols for indicating the same determination result of the determination means are overlapped, and set the second symbol row. If so, any one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

  According to the gaming machine AL7, since the first identification symbol included in the first symbol row is switched to the second identification symbol, the dynamic display executed during the first period is also performed during the second period. It is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols displayed on the screen. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature AM group> (Limit release by another operation during restriction control of button operation)
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a determination result specific to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an operation means operable and a type of operation on the operation means An operation determining unit that can determine at least a first operation and a second operation that is different from the first operation; and a setting execution unit that can perform setting based on a determination result of the operation determining unit. Regulating means for restricting execution of the first setting by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the first operation is performed, wherein the setting executing means includes By means In the in regulation, when said second operation is determined by the operation determination unit, a gaming machine AM1, characterized in that it is capable of executing the first set.

  Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stop-displayed) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. In many cases, various effects (fluctuation effects) are executed using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period) so that the player is devised so as not to get tired of the game early. Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of effect modes are facilitated in advance, and the mode of the variable effect executed during the special symbol changing period is different for each effect mode (for example, Patent Reference 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, since the different fluctuating effects can be provided to the player by switching the staging mode, the player can get tired of the game early because only the same fluctuating effects are provided. Can be suppressed. Further, there is a gaming machine which can switch the effect mode arbitrarily by operating an operation means which can be operated by a player. In such a gaming machine, the player himself / herself can select the most interesting production mode from among a plurality of production modes, so that a low-interest variable production is executed, and the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed. Further, since the player himself has to operate the operation means in order to switch the effect mode, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, as described above, if the effect mode can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, or the special symbol lottery is stopped. In the case where a short fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the effect of switching the effect mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. There was a problem that would.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine AM1, even if the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be executed by executing the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can eagerly operate the operation means to perform various operations.

  In the gaming machine AM1, the setting execution unit can execute a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determination unit during the restriction by the restriction unit. A gaming machine AM2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1, the second setting is performed when the first operation is performed during the restriction, so that the setting execution means is performed despite the execution of the first operation. However, the situation in which nothing is executed can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

  In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit until an end condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the following: a state in which the short game state is set The gaming machine AM3, wherein when the operation determining means determines the first operation, the setting executing means can restrict execution of the first setting.

  According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, during the short gaming state, the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means can be restricted, so that the setting executing means is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having difficulty grasping the determination result of the determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine AM3, based on the setting executed by the setting executing means, the game machine AM3 has an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. A gaming machine AM4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AM3, a different effect mode can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, the operation unit includes a first operation unit for executing the first operation and a second operation unit different from the first operation unit for executing the second operation. And a game machine AM5.

  According to the gaming machine AM5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, an operation is performed on a different operation unit when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously executing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine AM5, the gaming machine AM6 is characterized in that the second operation unit is provided at a position where it is more difficult for a player who is playing a game to operate than the first operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine AM6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM5, by making the operability of each operation unit different, the first operation using the first operation unit is made a normal operation, and the second operation unit is used. Can be used as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from worrying which operation to perform.

<Feature AN group> (execute another content by operation during button operation restriction control)
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a determination result specific to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, an operation means operable by the player, First setting execution means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation; and restriction means for restricting execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means. And a second setting executing means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state in which the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting means. Gaming machine A characterized by 1.

  Conventionally, there is a type in which a third symbol is variably displayed as identification information for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and the symbol row is plural (for example, three). An effect in which the used symbol variation display is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol column except for one symbol column, an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot winning (for example, Reach production). As described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the plurality of symbol columns, and the variable design for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is executed. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol fluctuation to the stop display, so that the third symbol is changed. During the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by suppressing a decrease in a willingness to play during a period of a third symbol change. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result with the identification symbol, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine AN1, when the operating means is operated in a state where the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so that even if the operating means is operated, nothing is executed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

  The gaming machine AN2 according to the gaming machine AN1, wherein the regulation unit can regulate the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied in a dynamic display period of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AN1, the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. This has an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the dynamic display result of the identification information.

  In the gaming machine AN2, a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit determines until a termination condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period to be set, wherein the regulating means is a state in which the short game state is set. The gaming machine AN3, wherein when the operation determining means determines the first operation, the setting execution means can restrict execution of the first setting.

  According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, in the short gaming state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means, so that the setting executing means is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having difficulty grasping the determination result of the determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine AN3, based on the first setting executed by the setting executing means, an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. A gaming machine AN4 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine AN4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AN3, different effect modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, the operation unit includes a first operation unit for executing a first operation, and a first operation unit for executing a second operation different from the first operation. A gaming machine AM5 comprising: a different second operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine AN5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, an operation is performed on a different operation unit when the first operation is performed and when the second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously executing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine AN5, the gaming machine AN6 is characterized in that the second operation unit is provided at a position where it is more difficult for a player who is playing a game to operate than the first operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine AN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN5, by making the operability of each operation unit different, the first operation using the first operation unit is made a normal operation, and the second operation unit is used. Can be used as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from worrying which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AO group> (A chance to change stage if it is difficult to change stage)
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and a determination result specific to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, an operation means operable by the player, Based on the operation, at least one of a first production mode as a production mode and a second production mode different from the first production mode, the production mode setting means, and the production by the production mode setting means. A period setting unit that can set a first period in which the setting of a mode can be performed and a second period in which the setting of the effect mode is more difficult to execute than the first period; The production mode Gaming machine AO1 where de settings, better to be executed in the second period, characterized in that it is possible to provide an advantageous information to a player than performed during the first period.

  Conventionally, there is a type in which a third symbol is variably displayed as identification information for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and the symbol row is plural (for example, three). An effect in which the used symbol variation display is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol column except for one symbol column, an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot winning (for example, Reach production). As described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the plurality of symbol columns, and the variable design for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is executed. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol fluctuation to the stop display, so that the third symbol is changed. During the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by suppressing a decrease in a willingness to play during a period of a third symbol change. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result with the identification symbol, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine AO1, when the effect mode is set in the second period in which the effect mode is hard to be set, it is possible to provide advantageous information to the player, so that the effect mode is set in the second period. It is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the game to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AO1, the effect mode setting means sets a third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode when executing the effect mode setting during the second period. A gaming machine AO2 characterized by being possible.

  According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AO1, by setting the third effect mode, it is possible to notify the player that the effect mode has been set during the second period. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period until an end condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the period setting means sets the short game state The gaming machine AO4, wherein the second period can be set when the game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, the effect mode can be hardly set in the short game state, so that the effect mode is set. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in determining the result of the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, it is provided that there is provided a notifying means capable of notifying a player that the second period is set by the period setting unit before the second period is set. A gaming machine AO5 characterized by the following features.

  According to the gaming machine AO5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, it is possible to make the player know in advance that the second period is set, so that a desired effect mode is set. In this state, the second period can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second period from being set in an effect mode that is not desired by the player and the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

<Characteristic AP group> (Variable ease of stage change by pre-reading)
An information acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of an information acquisition condition; an information storage unit in which the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored; and an information storage unit configured to store information based on the information stored in the information storage unit. Determination means capable of performing determination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means, and determining the determination result by the determination means A bonus game execution unit capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating that the determination result is a stop display on the display unit, A pre-determination unit that can pre-determine the information stored in the information storage unit before the determination unit performs the determination based on the information; Switching means for switching the effect mode from the effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode. A gaming machine AP1 characterized by being more easily established when the result of the second preliminary determination is different from the result of the first preliminary determination than the result of the determination.

  Conventionally, there is a type in which a third symbol is variably displayed as identification information for indicating a result of a special symbol lottery. Also, various effects (variable effects) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player is allowed to perform a game while expecting a jackpot winning by indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something we could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and the symbol row is plural (for example, three). An effect in which the used symbol variation display is executed, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in another symbol column except for one symbol column, an effect of increasing the expectation of the jackpot winning (for example, Reach production). As described above, the third symbol is variably displayed using the plurality of symbol columns, and the variable design for indicating whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win is executed. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol fluctuation to the stop display, so that the third symbol is changed. During the period from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the willingness to play decreases.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by suppressing a decrease in a willingness to play during a period of a third symbol change. It is intended to provide.

  According to the gaming machine AL1, of the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result with the identification symbol, it is possible to keep the player interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine AP1, it is possible to vary the ease of establishment of the switching condition according to the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means, and therefore, the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means when the effect mode is switched is determined by the player. And it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine AP1 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means that can determine an operation performed on the operation means, and the switching condition is determined when the operation is determined by the operation determination means. A gaming machine AP2 characterized by being able to be established.

  According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP1, the switching condition can be satisfied even when the player operates the operating means, so that the player can actively operate the operating means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine AP2, when the determination result of the preliminary determination unit is the second preliminary determination result, the switching unit switches from the first rendering mode to a third rendering mode different from the second rendering mode. A gaming machine AP3 characterized by being switchable.

  According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2, by setting the third effect mode, the player is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period until an end condition is satisfied. Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the switching condition is such that the short game state is set. The gaming machine AP4 is characterized by being more difficult to be established when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

  According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the effect mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in determining the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, there is provided a notifying means capable of notifying a player that the short gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set. A gaming machine AP5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine AP5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, the short gaming state is set because the player can know in advance that the short gaming state is set. The operating means can be enthusiastically operated to satisfy the switching condition before the switching condition is satisfied. This makes it easy to set the short game state in a state where the desired effect mode is set, so that the short game state is set in the effect mode not desired by the player, and the player's willingness to play decreases. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the above-described gaming machines, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S307 Dynamic display means S1804 Privilege provision means S4107 First setting execution means, second setting execution means S5315 Regulation means

Claims (5)

Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result;
Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means,
When identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit, a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player;
Operating means operable by the player;
First setting execution means capable of executing first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means;
Regulating means for regulating the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operating means;
A second setting execution unit configured to execute a second setting different from the first setting when the operation unit is operated in a state in which the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting unit. A gaming machine characterized by:   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the restricting unit can restrict the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during a dynamic display period of the identification information. 3. Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means,
Game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until an end condition is satisfied,
The restricting means can restrict execution of the first setting by the first setting executing means when the operating means is operated in a state where the short game state is set. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein:   Based on the first setting executed by the first setting executing means, the apparatus has an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein:   The operation unit has a first operation unit for executing a first operation, and a second operation unit different from the first operation unit for executing a second operation different from the first operation. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

Images